The URL can be used to link to this page

04-4780 (CSCS) Project Manualn I V PROJECT MANUAL INCLUDING SPECIFICATIONS FOR CIRCUIT CITY STORES INC. STORE #3582 WASHINGTON PARK RETAIL Cr4UILDING OF LA QUINTA Simon Drive and State Route &SAFETY DEPT. La Quints, California APPROVED June 30, 2004 FOR CONSTRUCTION r DATE BY By PERKOWITZ + RUTH ARCHITECTS 111 W. Ocean Blvd., 21m Floor Long Beach, California T. Architects Project No.: 04579.25 mum E T PROTOTYPE HID 80603 w/ Addendums•1, 2, 3, 4, 5, R 6 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA TABLE OF CONTENTS PROTOTYPE H1D June 1, 2004 DIVISION 5 - METALS 05120 Structural Steel 05210 Steel Joist Girders 05220 Steel Joists 05300 Metal Roof Deck 05400 Cold -Formed Metal -Framing DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS 06100 Rough Carpentry 06200 Finish Carpentry 06402- Interior Architectural Woodwork DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07175 Clear Water -Repellent 07200 Miscellaneous Building insulation 07410 Preformed Metal Panels TABLE OF CONTENTS H1D ADDENDUM 6 041204 0 PAGE - 1 04/12/04 DIVISION 0 - ADMINISTRATION 00100 Instructions to Bidders 00300 Bid Proposal Form 00400 Bid Form Supplement 00450 Subcontractor List 00500 Agreement Form ,00700 General Conditions to Construction Agreement 00810 Supplementary Conditions 00820 Special Conditions 00840 Warranty Manual 00850 Drawing Index (Under Separate Cover) 00900 Geotechnical Information DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01010 General Scope of Work 01040 Coordination 01045 Cutting and Patching •01300 Submittals (Prerequisites for Payment) 01310 Critical Path Schedule 01340 Shop Drawings, Samples and Submittals 01400 Quality Assurance Testing and Inspection 01500 Temporary Facilities 01600 Material and Equipment 01700 Contract Closeout 01710 Clean -Up and Disposal �. DIVISION 2 SITSWORR - 02200 Earthwork for Buildings 02282 Termite Control DIVISION•3 - CONCRETE 03300 Cast -in -Place Concrete DIVISION 4 - MASONRY 04201 Unit Masonry 04730 Simulated Stone Veneer DIVISION 5 - METALS 05120 Structural Steel 05210 Steel Joist Girders 05220 Steel Joists 05300 Metal Roof Deck 05400 Cold -Formed Metal -Framing DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS 06100 Rough Carpentry 06200 Finish Carpentry 06402- Interior Architectural Woodwork DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07175 Clear Water -Repellent 07200 Miscellaneous Building insulation 07410 Preformed Metal Panels TABLE OF CONTENTS H1D ADDENDUM 6 041204 0 PAGE - 1 04/12/04 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA 07500 Built -Up Roofing 07600 Flashing and Sheet Metal 07700 Roof Accessories 07900 Joint Sealers DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS 08110 Steel Doors and Frames 08330 Rolling Fire Door 08331 Overhead Coiling Security Grilles 08360 Sectional Overhead Doors 08410 Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts 08460 Automatic Entrance Doors 08700 Finish Hardware 08800 Glass and Glazing DIVISION 9 - FINISHES 09100 Lath and Plaster 09105 Foam (EPS) Trim and Finish System 09260 Gypsum Drywall 09510 Acoustical Ceilings 09650 Resilient Flooring 09680 Carpeting 09900 Painting 09986 Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Panels DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10150 Toilet Partitions 10445 Interior Signage 10520 Fire Extinguishers 10529 Security Box 10607 Chain Link Fence 10670 Wire Shelving 10800 Toilet and Bath Accessories DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT 11160 Loading Dock Equipment DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS 12506 Window Treatment 12690 Floor Mats DIVISION 13 - NOT USED DIVISION 14 - NOT USED DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL 15000 Mechanical Requirements 15100 General Mechanical Requirements 15400 Plumbing 15500 Sprinkler Systems 15770 Heating, Ventilating and Air -Conditioning TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - 2 H1D ADDENDUM 6 041204 04/12/04 CIRCUIT CITY STORES. INC. LA OUINTA. CA DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL 16010 Electrical General Provisions 16110 Raceways 16120 Conductors 16130 Outlet Boxes 16140 Wiring Devices 16141 Power Poles 16145 Busway System 16150 Flextray Cable Tray 16160 Panelboards, Dry -Type Transformer, Contractor (Gear) 16170 Disconnect Switches and Fuses 16450 Grounding 16500 Lighting 16700 Fire Alarm System 16710 Energy Management System APPENDIX Appendix "A" - SOILS REPORT 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS H1D ADDENDUM 6 041204 - END OF SECTION - PAGE - 3 04/12/04 ,CIRCUIT CITY STORE, INC. LA QUINTA, CA SECTION 00100 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1. PROJECT NOA. You are invited to submit a proposal for a general construction contract, covering work on a sales/storage/distribution facility as described on the drawings and in the specifications. 2. RECEIPT OF BIDS A. The Contractor shall deliver his bid to the Owner no later than as instructed by Owner in letter of Invitation to Bid. Bids transmitted by CCSI Internet Bid Form via secure server will be accepted, no later than the published bid. The attached Bid Form is intended as an example only. Submit bid on the Internet Bid Form. It is not necessary to send in an original copy, however, you may send originals to the person originating the Invitation to Bid letter -at the following address: CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC., CONST. DEPT. 9950 Mayland Drive Richmond, Virginia 23233 (804)527-4000 3. BID FORM In order to receive consideration, make all bids in strict accordance with the following: A. Make bids upon the forms provided, properly executed and with all items filled out. Do not change the wording of the Bid Form, and do not add words to the wording of the Bid Form. Unauthorized conditions, limitations, or provisions attached to the proposal shall be cause for rejection of the proposal. Alterations by erasure or interlineation must be explained or noted in the bid (Exhibit B-1) over the signature of the bidder. B. Each bid shall be addressed to the Owner, and shall be delivered as indicated above. Each bid, if also mailed, shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope bearing the title of the work and the name of the bidder. It is the sole responsibility of the bidder to see that his bid is received on time. 4. EXAMINATION OF DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND SITE OF WORK Before submitting a bid, each bidder shall carefully examine the Drawings, read the Specifications and all other proposed Contract Documents including the Construction Agreement between the Owner and Contractor, and visit the site of the work. Each bidder shall fully inform himself prior to the bidding as to all existing conditions and limitations under which the Work is to be performed, and he shall include Work as set forth in the proposed Contract Documents. No allowance will be made to any bidder because of lack of such examination of knowledge. The submission of a bid will be construed as conclusive evidence that the bidder has made such examination and agrees to the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 5.. PROOF OF COMPETENCY OF BIDDER Any bidder may be required to furnish evidence satisfactory to the Owner that he and his proposed subcontractors have sufficient means and experience in the types or work called for to assure completion of the contract in a satisfactory manner. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00100-1 H1A 021003 08/06/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORE, INC. LA QUINTA, CA 6. AWARD OR REJECTION OF BIDS The contract, if awarded, will be awarded to the responsible bidder who has proposed the lowest Contract sum, subject to the Owner's right to reject any or all bids and to waive informality and irregularity in the bids and in the bidding. 0. 7. EXECUTION OF AGREEMENT The Form of Agreement which the successful bidder, as Contractor, will be required to execute is the "Construction Agreement between Owner and Contractor -Stipulated Sum or Guaranteed Maximum Price", as incorporated in this manual. A. The bidder to whom the Contract is awarded by the Owner shall, immediately on receipt of notice of award and receipt of Agreement forms from the Owner, sign and deliver to the Owner all required copies. B. At or prior to delivery of the signed Agreement, the contractor shall deliver to the Owner the policies of insurance certificates as required by the Contract Documents. All insurance policies shall be approved by the Owner before the successful bidder may proceed with the work. C. Failure or refusal to furnish insurance policies or certificates in a form satisfactory to the Owner shall subject the bidder to loss of time from the allowable construction period equal to the time of delay in furnishing the required material. 8. INTERPRETATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS PRIOR TO BIDDING If any Contractor contemplating submitting a bid for construction of the work is in doubt as to the meaning of any part of the proposed Contract Documents, he may submit to the Construction Manager a written request forhk interpretation thereof not later than seven (7) days before bids will be1W opened. If any Subcontractor contemplating submitting a bid for construction of the Work is in doubt as to the true meaning of any part of the proposed Contract Documents, he may contact a Contractor bidding the project who may submit a written request to the Construction Manager not later than seven (7) days before bids will be opened. A. Interpretations may be made by the Project Manager though the contacted Contractor. Subcontractors shall make inquires only through one of the bidding Contractors. B. The person submitting the written request to the Project Manager shall be responsible for its prompt delivery. C. Interpretation of correction of proposed Contract Documents will be made only by Addendum, and will be mailed or delivered to each bidder of record. D. The Project Manager and the Owner will not be responsible for any other explanations or interpretations of the proposed Contract Documents. 9. BID FIGURE BREAKDOWN The Bid Proposal Form, Section 00300, Bid -Form Supplement, Section 00400 and List of Major Subcontractors, Section.00450, shall be submitted no later than two (2) hours after the published bid time. Submittal via fax will be accepted provided that the original form is received within the subsequent twenty-four (24) hours. END OF SECTION INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00100-2 H1A 021003 08/06/03 CIRCUIT CITY. STORE, INC. LA QUINTA, CA SECTION 00300 BID PROPOSAL FORM TO: Circuit City Stores, Inc., herein called,','Owner". 1. Pursuant to and in compliance with the invitation to bid and the proposed Contract Documents relating'to construction of: CIRCUIT CITY STORES INC. - the undersigned, having become thoroughly familiar with the terms and conditions of the proposed Contract Documents, the Circuit City Fixture Manual with its current revisions, and with local conditions affecting the performance and costs of the work at the place where the work is to be completed, and having fully inspected the site in all particulars, hereby proposes and agrees to fully perform the work within the time stated and in strict accordance with the proposed Contract Documents, including furnishing any and all labor and materials, and do all the work required to construct and complete said work in accordance with the Contract Documents, for the following sum of money: Base Bid: For all labor and materials, services, and equipment necessary for the completion of the work shown on the drawings, the written specifications, and: addenda no. dated , addenda no. dated , addenda no. dated , addenda no. dated , for the sum of: Dollars ( ) 2. Should the undersigned be .required to perform work over and above that required by the Contract Documents, or should required by the Contract Documents, he will be he be ordered to omit work paid extra or credit Owner, as the case may be, on the basis of unit price quoted herein, price quoted being sum total compensation payable or creditable for such items or work. EXTRA CREDIT Reinforcing Steel in Footings, Grade.Beams Retaining Walls and Fdn Walls, in Place/Ton /Ton /Ton Concrete Footings, Earth Formed, in Place /cy /cy Concrete Footings, Formed, in Place /cy /cy EXTRA CREDIT Concrete Foundation Walls, in Place /cy /cy Concrete Retaining Walls, in Place /cy /cy CMU Foundation Walls, in Place /sf /sf Earthwork Unit Price Definitions: Excavation, includes removal processes, loading, hauling, and disposal. Unsuitable material is existing material (not hazardous material), found to be incapable of supporting design loading. Borrow Material is defined as material provided from off-site sources. Borrow Material includes purchase of material, transportation, spreading and compaction to specification. Bulk Rock Excavation, Ripped /cy /cy Bulk Rock Excavation, Blasted /cy /cy BID"PROPOSAL FORM 00300-1 CONTRACTOR=S NAME: 0401 P.A. NO. 49 04/24/00 CIRCUIT CITY STORE, INC. LA QUINTA, CA Trench Rock Excavation, Ripped /cy /cy Trench Rock Excavation, Blasted /cy /cy Hand Rock Excavation /cy /cy Bulk Earth Excavation /cy /cy Unsuitable Material Excay. (Less than 100cy) /cy /cy Unsuitable Material Excay. (More than 100cy) /cy /cy Trench Earth Excavation /cy /cy Hand Earth Excavation /cy /cy Borrow Structural Fill Compacted in Place /cy /cy MIRAFI (or equal) Soil Fabric, in Place /By /By Topsoil in Place /cy /cy Fire extinguishers (per unit Type A ea ea installed cost) to add to or deduct from units or allowance Type B ea ea specified, required by local authorities. Type C ea ea 3. ADDITIONAL WORK PERFORMED ON A TIME & MATERIAL BASIS A. Electrical Mechanic (hourly rate, including mark-up) $ Helper (hourly rate, including mark-up) $ Material Mark-up (not to exceed 158) $ B. Mechanical Mechanic (hourly rate, including mark-upj $ Helper (hourly rate, including mark-up) $ Material Mark-up (not to exceed 158) $ C. Carpentry Mechanic (hourly rate, including mark-up) $ Helper (hourly rate, including mark-up) $ Material Mark-up (not to exceed 158) $ D. General Contractor Overhead and profit mark-up on work performed additional to Contract Plans and Specifications, but not to exceed 108. Combined Overhead & Provide (not to exceed 108): 8 E. Labor Burden Labor Burden Mark-up on labor only for performed in addition to Contract Drawings and Specifications, by the General Contractor=s own forces. Detailed backup information will be required. Total Labor Burden Mark-up (breakdown in Exhibit I): 8 4. I understand that the Owner reserves the right to reject any and/or all bids, but that this bid shall remain open and not be withdrawn for a BID PROPOSAL FORM 00300-2 CONTRACTOR=S NAME: 0401 P.A. NO. 49 04/24/00 i CIRCUIT CITY STORE, INC. LA QUINTA, CA period of thirty (30) days from the date prescribed for its opening. I also understand that the bidders shall not be entitled to any compensation from the Owner for expenses involved in bidding the work. 5. I understand that the project construction schedule shall be established so as to provide the Owner with beneficial occupancy in order to commence his use according to the following milestone dates. Letter of Intent/Notice to Proceed issued by: A. Date of Start of Construction: B. Date of Substantial Completion: C. Date of Final Completion: D. Date ready for Alucabond Field Dimensions: E. Date available to start stere fixturing: F. Date ready for Warehouse Racking: -G. Date telephone equipment room ready: H. Date NOVAR is on-line: I. Date of Lennox EOC: J. Date store is ready for merchandising: 6. If written notice of the acceptance of this bid is mailed or delivered to the undersigned within thirty (30) days after the date set for the opening of this bid, or at any other time thereafter before it is withdrawn, the undersigned will execute and deliver the Contract Documents to the Owner in accordance with this bid as accepted without further qualification, and will also furnish and deliver to the Owner the Performance Bond, Labor and Material Payment Bonds, if required, and proof of insurance coverage, all within fifteen (15) days after personal delivery or after deposit in the mails of the notification of acceptance of this bid. 7. Notice of acceptance, or request for additional information, may be addressed to the undersigned at the address set forth below. 8. The names of all persons interested in the foregoing bid as principals are: (IMPORTANT NOTICE: If bidder, or other interested person is a corporation, give legal name of corporation, state where incorporated, and names of president and secretary; if a partnership, give name of firm and names of all individual co- partners composing the firm; if bidder or other interested person is an individual, give first and last names in full). licensed in accordance with an act for the registration of Contractors, and with license number SIGN HERE: NOTE: If bidder is a corporation, set forth the legal name of the corporation together with the signature of the officer or officers authorized to sign contracts on behalf of the corporation. If bidder is a partnership, set forth BID PROPOSAL FORM 00300-3 CONTRACTOR=S NAME: 0401 P.A. NO. 49' 04/24/00 CIRCUIT CITY STORE, INC. LA QUINTA, CA the name of the firm together with the signature of the partner or partners authorized to sign contracts on behalf of the partnership. Business Address: Telephone Number: CONTRACTOR'S NAME: ADDRESS: PHONE NO: BID PROPOSAL FORM CONTRACTOR=S NAME: 0401 P.A. NO. 49 Date of Proposal: FAB NO: END OF SECTION 00300-4 04/24/00 •CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA SECTION 00400 BID FORM SUPPLEMENT There should be an entry for each item listed and if a subcontractor or supplier quote encompasses more than one item, his quote shall be divided to correspond to the breakdown shown. Include all Overhead and Profit in Item 1, General Conditions and do not apportion to each breakdown item. Bidders are advised that the format shown below will be required with all Change Orders providing tabulation of Change Order costs. If an item does not apply to this bid, insert AN/A@ in that space. CODED COST BREAKDOWN GENERAL CONDITIONS (DIVISION 1) 1-005 GENERAL CONDITIONS 1-010 G.C. OVERHEAD & PROFIT (FEE) DIVISION 1 SUBTOTAL DIVISION 2 SUBTOTAL CONCRETE (DIVISION 3) 3-010 CONCRETE FOUNDATIONS 3-020 CONCRETE SLABS 3-020 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS (AT BUILDING TO BACK OF CURB), STEPS, STOOPS, PADS, ETC. 3-060 BUILDING EXCAVATION & BACKFILL DIVISION 3 SUBTOTAL MASONRY (DIVISION 4) 4-050 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 4-060 CLAY UNIT MASONRY DIVISION 4 SUBTOTAL METALS (DIVISION 5) 5-010 STRUCTURAL METAL 5-030 MISC. & ORNAMENTAL METAL DIVISION 5 SUBTOTAL .,,,,ROUGH CARPENTRY (DIVISION 6) � BID FORM SUPPLEMENT 00400-1 CONTRACTOR=S NAME: H1D ADDENDUM 6 041204 04/12/04 SITE WORK (DIVISION 2) 2-010 SITE CLEARING & EROSION CONTROL 2-020 DEMOLITION 2-030 EXCAVATION & GRADING 2-040 SITE STORM DRAINAGE 2-050 SITE UTILITIES 2-060 CONCRETE WALKS r 2-070 PRECAST BOLLARDS 2-080 SITE RETAINING WALLS 2-090 CURB & GUTTER AND ENTRANCES 2-100 CONCRETE PAVING 2-110 ASPHALT PAVING BASE & STRIPING 2-120 EXTERIOR FENCING & GATES ' 2-130 LANDSCAPING & IRRIGATION 2-140 SITE LIGHTING (INCLUDES FIXTURES, POLES, BASES, CONDUCTORS, CONDUIT - FROM 5' OUTSIDE BUILDING) DIVISION 2 SUBTOTAL CONCRETE (DIVISION 3) 3-010 CONCRETE FOUNDATIONS 3-020 CONCRETE SLABS 3-020 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS (AT BUILDING TO BACK OF CURB), STEPS, STOOPS, PADS, ETC. 3-060 BUILDING EXCAVATION & BACKFILL DIVISION 3 SUBTOTAL MASONRY (DIVISION 4) 4-050 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 4-060 CLAY UNIT MASONRY DIVISION 4 SUBTOTAL METALS (DIVISION 5) 5-010 STRUCTURAL METAL 5-030 MISC. & ORNAMENTAL METAL DIVISION 5 SUBTOTAL .,,,,ROUGH CARPENTRY (DIVISION 6) � BID FORM SUPPLEMENT 00400-1 CONTRACTOR=S NAME: H1D ADDENDUM 6 041204 04/12/04 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA 6-010 ROUGH CARPENTRY 6-020 FINISH CARPENTRY 6-030 MILLWORK DIVISION 6 SUBTOTAL MOISTURE CONTROL (DIVISION 7) 7-010 WATERPROOFING 7-020 BUILDING INSULATION 7-030 ROOFING & ROOF INSULATION 7-040 PREFORMED METAL PANELS 7-050 FLASHING & SHEET METAL 7-060 ROOF ACCESSORIES 7-070 CAULKING & JOINT SEALERS DIVISION 7 SUBTOTAL DOORS, WINDOW & GLASS (DIVISION 8) 8-010 STEEL DOORS & FRAMES 8-020 WOOD/PLASTIC/IMPACT DOORS 8-030 OVERHEAD DOORS 8-032 ROLLING COUNTER SHUTTER 8-034 SECURITY GATES 8-040 AUTOMATIC DOORS 8-042 ENTRANCES & STOREFRONTS 8-070 FINISH HARDWARE 8-080 GLASS/GLAZING DIVISION 8 SUBTOTAL FINISHES (DIVISION 9) 9-020 STUD & DRYWALL 9-025 EIFS/STUCCO FINISHES 9-030 CERAMIC TILE 9-040 ACOUSTICAL CEILING 9-045 RESILIENT TILE 9-050 CARPET 9-090 PAINTING 9-095 WALLCOVERING 9-100 MARLITE PANELS DIVISION 9 SUBTOTAL SPECIALTIES (DIVISION 10) 10-010 TOILET PARTITIONS & ACCESSORIES 10-020. INTERIOR SIGNAGE 10-030 PEDESTRIAN CONTROL DEVICES 10-040 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 10-050 LOCKERS DIVISION 10 SUBTOTAL EQUIPMENT (DIVISION 11) 11-010 LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT 11-020 ROLLING CONVEYOR DIVISION 11 SUBTOTAL FURNISHINGS (DIVISION 12 BID FORM SUPPLEMENT CONTRACTOR=S NAME: _ H1D ADDENDUM 6 041204 00400-2 04/12/04 �l rm CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA B. Description of Alternates BID FORM SUPPLEMENT CONTRACTOR=S NAME: _ H1D ADDENDUM 6 041204 00400-3 04/12/04 12-010 WINDOW TREATMENT 12-020 FLOOR- MATS DIVISION 12 SUBTOTAL CONVEYING SYSTEMS (DIVISION 14) 14-010 LIFTS DIVISION 14 SUBTOTAL MECHANICAL (DIVISION 15) 15-010 PLUMBING 15-020 FIRE_PROTECTION SYSTEM 15-030 HVAC SYSTEM DIVISION 15 SUBTOTAL ELECTRICAL (DIVISION 16) 16-000 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM (ALL SYSTEMS EXCLUDING ALLOWANCES) 16-141 POWER POLES (PER INVITATION TO BID) 16-145 BUSWAY SYSTEM (PER INVITATION TO BID) 16-150 FLEXTRAY CABLE TRAY (PER INVITATION TO BID) 16-160 PANELBOARDS, DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS, CONTACTORS (GEAR) (PER INVITATION TO BID) 16-500 SITE LIGHTING 167500 LIGHT FIXTURE ALLOWANCE (PER'INVITATION TO BID) DIVISION 16 (ELECTRICAL).SUBTOTAL TOTAL BID • ' ALTERNATES A. General Alternate(s) listed below are for the purpose of modifying the requirements and/or Drawings. All work affected by such alternate(s) shall be performed in strict accordance with the Construction Documents. The "amount" ADD or DEDUCT, stated below for each alternate shall be the net adjustment to Base Bid should the Owner elect to include it in the Contract. Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any or all alternates without invalidating the Base Bid. Contractor agrees to modify his proposal to include, at Owner's option, Alternates, if any negotiated before execution of the Agreement. B. Description of Alternates BID FORM SUPPLEMENT CONTRACTOR=S NAME: _ H1D ADDENDUM 6 041204 00400-3 04/12/04 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA 1. When awarded the Contract, a bond may be required by the Owner. Contractor shall, within ten calendar days after signing of the Contract, deliver satisfactory payment and performance bonds in a form acceptable to the Owner and in an amount equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the contract sum. The amount indicated below will be added to the contract amount by establishing an allowance. The Contractor will provide the actual invoice to adjust this allowance by change order. Circuit City will pay only the actual direct cost of these bonds. Such bonds, at the Owner's option, may be secured and paid for separately by the Owner. a. The above signed hereby states that the premium cost of such bond, if such bond is secured and paid for by the above signed, will be an amount equal to % of the contract SUM. b. If a bond is required, no work shall commence until such bond is recorded with the county recorders office. Add BONDING COMPANY'S NAME: ADDRESS: PHONE NO: FAX NO: ALLOWANCES - Bidders are advised that mark up for profit and overhead for allowances should be included in their base bid, no adjustment for profit and overhead will be allowed in change orders that net out allowances. See Article 5.3 of General Conditions. 1. The allowances do not include state and local taxes. The contractor shall purchase and install allowance equipment in accordance with Circuit City Stores, Inc. instructions. Contractor shall be compensated by Circuit City for any additional monies used to purchase allowance equipment and the contractor shall reimburse Circuit City Stores for any allowance not used in the purchase of this equipment. Labor to install allowance equipment to be included in contractor's base bid. Profit and overhead will not be considered if the final cost is less than or greater than the allowance. Circuit City entered into an agreement with Richmond Electric Supply for the Power Poles, Busway System, Flextray Cable Tray, Gear and Light Fixtures for this store. The Owner will supply the general contractor with schedules. The contractor shall verify all quantities required. This Equipment will be purchased by the general contractor or his subcontractor from Richmond Electric Supply in Richmond, Virginia, telephone (804) 353-2511. a. Power Poles Add to the construction base bid, an allowance of $ (Refer to Invitation to Bid) material only. b. Busway System Add to the construction base bid, an allowance of $ (Refer to Invitation to Bid) material only. C. Flextray Cable Tray Add to the construction base bid, an allowance of $ BID FORM SUPPLEMENT CONTRACTOR=S NAME: _ H1D ADDENDUM 6 041204 00400-4 04/12/04 0) CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA (Refer to Invitation to Bid) material only. d. Panelboards, Dry -Type Transformer, Contactors (Gear) Add to the construction base bid, an allowance of $ (Refer to Invitation to Bid) material only. e. Lighting Add to the construction base bid, an allowance of $ (Refer to Invitation to Bid) material only. f. Modular Carpet Tile and Adhesive Add to the construction base bid, an allowance of $ (Refer to Invitation to Bid) material only. g. Vinyl Composition and Adhesive Add to the construction base bid, an allowance of $ (Refer to Invitation to Bid) material only. h. -Entry Way Matting Add to the construction base bid, an allowance of $ (Refer to Invitation to Bid) material only.- i. Recycled Rubber Flooring Add to the construction base bid, an allowance of $ (Refer to Invitation to Bid) material only. j. Steel Doors and Frames t Add to the construction base bid, an allowance of $ (Refer to Invitation to Bid) material only. k. Rolling Fire Doors Add to the construction base bid, an allowance of $ (Refer to Invitation to Bid) material only. 1. Overhead Coiling Security Grilles Add to the construction base bid, an allowance of $ (Refer to Invitation to Bid) material only. M. Sectional Overhead doors Add to the construction base bid, an allowance of $ (Refer to Invitation to Bid) material only. n. Automatic Entrance Doors Add to the construction base bid, an allowance of $ (Refer to Invitation to Bid) material only. o. Finish Hardware Add to the construction base bid, an allowance of $ (Refer to Invitation to Bid) material only. INSPECTIONS 1. Inspections on or about the date of substantial completion to determine the completion of the work and conformance of the work to BID FORM SUPPLEMENT 00400-5 CONTRACTOR=S NAME: H1D ADDENDUM 6 041204 04/12/04 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA the drawings and specifications. Written reports of deficiencies will be incorporated into a consolidated punchlist to be issued by Circuit City. 2. Inspections will include, but not be limited to: Roofing, plumbing, HVAC, HVAC controls, and electrical. 0 3. Circuit City will pay the cost of the initial inspection and one following-up "back -check" inspection. The Contractor shall correct deficiencies in a reasonable amount of time and notify Circuit City to schedule a back -check inspection. 4. If deficiencies are not corrected and in Circuit City's opinion additional back -check inspections are required beyond the first back -check inspection referenced above, the cost of such additional inspections (including travel, testing and preparation of reports) will be deducted from amounts owed to the Contractor. CONTRACTOR'S NAME: ADDRESS: PHONE NO.: FAX. NO.: END OF SECTION BID FORM SUPPLEMENT CONTRACTOR=S NAME: H1D ADDENDUM 6 0412 00400-6 04/12/04 0-) CIRCUIT CITY STORE, INC.- LA QUINTA, CA SECTION 00450 SUBCONTRACTOR LIST PROJECT NAME: SUBCONTRACTOR NAME Asbestos Removal (if required) Demolition (if required) Grading Paving Concrete Masonry Steel Woodwork (cabinets) Roofing Automatic Doors Entrances & Storefront Studs/Drywall Ceilings Flooring Hard Soft Carpet • Painting Plumbing Sprinkler HVAC Electrical General Contractor: Signature LIST OF MAJOR SUBCONTRACTORS 00450-1 CONTRACTOR=S NAME: 0401 PA. NO. 49 04/24/00 .CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA SECTION 00500 AGREEMENT FORM a (STIPULATED SUM CONTRACT) BETWEEN CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. AND GENERAL CONTRACTOR 00500-1 03/27/95 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA INSERT CIRCUIT CITY STIPULATED SUM CONTRACT HERE AGREEMENT FORM 00500-2 03/27/95 CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR Pagc STIPULATED SUM CONTRACT CIRCUIT CITY STORE ctPcnjecuNumbent -,PROJECTNAMEi, c,COMPANYNAM6t "LETTEROFINTENT), Pagc TABLE OF CONTENTS I. WORK TO BE PERFORMEDAND DOCUMENTS FORNaNG THE AGREEMENT ......................2 2. DUTIES OF THE CONTRACTOR AND OWNER.............................................................................4 Dutiesof Contractor.». __..._._»........»»»».» »..»........» .. »...»..._. .....» ».......».» .»....»..... ...._.»... » ....».»..»...»..._....4 Dutiesof Owner ......»_».._....»_. ».»......»» ..»_.._ ...»__.....» .» ».. _ .....».....».»_.»»....._.... _..»..»..»....».»_..._........»_7 3. STIPULATED SUM AND COST OF CONSTRUCTION..................................................................8 4. CHANGES IN THE WORK................................................................................................................8 5. CHANGE ORDER COSTS..................................................:.............................................................12 6. PAYNIENT BY OWNER...............................................................................................................12 7. TIME OF THE WORK.......................................................................................................................14 8. CONTRACTOR'S FINANCIAL RESPONSIBILITY, INDEMNIFICATION, GUARANTEES ....... 17 9. INSURANCE.....................................................................................................................................20 10. OWNERSHIP OF THE WORK..............................................................................•..........................23 11. ACCOUNTING, INSPECTION AND AUDIT..................................................................................24 12. ARBITRATION AND ATTORNEY'S FEES.................................................................................25 13. TERMINATION OF AGREEMENT................................................................................._...............25 14. MISCELLANEOUS...........................................................................................................................26 15. EXHIBITS A General Conditions B Drawings and Specifications B-1 Exclusions and Clarifications C Critical Path Schedule (to be provided within 20 days of Notice to Proceed) D Bid Form E Form of Insurance Certificate (to be provided prior to start of construction) F Notice to Proceed G Letter of Intent H Invitation To Bid Letter I Pre-bid Meeting Minutes J Labor Burden Breakdown STIPULATED SUM CONTRACT Page CIRCUIT CITY STORE uProjectNumbern «PROJECTNAMEn «COMPANYNAMEn «LETTEROFINTENTn 0— � r�. CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR THIS AGREEMENT is entered into as of Date of Letter of Intent, by and between CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. ("Owner"), a Virginia corporation, and General Contractor ("Contractor"), a GC's State corporation. This Agreement is made with regard to the following facts: Owner intends to construct a Circuit City Store and site work at Project City, State, Zip (the "Project"). Contractor desires to be engaged as the general contractor for construction of the Project in accordance with the terms and provisions of this Agreement. In consideration of the foregoing recitals and the agreements hereinafter set forth, and for other valuable consideration, the receipt and sufficiency of which are hereby acknowledged, the parties agree as follows: 1. Work To Be Performed and Documents Forming The Agreement 1.1 Contractor agrees to provide, perform and/or cause to be provided or performed all of the "Work". The "Work" shall include the following: (a) All of the labor, materials (-including purchase orders and subcontracts therefor), equipment and services necessary for the proper management, construction and completion of the Project in accordance with the "Construction Documents" (as defined below); (b) All work shown on the Drawings; (c) All improvements in connection -with the Project and all site work for the Project; (d) The "Subcontracted Work" and the "General Contractor Work," both as defined below; t. (e) All other items to be performed or provided under the terms hereof by the Contractor or designated herein as included in the Work; and (f) All other work necessary or appropriate to construct the Project in accordance with the Contract Documents, excluding only work marked "NIC" on the Drawings and Specifications and the items fisted as "Exclusions" on Exhibit B -I attached hereto. 1.2 The terms "Subcontracted Work" and "General Contractor Work" shall have the following meanings: (a) "Subcontracted Work" shall mean all Work not performed by Contractoes own personnel. STIPULATED SUM CONTRACT Pagc 2 CIRCUIT CITY STORE "PmjectNumbcru uPROJECTNAMEn ,%c,COMPANYNAME,) <ALETTEROPINTENT)) (b) "General Contractor Work" shall mean all Work to be performed by Contractor's own personnel, which may include complete concrete installation, forming and form work, concrete material, pouring, stripping and finishing; rough and finish carpentry; purchase orders for General Contractor Work; all Work recognized as being the responsibility of the general contractor under the "General Conditions" (as defined below); the payment and performance by General Contractor of all of its obligations under this Agreement including those set forth in Article 4 hereof; and such other work as shall be necessary for the proper management, layout, direction and supervision of all Subcontracted Work. 1.3 Any written change to this Agreement shall be in writing and signed by Owner and Contractor and, when so signed, shall constitute a "Change Order" binding on the patties hereto, shall be become part of this Agreement and, where inconsistent herewith, shall amend this Agreement. From time to time Construction Documents may be incorporated by Change Order into this Agreement, until such time as final Construction Documents have been completed and adopted. 1.4 The "Contract Documents" consist of the following, which, together with Change Orders made in the manner provided herein and issued subsequent to the execution of this Agreement, form the "Contract:" (a) This Agreement (including clarifications hereto made pursuant to the General Conditions) and Change Orders; (b) "Supplementary Conditions" and'!"Special Conditions" to this Agreement; (c) The "General Conditions" which are attached hereto as Exhibit A and incorporated herein by this reference; (d) The "Construction Documents" which consist of those "Drawings" and "Specifications" which have been and will be prepared or reviewed by "Name of the Architectural Firm" (the "Architect"); which consist of final working Drawings and Specifications (together with shop drawings prepared by design/build subcontractors) and which shall be incorporated into this Contract by Exhibit B at such time as they have been approved by the parties, subject, however, to the clarifications listed on Exhibit B•1 attached hereto; and (e) The "Critical Path Schedule" attached hereto as Exhibit C and incorporated herein by this reference. The Critical Path Schedule shall be updated monthly and shall be established and calculated using the Primavera software package (current version). In general, Drawings. shall show dimensions, positions, materials and kinds of construction. Specifications •shall describe quality of materials, workmanship and methods. Work called for on the Drawings and not mentioned in the Specifications, or vice versa, shall be performed as though fully set forth in both. Work not particularly detailed, marked or specified shall be the same as similar parts that are detailed, marked or specified. Should Contractor become aware of an error in the Specifications or Drawings, or in work by others affecting this Work, the Contractor shall at once notify in writing the Owner who will issue instructions as to procedure. If the Contractor proceeds with the Work based on any such error of which Contractor is aware, of if which in the exercise of reasonable care and diligence should be aware, without instructions from the Owner, the Contractor shall correct, at no cost to Owner, any resulting damage or defects. This includes Specification typographical STIPULATED SUM CONTRACT CIRCUIT CITY STORE «PmjectN"mbcn, Page J "PRObECTNAMEn 'ttCOMPANYNAME,, �LETTEROFINTENT„ errors and Drawing notational errors where the intent is doubtful. Figured dimensions on scale Drawings and on full-size Drawings shall govern_ In the event of any conflict between any of the Contract Documents, the Contract Documents shall have priority over one another in the order listed above in this Paragraph 1.4. In the event of a conflict between the Specifications and the Drawings, regarding material, quality, size, shape or dimension, the Specifications shall govern. 1.5 Contractor agrees, with respect to any items or trades treated as an allowance under the "Stipulated Sum", as hereinafter defined, (i) to work closely with Owner and the Architect to reduce any allowance quotation submitted by Contractor, (ii) to rebid major trades and subcontracts when requested by Owner, (iii) to suggest to Owner changes which Contractor believes will result in a lower cost for such allowance items and (iv) to provide Owner and its representatives (including the Architect) with full access to all information underlying Contractor's calculation of such allowance. 2. Duties of the Contractor and Owner Duties of Contractor 2.1 The relationship of Contractor with Owner shall be that of an independent contractor. However, Contractor recognizes the relationship of trust and confidence established by this Agreement and agrees to furnish its. best skill and judgment and to cooperate with Owner and the Architect and such other consultants as may be engaged by Owner or Architect in pursuing the best interest of Owner. Contractor agrees to furnish efficient business administration and supervision in connection with the Project and to maintain at all times an adequate 'supply of workmen and materials and to use its best efforts to perform the Work in the best workmanlike manner and in the most expeditious and economical manner, consistent at all times with the best interest of Owner. Contractor shall meet with and and Owner's agents, at such time, and from time to time, as Owner requests to review the Work and the progress schedule, and for such other purposes as Owner desires. 2.2 Commencing with the execution of this Agreement, Contractor shall fmish Owner with information concerning costs, availability of materials and equipment, methods of construction and other pertinent information which Contractor may possessor obtain and which may be of value to Owner in completing the Project. Contractor shall report to the Architect any inconsistencies; errors and omissions in the Construction Documents which Contractor may observe or which may come to its attention, and Contractor shall require its subcontractors to report to Contractor or the Architect any such inconsistencies, errors and omissions which.they may observe or which may come to their attention. 2.3 Contractor shall provide for the benefit of the Project a competent and skilled field organization containing at all times a sufficient number of personnel to perform the Work and to supervise such performance, including a project manager, project engineers, superintendents and assistants, foremen, engineers and detailers, timekeepers and clerks, cost accountants, material checkers, watchmen, skilled and common laborers and such other workmen and supervisory personnel as the Work may require. Both the number of persons from time to time employed in connection with the Project by Contractor, and the persons so employed, shall be subject to the STIPULATED SUM CONTRACT CIRCUIT CITY STORE ,pmjcctNumbcm Page 4 ggkuPROIECTNAMEP, uCOMPANYNAMEo ' «LETTEROFINTENTa approval of Owner, which approval shall not be unreasonably withheld. Contractor shall supervise all of the Work, including all Subcontracted Work, and shall prepare all schedules, estimates and reports as reasonably required by Owner. (a) Contractor agrees to appoint GC's Project Manager as "Project Manager" for the Work, which Project Manager shall be responsible for the administration of this Agreement so long as he shall remain in the employ of Contractor or can be retained by Contractor. (b) Notwithstanding the foregoing, Contractor agrees that, at the written request of Owner, the Project Manager and any successor(s) thereto shall be replaced by Contractor and another person acceptable to Owner shall be immediately engaged by Contractor as Project Manager. The Owner shall have the same right as it relates to the project superintendent and project engineer. 2.4 Contractor shall provide and maintain a sufficient number of temporary buildings for the operation of its field organization and each of its subcontractors, Owner and the Architect, as well as for storage of all materials and housing of machinery, tools and equipment. Contractor shall provide such other temporary construction and facilities as may be required for the Work. Contractor further agrees to utilize staging areas, if designated by Owner. 2.5 Contractor at all times shall provide adequate and sufficient machinery, equipment, tools and supplies as may be required for the- Work. 2.6 Contractor shall negotiate and award subcontracts and purchase orders subject to the terms of the Contract Documents. Owner shall have full access and rights to all information concerning the negotiation of all Subcontracted Work, purchase orders and all awards thereof in excess -of Five Thousand Dollars ($5,000.00). (a) All purchases shall be made utilizing standard written purchase order forms. Each purchase order shall set forth in detail the pertinent data as to its terms and conditions consistent with this Agreement. (b) All agreements and awards for Subcontracted Work shall be made utilizing a standard written subcontract the form of which shall be approved by Owner. Any non-standard terms, conditions and content of any subcontract shall be individually subject to Owner's prior written approval, if requested by Owner. (c) If requested by Owner, Owner shall be furnished with two (2) executed copies of all purchase orders and subcontract.awards in excess of.$5,000. (d) Whenever reasonably requested by Owner in advance of the award of any subcontracts or purchase orders, Contractor shall establish unit prices ("Unit Prices") as part of the subcontracts or purchase orders. Such Unit Prices shall be established for additions as well as deletions. Prior to the effective date of this Agreement, Owner did make such a reasonable request with regard to the following portions of the Work: N/A STIPULATED SUM CONTRACT Pagc 5 CIRCUIT CITY STORE ((Pr0icctNumbcm (,PROIECTNAMEr, XOMPANYNAMEn aLETTEROFINTENTi, h tl �1 ' �' It �.Y ' �� -� � . ... � ' .Y 1 2I . .7 Contractor shall have full and complete authority and responsibility for the performance of all Subcontracted Work, and for each of its subcontractors and material suppliers. Contractor shall be fully responsible to Owner for the acts and omissions of each of its subcontractors and material suppliers, and of persons employed either directly or indirectly by them, and for the acts and omissions of contractor's own employees, which responsibility shall be unaffected by any bankruptcy proceedings affecting any of them or any other inability to perform their obligations. Contractor agrees that no portion of the Contract Documents, nor any contract entered into between Contractor and any of its subcontractors or material suppliers, shall create any direct contractual relationship between any of such subcontractors or material suppliers and Owner. 2.8 Contractor shall purchase all materials and services required for construction of the Project and as otherwise required to perform fully all of the Work. Contractor shall cooperate with Owner's fixture contractor in the coordination of the installation of store fixtures without additional compensation. 2.9 Contractor shall cooperate with Architect at all times in order to obtain all necessary permits, authorizations, bonds and licenses required by any governmental authority having jurisdiction over all or any part of the Work. 2.10 All Work performed for the Contractor by a subcontractor shall be pursuant to an appropriate agreement between the Contractor and the subcontractor (and where appropriate between subcontractors and sub -subcontractors) which shall contain provisions that^ (a) preserve and protect the rights of the Owner in accordance with the Conti -act Documents; (b) - make such subcontract subject to the terms of this Agreement and the other Contract -Documents and require that such Work be performed in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents; (c) require submission to the Contractor of applications for payment under each subcontract to which the Contractor is a part, in reasonable time to enable the Contractor to apply for payment in accordance with this Agreement; (d) require that all claims for additional costs, extensions of time, damages for delays or otherwise with respect to Subcontracted Work shall be submitted to the Contractor (via any subcontractor or sub - subcontractor where appropriate) in sufficient time so that the Contractor may comply in them rarer provided in the Contract Documents for similar claims by the Contractor upon the Owner, (e) waive all rights the Contractor and subcontractor may have against one another or the Owner for damages caused by fire or other perils covered by the property insurance described in this Agreement, except such rights as they may have to the proceeds of such insurance held by the Owner. as trustee; and STIPULATED SUM CONTRACT CIRCUIT CITY STORE ((ProjectNumben, Page b aPROJECTNAMEs ,COMPANYNAME,) aLETTEROFINTENTu (f) waive all rights to file any mechanic's lien, or claim of any sort or kind, against the premises of Owner or any part thereof; and 0 (g) obligate each subcontractor specifically to consent to the provisions of this Paragraph 2.10. The Contractor shall make available to each proposed subcontractor, prior to the execution of the subcontract, copies of the Contract Documents to which the subcontractor will be bound by this Paragraph 2. 10, and identify to the subcontractor any terms and conditions of the proposed subcontract which may materially vary from the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. Each subcontractor shall similarly make copies of the Contract Documents available to his sub -subcontractors. Duties of Owner: 2.11 The Owner shall provide surveys showing the boundaries of the property, easements and location of underground utilities. 2.12 The Owner shall obtain and pay for all necessary easements. 2.13 Decisions and approvals required of the Owner shall be rendered with reasonable promptness, so as not to delay the Work. 2.14 The Owner shall provide the Contractor with soil and subsurface reports relating to the Project. Owner shall have no responsibility for the information contained therein or the accuracy thereof. 2.15 The Owner shall pay all property taxes and property assessments levied against any portion of the Project. 2.16 The Owner appoints CCSI's Construction Manager as its full-time representative on the Project with whom the Contractor may consult and whose instructions and decisions shall be binding on the Owner. No Change Order, field order or bulletin to the Contract Documents shall be valid or effective unless authorized on behalf of the Owner by the following appointed individuals within the limits shown: CCSI's Construction Manager Maximum $5,000.00 - Cumulative monthly Sean R. Easter Maximum $20,000.00 - Cumulative monthly R. Bruce Lucas Amounts in excess of $20,000.00 2.1? The Owner shall make all payments due Contractor promptly in accordance with this Agreement. 2.1Z The Owner's Contract with the Architect shall provide for the Architect`s obligation to: (a) Produce Construction Documents which comply with all applicable codes and regulations. (b) Review all shop drawings, samples and other submissions of Contractor and its subcontractors for conformance with the design requirements of the Project and -for compliance with STIPULATED SUM CONTRACT CIRCUIT CITY STORE (PrnjcctNumbm Page 7 MEu 1,COMP «COMPAWMYNAMEn ,,LETTEROFINTENTu I .N Construction Documents. Architect shall not be responsible for checking exact dimensions of shop drawings_ (c) Interpret the Construction Documents and coordinate the design and engineering of all systems and subsystems to assure that the architectural, structural and mechanical elements and components will be complete and compatible. 3. Stipulated Sum and Cast of Construction 3.1 Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents for the entire sum of $ Contract Amount (the' "Stipulated Sum"). The Stipulated Sum may be increased or decreased only in accordance with the provisions of Article 4. Contractor shall be entitled to no other compensation for construction of the Work and Contractor's sole remuneration shalt be the amount of the Stipulated Sum, payable as herein provided. Attached hereto as Exhibit D is the "Bid Form" submitted by Contractor. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in such'Bid Form, unless expressly agreed to in writing by Owner, the work_ to be performed for the Stipulated Sum shall be the "Work" as defined in Article 1 hereof. 3.2 Except as otherwise specified in this Article 3, Contractor shall be solely responsible for, and shall timely pay directly, all costs of the Work, including, without limitation, the cost of all labor, services, materials, tools, equipment, temporary construction facilities, water, light, power, heat, telephone, transportation, premiums for all faithful performance, labor and materials, payment bonds required under the Contract Documents, all other necessary facilities and utilities and all other costs incurred for the proper execution of the Work. 3.3 The following costs shall not be the responsibility of Contractor. (a) Costs and fees necessary to annex the site to benefit districts, such as acreage fees, drainage fees, sewer fees and water district fees. (b) Property taxes and assessments_ 3.4 Contractor shall be responsible for and shallpay prior to delinquency and in the manner prescribed by law, all sales, consumer, use and other similar taxes required or levied bylaw. 4. . Changes in the Work 4.1 "Change Order" shall mean (i) any, written amendment or modification to this Agreement or the other Contract Documents signed by both Owner and Contractor and (ii) any change in the Work ordered by Owner pursuant to Paragraph 4.2 or requested by Contractor and agreed to by Owner pursuant to such Paragraph. STIPULATED SUM CONTRACT CIRCUIT CITY STOREoProjectNumben, Pagc 8 oP.ROJECENAMEu VCOMPANYNAME,, cLFTTEROFINTENT., 4.2 Owner reserves the right to order in writing alterations, additions to or deletions froth the Work from the Contract Documents at any time prior to completion and acceptance of the Work by Owner. Contractor shall comply with any and all such Change Orders. Contractor may request or propose changes in the Work; provided, however, Owner shall be under no obligation to agree to' or acceptarty such requested or proposed change. Contractor shall not make any change or deviation from the Construction Documents without Owner's prior written approval, and Contractor at all times shall be fully liable to Owner for any ananthorized changes in or deviations from the Construction Documents. Except where expressly provided in this Agreement, no Change Order shall be made, nor shall any adjustment in the Stipulated Sum be recognized hereunder, unless Contractor shall have received a written Change Order executed by Owner prior to making any such change. 4.3 Whenever the necessity for a change arises, and when so ordered by Owner in writing, Contractor shall take all steps necessary to halt any Work in the area of the change that might be affected by the change requested. Changes in the Work shall be performed fully and completely and in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications, except for the deviations specifically called for by the Change Order. Materials utilized in the changed Work shall be as specified in the Contract Documents insofar as the Contract Documents do not conflict with the conditions set forth in the Change Order. 4.4 Except as otherwise provided in Paragraph 4.8 hereof for emergency changes, Contractor shall be issued a bulletin or field order describing a proposed change in the Work, which shall require Contractor to submit a proposed price to be added to or deducted from the Stipulated Sum as a direct result of such change, together with a request from Contractor for any adjustment in the time for completion of the Work. When and if agreement is reached as to the sum to be added to or deducted from the Stipulated Sum and as to the adjustment, if any, of the time for completion of the Work, and a Change Order is executed by Owner and Contractor, Contractor shall forthwith proceed with the changed Work. Otherwise, the Contractor shall proceed in accordance with Paragraph 4.9. 4.5 Whenever a bulletin or field order proposing a change is received by Contractor or Contractor requests a change, Contractor -shall prepare and submit to Owner a full and completely detailed estimate of the cost of the Work for such change and of the additional time required by Contractor within which to perform which would extend the Date of Substantial Completion and/or of the reduction in costs and time due to the omission of Work which was to have been performed for the Stipulated Sum. Estimates of costs for added Work shall be based upon the cost to Contractor for such Work at market values current at the time the changed Work is requested, unless otherwise covered by Unit Prices. For such added Work, Contractor shall add GC's Markun on Change Orders percent (_%) of the cost of such Work representing full compensation for Contractor's field overhead and main office overhead and profit. Contractor's fee for such added Work shall be added to the Stipulated Sum by Change Order. Estimates of the amount to be deducted from the Stipulated Sum due to the omission of Work shall be based upon the,cost of the Work to Contractor for the labor, materials and equipment which would have been used on such Work, using the same values thereof at the time the Stipulated Sum was established, unless otherwise covered by Unit Prices. 4.6 The estimates to be provided by Contractor in accordance with Paragraph 4.5 hereof shall contain the following additional.information: (a) For changed, added or deleted Work, Contractor shall furnish detailed estimates of both the changed cost of all labor, materials, equipment and all other costs to be included in the cost of the STIPULATED SUM CONTRACT CIRCUr r CITY STORE «PrujecrNumbcn+ Page 9 cePRO)ECTNAME+. «COMPANYNAME++ «LETTEROFINTENT++ Work for the changed, added or deleted Work, as determined in accordance with Article 5 below, or the applicable Unit Prices, and all savings thereof resulting from deleted Work. (b) For any portion of the changed Work which shall be performed by a subcontractor, Contractor shall furnish Owner with a detailed estimate of the costs to! the subcontractor for labor, materials and equipment to be used, and any other applicable costs charged by such subcontractor, including a markup by the subcontractor not to exceed fifteen percent (15%) to cover the subcontractor's general overhead and profit, unless otherwise approved in writing by Owner prior to award of the subcontract. (c) Sub -subcontractors' charges shall be limited to the terms of the preceding Paragraph. A subcontractor's markup on a sub -subcontractor's total charges shall not exceed five percent (5%) of the cost of such charges, unless approved in writing by Owner prior to award of the subcontract and shall specifically not include any other additional markup for overhead and profit. 4.7 Except as otherwise provided below, Contractor's quotations, supported by detailed estimates, shall be submitted within twenty (20) calendar days after the bulletin or field order proposing the change is received by Contractor or Contractor requests a change. Contractor's quotation shall include the period of time allowed for approval by Owner, which shall be not less than ten (10) working days. Either party shall have the right to request additional time of the other party. Any change which the Contractor feels will require additional time extension to achieve the dates set forth in Paragraph 7.2 shall be handled pursuant to Article 7.5 of this Agreement as it relates to the requested time extension. 4.8 Changes in the Work required as a result of imminent peril to persons or property, discovery of r errors in the Construction Documents requiring immediate clarification in order to avoid a serious work stoppage, changes of a kind where the extent of the Workinvoived cannot be determined until completed, and unexpected or unforeseen site conditions or changes under any other circumstance when deemed necessary by Owner may be authorized by Owner upon written notice thereof to Contractor or, in the case of imminent peril to persons or property, orally, where it is obvious that the change must be ordered immediately. Contractor shall commence performance of any such change immediately upon receiving such authorization_ After commencing any such change, Contractor shall submit a detailed estimate within the same time and in the same manner set forth above for ordinary changes_ Contractor also shall submit time and materials records for such Work until an agreement is reached upon the appropriate adjustment to the Stipulated Sum. 4.9 In the event that Owner and Contractor fail to agree on any adjustment in the Stipulated Sum for any change in the Work pursuant to a Change Order or a clarification of the Construction Documents which Contractor claims is a Change Order, Contractor, upon written notice thereof from Owner, shall immediately proceed to perform the Work which is the subject of the Change Order and changes in the Stipulated Sum on account of such Change Order, if any, shall be determined based on the cost of the Work for such Change Order. Contractor shall provide Owner at the completion of each day's work with a daily work sheet containing a detailed summary of the actual costs of the labor, materials and equipment used in the changed Work, on a form to be approved by Owner. Contractor similarly shall indicate all savings in labor, materials and equipment, as well as supervisory personnel, in connection with that portion of the Work which has been deleted by the Change Order or the changed Work. Where Contractor performs extra Work at locations away from the job site, in lieu of such daily work sheet, Contractor shalt furnish a detailed statement of labor, material and equipment used on such STIPULATED SUM CONTRACT Page 10 CIRCUIT CITY STORE uProicctNumbern ,PROJECTNAM& aCOMPANYNAMEu ,,LETTEROFINTENTu Work. In addition, upon completion of such changed Work, Contractor shall.furnish Owner with a detailed time AiQN and materials statement of the cost of the Work as a'result of such Change Order. ir In the event Owner and Contractor cannot agree upon the..reasonableand necessary cost of the Work for any Change Order or any other disputed work, Contractor, upon notice from Owner as set forth above, shall nevertheless perform the Work, Owner shall promptly pay to Contractor that portion of the cost of the Work which is not in dispute and the disputed sum shall be later resolved by negotiation or binding arbitration in - accordance with the rules of the American Arbitration Association. All of the information to be provided by Contractor pursuant to this Article 4 shall be provided in such detail as Owner may reasonably require. All statements and work sheets to be provided by Contractor with respect to changes in the Work shall be signed by Contractor, who shall certify, warrant and represent that to the best of Contractor's knowledge the information is true and correct, but such certification shall not preclude subsequent adjustment based upon a later audit. 4.10 For any changes in the Work, Contractor shall be entitled only to such adjustment in time by which the Date of Substantial Completion (as defined below) .is delayed due to performance of the added Work. Each estimate for an addition to the work submitted by Cont aetor shall state the amount of additional time that Contractor considers that the Date of Substantial Completion will be delayed as a result of the requested change. Failure to request additional time when submitting such estimates shall constitute a waiver by Contractor of any right to claim subsequently any adjustment in the time for the Date of Substantial Completion based upon such changed Work. In each instance the request for additional time shall include appropriate credit for time saved as a result of changes in or deletions to'the Work. Appropriate changes in time for changes or deletions to the Work shall be handled in the same manner. Contractor nonetheless shall have the.right to request a Change Order extending the Date of Substantial Completion when the cumulative effect of several Change Orders, by the nature -� of the Work described therein, reasonably causes the time of performance to exceed the aggregate of the time extensions already allowed in the same Change Orders. It will be the Contractor's obligation to demonstrate to the Owner how any requested time extension has adversely impacted the Project's Critical Path Schedule. Only time extensions which have been demonstrated to adversely impact the Projects Critical Path Schedule shall constitute a valid time extension for extending the Date of Substantial Completion. 4.11 In the event that Owner and Contractor fail to agree on any claimed adjustment in the Date of Substantial Completion, Contractor, upon written notice thereof from Owner, shall immediately proceed to complete the Work to be changed, and each party shall maintain all rights, remedies and claims with respect thereto. . 5. . Change Order Costs 5.1 Owner shall pay Contractor for Work performed pursuant to a Change Order (i) the estimate for such Work agreed to by Owner and Contractor pursuant to Paragraph 4.5 hereof, or (ii) if no such estimate is agreed upon, the Cost of the Work (as defined in Paragraph 5.1 of the General Conditions as modified hereby) STIPULATED SUM CONTRACT Page I 1 CIRCUIT CITY STORE aPmjcctNumben+ IR aPROJECTNAME++ 10V -COMPANYNAME» aLETTEROFINTENTrn r! . ,t t . . attributable to such Change Order as provided in Paragraph 4.9, subject in either case to the retention provisions of Article 6 hereof, further subject at all times to the limit of the Stipulated Sum, as adjusted by Change Order, and subject to such further exceptions as are hereinafter set forth. Contractor agrees that the amounts paid by Contractor for the services and materials to be provided hereunder -by Contractor at all times shall be at rates which are not higher than standard rates paid within the Project City, State, area, unless otherwise approved in writing by Owner. The cost of the Work for any Change Order for the costs of removal, repair or replacement of defective materials, equipment and workmanship shall not increase the Stipulated Sum. 5.2 All charges with respect to a Change Order for the services of the Architect, the landscape architect and any and all engineers and consultants engaged by Owner, including the cost of all Drawings produced thereby, shall be paid directly by Owner and shall not be deemed a cost of the Work for such Change Order. 5.3 Upon Owner's direction to Contractor to restore the Project following loss, damage or casualty, the cost of the Work for a Change Order shall include, and the Stipulated Sum shall be increased, for any loss or damage to the Work resulting from any casualty or risk assumed by Owner under Article 9 hereof. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the Stipulated Sum shall be increased to include costs resulting from subsurface water or soil conditions which have not been disclosed in any soil report given to Contractor by Owner. Loss or damage to the Work or equipment caused by any failure on the part of the officers, Project Manager, employees or other representatives of Contractor charged with the supervision or direction of the Work to exercise good faith and the standard of care normally found in the construction industry shall not be payable to Contractor as a cost of the Work, and all expenses therefor shall be the sole responsibility of Contractor. 6. Payment By Owner 6.1 Owner shall pay the Stipulated Sum in the manner and at the times hereinafter specified. All applications for payments must be submitted on AIA Document G702, Application & Certificate for Payment and AIA Document 703 (consistent with Contractor's Bid Form breakdown), Continuation Sheet and be accompanied by waivers of liens from Contractor and all "major" subcontractors and material suppliers for the portion of Work certified to be in place for which,payment has been made. Major subcontractors and material suppliers will be regarded as those whose contract sum exceeds Ten Thousand Dollars ($10,000.00) for the Project' 6.2 On or about the last working day of each calendar month, Contractor shall deliver to Owner for its approval, an itemized written statement on forms approved by Owner showing (i) the actual cost of the Work and the amount which is due and payable with respect thereto for Work completed ('m place and incorporated into the Work) and materials stored at the Project site or at Owner approved off-site storage areas, as itemized per Contractor's schedule thereof, during said month less all applicable retentions therefrom, (ii) the percentage of the Work completed during such month and the total percentage of the Work completed through such month, and (iii) an updated progress CPM schedule for the Work -(as illustrated by CPM -1). 6.3 On or about the twenty-fifth (25th) calendar day of each month, Owner shall remit to Contractor with respect to the preceding month that portion of the Stipulated Sum that the Owner approved in -its "Certificate of Payment" and excluding therefrom (i) a retention equal to ten percent (10%) of the approved amount of such Work (including. the General Contractor Work, the Subcontracted Work) as defined in Paragraph 6.7, (ii) any ST[PU[.ATED SUM CONTRACT Pagc 12 CIRCUIT CITY STORE aProjcctNumbcn+ tPROJECTNAMEu ,,COMPANY'NAMEu "I,ETTEROFINTENTu amount in excess of the cost of the Work performed by Contractor during such month and (iii) any portion of the cost of the Work for such month to the extent it exceeds the cost of the Work attributable to the percentage of the Work completed during such month. 6.4 Contractor shall at all times make available to Owner records and invoices of all disbursements made by Contractor for materials, labor, payments to subcontractors and other expenses incurred by Contractor. To the extent any discounts, rebates or other credits are due Owner on account of Owner's prepayments or otherwise, all such discounts, rebates and other credits shall appear in said statements as credits due to the Owner. 6.5 Owner may withhold payment to Contractor to the extent necessary to protect Owner upon the occurrence of any one or more of the following events: (a) any failure of Contractor to comply fully with any requirement of the Contract Documents, including any failure of Contractor to make any payment to any subcontractor or material supplier without cause; (b) any failure of Contractor to substantiate that previous payments made by Owner have been applied as provided by this Article 6, regardless of whether Contractor has a legitimate dispute with a subcontractor or material supplier, (c) the filing, delivery or recordation of any claim, lien, stop notice or similar matter against Owner, Contractor, any subcontractor, sub -subcontractor, materials supplier or the Project, or the existence of any allegation or dispute concerning payment or performancebetweenany of such parties, notwithstanding any failure of any of them to file, deliver or record any notice or similar required by law; provided, however, the amount which Owner may withhold pursuant to this subparagraph (c) shall be N limited to payments to Contractor for General Contractor Work and payments with respect to the Work ®r,") performed by the claimant involved, subject to the further limitation that the amount so withheld shall not exceed the greater of (i) the amount(s) claimed or in controversy or (ii) the face amount(s) of any and all bonds posted by the Owner to release any mechanics' or similar liens filed against the Project or any part of the Owner's property, plus twenty-five percent of such face amounts) as reasonable attorneys' fees to defend any actions on such bonds; and provided further that if Contractor provides a bond for the benefit of Owner pursuant to Paragraph 8.5 hereof with respect to the amount claimed or in controversy, the Owner will not withhold payments with respect thereto; or (d) any damage caused to any other contractor or subcontractor by reason of the negligent acts of Contractor. 6.6 Any and all funds paid to Contractor hereunder are hereby declared to constitute trust funds -in the. hands of Contractor for the Work performed in accordance with the Contract, to be applied by Contractor first to the payment of claims of subcontractors, laborers and materialmen arising out of the Work, then to claims for utilities famished and taxes imposed, and finally to the payment of premiums on surety bonds and other bonds and premiums on insurance payable during construction of the Project, before application to any other purpose. Upon receipt of funds from Owner, Contractor shall make immediate payment for the uses intended by Owner's payment to Contractor. STIPULATED SUM CONTRACT Pagc 13 CIRCUIT CITY STORE «PcojectNumbrn «PROF ECTN A%IE- uCOMPANYNAMEn uLETTEROFiNTENT» 6.7 Contractor shall retain from each payment to each subcontractor, and Owner shall withhold from its payments to Contractor with respect to such payments to subcontractors, a minimum of ten percent (10%) of the amount of each subcontract, unless otherwise approved in writing by Owner. Except as hereinafter provided, the retention under each subcontract shall not be paid until such subcontractor has furnished to Owner through Contractor (i) satisfactory evidence that all bills and claims against its portion of the Work have been paid, (ii) evidence satisfactory to Owner that the Work involved has been -properly completed, (iii) a complete waiver of all lien rights in a form satisfactory to Owner and (iv) the relevant time period has expired following the filing of a valid notice of completion or similar notice provided for under the laws of the state in which the Project is located. 6.8 All retentions held shall be due and payable thirty-five (35) calendar days after the filing of a valid notice of completion; provided, however, in no event shall Contractor be paid more than ninety-five percent (95%) of the Contractor's fee prior to the expiration of thirty-five (35) days after the issuance of the Certificate of Final Completion and where applicable, the filing of a valid notice of completion. In those jurisdictions which provide for filing of a notice of completion, Owner agrees to file a notice of completion promptly after issuance of the Certificate of Final Completion and when the time for the filing of such a notice is appropriate. 7. Time of the Work 7.1 Contractor shall commence the Work promptly after receipt of a Letter of intent/Notice to Proceed in the form set forth in Exhibit F attached hereto issued by Owner and shall prosecute the Work diligently t to completion. The Work (including the relevant portions thereof referred to below) shall be completed on the date(s) agreed upon by Owner and Contractor as set forth below. The "Date of Substantial Completion" of dip- Work heWork is the date when (i) the Work is sufficiently completed, in accordance with the Construction Documents, as modified by any Change Orders, so that the Owner can fully occupy the Project for the use for which it was intended, (ii) if the Project is located in a state which provides for the filing of a notice of completion or similar notice, a valid notice of completion or similar notice may be recorded, and (iii) the local governmental authority having jurisdiction over the Project has issued its final certificate of occupancy for all of the Work. The "Date of Final Completion" of the Work is the date when any and all corrective Work ordered by the Owner, after a semi- final inspection, has been consummated to the Owner's satisfaction. The "Certificate of Final Completion" shall be a document issued by the Owner after the Date of Final Completion and after final inspection has been made and shall not be unreasonably withheld. Notwithstanding the above, Owner may allow minor corrective Work to be completed after the Certificate of Final Completion is issued. Issuance of the Certificate of Final Completion fixes the Date of Final Completion and must be issued prior to final payment by the Owner, with exceptions contained in this Agreement- 7.2 greement 7.2 Time is of the essence of this Agreement as to all obligations of Contractor hereunder. Contractor recognizes and agrees that Owner may incur substantial financial losses in the event that the Work, or the relevant portions thereof, are not completed by the following dates: (a) Date of Certificate of Occupancy: (b) Date of availability for start of store fixturing: STIPULATED SUM CONTRACT Page la arae y« CIRCUIT CITY STORE aPrajcctNumb.rm PROJECTNAME> aCOMPANYNAMEn aLETTEROFINTENTr (c) Date ready for Alucabond Field Dimensions: (d) Date of Availability for Warehouse Racking: (e) Date telephone equipment room ready: (0 Date NOVAR on-line: (g) Date Lennox EOC: The date of availability for start of store fixturing shall be the date when all of the following have been properly performed: (i) all floor coverings (carpeting, rubber file and sheet vinyl) shall be in place, clean and protected; (ii) the store shall be enclosed, with all exterior doors in place and lockable (or in lieu thereof Contractor shall -provide at Contractor`s expense appropriate security guards or watchmen) and roof hatch or other roof access to the store shall be lockable ua sum board shall be completed and painted, all required 1 (-..) gyp e9 plywood backing shall be' in place; (iv) adequate lighting and power for all interior and fixture trades shall be installed and completed; (v) ceiling shall be complete including acoustic grid, lighting and fire sprinklers trimmed and under pressure; (vi) HVAC system shall be operational; (vin? .wire shall be pulled and trimmed for floor boxes and wail electrical shall be in place; (viii) all areas shall be clear of debris and broom clean; and (ix) concrete floors shall be sealed where specified. All of the foregoing ihall be performed in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Contractor shall consult with Owner and the Architect to make provision for proper sequencing, coordination and scheduling of this portion of the Work. The date the telephone equipment room is ready -shall be the date when the requirements for frxturization as set forth in the previous Paragraph have been satisfied and continuous permanent power is available to the 10) telephone equipment room. 7.3 Should Contractor, in the opinion of Owner; fail, refuse or neglect to supply a sufficient number of workmen or to deliver materials with such promptness as to prevent any delay in the progress of any portion of the Work resulting in Contractor's (or any of its subcontractors' or suppliers') failure to prosecute the Work to completion in a timely manner, then, in addition to any and all other rights and remedies of Owner, Owner shall have the right upon five (5) calendar days' prior written notice, to direct Contractor to furnish additional labor, including overtime; and to expedite delivery of materials which shall be sufficient to accelerate and complete the Work, and the Stipulated Sum shall not be increased on account of such direction by Owner. Nothing contained herein shall be deemed to preclude Contractor's right, following completion of the Work, to contest by appropriate proceedings any determination by Owner that additional workmen or expedited deliveries were appropriate. Should Contractor neglect or refuse to comply with such directive, Owner shall have the right (but not the obligation) to obtain and pay for such goods and services directly, and the Stipulated Sum shall be reduced in alike amount, and, in addition thereto, Owner may exercise any other right or remedy granted by this ^agreement (including termination hereof for cause) or granted by law. The payment thereof by Owner pursuant to the . foregoing shall not be deemed to cure or waive Contractoes default, 7.4 If Contractor is delayed at any time in the progress of the Work by (a) any act or omission of Owner, the Architect or any separate contractor or consultant employed by Owner (but not resulting from or STIPULATED SUM CONTRACT CIPCUrr CITY STORE uPmjCCENumbem uPROJECTNAM£a aCOMPANYNAME. oLETTEROFINTENTo Page I5 . ' Illy `v .iS3 � �•i'i •t„i ...�', 1 i :tit based on any default by Contractor or any of its subcontractors, or any failure by Contractor or its subcontractors to comply with the Contract Documents); (b) labor disputes (provided same are not occasioned by Contractor's failure to pay its employees or subcontractors); (c) fire, inclement weather, earthquake, unusual delay in transportation, inability to obtain necessary materials, equipment or. labor or by any act or lack of action by governmental authority through no fault of Contractor, or (d) any cause beyond the reasonable control of Contractor and its subcontractors, then the dates set forth in Paragraph 7.2 shall be extended for a period equal to the time by which the completion of the Work or the relevant portions thereof is delayed by reason of such causes, provided in each instance that the Critical Path Schedule is affected and a timely claim is made as set forth in Paragraph 7.5 below. For purposes hereof, "inclement weather” shall mean weather patterns that may not reasonably be anticipated during the period of construction of the Work. 7.5 All claims for extensions of time shall be made in writing to Owner not more than ten (10) calendar days after the occurrence of the cause for delay of which Contractor is aware, or in the exercise of reasonable care should have been aware; by which Contractor seeks to extend the dates set forth in Paragraph 7.2 pursuant to Paragraph 7.4 above. Failure to request.such extensions of any such dates by Contractor in accordance with the foregoing shall constitute a waiver of any right to claim subsequently any adjustment in any such dates based upon any of such causes. It will be the'Contractoes obligation to demonstrate to the Owner how any requested time extension has adversely impacted the Project's Critical Path Schedule. Only time extensions which have been demonstrated to impact the Project's Critical Path Schedule shall constitute a valid time extension for extending such date. 7.6 In the event that Owner desires to accelerate Contractor's performance of the Work (for reasons other than those set forth iii Paragraph 7.3 above) with greater speed than contemplated by Paragraph 7.2, Contractor shall, upon written notice thereof from Owner, employ overtime labor and expedite delivery of materials as directed by. Owner. Such notice shall be deemed a Change Order and the Stipulated Sum shall be adjusted on account of such Change Order as provided in Article 4 hereof. 7.7 Notwithstanding the fact that a dispute, controversy or question shall have arisen relating to (i) the interpretation of any provisioti of this Agreement, (ii) the performance of any Work, (iii) payments which Owner claims it is entitled to withhold pursuant to Paragraph 6.5 hereof or (iv) otherwise, the Contractor agrees that it will not directly or indirectly stop 'or delay any Work required to be performed or stop or delay the delivery of any materials required to be furnished hereunder, pending the outcome of such dispute or controversy. 7.8 Owner shall have the right to occupy portions of the Project as and when completed, but prior to Date of Final Completion, only if Owner accepts such portions as substantially complete (subject to punch list corrections) and Owner agrees to the commencement of warranties and guarantees as to such occupied 'portions. Contractor's Financial Responsibility, Indemnification, Guarantees 8.1 Contractor agrees to indemnify and hold harmless Owner and, in cases where Owner is a tenant of the real property on which the Project is being constructed, Ownees landlord, their subsidiaries and affiliated companies and their respective officers, directors, agents, representatives, consultants and employees, from and against any and all loss, liability, claim, damage, demand, cost and expense of every kind and nature whatsoever STIPULATED SUM CONTRACT Page 16' CIRCUrr COPY STORE uPrgi=Numbcm uP ROJ ECTNAM En uCOMPANYNAME" "LETTEROFINTENTn (including reasonable attorneys' fees) arising out of or resulting from the performance of the Work or caused by any negligent act or omission on the part of Contractor, any of its subcontractors, anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, regardless of whether such act is caused by a party indemnified hereunder. 8.2 Contractor agrees that if any legal action or other proceeding of any nature is brought against Owner, Owner's landlord where applicable, or Contractor, or any of their respective officers, directors, agents, representatives, consultants or employees, the Architect, or any of them (whether or not any other party defendant shall be joined in the action), because of any of the foregoing matters against which Contractor agrees to indemnify Owner or Owner's landlord, Contractor shall at its own cost and expense settle or defend such action, paying all costs, expenses and attorneys' fees involved therein. Notwithstanding the foregoing, in any action of the nature described above in which Owner or Owner's landlord is named as a party, Contractor agrees that its selection of legal counsel supplied in connection with any such action shall be subject to Owner's prior written approval, and Owner shall have the right to participate in the defense of any such action. The obligations of Contractor under this Paragraph shall not extend to the liability of the Architect, its agents, consultants or employees, arising out of (i) the preparation or approval of maps,'drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, Change Orders, Drawings or Specifications, or (ii) the giving of or the failure to give directions or instructions by the Architect, its agents or employees, provided that the giving or failure to give any such directions or instructions is the primary cause of the injury or damage, unless Contractor in exercise of reasonable care should have known, as appropriate, that the giving of such instruction'was improper or that such direction or instruction should have been given. 8.3 Contractor shall defend all suits and claims for infringement of any patent rights and shall hold the Owner and Owners landlord free and harmless from and against any and all loss, liability, claim, damage, demand, ti cost and expense on account thereof, except that Owner, or Owner`s landlord where applicable, shall be responsible for all such loss, liability, claim, damage, demand, cost and expense when a particular design, process or product of a particular manufacturer is specified by Owner. if Contractor has reason to believe that the design, process or product specified by Owner is an infringement of a patent, Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless Contractor_promptly provides such information in writing to the Architect and Owner. 8.4 Owner, or Owner's landlord where applicable, shall have no obligation to pay or reimburse Contractor with respect to any of the costs and expenses incurred by Contractor in accordance with Paragraphs 8.1 through -8.3 above. In the event any such loss, liability, claim, damage, demand, cost or expense is asserted against or incurred by Owner or Owneds landlord or their agents, representatives, consultants, or employees, or the Architect in connection with the foregoing, Owner, in addition to all other rights and remedies it may have with respect thereto, may withhold and offset from any payment then or thereafter due to Contractor under the terms of this Agreement an amount sufficient in Ownees judgment to protect and indemnify against any such matter. Alternatively, Contractor may in its discretion and at its expense, furnish a surety bond -in form, substance and amount satisfactory to Owner, written by a bonding company satisfactory to Owner, in which case Owner shall not withhold payment_ 8.5 Payment and performance bonds shall be provided by Contractor at the request of Owner and, except as provided in Paragraph 8.4 above, the premiums therefor will be paid directly by Owner unless such premiums are included in the Stipulated Sum. It is expressly understood that the cost of the bond is to only include the direct cost, to the contractor, form the bonding company-, those items not to be included in bond cost are mark - STIPULATED SUM CONTRACT CIRCUIT CITY STORE (ProjectNumben, Page I7 aPROJECTNAMEn uCOMPANYNAME+, aLETTEROFINTENTs, up and/or general administrative expenses of the contractors home office. Contractor shall not have, and hereby waives, any right to file any mechanic's lien, or claim of any sort or kind, against the premises of Owner or any part thereof, unless Contractor shall have given Owner ten (10) business days' prior written notice of Contractor's intention to file such lien or claim and a statement of the basis of such lien or claim. Contractor agrees that providing such notice shall be a condition precedent to its rights to file any such lien or claim. Contractor shall not permit or suffer any mechanic's or other similar lien filed by any subcontractor, material vendor, laborer or materialman to remain upon the premises of Owner and shall satisfy and have discharged any lien so filed within fifteen (15) days of its filing or such earlier period as may be necessary to avoid enforcement thereof. Contractor shall have the right to bond off or provide other satisfactory security against any unreasonable and improper lien which Contractor desires to contest. Contractor agrees to indemnify and hold Owner, and Owner's landlord where applicable, free and harmless from and against any and all loss, liability, claim, damage, cost and expense from any lien on the Project which is placed on or remains on the Project in connection with the Work, or any stop notice or similar action on the part of any subcontractor, material vendor, laborer or materialman, and Contractor shall at its sole cost and expense save and defend Owner, and Owner`s landlord where applicable, from any and all cost and expense in connection therewith. In the event Contractor should neglect or refuse to cause any such mechanic's or other similar lien promptly to be discharged or bonded off as required above, Owner, after giving Contractor seven (7) calendar days' written notice of its intention so to do, shall have the right, but not the obligation, to bond off such lien and such payment incurred by Owner shall be credited to the account of the Owner. Owner shall be entitled to offset one hundred percent of the amounts so bonded, plus twenty-five percent of such amounts as reasonable attorneys' fees, against payments thereafter becoming due to Contractor hereunder. Owner may exercise any other right or remedy granted by this Agreement (including termination hereof for cause) or granted by law. The bonding off of any lien by Owner pursuant to the foregoing shall not be deemed to cure or waive Contractor's default. 8.6 Should Contractor neglect or refuse to pay promptly when due any legitimate or undisputed bill incurred by it pursuant to this Agreement, Owner, after giving Contractor seven (7) calendar day's written notice of its intention so to do, shall have the right but not the obligation, to pay such bill' directly and such payments shall be credited to the account of the Owner. Owner shall be entitled to offset theamounts so paid against payments thereafter becoming due to Contractor hereunder. Owner may exercise any other right or remedy granted by this Agreement (including termination hereof for cause) or granted by law. The payment of any bill by Owner pursuant to the foregoing shall not be deemed to cure or waive Contractor's default. Owner will not make any such payment, however, without prior consultation with Contractor or an explanation of Contractor's reason for refusing to pay promptly such bili as and when due. 8.7 In addition to Contractor's warranty set forth in the General Conditions and any guarantees or warranties of Contractor set forth in any other Contract Documents, all. of the Work, including all of the materials and equipment incorporated therein, is guaranteed by Contractor against failure due to defects in workmanship, materials and improper installation for a period of one (1) year following the date on which the completed Work is accepted by the Owner or the Date of Substantial Completion, whichever is earlier, unless in each case a longer period of time is specifically provided for in the Contract Documents or is implied by law ("Contractor`s Guarantee"). If, within such one year period, any of the Work is found to be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt of written notice from the Owner to do so unless the Owner has previously given the Contractor a written acceptance of such condition. This period of one year shall be extended with respect to portions of Work first performed after the Date of Substantial Completion by the period of time between the Date of Substantial Completion and the actual STIPULATED SUM CONTRACT CIRCUIT CITY STORE aPrnjectNumbm, Page I r uPROIECTNAME,. (tCOMPANYNAME,- «L£TTEROFINTENTi, performance of the Work. This obligation shall survive acceptance of the Work under the Contract and termination of the Contract. The Owner shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition. 8.7.1 Any Work performed following the issuance,of the Certificate of Final Completion and the replacement of any Work, including any of the materials and equipment incorporated therein, pursuant to the foregoing guarantee of Contractor, also shall be unconditionally guaranteed in accordance with the foregoing for a period of one (1) year after completion of replacement, as the case may require, of each such item of Work. 8.7.2 Nothing contained in Paragraphs 8.7 and 8.7.1 shall be construed to establish a period of limitation with respect to other obligations which the Contractor might have under the Contract Documents. Establishment. of the time period of one year as described in Paragraphs 8.7 and 8.7.1 relates only to the specific obligation of the Contractor to correct the Work, and has no relationship to the time within which the obligation to comply with the Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced, nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish the Contractor's liability with respect to the Contractor's obligations other than specifically to correct the Work. 8.7.3 Contractor shall cause all guarantees and warranties from subcontractors, materialmen and equipment suppliers to be made directly to Owner as well as Contractor and Contractor shall furnish Owner with written evidence of such guarantees and warranties. All of such guarantees and warranties (including Contractor's warranties and guarantees under the Contract Documents) shall include the cost of all labor, materials and other costs required to replace defective, unsound or improper Work and materials, including damage to adjacent equipment or materials and the replacement or refinishing of same. As part of the Work, Contractor promptly shall enforce all of said guarantees and warranties for Owner's benefit if Owner shall request Contractor so to do. Neither payment hereunder, including the final payment to Contractor, nor Owner's use and occupancy of the Project or any part thereof, shall release Contractor from liability to Owner for workmanship, materials and equipment incorporated into the Work which are found to be defective, unsound or improper or otherwise covered by any such guarantees or warranties. 8.8 Contractor is advised that the vendors listed below in this Agreement are vendors who will be supplying labor and/or materials to the Project and with whom Owner has established national account pricing. Contractor is further advised that the Owner has guaranteed these vendors that payment for their work will be made for this particular Project. These vendors have manufactured or procured these proprietary items solely for the use of Circuit City Stores, Inc. The Contractor is required to pay these vendors in a timely fashion by joint check(s) to the appropriate subcontractor(s) that these vendor(s) have contracted with; lien waivers are required from the vendors listed below. Failure of the Contractor to pay these vendors by joint check will invoke Owner's right as called for in Section 8.6 and 6.5 of this Agreement. Any disputes in the amount owed to vendors listed below should be brought to the Ownees attention in writing. Owner will assist Contractor in - resolving any -such. disputes. Vendor and/or Product list: L . Richmond Electric Supply Company, Inc. 2. Lennox HVAC 3. Canterbury Distributing — Carpet & Ceramic Tile STIPULATED SUM CONTRACT Pap 19 _ CIRCUIT CITY STORE «PmjcccNumbcm «PROJECTNAME. «COMPANYNAM6u «LETTEROFINTENTD 4. Novar, Inc. - EMS System 5. Girtman-McDougall (hollow metal doors, frames and hardware, security gates) 6. VEC (STS Cable Supplier) 7. Besam Automatic Doors 8. Reading Commercial Carpet 9. Graybar Electric Company (Square D Equipment) 8.9 The provisions of this Article 8 and all obligations of Contractor hereunder shall sttrvive any termination or expiration of this Agreement 9. Insurance 9.1 Prior to the commencement of any Work or the performance of any service hereunder by Contractor or any of its subcontractors, Contractor shall procure the following insurance coverage and maintain such insurance in full force and effect until all of the Work is completed and accepted for final payment, unless otherwise specified herein. All such insurance shall be for the benefit and protection of Owner and Contractor and shall name Owner, its subsidiaries and affiliated companies, and their respective officers, directors, Owner's landlord and any party who owns a fee interest in and to the real property to be improved by the Project, or any construction lender therefor, as an additional insured. All insurance companies, the form of all policies and the provisions thereof shall be subject to Owners prior approval. The insurance to be procured and maintained by Contractor as hereinabove provided shall consist of the following . (a) Statutory worker's compensation and occupational disease insurance and employer's liability insurance, as required by the Workers Compensation Act of the state in which the Project is located, and employers liability. insurance with minimum limits of not less than $500,000. (b) Commercial General Liability Insurance, such policy to include the following provisions: (i) Coverages and Limits of Liability: General Aggregate Limit (other than products/cornpleted Operations .............................................................................. $2,000,000 Products Completed Operations Aggregate Limit ...... $2,000,000 Personal & Advertising Injury Limit ......................... $2,000,000 Each Occurrence Limit .......................................... $2,000,000 Fire Damage Limit (any one fire)................................$100,000 Medical Expense Limit (any one person) ........................ $5,000 Designated Construction Projects General Aggregate Limit (iii) Products Liability (Completed Operations) Insurance . Coverage to remain in force for a minimum of two years after completion of the job, or the length of the guarantee, whichever is greater. (iv) Contractual Liability: STIPULATED SUM CONTRACT f� ^. CIRCUMCITY STORE uPmjectNumbrn> Page 20 ( » cCOMP CTNAME «COMPANYNAME+, cLETTEP OFINTENT,, (1) Specifically insuring the liability assumed under the Contract Documents entered into between the Contractor and Circuit City Stores, Inc. (2) With respect to the contractual obligation of Contractor to provide liability insurance to Circuit City Stores, Inc., this policy shall apply to any loss or claim before any contribution, by the insurance of Circuit City Stores, Inc. (v) (Construction Trades Only) X, C, U, Exclusion deleted (vi) Waiver of Subrogation in favor of Owner (vii) Coverage to be written on an occurrence basis policy form. (viii) Primary Insurance - This policy is to be primary coverage, and any other insurance in force for the Owner shall act as excess coverage only and not contribute in the payment of any claim made hereunder to the extent of the limits of liability afforded hereunder. (ix) Notice of Occurrence - The failure to give timely notice to the insurance company of any occurrence giving rise to a claim hereunder shall not be construed as late notice unless an executive officer of the named insured had actual knowledge of the occurrence and then failed to notify the insurance company in accordance with the policy conditions. (x) Cancellation.- In the event of cancellation, material change or non -renewal, sixty - (60) days' advance written notice by certified mail will be sent to Owner and Contractor. j (xi) The insurance shall not contain any exclusions other than exclusions forming a part of the standard liability insurance policy as currently in use by the Insurance Services Office, except that all exclusions otherwise contained therein that are in conflict with the conditions and coverages as required by this Agreement shall be void; provided, however, in no event shall such insurance prohibit cross -liability of other insured parties covered by such insurers (severability of interest). (c) Commercial Automobile Liability - Including all owned, non -owned and hired vehicles, with limits of liability not less than 51,000,000 combined single limit (CSL). (d) Umbrella Excess Liability with limits of not less than $10,000,000 providing coverage over primary insurance coverage, written on a following forms basis. (e) Such other insurance and coverages as Owner may reasonably request. (f) Certificates of Insurance applicable to this section 9, shall be provided as follows on AIA Document G705 or Accord Form 27-S, as applicable, and shall specifically set forth evidence of all coverage required by this Paragraph 9.1 and shall reference job site by location and address. STIPULATED SUM CONTRACT CIRCUIT CITY STORE aProjectNumbent uPROJECTNAME» ccCOMPANYNAM& aLETTEROFINTENTu Page 2t 0) (i) Certificate or signed binder to be issued and addressed to: Circuit City Stores, Inc. 9950 Mayland Drive Richmond, Virginia 23233 Attention: Construction Department (u� Certificate must provide sixty (60) days' notice of any material change or cancellation. Any wording limiting notice to "best efforts, endeavor to advise, not responsible to notify, etc." WILL RESULT IN CERTIFICATE BEING REJECTED. (g) In the event that Contractor fails to procure or maintain any of the insurance required pursuant to this Article, Owner, at its election, but without any obligation to do so, may obtain such insurance for the benefit of Owner and Contractor and may either reduce the Stipulated Sum in a like amount or deduct the cost thereof from any payment then or thereafter due to Contractor. 9.2 Contractor shall obtain builder's risk and physical damage insurance naming Owner as an additional insured and Loss Payee, for the following items on standard "All Risk" or "Cause of Loss — special form", forms, subject to the standard terms, conditions, and exclusions therein set forth, in an amount not less than One Hundred Percent (100%) of the completed value thereof, subject to standard exclusions and deductible limitations satisfactory to Owner (not to exceed S 10,000), but any net loss incurred by Contractor as a result of such standard exclusions or deductible limitations shall be reimbursed by Owner. Such insurance shall include coverage at least with respect to the following: (a) The structures upon and in which the Work shall be performed (to the extent that it includes the premises hereinabove described). (b) All insurable items of the Work and materials once such materials are incorporated into the Work, are located upon the premises of the Project or are located at off-site storage areas approved by Owner. (c) Owner, Contractor, and all subcontractors waive all rights each against the others for damages caused by fire or other perils to the extent covered by insurance obtained pursuant to this Paragraph 9.2, except such rights as they may have to the proceeds of such insurance_ Similar waivers will be included in all subordinate contracts of Owner, Contractor and subcontractors where legally required for validity. r (d) Such insurance shall contain a loss payable endorsement in favor of the Owner or its order, as their interests may appear. (e) Valuation - Shall be the replacement cost at time of loss with new material of like kind and quality. (1) Subrogation - In all cases of loss, all rights of subrogation by the insurance company for loss caused by Owner, Contractor or any subcontractor are waived. STIPULATED SUM CONTRACT CIRCUIT CITY STORE «Pmiec0t4umbcrA Page 22 aPROIECTNAME" (,COMPANYNAM& aLETTEROFINTENT,, (g) Cancellation - In the event of cancellation, material change or non -renewal, sixty (60) days' advance written notice by certified mail will be sent to the Owner and contractor. (h) Transit coverage applicable to Work and Materials transported to and from any off-site storage area. . 9.3 All sums insured under Contractor's property insurance shall be made payable jointly to Contractor and Owner as insureds, subject to the requirements of any applicable mortgagee clause. The Contractor shall pay the subcontractors their proportionate shares of insurance proceeds to which the Contractor is entitled hereunder. 9.4 Prior to obtaining the insurance required by Paragraph 92, Contractor shall inform Owner in writing of the cost to Contractor of obtaining such insurance. At Owner's option, Owner shall thereafter have the right to obtain such insurance on Contractor's behalf and the Stipulated Sum shall be reduced by the insurance costs so avoided by Contractor. lo_ Ownership of the Work 10.1 Subject to Contractor's obligations to obtain insurance as aforesaid, ownership of all and each part of the Work as and when completed and incorporated in the Work, and to each and all of the materials as and when affixed to the Project and incorporated therein, shall be in the Owner. Ownership of all materials and equipment delivered to the Project site or approved off-site storage areas, but not affixed to the Project and incorporated therein, shall become the property of Owner at such time that such materials are paid for by Owner, and under no circumstances shall material which has been delivered to the Project site or storage areas be removed without Owner`s prior written approval. 102 The Contractor hereby agrees to hold Owner and Owner's landlord harmless from any claims or damage of any type including consequential damages on account of loss of use, to any personal property belonging to the Contractor, its subcontractors, suppliers, employees or representatives regardless of whether Contractor is deemed responsible in whole or in part for such damage and whether caused in whole or in part by Contractor's negligence. 11. Accounting, Inspection and Audit Contractor shall check all materials, equipment and labor involved with or incorporated into the Work and shall keep full, detailed and accurate records and accounts thereof, showing the actual net costs to Contractor of all items of labor, materials, supplies, services and other expenditures of whatever nature for which payment or reimbursement is authorized or required under the terms of this Agreement, as may be necessary for proper financial management under this Agreement, and the system of accounting shall be satisfactory to Owner or to an auditor appointed by Owner. Contractor shall retain and preserve all such records for a period satisfactory to STIPULATED SUM CONTRACT Page 23 CIRCUIT CCTV STORE uProjcctlVumbcrn «PROJECTNAMEu «COMPANYNAhta) «LETTEROFINTENT« 0 s> Owner (but not less than three (3) years) after final payment hereunder. Owner and its representatives-, employees and agents shall be afforded complete access at all reasonable times to all of the Contractor's books, records, correspondence, instructions, drawings, receipts, vouchers, accounts, memoranda and all other materials with respect to the cost of the Work for any Change Order or disputed sum hereunder. The foregoing obligations shall survive any expiration or termination of this Agreement and the completion of the Work contemplated hereby. 11.1 Contractoes records (including but not limited to accounting records (hard copy, as well as comput• ,- readable readable data if it can be made available), written policies and procedures, subcontract files (including proposals --A successful and unsuccessful bidders, bid recaps, etc.), original estimates, estimating work sheets, correspondence, Change Order files (including documentation covering negotiated settlements), backcharge logs and supporting documentation, general ledger entries detailing cash and trade discounts earned, insurance rebates and dividends, and any other supporting evidence deemed necessary by the Owner to substantiate charges related to this Agreement (all foregoing hereinafter referred to as 'records")] shall be open to inspection and subject to audit and reproduction by Owner's agents or its authorized representative to adequately permit evaluation and verification of costs of the Work, and any invoices, Change Orders, payments or claims submitted by the Contractor or any of his payees pursuant to the execution of the Contract Documents. 11.2 Such audits may require inspection and copying from time to time and at reasonable times and places of any and all information, materials and data of every kind and character, including without limitation, records, books, papers, documents, subscriptions, recordings, agreements, purchase orders, leases, contracts, commitments, arrangements, notes, daily diaries, superintendent reports, drawings, receipts, vouchers and memoranda, and any and all other agreements, sources of information and matters that may in Owner's judgment have any bearing on or pertain to any matters, rights, duties or obligations under or covered by any Contract Document. Such records, subject to audit shall also include, but not be limited to, those records necessary to evaluate and verify direct and indirect costs (including overhead allocations), as they may apply to costs associated with this Agreement. 11.3 Deleted. . 11.4 Contractor shall require all subcontractors, sub -subcontractors, insurance agents and material suppliers to comply with the provisions of this Article by insertion of the requirements hereof in a written contract agreement between Contractor and such party. Contractor will cooperate fully and will cause all of its officers, directors, agents, representatives and successors and all of its subcontractors (including those entering into lump sum subcontracts) to cooperate fully in famishing or in making available to Owner from time to time whenever requested in an expeditious manner any and all such information, materials and data_ 11.5 Owner's agent or its authorized representative shall have access to the Contractor's facilities, shall have access to all necessary records and shall be provided adequate and appropriate work space in order to conduct audits in compliance with this Article. 11.6 If an audit inspection or examination in accordance with this Article discloses overcharges of any nature by the Contractor to the Owner in excess of one percent (1%) of the total contract billings, the actual cost of the Owner's audit shall be reimbursed to the Owner by the Contractor. Any adjustments or payments which must be made as a result of any such audit or inspection of the Contractor's invoices or records shall be made within a reasonable amount of time (not to exceed ninety (90) days) from presentation of Owner's findings to Contractor. STIPULATED SUM CONTRACT Page 24 CIRCUIT CITY STORE nProjectNumbcn, ` .PROJECTNAME. «COMPANYNAME» (,LETTEROFINTENT,, 12. Arbitration and Attorney's Pees Any controversy arising out of or relating to the Contract Documents, or the breach thereof, shall be settled by arbitration in Project State in accordance with the rules of the American Arbitration Association then obtaining, which shall be binding upon the parties. Judgment upon the award may be entered in any court having jurisdiction thereof. In the event of any litigation between the parties hereto to enforce any right or obligation hereunder of with respect to the subject matter hereof, the unsuccessful party to such litigation covenants and agrees to pay to the prevailing party all costs and expenses, including, without limitation, all attorneys' fees and other consultants' fees, including engineers' fees, and court costs incurred by the prevailing party, all of which shall be included in and as a part of any award rendered in any arbitration. 13. Termination of Agreement 13.1 Owner shall have the fight to terminate this Agreement at anytime without cause and without liability to Contractor by giving Contractor fifteen (I5) calendar days' prior written notice; provided, however, Owner shall reimburse Contractor for that portion of the Stipulated Sum for which Contractor is obligated to pay prior to the effective date of such -termination, less all payments previously made by Owner. All subcontracts shall contain provisions permitting termination on the same basis as this Agreement. If this Agreement is terminated after construction has commenced, Owner shall pay to Contractor an amount equal to that which would be payable under Paragraph 13.3 hereof. 13.2 If Contractor persistently or repeatedly refuses or fails to supply sufficient property skilled workmen or proper materials required for the Work, if Contractor fails to make prompt payment to subcontractors or for materials or labor, if Contractor persistently or repeatedly disregards laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of any governmental authority having jurisdiction over the Project, or if Contractor otherwise is in violation of a material provision of any of the Contract Documents, then Owner may, without prejudice to any right or remedy, and after giving Contractor and its surety; if any, fifteen (15) calendar days' prior written notice, terminate this Agreement and take possession of the Project and all materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery thereon owned by Contractor and any materials stored at off site areas and Owner may complete the Work by whatever method Owner may deem expedient. In any such case, Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is completed. )f the unpaid balance of the Stipulated Sum exceeds the cost to Owner of completing the Work, including compensation for the Architect's additionaL services, Owner shall reimburse Contractor (to the extent of said difference) for costs incurred but not previously paid -to Contractor. If the cost to Owner of finishing the Work exceeds the unpaid balance of the Stipulated Sum, Contractor shall pay the difference to Owner. The costs incurred by Owner as herein provided shall be certified by the Architect. 13.3. If the Work is stopped for a period of ninety (90) calendar days under order of any court or any governmental authority having jurisdiction over the Project, through no fault or act or neglect of Contractor or any of its subcontractors, or any of their agents or employees, or any other person performing any of the Work under a contract with Contractor, or if Owner is guilty of a breach of any material provision of this Agreement and such STIPULATED SUM CONTRACT Page 25 CIRCUIT CITY STORE « ProjeuNumben> "PROIECTNAME. <COMPANYNAME,, aLETTEROFINTENT. breach is not cured within fifteen (15) days after written notice from,Contractor, then in any such event Contractor' may, upon seven (7) calendar days' prior written notice to Owner and the Architect, terminate this Agreement and recover from Owner payment for that portion of the Stipulated Sum payable to the effective date of such termination as defined in Article 3 hereof. 13.4 Contractor shall use its best efforts to make all contracts, subcontracts, purchase orders and other commitments entered into by Contractor in connection with the performance of the Work hereunder in a form assignable to Owner. In the event of any termination of this Agreement for any reason, as a condition to any payments to Contractor, Contractor shall, at the request of Owner, assign to Owner any such contracts, subcontracts, purchase orders and commitments as Owner designates, and Contractor shall use its best efforts to obtain consent to the assignment of any such contract, subcontract, purchase order and commitment not otherwise assignable in accordance with its terms and to assist in an orderly transition. All of the Owner's rights and obligations hereunder may be assigned by Owner to any party who owns a fee interest in and to the real property to be improved by the Project, Ownees landlord or any other party who is a construction lender therefor. 13.5 In the event of any termination of this Agreement, Contractor shall provide Owner with' a detailed description of the costs and expenses incurred by Contractor within sixty (60) calendar days after written notice of termination has been provided as herein required. 14. Miscellaneous 14.1 All notices and demands of any kind or nature which either party hereto may be required or desires to serve upon the other party hereto under the terms of this Agreement shall be in writing and shall be served upon such other party by personal service or by mailing a copy thereof by certified or registered mail, postage prepaid, with return receipt requested, or sending by overnight express courier, addressed to the party so to be served as follows: .. r If to Owner. Circuit City Stores, Inc. 9950 Mayland Drive Richmond, VA 23233 Attn: Director of Construction and: Circuit City Stores, Inc_ 9950 Mayland Drive Richmond, VA 23233 Attn: Vice President - Construction a, STIPULATED SUM CONTRACT Pagc 26 CIRCUIT CITY STORE aProjectNumben, aPEIOJECTNAMEu «COMPANYNAME,, a LETTEROFINTENTu If to Contractor: General Contractor GC's Address GC's City, State Zip Attn: Contact Person In case of service by mail, notice shall be deemed given, unless it is sooner received, at the expiration of the third (3rd) business day after the date of mailing. If by Federal Express, notice shall be deemed given one (1) business day after sending. if by personal service, notice shall be deemed given when delivered. The addresses to which and the persons to whom notice and demand shall be delivered may be changed from time to time by notice served as hereinabove provided. 14.2 Neither the rights nor the obligations of Contractor under this Agreement may be assigned or assumed by any other party except to the extent of duties assumed by subcontractors, and in any such case subject to. the prior approval of Owner. in no event may Contractor assign any right to monies due or to become due to Contractor hereunder. This Agreement may be assigned by Owner to any mortgagee and to arty affiliated corporation, or any corporation, partnership or joint venture which now owns or hereafter may acquire the fee title to or leasehold interest in and to the property to which this Agreement relates, provided such entity is owned or controlled by Owner or -any affiliated or parent corporation and is financially capable of fulfilling Owner's obligations hereunder. Except as hereinabove specifically provided, this Agreement shall be binding upon and shall inure the benefit of the respective successors and assigns of the parties hereto. 14.3 This Agreement and the other Contract Documents referred to in Article 1 hereof, as and when =L prepared and added hereto, shall constitute the entire agreement between the parties hereto with respect to the subject matter hereof, and supersede all prior agreements and understandings, including all correspondence, between the parties hereto with respect to the subject matter hereof, both oral and written. 14.4 No provision of this Agreement may be waived, changed or modified, or the termination or discharge thereof agreed to or acknowledged orally, but only by an agreement in writing signed by the party against whom the enforcement of any such waiver, change, modification, termination or discharge is sought. 14.5 The headings of the several paragraphs hereof are included herein solely for convenience of reference and are not intended to aid in the construction of or to govern the terms and provisions of this Agreement.. - 14.6 This Agreement may be executed in two or more counterparts, each of which shall be deemed an original, but all of which together shall constitute one and the same instrument. 14.7 The Contractor hereby agrees to execute any and all documents which may be reasonably requested by an construction or permanent lender, including the assignment of the Contract, in whole or in part, and the Contractor shall be bound thereby. STIPULATED SUM CONTRACT Pap 27 CIRCUIT CITY STORE aPaojectNumhen, uPROJECTNAME+, aCOMPANYNAMSu ,,LETTEROFINTENTn 14.8 Notwithstanding anything in the Contract Documents to the contrary, the Owner shall have, at all reasonable times, the right to enter the Project for the purpose of conducting marketing activities and inspecting the Pe g .Work. The Contractor shall provide for such access. 14.9 This Agreement shall be governed and construed in accordance with the laws of the state in which the Project is located, IN WITNESS WHEREOF, Owner and Contractor have executed this Agreement on the day and year first written above. CONTRACTOR OWNER General Contractor CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. GC's Address 9950 Mayland Drive GC's City, State, Zip Richmond, Virginia 23233 By: By; Its: Its: Vice President - Construction License No. k STIPULATED SUM CONTRACT CIRCUrr MY STORE caPmjeccNumbcm r '°'"ccPROIECTNAM£» -ccCOMPANYNAMEn «LETTEROFINTENT), Page 28 CIRCUIT CITY STORES INC. LA QUINTA, CA SECTION 00700 GENERAL CONDITIONS TO CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT EXHIBIT A GENERAL CONDITIONS TO CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT between CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. ("Owner"), and "Contractor" n -•GENERAL CONDITIONS TO CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT t 00700-1 03/27/95 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA INSERT EXHIBIT A FOR EITHER CIRCUIT CITY STIPULATED SUM CONTRACT OR GUARANTEED MAXIMUM SUM HERE GENERAL CONDITIONS TO CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT 00700-2 03/27/95 EXHIBIT A GENERAL CONDITIONS TO CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT dated Date of Letter of Intent, between CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. C'Owner'°), and General Contractor ("Contractor") STIPULATED SUM CONTRACT CIRCUIT CITY STORE fktPmjeccNumbcm uPROJECTCITYSTATEu aCOMPANYNAME» aLETTEROFINTENTn PAGE I EXHISIT "A' TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. General........... 2. Organization of Specifications/Arrangement of Drawings.......................................................................3 3. Intent and Interpretation of Contract Documents.....................................:.................................................3 4. Owner's Right to Award Separate Contracts............................................................................................4 5. Cost of the Work; Allowances......................................................................................5 6. Architect ...................... 7. Contractor's Design Responsibility ........................................................................................... 4 ............ 10 8. Coordination by.Contractor........................................................_.................................... ...............11 9. Temporary Construction Facilities......................................:.....................................................................12 10. Use of Site and Premises ................................ 11. Subcontractors ....................................................................................................................................... 14 12. Submittals to Owner...............................:..........•.....•............................................................_....._..........15 13. Shop Drawings.............................................................................................................•-------•-...............IS 14. Samples................................................................................................................................................17 15. Record Drawings and Maintenance Instructions.................................................. ......................................................._...........---.18 16. Materials and Equipment.................................................................... ................................................. 18 17. Substitution of Material .......................................... ..............................................................._.....19 18. Workers and Workmanship............................................................. .............................._........_..._._.........20 19. Warranty ........................................................ ...... ...............:..............................................................21 20. Inspection of Work and Testing of Materials..........................................................._.......__...........21 21- Correction of Work.......................................................................•---....................••-•----.........._.............23 22. Cutting and Patching.--•................................................................................_.24 23. Clean -Up .................•----...........---.......... ........----._...............24 24. Protection of the Work ............................ ..................................................... 25 25. Protection of Persons and Property.............................................•......................................_.................. .26 26. Fire Precautions and Protection ............... 27. Environmental Control ................ 28. Progress Schedule .• .................................. ........_..............__._..29 STIPULATED SUM CONTRACT . CIRCUIT CITY STORE 9PACs PcojcctNumbm) EXHIBIT.;,. uPROJECTCrrYSTATEa «COMPANYNAMEn aLETTEROFINTENTn GENERAL CONDITIONS L General These General Conditions of the Agreement (referred to hereinafter as the "General Conditions"), except as modified by Division I of the Specifications, are made a part of each section of the Specifications with the same force and effect as though fully repeated therein. 2. Organization of Specifications/Arrangement of Drawings Organization of Specifications by "Divisions", "Sections", or "Articles", and arrangements of Drawings have been made for convenience only. Neither Architect nor Owner are bound to define limits of any subcontracts or establish work to be performed by any trade, craft or union. Except as otherwise expressly provided, terms and conditions of limitations are wholly between Contractor and its subcontractors. It shall be Contractor's responsibility to allocate work to the proper trades and to include all the Work that is required_ 3. Intent and Interpretation of Contract Documents 3.1 Contractor shall visit the site, familiarize himself with the local conditions under which the Work is to be performed and correlate his observations with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 3.2 The Contract Documents are complementary and what is required by any one shall be as binding as if required by all. The intention of the Contract Documents is to include all labor, materials, equipment and other items as provided herein necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Project It is intended that Work not covered under any heading, section, branch, class or trade of the Specifications shall be supplied if it is required elsewhere in the Contract Documents or is reasonably inferable therefrom as being necessary to produce the intended results. Words which have well-known technical or trade meanings are used herein in accordance with such recognized meanings. 3.3 With the Ownees concurrence, written interpretations necessary for the proper execution or progress of the Work, in the form of Drawings or otherwise, shall be issued with reasonable promptness by the Architect. The Owner or the Contractor may make written request to the Architect for such interpretations. Such interpretations shall be consistent with and reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents, and may be effected by Field Memoranda. A Field Memorandum may be issued by the Architect for clarification of Drawings or Specifications only if clearly no cost or time change is involved. Each. Field Memorandum will be dated and consecutively numbered. Field Memoranda shall not be deemed Change Orders, but such interpretations shall be considered a part of the Contract Documents only when countersigned by Contractor with the statement that cost and time are not affected. Work executed before receipt of such interpretations, if not in accord, shall be removed ,STIPULATED SUM CONTRACT PAGE 3 CIRCUIT CITY STORE M(ProjectNumbcm EXHtBrr "A" T(PROIECTCrrYSTATEu uCOMPANYNAMEu (,LETT£ROFINTENTu and replaced or adjusted, as directed, at Contractor's expense. If, in Contractor's opinion, such interpretations are more elaborate than Contract Documents indicate, written notice shall be given to Architect and Owner within thirty (34) days of receipt thereof. Such claim will be considered by Owner and, if justified, the written interpretations will be amended or extra Work authorized. 3.4 Contractor shall execute the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall make no changes without having first received written permission from Owner. When detailed information is lacking, Contracts should refer the matter to Architect and Owner for information before proceeding with Work. 3.5 Dimensions shall not be obtained by Contractor by scaling Drawings, except that dimensions for the interior sales floor may, with the consent of Owner, be scaled from fixturing drawings. When dimensions are not written on Drawings, Architect will furnish interpretations. 3.6 Drawings and diagrams for mechanical and electrical Work shall be followed only for Work for which they were especially prepared and shall be considered as diagrammatic only for other trades; they shall neither be used for any structural guidance nor for architectural layout. 3.7 The general character of detail Work is indicated on the Drawings. The Contractor shall not execute any of the Work requiring supplementary details or shop drawings until such drawings have been returned to him with no exceptions taken. Where Drawings indicate Work in detail and other portions in outline only, outlined portions shall be made identical to those detailed. 4. Owner's Right to Award Separate Contracts 4.1 The Owner reserves the right to award separate contracts for portions of the Project 42 When separate contracts are awarded for different portions of the Project, the "Contractor" in each case shall be the contractor who signs each separate contract with the Owner, and the "Project" for each Contractor shall be defined in his contract documents. 4.3 Mutual responsibility of Contractors: 4.3.1 Each Contractor shall afford other contractors reasonable epportunity for the introduction and storage of their materials and equipment and the execution of their portions of the Work, and shall properly connect and coordinate his Work with theirs. ' 4.3.2 If any part of a Contractor`s Work depends for proper execution or results upon the Work of any other separate contractor, Contractor shall inspect and promptly report to the Owner and Architect any apparent discrepancies or defects in such Work that render it impossible for such proper execution and results. Failure of Contractor to so inspect and report shall constitute an acceptance of the other contractor's Work as fit and proper to receive his Work, except as to defects which may develop in the other separate contractor's work after the execution of the Contractor's Work. STIPULATED SUM CONTRACT PAG CIRCUIT CITY STORE fkcPmjectNumbcn. ExFuBrr'A- ,iPROJECTCITYSTATEi. uCOMPANYNAME„ «LETTEROFINTENTi, *1 4.3.3 Should Contractor cause damage to the Work or property of any separate contractor on the Project, the Contractor shall, upon due notice, settle with such other contractor by agreement. or arbitration, if he will so settle. if such separate contractor sues the Owner or initiates an arbitration proceeding on account, of, any11damage alleged to have been so sustained, Owner shall notify Contractor who shall defend such proceedings at Contractor's expense; and if any judgment or award against Owner arises therefrom, Contractor shall pay or satisfy it and shall reimburse Owner for all attorneys' fees and court or arbitration costs which Owner has incurred. 4.3.4 Contractor shall provide all chases and openings required in the Project and required by other contractors employed by Owner as shown in the Contract Documents. It shall, however, be the dutyand responsibility of each of Owner's contractors involved to clearly locate, at the proper time, all chases and openings required and furnish drawings, templates and all other information necessary for proper execution of Work and to furnish and install all supporting devices and materials and equipment required by him. 4.3.5 When other contractors are directed to coordinate their work with Work of Contractor so ' far as built-in items, space requirements and time scheduling are concerned, and this Contractor has knowledge of such requirements, he shall be responsible for execution of required coordination. 4.4 Contractor shalt be responsible for any cutting, fitting and patching that may be required to complete his Work except as otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents. Contractor shall not endanger the work of any other contractor by cutting, excavating or otherwise altering any Work and shall not cut or alter the work of any other contractor except with Owner's prior written consent. 4.5 Any costs caused by defective or ill-timed Work shall be borne by the party responsible therefor. 4.6 If a dispute arises between contractors as to their responsibility for cleaning up as required by the Contract. Documents, Owner may clean up and charge the cost thereof to the several contractors as the Owner shall determine to be just. 5. Cost of the Work; Allowances 5.1 The "Cost of the Work" shall consist of the following 5.1.1 All wages, salaries and employee benefits paid by Contractor to or for the benefit of its field organization with respect to the time such persons are engaged in the Work. Contractor may include a mark-up to account for the actual costs of Coatractoes gross payroll inclusions such as allocable fringe benefits, payroll taxes and insurance, including but not limited to, workmen's compensation and unemployment insurance, but subject to applicable annual limitations and adjustments, which mark-up, however, shall not exceed Total Labor Bumen Breakdown percent (_%). Contractor's field organization shall be deemed to include, but shall not be limited to, the general superintendent, safety engineers, superintendents, engineers, accountants, job timekeepers, material clerks, foremen, watchmen, teamsters, STIPULATED SUM CONTRACT PAGE 5 CIRCUIT CITY STORE PN<ProjectNumbeni y uPROJECTCITYSTATE» EXHISM "A" aCOMPANYNAMEn uLETTEROFINTENTn mechanics, laborers and other personnel necessary for the supervision of the Work and performance of the General Contractor Work. Contractor's field organization also includes employees of Contractor ile engaged at shops or elsewhere in expediting the production or transportation of material or otherwise providing services pertaining directly to the Work, who shall be considered as stationed at the field office and their salaries paid for such part of. their time as is .employed in connection with the Work The foregoing shall not include any executives above and including the level of Project Manager. Owner shall not be responsible for any payments of costs which exceed the prevailing local scale for similarly skilled employees and workmen. Salaries for specialized employees of Contractor shall be subject to Owner's prior written approval. 5.1.2 The payment of union contributions and benefits for the Contractor's employees and the payment of any contribution pursuant to any and all unemployment insurance laws and all other laws for the benefit of employees generally, now in effect or hereafter enacted by local, state, or federal authority, whether levied or based upon the payroll of the Contractor for employees partly or wholly engaged in the Work. The Contractor, having received said payments from the Owner, shall indemnify and hold the Owner harmless from any claim that such payments have not been paid to the appropriate union or governmental agency. Such payments are only required as it relates to the actual time associated with the Work. 5.13 The cost to Contractor for all rental, handling and transportation, maintenance, normal upkeep and repair of tools, machinery, trucks and equipment (including shores, panel forms and scaffolding) rented by Contractor from others. Equipment rented by Contractor from any source whatsoever shall not exceed seventy-five percent (75%) of the rental rates listed in the most recent Associated Equipment Distributors Nationally Averaged "Rental Rates Compilation" and shall not exceed the average prevailing local equipment rental rates. All rental equipment shall be delivered in good - condition and thereafter all actual costs for operation, repair and maintenance of equipment during its use, in connection with -the Project shall be included as a Cost of the Work. No additional charge for wear and tear, depreciation, general overhauling or replacing of defective rental equipment or components shall be included in the Cost of the Rork. The total rental charges shall not exceed the replacement cost of any item so rented, such replacement cost to be determined by the depreciated value of the equipment at the time it is placed in use at the job. All rented power tools, equipment and other rented devices shall be removed from the Project site and the rental terminated as soon as possible by Contractor so as to reduce the rental cost to the minimum amount consistent with the best interests of Owner in the rapid and proper completion of the Work. The costs of equipment rented for use in connection with more than one project site during one rental term shall be apportioned among the various projects. This apportionment . requirement shall also apply with respect to all equipment of any kind owned by Contractor or purchased by Contractor for use in connection with more than one project site simultaneously_ Contractor may, with Owner`s prior written consent, enter into lease -purchase arrangements with respect to equipment procured for the Work, and Contractor shall, upon completion of the Work, credit the account of Owner the depreciated value thereof. 5.1.4 The cost to Contractor for all special tools, machinery, trucks and equipment purchased by Contractor specifically for use in connection with the Work, subject in each case to Owner's prior written approval. All such special tools, machinery, trucks and equipment purchased by Contractor specifically for use in connection with the Change Order Work shall become the property of Owner following completion of the Work. Contractor may elect to retain same upon completion of the Work, in which case Contractor shall credit to the account of the Owner the depreciated value thereof. Contractor STIPULATED SUM CONTRACT PAGE a CIRCUIT CITY STORE Y.<PmjcctNumbcm EXHIBIT"A" aPROJECTCITYSTATE,) 4cCO1,1PANYNAMEi, ,,LETTEROEINTENTo s shall keep full, detailed and accurate records and accounts of all, such items and Contractor's use thereof in connection with the'Project, all of which such records and accounts shall be preserved and made available to Owner and Owner's agents and representatives in accordance with Article 1 L hereof. 5.1.5 The cost to Contractor of all expendable supplies, such as "safety first" supplies, bottled water, drinking cups, crayon, flagging, chalk time and the like purchased, supplied and consumed for the General Contractor Work, and gasoline, oil and grease for operating Contractor's equipment; tie wire, welding rods and similar supplies consumed in connection with the Work. 5.1.6 The cost of all permits, fees, business licenses and other charges paid by Contractor specifically connected with the Work required by any governmental authority. having jurisdiction over the Work, including gross receipts tax or similar taxes imposed by other jurisdictions. 5.1.7 The cost to Contractor for all royalties and license fees required in connection with the Work, subject in each case to the Owner's prior written approval. 5.1 .8 All premiums for insurance and bonds required by Owner in connection with the Work and paid for by Contractor, including but not limited to insurance for tools and equipment owned by Contractor and necessary for use in connection with the Project. All rebates and refunds when paid to Contractor in connection with such premiums shall be reimbursed to Owner, except for "prompt payment" discounts, which shall not be reimbursed to Owner unless obtained with Owner's funds. 5.1.9. All costs incurred by Contractor for Work on public streets and moving of utilities, and all charges of utility companies for utility alterations and building services, as shown on the Drawings and Specifications. 5.1.10 All expenses incurred by Contractor in the protection of adjoining property. 5.1.11 All reproduction costs for the Construction Documents. 5.1.12 Consulting fees for consulting engineers retained by Contractor with Owner's approval for services in the construction of the Work_ 5.2 The "Cost of the Work" shall exclude the following. 5.2.1 Salaries or other compensation of the Contractor's officers, executives or other supervisory personnel at the Contractor's principal office and branch offices. 5.2.2 1 A1C expenses of Contractor in connection with maintaining and operating its, main _. office and any branch offices of Contractor other than the field office of the Project- 5.2-3 roject 5.2.3 Any part of the Contractor's capital expenses, including interest on the Contractor's capital employed for the Work. 5.2.4 Except as specifically provided elsewhere in this Agreement, rental costs of machinery and equipment PAGE 7 EXHIBIT "A' STIPULATED SUM CONTRACT CIRCUIT CITY STORE AcpmjeaNumbem aPRODECTCITYSTATEa XOMPANYNANI& ,LETTFROFItgTE:gT,, 5.2.5 Profit, overhead or general expenses of any kind, including maul office supervision of all Subcontracted Work, except as may be expressly included elsewhere in this Agreement. 5.2.6 Costs due to the negligence of the Contractor, any subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or for whose acts any of them may be liable, including but not limited to the correction of defective or nonconforming. Work, disposal of materials and equipment wrongly supplied or correcting any damage to Project. 5.2.7 Payments made by Contractor to its employees or personnel on account of merit bonuses. 5.2.8 All salaries, costs and expenses incurred by Contractor in the preparation of estimates, administration of the Work and all other cost data and preparation required by Owner, exclusive of the time involving the Contractors field personnel engaged in the actual field performance of the Work 5.2.9 All costs and expenses of purchasing and expediting purchase- orders, exclusive of the time involving the Contractor's field personnel engaged in the actual field performance of the work. 5.2.10 All costs and expenses of supervision and administration of progress and cost control by executives above and including the level of Project Manager. . 5.2.11 Costs related to general accounting, auditing and billing in any way connected: with the Project, including the payment of labor taxes and insurance for any persons performing such functions. 5.2.12 Supervision of insurance and taxation matters. 5.2.13 Travel expenses of Contractor's officers and executives and travel expenses and relocation costs of Contractor's personnel involved in the Project, except with Owner`s prior written approval. 5.2.14 All expenses paid or incurred for purchase or rental of office equipment, stationery, stamps and office supplies of any kind or nature whatsoever for main and branch offices. 5.2.15 All costs, expenses, losses and damage caused or claimed to be caused to the Project, the property of Owner, the public and adjacent properties, arising from or related to' the acts or omissions of Contractor or any of Contractors subcontractors, or the agents or employees of any of them; costs of removal, repair or replacement of materials, equipment and workmanship which are required to correct any part of the Work resulting from any failure on the part of the officers, employees or other representatives of Contractor charged with the supervision or direction of the Work to exercise good faith and the standard of care normally found in the construction industry. 5.2.16 All costs of any business licenses not specifically required of Contractor for the Project, and all dues, assessments and contributions paid or payable to Contractor's technical or trade associations, including but not limited to AGC fees. STIPULATED SUM CONTRACT P".. I—) CIRCUIT CITY STORE kaProjcaNumbern EXHIBIT aPROJECTCITYSTATEH ,,COMPANYMAMEn ,tLETTEROFINTENTn 5.2.17 All costs of insurance on tools and equipment owned or furnished by Contractor; taxes assessed against property and equipment of Contractor which is not to be incorporated into the Project; taxes on gross income, except gross receipts tax, profit and net income of Contractor, and interest on money borrowed or furnished by Contractor. 5.2.18- Storage costs at yards owned or leased by Contractor, except any yard leased by Contractor on a short-term basis solely for purposes of the Project, with Owner's prior written approval. 52.19 All costs incurred by Contractor in violation of any terms, provision, or agreement set forth in the Contract Documents. 5.2.20 Consultation with Owner and the Architect and any engineers. and other consultants engaged by Owner with respect to the Work, and all time devoted to the development of Drawings and Specifications, plans, budgets, estimates and schedules, as well as all other duties performed by Contractor hereunder, other than services of Contractor's field organization and Project Manager. 52.21 All other costs except those expressly included in Cost of the Work pursuant to Paragraph 5.1 hereof. 5.3 The Contractor may include in the Stipulated "Sum Allowances stated in the Contract Documents and for ower Work not yet sufficiently defined in the "Contract Documents. In the event Allowances are provided for. Contrac!or shall notify Owner of the specific additional Work required and obtain Owner`s prior written approval of such aduitional Work before allocating any such Allowances to such Additional Work. These Allowances shall cover the net cos` of the materials and equipment delivered and unloaded at the Project site, all applicable taxes and all costs required z�,r installation. Contractor's field overhead shall be included in the Stipulated Sum and not in the Allowance. Contracto- shall cause the Work covered by these Allowances to be performed in accordance with Drawings and Specification; developed by the Architect for such amounts and by such persons as the Owner may direct, but Contractor will not be required to employ persons against whom he makes a reasonable objection. If the cost, when determined, is more or less than. the Allowance, the Stipulated Sum shall be adjusted accordingly by Change Order, which may include additional handling costs on the site, labor, installation costs, and other expenses incurred by Contractor from any increase over the original Allowance. 6. Architect 6.1 The Architect is. the person or organization licensed to practice architecture and identified in the Agreement, and shall be deemed to include the Architect's duly authorized representatives, including engiacers on the Architect's staff arid consultants and engineers employed by the Architect 6-2 The Architect shall at all times have access to the Work wherever it is in preparation and .progress. The Contractor shall provide facilities for such access so the Architect may perform his functions under his agreement with the Owner. 6.3 The Architect will review shop drawings, samples and other construction data. /^ STIPULATED SUM CONTRACT PAGE 9 CIRCUIT CITY STORE M;PmjectNumhen, "'pTtl 11PROJECTCITYSTATE» EJCHIBIT'A' -,C0MPANYNA7NEu ,LETTEROFINTENTi. 6.4 Nothing contained in the Contract Documents shall create any contractual relationship between the Architect and the Contractor. The Architect will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of the Contractor, any subcontractors, any of their agents or employees or any other persons performing any of the Work. The Architect will not be responsible for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, nor for safety precautions, including requirements of OSHA or programs in connection with the Work, and he will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 7. Contractees Design Responsibility 7.1 Structural design of all temporary construction, equipment and appliances used in the construction of the Project and not a permanent part thereof, including, but not necessarily limited to, hoisting equipment, cribbing, shoring and the temporary bracing of structnral steel, is the sole responsibility of the Contractor. All such items shall conform with the requirements of governing codes and all rules, regulations and orders of all authorities having jurisdiction. 7.2 Contractor shall not impose loading upon any part of the Project under construction or upon existing construction upon or adjacent to the site of the Project, in excess of safe limits, or loading which will damage the structural, architectural, mechanical, electrical or other components. All damage which occurs as a result of overloading shall be repaired or the damaged Work replaced at Contractor's sole expense, all as directed by the Owner. 7.3 Contractor shall be responsible for locating building(s) in accordance with ' property lines and%.` elevations established in the survey and on the Drawings and for the accuracy of building lines and levels. 7.4 Before commencing Work, Contractor shall verify grades, lines, levels and dimensions indicated and shall report errors or inconsistencies to Architect and Owner. Contractor shall not proceed until errors and inconsistencies are corrected. 7.5 Contractor shall establish control points and bench marks adequate for the use of all trades and for reference indicated tolerances. The Contractor shall remove, re-establish, relocate and maintain control points and bench marks as necessitated by the construction progress and shall maintain such control points and bench marks in an undisturbed condition until final completion and final acceptance by the Owner of the Project 7.6 The Contractor shall establish and maintain building and construction grades, lines, levels and reference lines for use by all trades in laying out, installing and erecting the Project and shall be responsible for accuracy and protection. Work shall be erected square, plumb, level and true to line and grade, in the exact plane and to the correct elevation and/or sloped to drains as indicated or as required to drain. 8. Coordination by Contractor STIPULATED SUM CONTRACT PAGE �. CIRCUIT CITY STORE gcPmicctNumbcni EXHIBIT.A. «PROJECTCITYSTATE,, <COMPANYNANM, -LETTEROFINTENT,i 8.1 Contractor and each subcontractor shall be responsible iur examining all Drawings, all sections of Specifications and all items of addenda and all modifications to inform themselves of requirements for their part of the Work. Architect and Owner assume no responsibility for omission of an indication of an item or part of .-Work from a location on one Drawing which is indicated on any other Drawing. Specifications are divided into sections for convenience of Contractor. Items or parts of Work. specified shall constitute the responsibility of Contractor regardless of where they are located in Specifications. Neither Architect nor Owner will make decisions on trade jurisdiction or responsibilities of subcontractors. 8.2 Contractor shall supervise all measurements taken in the field necessary to insure timely fabrication, delivery, and proper fitting together of the entire Work. 8.3 Contractor shall coordinate Work of all crafts to eliminate interferences, duplication of Work and unfinished gaps between operations. 8.4 Contractor shall regulate and schedule installation and erection of each trade and craft involved in the Work to eliminate delays due to overlap in time of starting Work of various trades and lack of erection or installation of contiguous or.underlying Work upon which installation or erection of Work of any trade is dependent. 8.5 Contractor shall advise subcontractors and trades as to features of construction required in their Work to receive, engage and support parts of other Work; and of easements and tolerances required. It is Contractor's responsibility to ensure that each subcontractor leaves his' Work in proper condition to receive subsequent application of Work of other trades. 8.6 Contractor shall see that provision for the placement of all Work by applicable .trade or subcontractor is accomplished on schedule. 8.7 Contractor shall see thataPP licable trades and subcontractors furnish and receive all Drawings, Specifications, addenda, Change Orders, shop drawings, samples, templates and other information required for the Work as a whole. 8.8 Contractor shall see that all sleeves, inserts, boxes, piping, conduit, blocking, anchor bolts, and other required items are built into the Work at proper times in the required manner. 8.9 Contractor shall prepare and protect the Work as required for introduction into the Project of materials, fabrications, furniture and equipment furnished by Owner and not a part of this Project. Contractor shall render assistance as required to facilitate installation of items. 8.10 Contract shall also advise all trades and subcontractors, and they shall agree, that due to field conditions, minor departures from Drawings and Specifications will occur and Work involved in departures shall be .._. performed without additional compensation. No claims for extras will be allowed in connection with minor changes due solely to field conditions. 8.11 Before starting Work, Contractor shall examine the Work of each subcontractor and of other separate contractors that could affect Work under his charge, and Contractor shall report in writing any conditions deviating from the indications on the Drawings and requirements of the Specifications, including faulty or improper Work or other conditions arising from the work of others or the doing of it, whereby the Work may be impaired. STIPULATED SUM CONTRACT PAGE I I CIRCUrT CITY STORE fk<PmjeaNetmbcm EXHIBIT "A' aPROJECTCITYSTATEa aCOMPANYNAME. oLETTEROEINTENT» Contractor shall assure himself that all conditions are such as will allow proper execution of the Work, and the fulfillment of warranty requirements.. 8.12 The act of starting any specific operation will be deemed evidence of acceptance of related existing conditions as satisfactory for such Work and the required or indicated results that shall be produced. The requirements of this and the preceding paragraph shall apply to the Work of each subcontractor. 8.13 The Contractor shall keep one copy of all Architect's and other consultants' Drawings, Specifications and addenda and one complete file of approved shop drawings at the Project site at all times, in good order, available to the Owner and Architect. This set of Drawings and documents shall be maintained fully conformed, coordinated and current at all times. 9. Temporary Construction Facilities 9.1 Contractor shall provide and maintain hoists, bunkers, scaffolds and other temporary construction facilities (including the dual -gate system), excepting only such as are specifically required to be provided by others. Temporary hoists, bunkers and other temporary construction facilities (including the dual -gate system) shall be located in or about the Project in such a position as is practicable and where it will not interfere with the progress of the Work. 9.2 Contractor shall protect the construction site and surrounding public areas in compliance with the requirements of applicable codes and regulations of public agencies having jurisdiction. The obtaining and paying for all required permits and inspections in connection therewith shall be the responsibility of the Contracto• Where so required Contractor shall provide and maintain in working order at all times warning lights and pay a►. costs in connection therewith. 9.3 Upon completion of the Project, or prior thereto when so authorized or required to maintain job progress, protective fence and canopy and related construction shall be removed by the Contractor and the space occupied thereby restored to its original condition as approved by authorities having jurisdiction. . 9.4 Contractor shall provide and maintain, in compliance with local custom and applicable codes and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction, complete temporary toilet facilities. 9.5 . Upon completion of the Project, or prior thereto when so authorized, temporary toilet facilities shall be disconnected and all equipment and temporary construction connected therewith removed from the site. 9.6 Contractor shall arrange for connections and pay for water and electric service for power and light; including temporary connections used by subcontractors during the progress of the Work and until final acceptance- Should Contractor fail to scttle claims for water, electric power or other material used in the Work, the Owner may reserve from the monies due or to become due to the Contractor a sum sufficient to satisfy such claims; and should any such claim remain unsettled for thirty (30) days after notice thereof has been given the Contractor, the Owner may settle such claim or claims out of the monies reserved and the amount expended for such purposes shall be deducted from monies due or to become due to the Contractor. STIPULATED SUM CONTRACT PAGE CIRCUIT CITY STORE (k i'micaNumha), EXHIBIT "A" aPROJECTCITYSTATE1. aCOMPANYNAME,, «LETTEROFINTENTu 9.7 In the event of partial occupancy by the Owner or a tenant with Owner's written permission prior to final acceptance, the payment of charges for water, electricity and fuel for the portion of the Project occupied shall be the responsibility of the Owner or the tenant involved and the account name for the applicable utility service shall be changed accordingly to reflect the responsible party. 9.8 The Contractor shall provide two (2) independent telephones in the construction trailer and a telephone answering machine. One telephone shall be a cordless telephone with a minimum range of 700 & The superintendent shall carry dtds telephone with him when he is on the job site away from the trailer. The Contractor shall subscribe to the optional features of "call waiting" and "call hold" for both construction telephones. 9.9 Signs furnished by the Owner shall be erected on the site as and where required by the Owner. Contractor shall not place or allow to be placed any signs, billboards or posters on any portion of the site or the Project, except upon written permission from the Owner and then only of a size, material, color and type and at a location approved by the Owner. 9.10 Elevators may be used during the course of construction by Contractor once the elevators are declared operable by the elevator subcontractor, provided that the Contractor shall adequately protect all parts of the equipment, machinery, controls and cabs from damage or harm of any nature; and elevators shall be available to all other separate contractors and subcontractors as may be required by the Owner. 10. Use of Site and Premises 10.1 The working area outside of the building lines for use of storage of materials, for equipment operations and for temporary buildings is the area bounded by the limiting streets and property lines, unless otherwise restricted by the Drawings or Specifications. Such other space, including public sidewalks and roadways as may be permitted for temporary use by the applicable building codes or public authorities at the place of construction, may be used and the cost, if any, shall be borne solely by Contractor. Disturbed public areas shall be put back into their original state at completion of use, as approved and accepted by public authorities having jurisdiction. 10.2 - Contractor shallconfine operations at the site to areas permitted by law, ordinances, permits and the Contract Documents and shall not encumber the site with any extraneous materials or equipment. 10.3 The site shall not be encumbered by the storage of materials for extended periods prior to the time when installation of such materials will be --required. No trenches -required for utility systems and like operations shall be excavated until material required therefor is ready for installation and completion of such Work in the shortest time possible. 10.4 Contractor shall afford opportunity and facilities for the introduction and storage of material on the site and in the structure by subcontractors. Workmen, subcontractors or other representatives shall be admitted to the site only for the proper execution of the Work and shall have no tenancy. STIPULATED SUM CONTRACT CIRCUIT CITY STORE KtaProjxtNumbetn kPROJECTCITYSTATEu aCOMPANYNAMEu aLETTEROFrNTENTu PAGEIJ EXHIBIT "A- 10.5 Contractor shall send notices, make all necessary arrangements and perform all services for protection and maintenance of all public utilities during the construction period and until final acceptance of Project by Owner. 10.6 Contractor, at its sole cost and expense, shall. obtain and pay for permits and inspections required to use public streets, sidewalks, curbs and paving, including cutting openings therein and shall post guarantees and bonds required and be responsible for repair and correction of damage as required by authorities having jurisdiction. 10.7 Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all laws, ordinances, rules and regulations and valid orders of any public authority bearing on the performance of the Work. If Contractor observes that any of the Contract Documents are at variance therewith in any respect, he shall promptly notify the Owner and Architect in writing, and any necessary changes shall be adjusted by appropriate modification. If the Contractor performs any Work, knowing it to be contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, and without such notice to the Owner and Architect, he shall assume full responsibility therefor and shall bear all costs attributable thereto. 10.8 Until acceptance of the Project, or partial or full occupancy by Owner, Contractor, at its sole cost and expense, shall be the building manager and shall be responsible for providing and maintaining temporary doors for security, for locking and unlocking entrances, for protection of all parts from damage or from wetting by rains or flood water, for provision of safety and enforcement of safety regulations, for preventing unauthorized persons from entering the property, for general orderliness, for care of the adjacent properties and public ways abutting the property of Owner and for any temporary assignment of space within the site or premises. 11. Subcontractors A subcontractor is a person or organization who has a. direct contract with the Contractor to perform any of the Work on the Project A sub -subcontractor is a person or organization who has a direct or indirect contract with a subcontractor to perform any of the Work on the Project. Where the context so requires or suggests, the term "subcontractor" shall also be deemed to refer to sub -subcontractors. • The terms subcontractor and sub- subcu�:'*actor are referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and masculine in gender, and mean a subz�ontractor or sub -subcontractor, as the case may be, and its respective authorized representatives. 12. Submittals to Owner 12.1 Contractor shall submit the following schedules to the Owner for approval no later than ten (10) days after Owner`s request for each item. Contractor shall update each schedule listed below at the end of each month, if necessary to ensure accuracy. 12.1.1 12.1.2 basis. Contemplated progress schedule by trade. Contemplated payment schedule - indicate contemplated costs on a monthly STIPULATED SUM CONTRACT PAGE la CIRCUIT CITY STORE FtPmjectNumbcn, EXMBrr -A" (,PROJECTCITYSTATE)) aCOMPANYNAM E. aLETTEROFINTENT» 0), 12.1.3 Shop drawing and materials sample schedule - list all required shop drawings and samples for each part of the Work with reference to applicable technical section numbers. Include submission and required return dates. 12.1.4 Guarantees, warranties and bond schedule - list all required guarantees, warranties and bonds, other than warranties and guarantees required by these Contract Documents, including the Contractor's 1 -year obligation to restore defects. 12.2 . Contractor shall submit schedules for the review and approval of the Owner. If changes affecting the schedules are made in the Project by the Owner as the Work progresses, Contractor shall notify the Owner of the effect within five (5) days of receipt of written authorization. to proceed with changes. 12.3 The progress schedule shall be revised from time to time as may be required to reflect changes in job progress or authorized extensions of construction time. 13. Shop Drawings 13.1 Shop drawings and/or plates and brochures, as required, shall be prepared by Contractor and submitted for approval well in advance of the time information will be required in order that the Work will not be delayed; provided, however, in no event shall any shop drawings be submitted more than forty-five (45) days after the notice to proceed. No Work indicated on any one shop drawing shall be started until such drawing has been approved 13.2 One ozalid transparency and two blueline prints of each drawing shall be submitted to the Architect for his checking. Required corrections will be noted on the transparency and the transparency returned to the Contractor, who shall make the necessary revisions and resubmit the revised transparency for final approvaL The transparency, after the required corrections have been checked, or if correct when initially submitted and requiring no revisions, will be stamped and returned to the Contractor, who shall then make distribution to all parties concerned, including one copy for the Architect and, unless otherwise provided, one copy for the Owner. 13.3 Unless otherwise provided in the various trade sections of the Specifications, shop ,drawings requiring the interrelation of Work within a trade and shop drawings which require coordination and checking with shop drawings of another trade shall be submitted together to facilitate proper checking and coordination. In the event such coordinated submission is not made, the Contractor may be notified and checking of the shop drawings submitted will be delayed by the Architect until the remainder of the related shop drawings are submitted. Any delay in the Work resulting from Contractor's failure to comply with this requirement shall be the responsibility of Contractor and no extension of completion time will be allowed to compensate for delay in checking and return of the affected shop drawings. 13.4 So far as practicable and in order to facilitate the approval of shop drawings and their prompt return,- each shop drawing shall bear a cross reference note referring to the detail number, sheet number or STIPULATED SUM CONTRACT CIRCUIT CITY STORE MIPmieccNumben. PAGE 15 eP0JECTCrrYSTATE.. EXHIBIT 'A" 4COMPANYNAMEn ,LF-TTEROFINTENT,, numbers of the Drawings showing the same Work and the Specification section covering the Work shown on the shop drawing. 13.5 Shop drawings shall indicate accurately the job conditions and dimensions and to conform to indications on the Drawings, the requirements of the Specifications and applicable supplementary details and instructions. They shall indicate the complete methods of connection, jointing, support, anchorage, reinforcement and other features of construction, together with necessary easements and clearances in the work of others, and relation of Work so detailed to finished surfaces of abutting Work. Materials and finishes of Work so detailed shall be indicated thereon. 13.5 The Architect's checking of shop drawings shall apply in a general sense only and will not relieve Contractor from the responsibility for proper. fitting and construction of Work, nor from furnishing material and Work required by the Drawings, Specifications and related documents, which may not be indicated, or which may be indicated differently, on the approved shop drawings. 13.7 Shop drawings and schedules of all trades shall be submitted only by Contractor, who shall indicate by a signed stamp on the drawings that he has checked the shop drawings and that the Work shown on them is in accordance with the Contract Documents and has been checked for dimensions and relationship with work of all other trades involved. Under no conditions should shop drawings be submitted to the Architect by anyone other than the Contractor. 13.8 The checking of shop drawings and/or schedules by the Architect shall not relieve Contractor of responsibility for deviations or omissions from Drawings or the Specifications, unless he has in writing called the Architect's attention to such deviations and/or omissions at the time of submission of shop drawings, nor shall it relieve him of the responsibility for errors or omissions of any kind in she drawings or schedules, unless such deviations, changes or omissions are duly approved as such and noted b', . specific approval on the drawings. When Contractor does call such deviations or omissions to the attention of the Architect, be shall state in his letter whether such deviations, changes or omissions involve any extra cost. If this is not mentioned, it will be assumed that no extra cost is involved for making the change, deviation or omission. Letters fully describing any deviations, changes or omissions, together with the reasons therefor, shall be submitted by Contractor to the Architect, with copy to the Owner, together with the affected drawings. 13.9 Any changes, deviations or omissions which affect the scope of the Work, appearance, or time or price shall be considered a Change Order and shall be subject to approval by Owner in the manner provided for other Change Orders. 13.10 Shop drawings which involve changes in the design concept of the Project, the basic methods of assembly or reduce the quality of the Work may be returned to Contractor without checking unless valid reason for the change is established at the time of submission. 13.11 No portion of the Work requiring a shop drawing, product data or sample submission shall be commenced until the submission has been approved by Architect. All such portions of the Work shall be performed in accordance with approved shop drawings, product data and samples. All changes made by Architect or Contractor or directions issued by Architect in connection with preparation of shop drawings, product data and samples which involve a change in cost or in time of performance hereunder shall be made and implemented in. accordance with the procedures specified for Change Orders. STIPULATED SUM CONTRACT PAGE CIRCUIT CITY STORE 1WPmjccLNumbcrn .:EXHIBIT 'A' ..PROJECTCITYSTATE), aCOMPANY'NAMEN (tLETTEROFINTENT), 0 14. samples 14.1 Contractor shall prepare and submit for Architect's approval all samples as required by the various trade sections of the Specifications and samples of other materials as may subsequently be requested. Unless specified otherwise, samples shall be submitted in duplicate. 14.2 Samples shall be submitted in sufficient time to allow the Architect reasonable time for consideration and so as not to delay progress of the Work in the event re -submission should be required. " 14.3 Each sample shall be labeled with the following information and shall have a blank space large enough for the approval stamp: 14.3.1 • Project name and location. 14.3.2 Name of Contractor. 14.3.3 Name of subcontractor and manufacturer. 14.3.4 Name, finish and composition of the material. 143.5 Location and/or intended use of the material, 14.3.6 Reference to Specification section and Drawing sheet number. { 14.4 Upon approval, the samples will, be stamped or labeled to indicate approval and one of the samples returned to Contractor. The approved sample retained by the Architect will constitute the standard of quality and appearance of all materials of the type represented by the samples to be installed. In the event samples are not approved, Contractor will be given the reasons for disapproval and shall re -submit samples until approval is obtained. 14.5 At the option of Owner- or Architect, samples will be subject to testing, and in such event such additional samples as may be required, shall be supplied by Contractor at no additional cost 15. Record Drawings and Maintenance Instructions 15.1 Contractor shall furnish Owner a complete set of reproducible transparency record drawings for the Work of each trade section where so required by the technical section. Record drawings shall be prepared and submitted to Contractor by each of the subcontractors as required in compliance with the following Paragraphs. 15.2 Each subcontractor shall provide and keep current a complete "as -built" record set of blueline prints, which shall be corrected daily and shall show every change from the original Drawings and Specifications, STIPULATED SUM CONTRACT PAGE 17 CIRCUIT CITY STORE kPcojectNumben, EXHIBIT -A" uPROJECTCITYSTATEn XOMPANYNAME)) uLETTEROFINTENT�� and shall show the exact "as -built" locations, sizes and kinds of equipment. Prints for this purpose may be obtained 16k), from the Architect at cost. This set of drawings shall be kept on the job site and shall be used only as a record set. The foregoing shall not be construed as authorization to Contractor to'make changes in the layout without definite authorization in each case. 15.3 At the completion of the Project, Contractor shall deliver to the Architect five (5) copies (or such number is otherwise specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents) of manufacturer's manuals providing for Owner's guidance full details of the suggested care and maintenance of all visible surfaces and equipment included in this Project. 15.4 Contractor shall furnish all literature of each manufacturer relating to equipment, including motors or other manufactured equipment. He shall also submit cuts, wiring diagrams, instruction sheets and all other information pertaining to same that would be useful to Owner in the operation and maintenance -of same, to the extent that this information is reasonably available from manufacturers and/or is not shown on the as built drawings. 16. Materials and Equipment 16.1 Contractor warrants to Owner and Architect that all materials and equipment furnished under the Contract Documents will be new and the best of their respective kinds, unless otherwise specified, and that all Work will be of good quality, free from faults and defects and in conformance with the Contract Documents. All Work not so conforming to these standards may be considered defective. If required by Owner, Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment. The warranty provided in thi Article shall be in addition to and not in limitation of any other warranty or remedy required by law or by th, �) Contract Documents. 16.2 Especially manufactured or fabricated Work made to detail and delivered to the site with the intention of forming a part of the permanent structure, when accepted, shall be considered as the property of Owner, and the value thereof, upon acceptable substantiation, may be included in the periodic requests for payment. Form lumber and bulk building materials, including brick, aggregate and cement, shall be considered as the property of Contractor until actually incorporated into the Work, and the value thereof shall not be included in the periodic requests for payment 16.3 Insofar as is practicable, material of one manufacture for each specific purpose shall be used throughout the Project, except where otherwise required, and where the nature of such allows, shall be delivered to the site in original and unbroken cases, cartons or containers with the name or brand of the manufacturer plainly marked thereon_ 16.4 Owner reserves the right to purchase material or supplies directly and furnish then= to Contractor for installation in compliance with the Contract Documents. 16.5 Construction materials which do not become a permanent part of the construction and which have previously been used in the Work and are proposed to be re -used, shall be sorted as to class, size and kind and piled and stored in an orderly manner and kept readily accessible. Such materials may be re -used in the Work, STIPULATED SUM CONTRACT PAGEEXHIBIT "A" CIRCUIT CITY STORE IkzProjectNum6ero j "PROIECTCITYSTATE), <,COMPANYNAME" "LETTEROFINTENTu tvC4r3r� `:I provided they are structurally sound, clean, entirely suitable and approved for the intended use by Owner. Re -used form lumber for exposed concrete surfaces shall be of such quality so as to produce concrete surfaces q ty p of the same appearance and quality as the surfaces produced by the initial use of the forms. 16.6 Where installation of Work is required to lie performed in accordance with the product manufacturer's instructions, Contractor shall, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, procure and distribute the necessary copies• of such instructions. Manufacturer's instructions shall be subject to approval and/or modification by the Architect. . Unless otherwise required, Contractor shall obtain and deliver to the Architect two copies of such instructions at least two weeks prior to start of the Work involved. 17. Substitution of Material 17.1 Where materials, equipment or process are specified in a Specification by patent, proprietary name or name of the manufacturer, such Specification shall, unless otherwise specified or restricted, be deemed to be used for the purpose of establishing a standard for that particular item and shall be deemed to be followed by the words "or other as approved by the Architect." Any bidder, manufacturer or distributor may offer for approval any material, item of equipment or process which he considers to be equal in every respect to that indicated or specified- 17.2 pecified 17.2 Requests for approval of materials, equipment or processes not named in the Specifications shalt be submitted in writing as a part of the submission of proposals. Requests for approval shall be accompanied by such supplemental technical information and/or samples, where required, as may be necessary for evaluation of the product. 17.3 If, in the opinion of the Architect, the suggested substitution is equal to the material, equipment or process originally specified, or otherwise fulfills the requirements of the Project, the approval will be confirmed in writing to Owner and Contractor. Approval of proposed substitutions shall not .be deemed to have relieved Contractor of responsibility for the proper execution of the Work nor from warranty and maintenance requirements imposed by the Contract Documents. 17.4 Where no substitutions are proposed or approved in conformity with the provisions of this Article, then no deviation from the materials, equipment or process specified will be allowed, excepting only the following cases and provided in each such case the substitution has been approved by the Architect: 17.4.1 The manufacture or production of the specified material, process or equipment has been discontinued. 17.4.2 The specified material, process or equipment is not available in sufficient quantity or quantities to complete the Work Failure of Contractor to award subcontracts in sufficient time, or failure of Contractor or the subcontractor involved to place orders for materials so as to insure delivery without delaying the Work, will not constitute cause for approval of substitute materials. °` STIPULATED SUM CONTRACT PAGEi R� CIRCUIT CITY STORE cPrajettNumbcn' EXHIBIT "A" �tPROJECTCITYSTATE. nCOMPANYNAMEn ,,LETTEROFINTENTu 17.4.3 Delays beyond the control of Contractor, such as strikes, lock -outs, storms, fires or acts of God, which preclude the procurement and delivery of materials'or equipment for purposes of the Project, and for such other reasons as the Architect may deem to justify the substitution. 18. Workers and Workmanship 18.1 Contractor and its subcontractors shall at all times enforce strict discipline and good order among their employees, and shall not employ on the Work any unfit person or anyone not.sHled in the task assigned to him. 18.2 Contractor shall not employ any labor on its own payroll nor allow any subcontractor to employ any labor which may cause dissension with other workers on the premises. 18.3 The workmanship of apprentices and helpers shall not be allowed where that of journeymen and master mechanics is necessary to obtain the required standard of workmanship. Workmen employed shall be competent and skilled in the performance of their particular Workand shall be employed under the prevailing local working conditions and in the status customary in projects of the size and type involved. Workmen or supervisory personnel deemed incompetent or improperly employed, or whose Work on this Project could result in a work stoppage or unacceptable results, then or at any subsequent time during the Project, shall be dismissed forthwith and shall not be re-employed on the Project. The fact that journeymen or master mechanics were employed in the execution of sub -standard Work shall have no effect upon the acceptance or rejection of such Work. 18.4 In the hiring of employees for the performance of Work by Contractor or any subcontractor, neither Contractor nor any subcontractor shall by reason of race, religion or color discriminate against any citizen who is qualified and available to perform the Work to which the employment relates, nor shall Contractor or any subcontractor discriminate in any manner against or intimidate any employee on account of race, religion or color. 18.5 Workmanship shall be the best of its respective kind for each of the various trades and shall be executed in accordance with the Contract Documents and under direct supervision of competent representatives of Contractor and the various subcontractors, and of the manufacturer where so required. 19. Warranty 19.1 Contractor warrants to Owner and Architect that the Work will be free from defects not inherent in the quality required or permitted and that the Work will conform with the requirements of the Contract Documents.. Work not conforming to these requirements, including substitutions not properly approved or authorized, may be considered defective. Contractor's warranty excludes remedy for damage or defect caused by abuse, modifications not executed by Contractor, improper or insufficient maintenance, improper operation or normal wear and tear under normal usage. 19.2 Contractor's Guarantee, set forth in the Agreement, shall be for a period of one (1) year from the earlier of (i) the Date of Substantial Completion or (ii) the date on which the completed Work is accepted by the STIPULATED SUM CONTRACT PAGE 20 CIRCUIT Cr'rX STORE /kcPmjectNumben� EXHIBIT 'A" (tPRO1ECTCrrYSTATE)> (tCOMPANYNAMEn 1,LETTEROFINTENT), �J Owner, except where otherwise 'required by the Contract Documents, and is in addition to other warranties required under the Contract Documents, which may be for a period of more or less than one year. - 19.3 The Contractor's warranties (including Contractor's Guarantee) shall cover all Work in the Contract Documents, whether or riot any portion or trade has been assigned or sublet. In the event any portion of the Work is performed by assignees or subcontractors, their written warranty to Owner covering their respective portions of the Work for the periods required shall be collected by Contractor, who shall deliver them, together with his own warranty, to Owner. Assignees' and subcontractors' warranties shall expressly provide that the same may be enforced directly by Owner, if he so elects, and shall run concurrently with the Contractor's warranties. All such warranties shall be secured by the Contractor's performance bond when such bond is required. No warranties by subcontractors shall in any way relieve Contractor of his warranty obligations or obligate Owner to proceed under any subcontractor warranty in lieu of or before proceeding against Contractor's warranties. 19.4 Where any material, process or method of operation or application procedure is required which, in the opinion of Contractor, would render the finished Work unsuitable for the required warranty, then before any Work is started, such matter shall be objected to in writing to the Architect and to Owner stating reasons therefor and recommending a substitute so.that the Work, when completed, will be suitable for the required warranty. In the event the Contractor's recommendation is approved,, the Work shall be installed in accordance therewith and at no change in the Contract Document price unless otherwise authorized. 19.5 Defective materials, equipment and workmanship occurring within any warranty period may be repaired where such repair produces results in conformity to Contract Documents requirements reletting to appearance, performance and reliability. Where the nature of the defective materials, equipment and workmanship is such that acceptable results cannot be obtained by repair, such defective items shall be removed and replaced with new materials, equipment and workmanship complying with Contract Documents. All remedial Work shall be subject to Owner's approval. ' 20. inspection of Work and Testing of Materials 20.1 Except as may be modified in the various technical sections of the Specifications, the procedures for inspection of Work and testing of materials under this Article shall apply. 20.2 Materials and products to be incorporated in the Project shall, at Owner's decision, be subject to inspection and testing, both at the site and in the shops or plants of manufacture. Contractor shall give timely notice of the readiness of any Work, products or materials that are required by the Contract Documents or by public authority having jurisdiction to be inspected, tested or approved-. 20.3 , Access to the Work wherever it is in preparation or progress shall be permitted at all times and Contractor shall provide safe and proper facilities for such access and inspection. 20.4 Work required to be inspected shall be left exposed until inspected. and approved. Should such Work be covered without approval, when directed by Owner it shall be uncovered for examination and recovered after approval at no additional cost to Owner. Re-examination of questionable concealed Work may be ordered by Owner and/or governmental inspection authorities having jurisdiction. \ PAGE 21 EXHia1T'A" ' ,,,,, ,STIPULATED SUM CONTRACT CIRCUIT CITY STORE McProjcctNumbcn) " (,PROJECTCITYSTATE., :COMPANYNAMEn a LETTEROFINTENTii 20.5 If Owner determines that any Work requires special inspection, testing or approval which the: preceding paragraphs do not include, he will instruct Contractor to order such special inspection, test or approval and Contractor shall give notice as noted in preceding paragraphs. If such special inspection or testing reveals a failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents or with laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of any public authority having jurisdiction, Contractor shall bear all costs thereof, including the Architect's additional services made necessary by such failure and the cost of such testing or inspection; otherwise Owner shall bear such costs and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued. 20.6 Required inspections and tests and the reports shall be made by a qualified testing engineer or laboratory selected or approved by Owner. Certified copies of test reports shall be furnished as follows: 20.6.1 One copy to Owner. 20.6.2 Two copies- to Architect. 20.6.3 One copy to consulting engineer.. 20.6.4 One copy to Contractor. 20.6.5 One copy to the building department under whose jurisdiction the Project is constructed. 20.6.6 . One copy to the supplier of the material tested. 20.7 If Owner or Architect wishes to observe the inspections, tests or approvals required by th Article, he will do so romptly and, where applicable, at the source of supply.00) 20.8 Neither tiiz observations of the Architect nor inspections, tests or approvals by persons other than Contractor, shall relieve Con4?ctor from his obligations to perform the Work in accordancd with the Contract Documents. 20.9 Preliminary inspection and arproval of materials during the process of manufacture or at the time of delivery and intermediate inspection and approval of installed Work before covering shall be subject to the Contract Documents relating to final inspection and acceptance of the Work as a whole and to the provisions of the Contractor's warranty. 20.10 Except as otherwise provided herein, the cost of testing and inspection shall be paid by Owner. 21. Correction of Work 21.1 Contractor shall promptly remove from the premises all Work determined by Owner prior to completion to fail to conform to the Contract Documents, whether or not incorporated into the improvements under construction, and Contractor shall promptly replace and re -execute or cause to be replaced and re -executed all STIPULATED SUM CONTRACT PAGE 22 CIRcurr CITY STORE CaPmjcctNurnbcm EXHIBIT "A" uPROJECfCITYSTATEn ,-COMPANYNAMEn aLETTEROFINTENTi, such Work. Contractor shall not be entitled to reimbursement for the cost of such removal, replacement and re- Apexecution. 21.2 if Contractor does not remove such non -conforming Work within a reasonable time, fixed by written notice from Owner, Owner may remove it and store the material at the expense of Contractor. If Contractor does not promptly pay the expenses of such removal and storage, Owner may at its election, deduct such expenses from any payment due Contractor hereunder or bring such action as Owner may deem appropriate for the recovery of such expenses. 21.3 If Contractor does not replace and re -execute such non -conforming Work or cause it to be replaced and re -executed within a reasonable time, fixed by written notice from Owner, Owner may, without prejudice to any other remedy it may have, cause such Work to be replaced and re -executed at the expense of Contractor. If Contractor does not promptly pay the expense of such replacement and re-execution, Owner may at its election deduct such expenses from any payment due Contractor hereunder of bring such action as Owner may deem appropriate for the recovery of such expenses. 21.4 Contractor shall not stop the Work or any portion thereunder except as directly affected by removal of such condemned Work. 21.5 If any Work is covered contrary to the request of the Architect or Owner, it must, if required by Owner, be uncovered for his observation and replaced at Contractor's expense_ If any other Work has been covered which the Architect or Owner has not specifically requested to observe prior to being covered, Owner may request to see such Work and it shall be uncovered by Contractor. If such Work be found in accordance with the Contract Documents, the cost of uncovering and replacement shall, by appropriate Change Order, be charged to Owner. if such Work be found to be not in accordance with the Contract Documents, Contractor s shall pay such costs. 21.6 Neither the issuance of the Certificate of Final Completion nor payment of the final payment shall relieve Contractor of responsibility for faulty or defective materials and workmanship, and. he shall remedy all defects due thereto and pay for damage which may appear within any warranty period to other Work resulting therefrom, all in a satisfactory and acceptable manner. Owner shall give notice of observed defects with reasonable promptness_ 21.7 In addition to corrections required because of faulty or defective Work, the related requirements of these General Conditions are extended to include maintenance of a continuing service character, where required under various technical sections of the Specifications. 22. Cutting and Patching 22.1",All trades shall perform and time their Work so as not to require unnecessary cutting. All Work shall be performed in accordance with information obtained from Drawings and Specifications, detail drawings or instructions from the various trades so as to avoid where possible, the necessity of cutting. Contractor or its subcontractors shall not endanger any Work by cutting, excavating or otherwise altering the Work and shall not cut or alter the Work of any other contractor without the consent of Owner. PAGE 23 EXHISrr "A- STIPULATED SUM CONTRACT CIRCUrr CITY STORE IMProjectNumbem tPROJECTCITYSTATED aCOMPANYNAME), aLETTEROFINTENT), 22.2 All trades shall promptly install conduits, outlets, piping sleeves, boxes, inserts, anchors and other equipment into walls, floors and other construction to meet requirements of construction progress of all other trades. All subcontractors and trades shall cooperate freely under the coordinating direction of Contractor to the end that all parts of the Work may proceed ' advantageously and in complete harmony. If there is a need for cutting, then it and the resulting corrective patching shall be done at the expense of the trade requiring it. Any cost caused by defective or ill-timed Work shall be bome by the party responsible therefor, and not by Owner in any event. No indiscriminate cutting or patching shall be performed until Owner has been consulted for proper directions. Careless or avoidable cutting will not be tolerated. 22.3 Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting or patching of its Work that may be required to make its several parts fit together properly. in all cases, care shall be exercised in cutting operations. Contractor shall perform operations under supervision of competent mechanics skilled in applicable trades and shall cut openings as small as possible to avoid damage. 22.4 Wherever cutting, removal or alteration of existing Work is necessary to form connections with new Work, or otherwise meet the requirements of the Contract Documents, such Work shall be performed as necessary to avoid damaging the Work that is to remain in place, and patching and repairs shall be made in workmanlike manner, using materials, construction, details and finishes matching the existing Work. 23_ Clean -Up 23.1 Contractor at all times shall keep the premises free from accumulation of waste materials or . rubbish caused by his or his subcontractors' operations. Materials to be used shall be kept in an orderly manner, 10) neatly stacked or piled. 23.2 Upon completion of the Work of any subcontractor, such subcontractor shall remove his surplus materials and debris from job site. At the completion of all the Work, Contractor shall remove all waste materials and rubbish from and about the Project, as well as all tools, construction equipment, machinery and surplus materials, and shall clean all glass surfaces and leave the Work "broom -clean" or its equivalent, except as otherwise specified. Subject to exceptions specified, Contractor and all subcontractors shall use materials and methods for cleaning and polishing as recommended by the applicable manufacturers. Soaps and cleaners shall be of types not injurious to surfaces on which they are used. Use of acids is prohibited except as specified. 23.3 All Work shall be left clean and free of dirt, spatterings of paint, plaster, concrete, mortar, fingerprints and foreign matter. Contractor shall leave the building and premises clean and orderly, ready for the occupancy for which it is intended, and in accordance with, but not limited to, the following, in addition to "broom - cleaning'." 233.1 Remove all stains from glass; wash and polish same inside and out. Do not . scratch glass or glazing compound. 23.3.2 Clean fixtures and equipment, floors, wall and ceiling surfaces., doors and other surfaces exposed to view. STIPULATED SUM CONTRACT PAGE 24 •) CIRCUIT CITY STORE fkPrvjectNumben) EXHIBIT 'A" ,tPROIECTCITYSTATEn .COMPANYNAME" «LETTEROFINTENT» 31 23.3.3 24. Protection of the Work I• ; f Y' A to . i Clean and polish metal surfaces, including doors and hardware. 24.1 Protection of Work shall be continuously maintained by Contractor in such suitable form as will protect the Work as a whole and in part, and adjacent property and improvements from accidents, injury or damages. Contractor shall properly protect the Work with lights, guard rails, temporary covers and barriFades; provide excavations with proper enclosures; brace and secure all parts of the Work against storm and accident and provide such additional forms of protection as may be necessary in the prevailing circumstances. 24.2 Should construction, materials or equipment become damaged, destroyed or stolen through negligence on the part of Contractor or any subcontractor or the agents or employees of any of them while the Work remains under Contractor's jurisdiction, Contractor shall repair or replace same to the satisfaction of Owner, without cost to Owner. 24.3 Contractor and all subcontractors shall provide protection for their own materials, tools and equipment employed in the Work -including the tools .of workmen. Except where otherwise expressly stipulated, Owner shall not be held to have incurred any liability :for loss of or damage to materials, tools and equipment of Contractor or of those persons employed by him, by subcontractors or otherwise. 24.4 Contractor shall be solely responsible for the safety and condition of his .and the various subcontractors' materials and implements stored in or about the building and the site. Should it become necessary during the Project to remove. such materials and implements to facilitate and maintain scheduled progress of the Work, Contractor shall remove materials and implements to some new location and such moving shall be done without additional charge. Should Contractor fail, refuse or neglect to commence the Work of removal of materials and implements within two (2) days after notifications or to prosecute the. Work of removal with due diligence, Owner may cause the materials or implements to be moved and the cost thereof shall be deducted and paid by Owner out of monies which may be due or may become due to Contractor_ 24.5 Contractor shall be responsible for the patching and replacing of all damaged Work. Patching and replacing of damaged Work shall be done in accordance with the Contract Documents, and the cost shall be an obligation of Contractor_ At completion of the Project, damage to the Project shall be satisfactorily repaired or replaced by Contractor at its sole cost and expense_ 24.6 Rain, surface or subsurface water and other fluid shall not be allowed to accumulate in excavations or under or about the structures. Should such conditions develop or be eticountered, the water shall be kept constantly controlled and legally disposed of by temporary pumps, piping, ditches, dams or other methods. 24.7 Carts, hand trucks, wheelbarrows and similar wheeled conveyances used on or in any portion of the structure shall be equipped with pneumatic tires, except where otherwise expressly authorized. PAGE 25 EXHIBIT 'A' STIPULATED SUV( CONTRACT CIRCUIT CITY STORE kuPmjccWumbrno UPROJECTCITYSTATE�, aCOVIPANYNAMEu ,LETTEROFINTENT)k PAGE 25 EXHIBIT 'A' 25. Protection of Persons and Property 25.1 Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. Contractor shall designate a responsible member of his organization at the site whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents. This person shall be the Contractor's superintendent unless otherwise designated in writing by Contractor to Owner. 25.2 Contractor shall comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful orders of any public authority including OSHA, having jurisdiction for the safety of persons ,or property or to protect them from damage, injury or loss. Contractor shall erect and maintain, as required by existing conditions and progress of the Work, all reasonable safeguards for safety and protection, including posting danger signs and other warnings against hazards, promulgating safety regulations and notifying owners and users of adjacent properties. 253 Such protective measures as may be required to adequately protect the public from hazards of construction work and to exclude unauthorized persons from the Work shall be provided and maintained by Contractor. When regulated by local building code or other authority, such requirements for protection shall be considered as minimum requirements and Contractor shall be responsible for such protection in excess of minimum requirements as may be required hereby. 25.3.1 Contractor shall take all reasonable precautions for the safety of, and shall provide all: reasonable protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: 25.3.2 All workmen and other employees of Contractor and subcontractors on the Project and all visitors and other persons. who may be affected thereby; 25.3.3 All the Work and all rdaterials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site, as long as it is under the care, custody or control of Contractor or any subcontractors or sub -subcontractors; and 25.3.4 Other property at the site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures and. utilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction. 25.4 No part of the Work shall be performed, nor shall any of the material, supplies, articles or equipment be manufactured or fabricated in any plant, factory, building or surroundings, or under working conditions which are unsanitary, hazardous or dangerous to the health and safety of employees' engaged therein. Precautions shall be exercised for the protection of all persons and property. 25.5 Should the manufacturer of a specified material or product supply instructions, either by label on the container or by independently issued bulletin or instructions pertaining to the product, which refer to possible health and/or safety hazards in the use of the product, Contractor shall be responsible for the proper use and application of the product in conformity with such instructions, .and shall be responsible for all damage or injury resulting from failure to comply with such instructions. STIPULATED SUM CONTRACT PAGE 26 CIRCUIT CITY STORE McPmject. Fumbem EXHIBfr "A- aPROJECTCITYSTATEu uCOMPANYNAMEu aLETTEROFINTENT» 25.6 When the use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment is necessary for the execution of the Work, Contractor shall exercise the utmost care and shall conduct such activities under the supervision of properly qualified personnel. 25.7 Internal combustion engines and compressors shall be equipped with mufflers to reduce noise to a minimum and shall not be operated in enclosed areas without adequate ventilation. 25.8 Owner may provide such watchmen's service as he deems necessary to protect his interests during the progress of construction of the Project, but any protection so provided by Owner shall not in any way relieve Contractor of the responsibility for the safety and condition of the Work and material until the completion and acceptance thereof. Contractor shall employ such watchmen's service as he may deem necessary to properly protect and safeguard the Work and material. Owner shall not in any way he liable or responsible for damage or loss to the Work or material due to trespass or then 25.9 All damage or loss to any property referred to herein and caused in whole or in part by Contractor, any subcontractor, any sub -subcontractor or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by Contractor at its sole cost and expense. 25.10 In any emergency affecting the safety of persons or property, Contractor shall act to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss. Any additional compensation or extension of time claimed by Contractor on account of emergency Work shall be determined as provided in the Agreement for Changes in the Work_ 26. Fire Precautions and Protection 26.1 Contractor shall take necessary precautions to guard against and eliminate possible fire hazards and to prevent damage to the Work, building materials, equipment, temporary field offices, storage sheds and public and private property. Contractor shall be responsible for providing, maintaining and enforcing the following conditions and requirements during the entire construction period: 26.1.1 Contractor's superintendent in charge shall inspect the entire Project at least once each week to make certain that the. conditions and requirements of the Contract Documents and applicable law are being adhered to. 26.1.2 An adequate number of outlets and supply of fire hose of required size and length to protect the construction area shall be provided by Contractor as soon as water is available or when construction starts. Installation shall be in compliance with requirements of applicable codes and/or regulations established by public authorities having jurisdiction. 26.I3 . Contractor shall provide and maintain in working order during construction portable fire extinguishers, the number and locations of which shall be as required by applicable codes or the requirements of public authorities having jurisdiction. In the.absence of such requirements, Contractor shall provide not less than four (4) fire extinguishers conveniently located for proper protection for each A�K-STIPUI.ATED SUM CONTRACT PAGE 27 �,�CIRCUIT CITY STORE Ik(PtojwNumbem EXHIBIT'A' aPROJECTCITYSTATEP -COMPANYNAMFi, ,tLETTEROFINTENTo 25,000 sq. R of floor area. Fire extinguishers shall be either 2-112 gal. capacity water type gas cartridge expelled units or 5 gal. capacity' pump type. Extinguishers shall have the approval of Fire Underwriter's Laboratory and shall be inspected at regular intervals and recharged as necessary. In areas of flammable liquids, asphalt or electrical hazards, extinguishers of the 15e lb. carbon dioxide type or 20-1b. dry chemical type shall be provided. 26:1.4 No open fires shall be permitted. 26.1.5 Only a reasonable working supply of flammable building material shall be located inside of, or on the roof of, the building(s) of the Project. 26.1.6 Tarpaulins used during the course of construction shall be of a flameproof type and secured in-place against damage or flapping from winds. 26.1.7 Oil -soaked rags, papers and other highly combustible materials shall be removed from the Project at the close of each day's work, and more often where necessary, and -placed in metal containers with tight -hinged lids. 26.1.8 Gasoline, benzene or similar combustible materials, as well as flammable or waste materials subject to spontaneous combustion, shall not be poured into sewers, manholes or traps, but shall be safely disposed. Contractor shall make appropriate arrangements for storing these materials outside of the Project. 26.2 When public authorities or codes impose regulations relating to fire prevention and control, sucl regulations shall be considered as minimum requirements and not requirements in lieu of those set forth above. ' Y` 27. Environmental Control 27.1 All materials and work procedures used on the Project shall comply with all air pollution, water pollution and other environmental pollution control regulations in effect at the site of the Project. Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all necessary approvals and certification as to compliance of material and procedures. 27.2 Throughout the entire construction period, Contractor shall effectively dust -palliate the working area, unpaved roads used in the operations and involved portions of the site. Such palliation shall include chemical treatment or intermittent watering and sprinkling of such frequency as will satisfactorily allay the dust at all times during construction. Within twenty (20) days following Owner's notice to proceed, Contractor shall provide to Owner and Architect the Critical Path Schedule, showing timely completion of the.Work as required by the Agreement Upon STIPULATED SUM CONTRACT PAGE 28 • CIRCUIT CITY STORE AtPmjectNumbcm EXHIBIT "A" uPRO)ECTCITYSTATEn ccCOMPANYNAMEn .cLETTEROFINTENL> receipt of the initial Critical Path Schedule, Owner may accept same as submitted or reject and note deficiencies. If the schedule is rejected, the deficiencies noted shall be corrected and a new schedule shall be submitted within ten (10) days, In any case, the complete Critical Path Schedule must be approved by Owner prior to any payments being made. The Critical Path Schedule shall be in the form of a network using Critical Path Methodology (CPM), clearly showing construction activities, dependencies and durations. The critical path activities shall be highlighted and float time for non-critical activities shall be listed_ Longer duration activities shall be broken into sub -activities .when the Work can be completed in phases (i.e., south half, north half, etc.). Contractor will be allowed flexibility in schedule logic and content; however, the following activities must be included in all cases: (a) award of contract; (b) pad delivery and move on; (c) pour foundations; (d) underground utilities; (e) pour slabs (phase); (f) exterior walls (phase); (g) columns; (h) floor and roof structure (phase); (i) roof decking; 6) roofing (drying); (k) HVAC duct work; (1) fire sprinkler piping; (m) interior stud walls (phase); (a) drywall; (o) lathe and plaster (phase); (p) painting (phase); (q) delivery of long lead materials; (r) contract dates; and (s) anticipated weather delays. In the event Contractor falls behind the Critical Path Schedule, or otherwise fails to progress properly towards timely completion of the Work,' Owner and Architect shall have the right to require Contractor, without cost or expense to Owner or change in the Stipulated Sum, to take all steps necessary to improve progress, including, without limitation, overtime work and additional work days, and to submit for Owner's approval a revised Critical Path Schedule showing the manner in which the originally scheduled progress will be restored and the Work timely completed as required by the Agreement. Contractor shall keep the Critical Path Schedule current to reflect changes caused by delays permitted hereunder. A Critical Path Schedule showing the latest schedule and actual status of the Work shall, in any case, be submitted on a monthly basis with the pay request. Initials: Owner. Contractor. General Contractor STIPULATED SUM CONTRACT PAGE 29 CIRCUIT CITY STORE 1k�PmjeetNumbem EXMBIT'A' «PROIECTCITYSTATE. uCOMPANYNAME. «LETTEROFINTENT,, CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA SECTION 00810 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL These Supplementary Conditions, except as modified by Division 1 of the Specifications, are made a part of each section of the Specifications with t the same force and effect as through fully repeated therein. A. Site Inspection 1. Each bidder shall visit the project site prior to the preparation of his bid to investigate and determine all conditions on and near the site which could affect the execution of the work. Any Contractor's failure to fully acquaint himself with existing conditions under which the work is to be performed will not be justification for additional compensation. If location size of existing or proposed building elements are found to be in conflict with other work, the contractor will be responsible for correcting the conflict with no additional cost to the Owner. Contractor shall promptly notify the Owner and the Project Manager and provide a sketch detailing the conflict and proposed solution. Contractor shall proceed with corrective action as approved by the Project Manager. 2. The location of the underground utilities, such as sewers, electrical power, water piping, conduits, etc., indicated on the drawings is as exact as can be determined from available information but its accuracy or completeness cannot be guaranteed. Exact location of these utilities shall be verified by the Contractor prior to starting work. Contractor shall exercise special care when excavating at or near the general location of underground utilities for the safety of workers, as well as for protection of the utility services. 3. Any connections to or relocation of any existing utility line requiring temporary discontinuation of utilities which are in active use shall be scheduled and coordinated with the utility companies and/or the representatives of the Owner. All premium time required for the installation of any such connections and/or relocations shall be included in Contractor's bid. In no case shall the utilities be left disconnected at the end of a working day or weekend unless authorized by representatives of the utilities and the Owner. Any existing utilities damaged due to the operation of any Contractor shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Owner and utility company or agency, by the Contractor causing the damage, at no increase in the contract cost. B. Inspection and Surface Preparation 1. Contractor shall be responsible to insure that ALL surfaces receiving subsequent finish or coatings are prepared in accordance with manufacturers' recommendations. Contractor and his subcontractors shall require that a representative of the manufacturer inspect and approve the surface preparation prior to application of his product. 2. Contractor shall advise the Project Manager immediately, in writing, of any incompatibilities between materials or surfaces. Commencement of Application implies acceptance of the surface and shall constitute waiver by the respective contractor and general contractor to any claim of incompatibility. END OF SECTION SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00810-1 11/25/91 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA SECTION 00820 SPECIAL CONDITIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 FORMS The sample forms following this section are typical of those to be used by the party/parties to the Contract. 1. Notice to Proceed (1 page) 2. Procedures Memorandum for Field Order, Change Order, and Payment Application (4 pages) 3. Field Order (1 page) 4. Change Order (3 pages) 5. Application and Certificate for Payment (6 pages) 6. Affidavit (Stored Materials) (1 page) 7. Waiver and Release of Liens and Lien Release Checklist (2 pages) 8. Certificate of Substantial Completion (1 page) 9.. Agreement of.Final Payment (3 pages) SPECIAL CONDITIONS H1A 021003 00820-1 08/06/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA INSERT SAMPLE FORMS HERE - (FORMS ARE NOT ON DISK - HARD COPIES ONLY) PLEASE REFER TO HARD COPY OF SPECIFICATION AND INSERT SAMPLE FORMS HERE. 0 SPECIAL CONDITIONS 00820-2 H1A 021003 08/06/03 NOTICE TO PROCEED PROJECT: CONTRACT DATE: CONTRACT AMOiINTs You are hereby notified to commence work on the above referenced contract on or before , and shall fully complete all of the work in accordance with contact documents, plans and specifications within consecutive calendar days thereafter. Your schedule completion date is, therefore, The contact provides for an assessment of the sum of $ as liquidated damages for each consecutive calendar day after the above established contact completion date that work remains incomplete commencing on Contract also provides for a bonus payment of the sum of $ for each consecutive.caleadar day before the. above' established contact completion date that work is complete commencing Date this day of 19� BY: R. Bruce Lucas TITLE: vice President /Construction ACCEPTANCE OF NOTICE Receipt of the foregoing Notice to Proceed is hereby acknowledged.. This day of 19+ BY TITLE CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. Construction Department Memorandum TO: General Contractors' FROM: Ben I{ Droste, Accounting Lfanager SUBJECT: Procedures - Field Order, Change Order, and Payment Application Following are the accepted procedures for submitting Field Orders, Change Orders, and Payment Applications. Please direct all of your information or inquiries to the,Project Administrator assigned to your project. FIELD ORDERS 1. Field Orders, with all three (3) copies intact and two (2) copies of backup, should be sent directly to the Construction Manager. 2. Once Field Orders have been approved by the Construction Manager, Sean Easter/Chuck Altmaier, and/or Bruce Lucas, they are directed to a Project Administrator for entry into the Omnis System. 3. DO NOT NUMBER Field Orders as a number is automatically assiped to it from the Omnis System. 4. After entry into Omnis, a copy is immediately Faxed to the General Contractor, followed by mailing the original. CELANOE ORDERS 1: Change �?rder Proposals, wig four (4) copies intact and four (4) copies of backup, should be sent directly to the Construction Manager for review and approval- he will then send it to Seau or Bruce for his approval, afterwards the Project Administrator wilt enter the CO into Omnis. 2. The backup that accompanies the Change Order must be summarized on two forms (Circuit City Change Order Estimate and Subcontractor Summary of Cost). The backup must include Material Quantities, Unit Prices, and Ex- tensions. The Labor must also be broken down to show man hours per task and applicable rates. . 3. DO NOT NUMBER the Change orders as a number is automatically assigned to it by the Omnis System. HOWEVER, if the Change Order is for only a portion of the work completed against a particular Field Order, you MUST note it at the Field Order number (i.e., if Change Order is directed by Field Order 1110, 10.01, 10.02, etc.). By malting this notation we can ensure all Change Orders pertaufum to that particular Field Order are properly tracked. Once a Change Order number has been assigned directly to a Field Order number, other charges cannot be charged against that Field Order (i.e., Field Order 410, 10.01, 10.02, etc.). This must be done with the first Change Order filed against a Field Order, otherwise the Field Order inclosed out and cannot be audited. 4. After the Change Order has been entered and completed, a copy of the cover sheet is immediately faxed to the General Contractor, followed by mailing the original with complete backup. PROGRESS PAYMENT APPLICATIONS The General Contractor should send one (1) copy of the progress payment (submitted on Application for Pay Request -AIA Document G702), accompanied by the complete Schedule of Values -AIA Document G703, and all required documentation to Sherry or Pat, and send one (1) copy to the Construction Manager for iris approval (this saves tune and expedites processing). The following four (4) documents ARE REQUIRED before each Payment Application can be processed and approved: Completed Lien Release Chectdist This checklist MUST be included, and it should closely match the Schedule of Values (AIA Document G703). Your accumulative "Paid To Date Amount" should match the accumulative `'! aid To Date" figure on your subcontractor's lien release. Checklist columns are ... a. "Description of Work or Material" -- all activities by subs andfor suppliers over $10,000, and by the General Contractor should be fisted (see the en- closed sample form). List only those activities pertinent to the project. b. "Subcontractor/Material Supplier" — list the name of the sub/and or supplier. If any one activity has more than one (1) subcontractor and/or supplier, you must fest each one. c. "Original Contract" — amount of the sub and/or supplier's contract. i d. "Adjusted Contract" -- amount of the sub andlor supplier's contract including change orders, etc. e. `Trevious Months Draw Amount'— total approved amount from all previous months' draws, including retainage. `rad To Date" amou± the sub and/or supplier has actually received to date for the entire project. This amount should match the Paid To Date amount on - the lien release received g. "Amount This Request" and `Balance To Complete" — self-explanatory. h. "Releases In File To Date" — for Cc-cdd City's use only - The Schedule of Values should closely reflect the cost of the work Any fees or markups by the General Contractor should be in separate line items and not spread over Al of the items fisted. 2. Conditional Lien Release Submitted by the General Contractor for the amount requested as Current Pay- ment (use attached form). If your State has a different Lien Release form, you `.:.. must subcxut that form to our office for approval. 3. Unconditional Lien Release Submitted by the General Contractor for "Total Amount Previously Paid To Date" on the contract (use attached form). 4. unconditional Lieu Release All subcontractors with a contract for more than S1Q,000 and were paid monies from the previous month's payment must provide a lien release. These releases should be for the total amount. Paid To Date,'.' not just the.amount paid oathe.previous month - NOTE: California's projects must use the appropriate California Release force (different from the standard release form we use)- Texas releases must be notarized with the following notation "Waives, Releases, and Discharges iri Order To Fully Waive Claim Of Lien Claimant." Illinois releases must be notarized. FINAL PAYMENT A Final Payment WILL NOT BE MADE until the following items are received: 1. A completed Audit Cif GM" Contract) and negotiated settlement. \ c; c»ne 2. Payment Application. 3. Construction Manager sign the Pay App and the Change Order Summary. 4. National Accounts paid in full and Final Releases received_ National Accounts are -die iolloWing: Fesann Auto Ooonis, Cantethury Distributorss, Girtman McDougall, Lennox, Frudenburg, Novar Controls, and Richmond Electric.. 5. Conditional or Unconditional Final Lien Releases received &oin all subcontractors and suppliers, and for any IVMechanies Lien (and a Release of Lien from the court), Intent to Lien, and Preliminary Notices. 6. An "Agreement of Final Payment Letter" (copy attached) executed by the G.C. 7. Joe Freeze sign the Final Payrnent Letter signifying all As -Built drawings are in, and Bud Vye or Al Santa Maria sign the Final Payfnealttter sigi R g all Warri ity Manuals are in and there are no outstanding construction or repair problems for the project. i 10 BASIS OF COST f�1 S Fixed Sum.. ®5 Approximate Cost Actual Cost to be submitted within 20 days per the Constructiton Contract- Contractor shall advise Owner immediately. and prior to completing work, if Actual Cost is substantially greater than Approximate Cost. Q S Guaranteed Maximum/Time & Material. Actual Cost to be based on time and materials not to exceed Guaranteed Maximum (it appropriate). Time cards and material list Will be required to be signed by the General Contractor's Superintendant (on a daily basis), and submitted with the change order. 5 Other. Explain: Signature of Authorized Circuit City Representative Signature of Authorized Contractor Representative COPY DISTRIBUTION: (Pink Copy - Field Notebook) [] INTERNAL BUDGET ESTIMATE CIRCUIT Y CITY PROJECT NAME: PROJECT NO: CONTRACTOR: FIELD ORDER FIELD ORDER NO:, CAS W wd fir C--4 c=r, FIELD ORDER DATE: ❑ A -Prototypical Requirement ❑ ' D -Due to City/Agency Requirement O G -Acceleration ol-t-Backcharge ❑ B -Due to Field Condition(s) ❑ E -[Directed by Executive Management ❑ 1-MisclOther ❑ C-Architectural/Design Error ❑ F -Due to Developer/Coordination You are hereby instructed to perform the following additional work. This Field Order shall have no effect on the Project Schedule unless specifically noted below. BASIS OF COST f�1 S Fixed Sum.. ®5 Approximate Cost Actual Cost to be submitted within 20 days per the Constructiton Contract- Contractor shall advise Owner immediately. and prior to completing work, if Actual Cost is substantially greater than Approximate Cost. Q S Guaranteed Maximum/Time & Material. Actual Cost to be based on time and materials not to exceed Guaranteed Maximum (it appropriate). Time cards and material list Will be required to be signed by the General Contractor's Superintendant (on a daily basis), and submitted with the change order. 5 Other. Explain: Signature of Authorized Circuit City Representative Signature of Authorized Contractor Representative COPY DISTRIBUTION: (Pink Copy - Field Notebook) [] INTERNAL BUDGET ESTIMATE C • l®r ciRcuir CITY CHANGE ORDER 'ROJECT NAME: ADDRESS: y TO CONTRACTOR: ADDRESS: CONTRACT IS CHANGED AS FOLLOWS: :OPE OF WORK DESCRIPTION: CHANGE ORDER 9: (A-V--anrc- mkc,r) CONTRACTOR PROPOSAL Ir: DATE: CONTRACT DATE: CONTRACT FOR: DIRECTED BY FIELD ORDER ft: DATE: OR PLAN CHANGE #: DATE: lp Circuit City r-UANII-C nvnFR FS fIMMLTr- v Job Name Job Number DRAFT FIELD ORDER Job Location COQ SUB CONTRACTOR SUMMARY OF COST FOR CHANGE ORDER GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF WORK LABOR (MH AT PAYROLL RATE) FOREMAN PAYROLL FAXES AND FRINGE BENIFITS(%) UNIT RATE WORK OR MATERIAL COST SUB TOTAL A. TOTAL LABOR MATERIAL (SEE ATTACHED) FREIGHT % SALES TAX B. TOTAL MATERIAL C. LABOR & MATERIAL D. OH&P 15% SUBCONTRACTOR COST DESCRIPTION ATTACH BACK UP E.. F OHRP ON SI B WORK 5016 5% G. TOTAL SUBCONTRACTOR WORK ' TOTAL CHANGE ORDER AMOUNT �-------� COST OF SMALL TOOLS, CLEAN UP, MMDUNG, RECEIVING. STORAGE, ENGINEERING, MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS ARE A PART OF OVERHEAD COMPANY f DATE .rvd RUMBER : . CIRCUIT CITY 5/5/95 PAGE OF 6 PAGES APPLICATION NUMBER: CONTINUATION SHEET AND CERTIFICATE FOR PAYMENT,conlaining APPLICATION DATE: APPLICATION Conlraclor's signed Certificallon Is allached. PERIOD FROM: PERIOD TO: In labulallons below, amounts are stated la the nearest dollar. variable relalnage for line items may aPPly. Use Column I on Contracts where G H B C A DESCRIPTION OF WORK SCHEDULED D WORK F PRESENTLY TOTALRIALS COMPLETE % BALANCE AND STORED TO (G!C) TO RETAINAGE. ITEM VALUE FROMPREVIOUS THIS PERIOD STORED(NOT IN DATE (C NO APPLICATION DOR E) (D+E+F) GENERAL (DIVISION ONE) 0 0',ro 0 0 CONDITIONS MOBLIZATION 0 0 0 0 0 0 D D 0% 0 0% 0 0 0 BONDIBUILDERS RISK 0 00 0 0 0 0 0 0% 0 0 GENERAL CONDITIONS D 0 0 G.C. PROFIT 0 0 iJDIVl01 0 0 DIVISION ONE SUBTOTAL 0 D 0 SITE WORK (DIVISION TWO) 0 0% 0 0 RETAINING WALLS 0 0 0 p 0 0 0 0 0 0% 0 0°.6 0 0 0 HAZARDOUS REMOVAL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0% 0 0' DEMOLITION 00 0 0 0 0 D 0% 0 0 0 BUILDING EXCAV/BACKFILI. 0 D 0 0 . CLEARING/GRUBBING 0 0 0 0 0 0'A 0 0 CUTSOLLS 0 0 0 0 0°� 0 0 0 STORM DRAINAGE 0 0 0 0 04A 0 SEWER 0 0 D 0 0 0% 0 0 0 WATER 0 0 D 0 00 0 0°% 0 0 GRAVEL 0 0 0 0 0% 0 0 CURBING 0 0 0 0 06,b 0 0 PAVING SIDEWALKSp 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0% Oo/. 0 0 LANDSCAPING 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 °'� 0 CONCRETE PAD 0 0 0 0 0 MISC 0 0 101y /01 DIVISION TWO SUBTOTAL 0 0 0 ' CONCRETE (DIVISION THREE) 0 0 goib 0 0 FOUNDATIONS 0 0 0 0 0 D SLABS 0 JOZ ..,,,,;dIESER CIRCUIT C`'�'"P' 5r5145 PAGE OF PAGES APPLICATION NUMBER: CONTINUATION SHEET APPLICATION AND CERTIFICATE FOR PAYMENT.containing APPLICATION DATE: _^ Contraclofs signed Cerlt6e0tian is attached, PERIOD FROM: In tabulations below, amounts ere stated to the nearest dollar. retainacid tot line items may apPly, PERIOD TO: Use Column I on•Conlracis where variable H I C A B OF WORK SCHEDULED D E WORK COMPLETED F MATERIALS G TOTAL COMPLETi: BALANCE (GIC) TO AND 0 TO FINISH RETAINAGE ITEM DESCRIPTION NO VALUE FROM PREVIOUS THIS PERIOD STPRESENTLY ORED (NOT IN DOTE APPLICATION 0 OR E) (D+E>F) DIVISION THREE SUBTOTALS 0 0 0 0 p llOiV/Oi 0 0 MASONRY (DIVISION FOUR)0°A 0 0 BLOCK MASONRY 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 p 0 0% 0 0 INSULATION 0 p f�OIV/Ot 0 0 DIVISION FOUR SUSTOTAL•S 0 0 0 0 METALS (DIVISION FIVE) 0% 0 0 STRUCTURAL STEEL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 04/0MISCJRON 0 0 0 p aKD1VJ01 0 0 DIVISION FIVE SUSTOTALS 0 0 0 CARPENTRY (DIVISION SIX) 0 0% 0 0 ROUGH CARPENTRY 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0'A 0 ' 0 0 0 FINISHED CARPENTRY 0 MILLWORK 0 0 0 0 0% 0 0 0 0 0 WOOD BASES 0 IsDIVJO( 0 0 DIVISION SIX SUBTOTALS , o p p 0 MOISTURE (DIVISION SEVEN)0°� 0 0 0 0 CONTROL ROOFING a ROOF INSULATION 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0'� 0 0% 0 0 SHEET METAL WORK 0 a o o c o o'� ° o ROOF ACCESSORIES 0 0 0 0'/. 0 0 CAULKING & WATERPROOFING 0 0 0 0 EXTERIOR METAL. SIDING 1 "OBER CIRCUITY _ PAGE OF 6 PAGES CONTINUATION SHEET CERTIFICATE FOR PAYMENT,conialning APPLICATION NUMBER: APPLICATION DATE: _ APPLICATION AND Contraclors signed Cenlrieallon IS atieched. PERIOD FROM in labutalions below, amounts are slated to the nearest dollar. PERIOD TO: _ Use Column I on Contracts where variable ralainagei for line Items MY apPIY, I C A 9COMP DESCRIPTION OF WORK SCHEDULED D E K F G TND TORSO TO H BALANCE (G C) TO FINISH RETAINAGE ITEM N0, FROM PREVIOUS THIS PERIOD PRESENTLY STORED (NOT IN DATE , . "(C -G) APPLICATION D OR E) (D+E+F)0 0 0 0 0 0 #DW101 DIVISION SEVEN SUBTOTALS 0 DOORS (DIVISION EIGHT) 0 0% 0 0 . ' WINDOWS GLASS OVERHEAD DOORS 0 0 0 0 0 p 0 p 0°i° 0 0 0 0 DOORS, FRAMES 0 0 0 0 0 0 0`/' 0 0 _ 0 - SECURITY GATES 0 0 ° 0 0 p a% � GLASS & GLAZING 0 0 p 0 0 0% 0 0 GLASS RAILS 0 0 0 0 FINISH HARDWARE • p 1JDIV/01 0 0 DIVISION EIGHT SUBTOTALS _ ., FINISHES (DIVISION NINE) 0% 0 0 EIFS 0 0 0 p 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0% 0 0 0 STUDS -SHOWROOM 0 0 0 0 0 Q 0% o 0 STUDS -OFFICE STUDS -TOILET &. CAR STEREO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0°rri 0 0 0 0 STUDS•EXTERIOR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0pgt; %% o 0 STUDS•OTHI:R 0 0 0 0 0 0% p 0 0 ORYWALL•SHOWROOM 0 0 0 0 0 0°l. 0 DRYWALL -OFFICE DRYWALL -TOILET & CAR STEREO 0 p p 0 o 0 0 0 01A 0 a p0%DRYWALL-OTHER 0 0 o 0 Q 0 0 0 01A 0 0 0 CERAMIC TILE 0 p 0 0 0% 0 0 CEILING GRID 0 0 0 0 0°1 0 0 CEILING TILE 0 0 0 O 0 a'A 0 0 CARPETING FLOOR 0 0 0 0 0°� 0 CARPETING WELL & COUNTER 0 0 p 0°� 0 0 RESILIENT TILE 0 Q 0 0 0 0% 0 0 RUBBER FLOORING 0 0 ° 0 0% 0 OTHER 0 0 0 0 PAINTING -EXTERIOR Jou NOMBER CIRCUIT CITY 5/5/'15 PAGE OF 6 PAGES APPLICATION NUMBER: CONTINUATION SHEET APPLICATION AND CERTIFICATE FOR PAYMENT,conialning APPLICATION DATE: Conlracioes signed Cerlifieallon Is allachod. PERIOD FROM: PERIOD TO: In labulations below, amounts are slated to the nearest doAar. relainage for line Ilems may apply. use Column Ion Conlracls where varlabla H C A B RK SC OF WO SCHEDULED D WORK E COMPlETEO F MATERIALS PRESENTLY G TOTAL COMPLETE AND ED TO 6A {G!C) BALANCE RETAINAGE ITEM DESCRIPTION VALUE FROM PREVIOUS THIS PERIOD STORED (NOT IN TO�iG'SH OAT N0. APPLICATION D OR E) (D+E+F) PAINTING -SHOWROOM 0 0 0 a 0 0 0 0 0 0,� 0 0 0 0 PAINTING -OTHER 0 0 0 0 0 0 0% 0 0 WALLCOVERINGS 0 0 0 0 0 0� 0 0 MARLITE/SINATRA PANELS 0 0 0 0 ACSTL WALL PANELS 0 0 #DIY/01 0 0 DIVISION NINE SUBTOTAL 0 0 0 0 SPECIALTIES (DIVISION TEN) 0 0@A 0 0 TOILET ROOM ACCESSROES 0 0 0 0 0 0 a 0 0°,b 00% 0 0 0 0 WIRE PARITIONS 0 0 0 0 0 a MISC0 0 0 #pIVl01 0 DIVISION TEN SUBTOTAL 0 0 0 EQUIPMENT (DIVISION ELEVEN) 0•% 0 0 DOCK LEVELERlENCLOSURE 0 0 0 a 0 0 O G 0 r� 0 MISCELLANEOUS 0 0 a0N10! 0 0 0 0 0 0 MECHANICAL (DIVISION FIFTEEN) 0 0*A 0 � GAS PIPING 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0A 0 0 0 COMPRESS AIR SYSTEM 0 0 0 0% 0 VACUUM SYSTEM a p 0 0 0 0 0% 0 0 ROOF DRAINAGE 0' 0 0 0. 0 0 0 PLUM OING•UNDERGROUND•SITE 0 0. 00% 0 0 PLUMOING•ROUGH IN (UNDERSLAB) G 0 0 0 O 0% 0 PLUMBING -OVERHEAD PIPING 0 0. 0 0°,t, 0 PLUMBING -FINISH 0 0 0 0 0 0 PIPE INSULATION tr, 515195 �1 CIRCUIT CITY J� '_-OMER PAGE OF 6 PAGES APPLICATION NUMBER: CONTINUATION SHEETAPPLICATION APPLICATION AND CERTIFICATE FOR PAYMENT,containing DATE: PERIOD FROM: Conlracloes signed CerUDcallOn Is attached, stated to the nearest dollar. PERIOD T0: �.. in tabulations below, amounts are Contracts where yariable retainage•for line Iierrs may apply, G H i Use Column t on A B C D WORK COMPLETED F MATERIALS TOTAL COMPLETE °,G BALANCE RETAINAGE AND STORED TO (GIC) TO FINISH SCHEDULED 111:M DESCRIPTION OF WORK VALUE FROM PREVIOUS THIS PERIOD STCRREO (NOT IN DATE (C -G) N0. APPLICATION DOR E} (D+E+F) 0°h 0 0 FIRE PROTECTION -SITE ° 0 0 p 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0% 0 0% 0 0 o 0 FIRE PROTECTION -HIGH ROOF 0 ° 0 ° 0 0°d, 0 0 0 FIRE PROTECTION -RACKS • 0. • p 0 0 6 0% 0 0 FIRE PROTECT101d•LOWRDOF 0 p 0 0 p 0 0 FIRE PROTEC110N•M1SCIDRAFTING 0 p 0 0 0 0% 0 0 HVAC UNITS -HVAC DUCTWORK 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0% Ooh 0 0 0 0 HVAC bIFFUSERS 6 TRIM 0 0 0 0 0 0 0% 0% 0 0 HVAC EXHAUST SYSTEMS 0 0 0 0 0 HVAC HEATERS ' 0 0 0 �D1VlO1 0 0 HVAC MISC-®-�"-^ 0 0 0 DIVISION FIFTEEN SUBTOTAL 0 ELECTRICAL ( OMSION SIXTEEN) 0 0 0 0°h 0 0°ib 0 0 0 TEMP POWER,PERMITS, MOBIL, 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0',b 0 0 0 0 ROUGH UNDERGROUND ROUGH EtECTRIC•WAREHOUSE 0 0 0 0 .0 0 0 0 01/0 Oen 0 0 0 0 ROUGH ELECTRIC•SHOWROOM 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0% 0 0 ROUGH ELECTRIC -OFFICE 0 0 0 0 0 p 0�6 0 0 ROUGH ELECTRIC•OTHER FINISH ELECTRIC•WAREHOUSE 0 0 0 0 0 ° 0 ° 0°A 0 o 0 0 FINISH ELECTRIC -SHOWROOM 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o°� 0 0 0' FINISH ELECTRIC•OFFICS 10 0. 0 0 0 0°� 0 0 FINISH ELECTRIC -OTHER LIGHT FfXTURES•WAREHOUSE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ° 0 G 0 0 LIGHT FIXTURES•SHOWROOM 0 0 p 0 0 0 b 0' 0 LIGHT FIXTURES -OFFICE p 0 p 0 °f/ 0 /Y 0 0 LIGHT FIXTURES•StTE 0 0 ° o 0% 0 LIGHT FIXTURES -OTHER 0 0 0 0 0 0'l0 ° CONTOLS FIRE ALARM 0 0 0 0 0 0 SWITCHGEARIPANELBOAROS CIRCUIT CITY 515145 Jog MER . PAGE OF 6 PAGES APPLICATION NUMBER: CONTINUATION SHEET C APPLICATION AND CERTIFICATE FOR PAYMEh1T.conlain(ng APPLICATION DATE: PERIOD FROM: ~+� Contractors signed Certiricatlon Is attached. stated to the nearest donor. PERIOD T0: In tabulations below, amounts are Column I on Contracts where variable relainage for line Items may apply. H I Use C A g SCHEDULED D E WORK COMPLETED F MATERIALS 0 TOTAL COMPLETE °� BALANCE AND STORED TO (GIC) TO FINISH RETAINAGE ITEM DESCRIPTION OF WORK VALUE FROM PREVIOUS THIS PERIOD PRESENTLY STORED (NO? IN DATE NO. APPLICATION 0 OR E) (D+E+F) 0 0 FINISH 6ISPLAY FIXTURES 0 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0% 0 0 MISC, 0 0 0 #DIV/0i 0 DIVISION SIXTEEN SUBTOTALS 0 0 0 0'i6 0 0 CHANGE ORDER NUMBER ONE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0,6 0',6 0 0 0 0 CHANGE ORDER NUMBER TWO 0 0 0 0 0 00/0 0 0 0 CHANGE ORDER NUMBER 0 0 0 0 0 0 0% 0 0 CHANGE ORDER NUMBER 0 0 0 D D D'� D 0 CHANGE ORDER NUMBER 0 0 0 0 0 0°h 0 0 CHANGE ORDER NUMBER 0 0 0. 0 D 0 ' 0 0 CHANGE ORDER NUMBER 0 0 0 0 0 0°�d. ° 0 0 CHANGE ORDER NUMBER 0 0 0 0 0% 0 0 CHANGE ORDER NUMBER 0 0 0 0 0 0' 0 0 CHANGE ORDER NUMBER 0 0 0 0 0 0 0'h 0 0 CHANGE ORDER NUMBER 0 0 0 0 0 .0 0 0 CHANGE ORDER NUMBER 0 0 0 0 0 0',G 0 0 CHANGE ORDER NUMBER 0 0 0 0 0 D% 0 0 0 CHANGE ORDER NUMBER 0 0 0 0 0 1) 0 0 CHANGE ORDER NUMBER 0 �0 0 0 0 0% CHANGE ORDER NUMBER 0 0 0 0 . 0 CHANGE ORDER NUMBER 0 0 fDIV101 TOTAL CHANGE ORDERS 0 • 0 0 0 p f DIV/01 0 0 0 ° TOTALCONTRACT IIFFIDAVI'T (STORED MATERIALS) STATE OF Before me,. the undersigned' authority personally appeared who, being duly sworn, says that he ie a subcontractor for work of of General Contractor for project, and that all materials billed on the attached invoice are being held in the subcontractor's warehouse at (street), (city) for, the above mentioned project, and are fully insured against loss or damage_ Subcontractor Sworn to and subscribed before me this day of 19 Notary Public MY COMMISSION EXPIRES: for General Contractor for the above mentioned project, states that the above stored materials constitute a part of the Performance, Payment and Guarantee Bond, and are for this project only. _General Contractor Sworn to and subscribed before me this day of 19 Notary Public MY COMMISSION EXPIRES: F RIC: iO,", VP._ 23233 FxtrAr. MtCO DITIONAL S Itr 'PROGRESS CONDITIONAL WAIVER ANO RELEASE OF LMIS The underaigned is a general contractor or subcontractor', amaterialear, other person furnishing services or labor or material in the constructicn repair of imprnvemsnts upon real eacatu owned by. and described as fallosaas In consideration of the sum of to the unde=signed In h paid, receipt whereof is hereby a�ckn041edged, and other benefits accruing, undersigned does hereby waive, release and quitclaim In favor of the owner owner' of said real estate and in favor of each and every parey making a loran said real estate,' as improved and his or its successors and asei_gns, all ri that the undersigned may have to a described_ lien upon the Land and improvements ab _ IT IS UNDERSTOOD AND AGREED THAT THIS WAIVER AND REM -EASE IS FOR SERVICES REMERIEM, WORK DOME AND HATERLAL FURNI5SED PRIOR TO THE DATE MREO'Cr In for all such aerv£ces rendered, work done and material furnished and not a for the particular item Ladicsted below_ Mittens the following signaturd and seal this day of , 19 1 FIRHa BY: _ (SEAL1 TITLE_ S CONI] ITIONAL J UPO.r REc:EipT 6F AMOUNT (Servicea, labor or material fiurnished) S Total Amaunu PAID TO DATZ an ConcraCr- Subacribed and aw0rn to before the undersigned, a Notary Public for c rothis Stare of da of y in s: , 19 Notary Public Hy Commission expires:-, Revisad-5/6/94 0 • - SUBCONTRACTOR OR SUPPLIER WAIVER OF LIEN The undersigned is a contractor or subcontractor or supplier or materialman or other person furnishing services or labor or material in the construction or remodel or repair of improvements upon real estate owned by CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. (9950 Mayland Drive, Richmond, Virginia 23233) and described as follows: Circuit City Project Name _..- Project Address City County State In consideration of the sum of $ to the undersigned in hand paid, receipt whereof is hereby acknowledged, and other benefits accruing, the undersigned does hereby waive, release, and quitclaim in favor of the owner or owners of said real estate and in favor of eachand every party making a loan on said real estate, as improved and his or its successors and assigns, all rights that the undersigned may have to lien upon the land improvements above described. It is understood and agreed that this waiver and release is for all services rendered, work completed, and material furnished prior to the date hereof. Witness the following signature and seal this day of Fim: By: Title: Paid To Date Amount: $ Conditional. In Progrem: Unconditional: Final: Subscribed and sworn to before the undersigned, a Notary Public, on this the day of in the City/County of in the State of Notary Public My Commission Expires GENIERAL CONTRACTOR WANER OF LIEN To All Whom It May Concern: WHEREAS, the undersigned has been employed by: CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. 9950 Mayland Drive Richmond, Virginia 23233 To furnish services or labor or materials for work under a Contract for the construction of Circuit City Project # Name State, _ In the City of: _ In the County of: _ In the State of- NOW f NOW THEREFORE, this day of11for and in consideration of y the sum of $ to be paid after approval of our request, the undersigned does hereby waive and release, contingent upon aforesaid payment, only to the extent of the aforesaid amount, any lien rights to, or claim of lien with respect to and on the monies or other considerations due or to become due from the owner by virtue of said contract, on account of labor, services, materials, fixtures, apparatus, or machinery furnished by the undersigned to or for the above described premises but only to the extent of the payment aforesaid. Unconditional Waiver for Previous Payments Received: $ Conditional Waiver for Previous Requests (Unpaid): $ Conditional Waiver for Current Application Request: $ General Contractor: State of: Signed Name: County of _ Printed Name: Subscribed and swom to before me Title: ,- . _ this day of Notary Public: My Commission expires: CERTWICATE OF Distribution to: ~ SUBSTANTIAL o cHiTEC- � All"ti COMPLETION F�ND7RACTOR o U AIA DOCUMENT G704 OTHER p PROJECT: ARCHITECT:(name, address) ARCHITECT'S PROJECT NUMBER: TO (Owner):' CONTRACTOk: F CONTRACT FOR: S CONTRACT DATE: �'rA DATE OF ISSUANCE: L P PROJECT OR DESIGNATED PORTION SHALL INCLUDE: :�asrm� The Work performed under this Contract has been reviewed and foundto be substantially complete. The Date of Substantial Completion of the Project or portion thereof designated above is hereby established as .which is also the date of commencement of applicable warranties required by the Contract Documents, except as stated below DEFINITION OF DATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION The Date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof is the Date certified by the Architect when construction is sufficiently complete, -in accordance with the Contract Documents, so the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work or designated portion thereof for the use for which it is intended, as expressed in the Contract Documents. A list of items to be completed or corrected, prepared by the Contractor and verified and amended by the Architect, i attached hereto. The failure to include any items on such list does not atter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete a' Work- in accordance with the Contract Documents_ The date of commencement of warranties for items on the attached list wit be the date of final payment unless otherwise agreed to in writing_ NOT TO BE EXECUTED BY ARC111TECT ARCHITECT BY DATE The Contractor will complete or correct the Work on the list of items attached hereto within from the above Date of Substantial Completion. CONTRACTOR BY DATE da• The Owner accepts the Work or designated portion thereof as substantially complete and will assume full possession there at - (time) on (date OWNER BY DATE The responsibilities of the OPvner and the Contractor for security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Wo: and insurance shall be as follows: (note—owner's and Contractors legal and insurance counsel should determine and review insurance requirements and coverage; Contract shjtt secure consent of surety company, it any.► AGREEMENT OF FINAL PAYMENT This Agreement is made as of .the day of f` 19 , between .Circuit .City Stores, Inc. ("OWner") and. ( "Contractor") . WHEREAS, owner and Contractor entered into a document entitled "Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor" (the "Contract"), dated , 19 for improvements to be constructed at A e "Project"). WHEREAS, Contractor_ has. substantially completed the Project, subject only to the following: WHEREAS, Owner and Contractor desire to enter into a final accounting on the Project: ' NOW, THEREFORE, -in consideration of the mutual covenants ,F� herein contained, the parties hereto do hereby agree as follows: ;� y 1. Contract Sum, The original contract sum for the Project under the aforementioned Contract was $ and total amount of change orders was $ fora total adjusted contract sum of $ , of which $ has been paid by Owner to Contractor to date_ The balance of $ (the "Balance") is to be paid'by Owner upon Contractor's execution of and performance of obligations contained in this Agreement_ . 2. Final. Payment: Contractor acknowledges and affirms that upon being paid the Ballance herewith, it has' been paid in full for the Project, including all claims for change orders, unanticipated work, and a.11 items of material, and labor incurred by it, whether heretofore invoiced to Contractor by its suppliers subcontractors or not, it being the intent hereof that Owner Owner shall have no obligation whatsoever to make any further payiqents to Contractor on account of the Project and Contractor's obligations under the Contract_ Contractor, by its execution hereof, hereby unconditionally waives a'nd•releases its lien on the Project. A. - lie 2 of 3 3. Lien Waivers. Attached hereto are duly executed waivers of lien for all major subcontractors and material suppliers (i.e., those whose contract sum exceeds $10,000.00) which cover all items of material and labor supplied to the Project and acknowledge receipt of full and final payment. For all major subcontractors and material suppliers for whom a waiver of lien is not! attached, Contractor hereby authorizes Owner to subtract the amounts owed such subcontractors and suppliers from the Balance and issue to Contractor checks in such amounts payable jointly to Contractor and the major subcontractors or suppliers. Contractor agrees that such check or checks in joint name shall be deemed the equivalent of payment directly to Contractor for purposes of computing the appropriate amount of the Balance. 4. Indemnity. Contractor agrees to pay in full, or otherwise satisfy in full, all subcontractors and suppliers of material for the Project for all materials and equipment furnished, for all work, labor and services performed, and for all known indebtedness and claims against the Contractor, including any claims for damages arising in any manner in connection with the Project, for which the Owner might in any way be held responsible or which may affect title to the Project. Contractor agrees to indemnify and hold harmless Owner, its agents, employees and successors in interest, from and against all claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys' fees, arising out of or k resulting from the obligations contained in the Contract and this Agreement. S. No Bar_ The making of final payment hereunder by Owner shall in no way constitute a waiver of any of Owner's claims against Contractor whether for unsettled liens, "punch list" items, faulty or defective work, failure of 'work to comply with the Contract documents, product liability, or the terms of any warranties.. 6. Conflict. If any of the provisions of this Agreement shall conflict with any of the provisions of the Contract, or its related or incorporated documents, such conflict shall be resolved in every, instance in favor of the provisions of this Agreement. 7. Changes_ This Agreement may not be terminated, altered, waived, changed or modified in any way on behalf of the -Owner except by an instrument in writing executed by the party against which enforcement of the termination, alteration, waiver, change or modification is asserted. 3 of 3 e. Governing Law. This Agreement shall be deemed to be a Virginia contract and shall be construed and enforced in accordance with the laws of the of 9: Headings. The' headings appearing in. this Agreement are intended for convenience of reference, and are not to be considered in construing this instrument. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have caused this Agreement to be executed as of the day and year first above written. OWNER: CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. By: CONTRACTOR: By DIRECTOR OF CONSTRUCTION: SEAN EASTER AS -GUILTS IN OFFICE: JOE FREEZE MAINTENANCE MANUALS IN OFFICE: HUD VYE CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA SECTION 00840 WARRANTY MANUAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 MANUAL: Prior to requesting final payment, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner's Representative two (2) copies of the Warranty Manual as specified herein. Submittal of a Bid Proposal constitutes an acknowledgment by the Bidder of these requirements. Organize the Warranty Manual into sets of manageable size. Bind in heavy-duty, 3 -ring vinyl covered binders with pocket folders for folded sheet information. Mark identification on front and spine of each binder. Include the information as specified herein and in section 00820, properly indexed. Refer to sample pages at the end of this Section. Organize each manual as follows: Front Page DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Certificate of Occupancy Listing of local utility companies and services with addresses and telephone numbers. Listing of subcontractors and material suppliers. Contractor's one year written warranty. DIVISION 2 through DIVISION 16: Individual sections with the following information in each section as applicable: Section header page containing i n sect o name (title), section number, subcontractor or material supplier name and address, name of contact person, telephone number, and warranty period. Copy of warranty. Certified Test and Inspection Report. Product data and/or cut sheets. Emergency instructions. Operation instructions. Maintenance instructions. Spare Parts List Wiring diagrams. Fixture lamping schedule. WARRANTY MANUAL 00840-1 0401 P.A. CR 04/24/00 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA WARRANTY MANUAL CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. CIRCUIT CITY SUPERSTORE NO. OWNER: Circuit City Stores, Inc. 9950 Mayland Drive Richmond, Virginia 23233 PROJECT MANAGERS: CASCO 10877 Watson Road, Suite 200 St. Louis, Missouri 63127 CONTRACTOR: WARRANTY MANUAL 00840-2 0401 P.A. CR 04/24/00 If) CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA SUBCONTRACTOR/SUPPLIER LIST CIRCUIT CITY SUPERSTORE NO. Section Section Subcontractor/ Contact Name Number Title Material Supplier Telephone No WARRANTY MANUAL 00840-3 :0401 P.A. CR 04/24/00 ;02200 Earthwork for Buildings Fencing: Paving: Landscaping: 03300 Cast -in -Place Concrete . Masonry Contractor: Supplier: 04200 Concrete Unit Masonry: .Masonry Contractor: Supplier: Concrete Block: 04201 Unit Masonry: Masonry Contractor: Supplier: Concrete Block: 05120 Structural Steel: Erector: Fabricator: 05500 Metal Fabrications: Fabricator: 06402 Interior Architectural Woodwork: (07530) Single Ply Membrane Roofing: w Installer: Supplier: (07531) Single Ply Membrane Roofing Mechanically Fastened: Installer: Supplier: (07532) Single Ply Membrane Roofing Fully Adhered: Installer: Supplier: 07600 Flashing and Sheet Metal: WARRANTY MANUAL 00840-3 :0401 P.A. CR 04/24/00 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA WARRANTY MANUAL 00840-4 0401 P.A. CR 04/24/00 Installer: Supplier: 08330 Overhead Coiling Doors (Fire Shutters): Installer: 08332 Overhead Coiling Doors: Installer: 08334 Overhead Coiling Grilles: Installer: 08360 Sectional Overhead Doors: Installer: 08380 Special Doors: Installer: 08410 Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts: Installer: 08450 All Glass Doors: Installer: 08460 Automatic Entrance Doors: Installer 08700 Finish Hardware: Supplier: 08800 Glass and Glazing: Installer: 09310 Ceramic Tile: Installer: 09510 Acoustical Ceilings: Installer: Supplier: 09650 Resilient Flooring: Installer: 09680 Carpeting: Installer: 09900 Painting: Contractor: 09950 Wall Covering: WARRANTY MANUAL 00840-4 0401 P.A. CR 04/24/00 • CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA .Installer: -'09986 Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Panels: Installer:: 10150 Toilet Partitions: Installer 10445, Interior Signage: Installer: 10605 Folding Security Gates: Installer: Supplier: 10607 Chain Link Partitions: Installer: 10670 Wire Shelving: Installer:' 10800 Toilet and Bath Accessories: Installer: 11160 Loading Dock Equipment: Installer/Supplier; 12506 Window Treatment: Supplier: 12690 Floor Mats: Supplier: 15400 Plumbing: Contractor: Supplier: 15500 Sprinkler System: Contractor: Supplier:, 15770 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning: Contractor: Equipment Supplier: WARRANTY MANUAL 0401 P.A. CR 00840-5 04/24/00 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA 16010 Electrical General Provisions: Contractor: Suppliers: Electrical Equipment: 16500 Lighting: 16700 Fire Alarm System: WARRANTY MANUAL 00840-6 0401 P.A. CR 04/24/00 10 OF ej e WARRANTY MANUAL 00840-7 0401 P.A. CR 04/24/00 .CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC LA QUINTA, CA EXAMPLE CIRCUIT CITY SUPERSTORE SECTION 02282 - TERMITE CONTROL SUBCONTRACTOR: CONTACT: TELEPHONE NUMBER: WARRANTY PERIOD: 1 Year from date of substantial Completion END OF SECTION r e WARRANTY MANUAL 00840-7 0401 P.A. CR 04/24/00 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA SECTION 00850 DRAWING INDEX DRAWING INDEX (UNDER SEPARATE COVER) END OF SECTION DRAWING INDEX 00850-1 09/30/93 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA SECTION 00900 GEOTECHNICAL INFORMATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION: A. A geotechnical investigation report for the project has been prepared by MACTEC Engineering and Consulting, 601 Washington Ave., Suite 330, Newport, Kentucky 41071, dated May 7, 2004 along with an earlier geotechnical investigation for the project site by Sladden Engineering, 39-725 Garand Lane, Suite G, Palm Desert, CA 92211 and both are attached herein at Appendix "A". 1.02 INTERPRETATION: A. Soil investigation data contained in 1.01 A above is provided solely for information and convenience of the bidders. The Owner and the Project Manager disclaim any responsibility or warranty of any kind whatsoever for the accuracy, true location, rock elevations, and extent of the soils investigation that has been prepared by others. They further disclaim responsibility for interpretation of the data by bidders, as in projecting soil bearing values, soil stability and the presence, level and extent of the underground water. The bidder assumes the risk that soil and underground conditions may be other than appearing in the aforesaid documents, but nothing herein shall affect the provisions of the General Conditions of the Contract. 1:03 UNANTICIPATED SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS: A. During earthwork, paving and foundation construction operations, when the Contractor encounters conditions that are different from those he anticipated by field observation and inspection of the geotechnical report, he shall immediately (within 24 hours) bring this fact to the Owner's attention. 1.04 EXTRA PAYMENT: A. No consideration for extra payment will be given for conditions occurring which could have been anticipated from the information contained in the soil report. B. If conditions occur resulting in extra work which could not have been anticipated or reasonably inferred from the soil report information, the General Conditions and the Special Conditions shall apply. END OF SECTION GEOTECHNICAL INFORMATION H1A 021003 M 00900-1 08/06/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA SECTION 01010 GENERAL SCOPE OF WORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Requirements of Divisions 0 and 1 apply to work of this Section. 1.02 SCOPE: Furnish materials, .equipment and perform labor required to execute the work required to complete the construction of the project as indicated on the drawings and specified herein. The work shall include but not be limited to the following: A. • Construction of new shell building to accommodate a new Circuit City Retail Store and associated sitework as indicated on the plans. Connect to on-site water, sewer, electrical, gas, telephone, and fire service utilities as indicated on the plans. B. The Contractor shall coordinate the work to the extent and intent that complete development is produced. C.' The Contract includes all items and work shown as called for on the Drawings and in the Specifications, except those items and work marked specifically "N.I.C." (Not in Contract), or as listed as "F.B.O." (Furnished by Others, but requiring coordinated items of work by this Contractor). 1.03 PERMITS A. The Owner has applied for the general building permit. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner as required to obtain the ,.••� general building permit and shall obtain all other permits required i for the work. The Owner will reimburse Contractor for the cost of the general building permit. The Contractor shall be responsible for all other permits. 1.04 MEASUREMENTS A. Verify measurements at site and assume responsibility for accuracy of measurements. 1.05 OBSTRUCTIONS A. Remove obstructions as necessary for proper reception, performance, constructions, installation, and completion of work specified herein. 1.06 RESTORATION A. After completion of all other work, repair portions on site which have been damaged because of building operations specified herein. 1.07 RECORDS A. Keep at job site a neat, complete, and accurate record of all approved deviations from Contract Drawings, Shop Drawings and Specifications, indicating work as actually installed. Record all such deviations in Contract Drawings. A complete set of as -built reproducible shall be turned over to the Owner upon completion of the job. B. The general contractor shall provide weekly job photos. Photographs shall be provided with a date stamp and stored at the job site in vinyl protectors enclosed in a three ring binder. GENERAL SCOPE OF WORK 01010-1 H1A 021003 08/06/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA 1.08 COOPERATION A. Give work the constant attention necessary to facilitate its progress. Cooperate with Project Manager. Maintain at site a competent and reliable representative authorized to receive orders and to initiate necessary actions. 1.09 COORDINATION A. Be responsible for proper fitting and coordination of operations of various Subcontractors, trades, and materialmen. 1.10 USE OF STRUCTURE A. Owner shall have rights at any time during construction of structure to enter same for the purpose of installing work covered under a different Contract. Contractor and Owner will, so far as possible, work to the mutual advantage of both, where their several work touch upon or interfere with each other. 1.11 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cut; patch and refinish work as necessary to coordinate its several parts, so that it functions optimally, and as indicated in, or reasonably implied by, Plans and Specifications. 1.12 DIVISIONS OF SPECIFICATIONS A. These Specifications are arranged in several sections and indexed for ease of reference. Such arrangement shall not be considered, however, to define or limit the work of any particular Subcontractor, trade or craft: 1.13 TEMPORARY SUSPENSION OF WORK A. Owner shall have authority to suspend the in work wholly or part for such periods as they may deem necessary, due to unsuitable weather or other conditions considered unfavorable for suitable prosecution of work, or because of failure of Contractor to perform any provisions of Contract. Immediately suspend work, in whole or in part, upon receipt of a written order from Owner. Resume work as ordered by Owner. Do not suspend work without written authority of ,Owner. 1.14 INSPECTION AND SURFACE PREPARATION A. Contractor shall be responsible to insure that all surfaces receiving subsequent finish or coating are prepared in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Contractor and his subcontractors shall require that a representative of the manufacturer inspect and approve the surface preparation prior to application of his product. B. Contractor shall advise the Project Manager immediately, in writing, of any incompatibilities between materials or surfaces. Commencement of Application implies acceptance of the surface and shall constitute waiver by the respective contractor and general contractor to any claim of incompatibility. END OF SECTION 0) GENERAL SCOPE OF WORK 01010-2 H1A 021003 08/06/03 LA QUINTA, •CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. CA SECTION 01040 COORDINATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 CLEANING A. Give work the constant attention necessary to facilitate its progress. Cooperate with the Project Manager. Maintain at site a competent and reliable representative authorized to receive orders and to initiate necessary actions. 1.02 COORDINATION: A. Be responsible for proper fitting and coordination of operations of various Subcontractors, trades, and materialmen. 1.03 USE OF STRUCTURE: A. Owner shall have rights at any time during construction of structure to enter same for the purpose of installing work covered under a different Contract. Contractor and Owner will, so far as possible, work to the mutual advantage of both, where their several works touch upon or interfere with each other. 1.04 CUTTING AND PATCHING: A. Cut, patch and refinish work as necessary to coordinate its several parts, so that it functions optimally, and as indicated in, or reasonably implied by, Plans and Specifications. 1.05 DIVISIONS OF SPECIFICATIONS: A. These specifications are arranged in several sections and indexed for ease of reference. Such arrangement shall not be considered, however, to define or limit the work of any particular Subcontractor, trade, or craft. 1.06 TEMPORARY SUSPENSION OF WORK: A. Owner shall have authority to suspend the work wholly or in part for such periods as they may deem necessary due to unsuitable weather or other conditions considered unfavorable for suitable prosecution of work, or because of failure of Contractor to perform any provisions of Contract. Immediately suspend work, in whole or in part, upon receipt of a written order from Owner. Resume work as ordered by Owner. Do not suspend work without written authority of Owner. 1.07 INSPECTION AND SURFACE PREPARATION: A. Contractor shall be responsible to insure that all surfaces receiving subsequent finish or coatings are prepared in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Contractor and his subcontractors shall require that a representative of the manufacturer inspect and approve the surface preparation prior to application of his product. B. Contractor shall advise the Project Manager immediately, in writing, of any incompatibilities between materials or surfaces. Commencement of Application implies acceptance of the surface and shall constitute waiver by the respective contractor and general contractor to any claim of incompatibility. COORDINATION 01040-1 1. 03/12/93 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA 1.08 OWNER OCCUPANCY - CONSOLIDATION OF CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS: A. When Owner has occupied the premises and before construction is complete, all construction materials required to complete the work, must be consolidated in Warehouse Area only, in specific location as directed by the Owner's Representative. END OF SECTION OP 10) COORDINATION 01040-2 03/12/93 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA SECTION 01045 CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS: A. Definition: "Cutting and patching" includes cutting into existing construction to provide for the installation or performance of other work and subsequent fitting and patching required to restore surfaces to their original condition. 1. "Cutting and patching" is performed for coordination of the work, to uncover work for access or inspection, to obtain samples for testing, to permit alterations to be performed or for other similar purposes. 2. Cutting and patching performed during the manufacture of products, or during the initial fabrication, erection or installation processes is not considered to be "cutting and patching" under this definition. Drilling of holes to install fasteners and similar operations are also not considered to be "cutting and patching." 3.. "Demolition" is recognized as related -but -separate categories of work, which may or may not require cutting and patching as defined in this section; refer -to "Demolition" sections of Division 2. B. Refer to other sections of these specifications for specific cutting and patching requirements and limitations applicable to individual units of work. Unless otherwise specified, requirements of this section apply to mechanical and electrical work. Refer to Division -15 and Division -16 sections for additional requirements and limitations on cutting and patching of mechanical and electrical work. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Requirement for structural work: Do not cut and patch structural work in a manner that would result in a reduction of load -carrying capacity or of load -deflection ratio. B. Operational and safety limitations: Do not cut and patch operational elements or safety related components in a manner that would result in a reduction of their capacity to perform in the manner intended, including energy performance, or that would result in increased maintenance, or decreased operational life or decreased safety. C. Visual requirements: Do not cut and patch work exposed on the building's exterior or in it's occupied spaces, in a manner that would, in the Project Manager's opinion, result in lessening the building's aesthetic qualities. Do not cut and patch work in a manner that would result in substantial visual evidence of cut and patch work. Remove and replace work judged by the Project Manager to be cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Procedural proposal for cutting and patching: Where prior approval of cutting and patching is required, submit proposed procedures for this work well in advance of the time work will be performed and y request approval to proceed. Include the following information, as applicable, in the submittal. CUTTING AND PATCHING 01045-1 01/07/91 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA 1. Describe nature of work and how it is to be performed, indicating why cutting and patching cannot be avoided. Describe anticipated results of the work in terms of changes to existing work, including structural, operational and visual changes as well as other significant elements. 2. List utilities that will be disturbed or otherwise be affected by work, including those that will be relocated and those that will be out -of -service temporarily. Indicate how long utility service will be disrupted. 3. Where cutting and patching of structural work involves the addition of reinforcement, submit details and engineering calculations to show how that reinforcement is integrated with original structure to satisfy requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS: A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, or as directed by the Project Manager, use materials for cutting and patching that are identical to existing materials. If identical materials are not available, or cannot be used, use materials that match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible with regard to visual effect. Use materials for cutting and patching that will result in equal -or -better performance characteristics. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION: A. Before cutting, examine the surfaces to be cut and patched and the conditions under which the work is to be performed. If unsafe or otherwise unsatisfactory conditions are encountered, take corrective action before proceeding with the work. 3.02 PREPARATION: A. Temporary support: To prevent failure, provide temporary support of work to be cut. B. Protection: Protect other work during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for that part of the project they may be exposed during cutting and patching operations. 1. Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. 2. Take precautions not to cut existing pipe, conduit or duct serving the building, but scheduled to be relocated, until provisions have been made to bypass them. 3.03 PERFORMANCE: A. General: Employ skilled workmen to perform cutting and patching work. Except as otherwise indicated or as approved by the Project Manager, proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time and complete work without delay. B. Cutting: Cut the work using methods that are least likely to damage work to be retained or adjoining work. Where possible review proposed procedures with the original installer; comply with original installer's recommendations. CUTTING AND PATCHING 01045-2 01/07/91 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA 1. In general, where cutting is required, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut through concrete and masonry using a cutting machine such as a carborundum saw or core drill to insure a neat hole. Cut holes and slots neatly to size required with minimum disturbance of adjacent work. To avoid marring existing finished surfaces, cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Comply with requirements of applicable sections of Division -2 where cutting and patching requires ' excavating and backfilling. 3. By-pass utility services such as pipe and conduit, before cutting, where such utility services are shown or required to be removed, relocated or abandoned. Cut-off conduit and pipe in walls" or partitions to be removed. After by-pass and cutting, cap valve or plug and seal tight remaining portion of pipe and conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter. C. Patching: Patch with seams which are durable and as invisible as possible. Comply with specified tolerances for the work. 1. Where feasible, inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of work. 2. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and where necessary extend finish restoration into retained adjoining work in a manner which will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. 3. Where removal of walls or partitions extends one finished area into another finished area, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space to provide an even surface of uniform color and appearance. If necessary to achieve uniform color and appearance, remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials. 4. Where patch occurs in a smooth painted surface, extend final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing patch, after patched area has received prime and base coat. 5. Patch, repair or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even plane surface of uniform appearance. 3.04 CLEANING: A. Thoroughly clean areas and spaces where work is performed or used as access to work. Remove completely paint, mortar, oils, putty and items of similar nature. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit and similar features before painting or other finishing is applied. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. END OF SECTION CUTTING AND PATCHING 01045-3 01/07/91 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA SECTION 01300 SUBMITTALS (PREREQUISITES FOR PAYMENT) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Requirements of Divisions 0 and 1 apply to work of this Section. 1.02 SCOPE: This Section establishes certain requirements which must be fulfilled before payments will be made. Refer also to Section 01600, for additional requirements and for retainage. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREREQUISITES TO FIRST PAYMENT: A. Prior to submission of the first request for payment under this Contract, Contractor shall have submitted or performed the items of work listed on the following tabulation and in Paragraph 3.03. PREREQUISITES FOR_FIRST PAY REQUEST 1. List of Subcontractors with address and phone numbers. 2. Construction Progress Schedule. 3. Detailed cost breakdown segregating site work and building, indicating the schedules of prices covering various divisions of the work. 4. Verification of bond coverage (if required by Owner) a. Performance Bond. b. Labor & Material Payment Bond. 5. Certificates of Insurance - showing Owner and Project Manager as additional insured; and holding the Owner and Project Manager harmless from any and all claims for: a. Worker's Compensation with endorsement. b. Contractor's.(Employer's) Liability. C. General Liability with Endorsements/Additions: Bodily Injury - Property Damage - Personal Injury and other items required by Section 05500. d. _ Automobile (Owned/Non-Owned/Hired/Non-Hired): Bodily Injury - Property Damage. e. Excess Liability (Umbrella Form). f. Comprehensive Crime Bond: Employee Dishonesty Limit of Liability. g. Fire and Extended Coverage (Builders Risk) 6. Surveyors Certification that existing grades, utility and property lines, building locations and elevations have been correctly placed. 7. "Coming Soon" sign provided and installed per plans. 8. Contractors Certification that existing grades, utilities, drains, elevations and similar items have been verified to be as shown on drawings. 0 liK Copy of Construction Contract, signed by Owner and Contractor. Contractor's written confirmation that availability of SUBMITTALS (PREREQUISITES FOR PAYMENT) H1A 021003 01300-1 08/06/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA equipment or materials specified including "long lead items" will not cause delay in Construction Progress Schedule. 11. Conditional lien releases for first pay request. Unconditional lien releases are required for subsequent pay requests. 0 3.02 PREREQUISITES TO FINAL PAYMENT: A. Prior to authorization of final payment the following requirements of the Contract Documents shall have been fulfilled: 1. Satisfactory completion of all construction work including Punch List items, and acceptance by the Project Manager, and Owner. 2. Delivery to the Owner or building occupants of the "Certificate of Occupancy" indicating approval by the governing building authorities to occupy the premises for the purposes intended. 3. Submission, by the Contractor to the Owner, of all required written warranties and guarantees and written approvals from governing agencies as issued and as specified. 4. Submission, by the Contractor to the Owner, of "As -Built" drawings completely posted, signed by the General Contractor and the applicable Subcontractors. 5. Submission, by the Contractor to the Owner of an affidavit, sworn to before a Notary Public, stating that all workmen and persons employed, all firms supplying the materials and all Subcontractors upon the project have been paid in full, and that there are no bills outstanding against the project for either labor or material except certain items, if any, to be set .forth in such affidavit covering claims, or items in connection with which notice to withhold has been filed under the provisions of the Statutes of the State of 6. Evidence of closing of lien period without filing of liens. 7. Receipt of lien releases. 8. Consent of surety, if any. 9. Return all available plans and Specifications, with all Addenda and Plan Changes. 10. Submission of a complete listing of the names, addresses and telephone numbers of all principal vendors, Subcontractors and sub -contractors employed on the work. 11. Submission of operating instructions, parts lists and maintenance manuals on all equipment installed in the Building. B. Completion of "Agreement of Final Payment", a copy of which is included within this section. C. "Notice of Completion" shall not be filed before date of both Owner's Preliminary Acceptance of the project (subject to completion of Work and Punch List items) and Owner's Certificate of Substantial Completion. D. Final be 35 days payment shall made after Contractor's recordation of "Notice of Completion", or upon completion of the requirements of SUBMITTALS (PREREQUISITES FOR PAYMENT) 01300-2 H1A 021003 08/06/03 SUBMITTALS (PREREQUISITES FOR PAYMENT) 01300-3 H1A 021003 .08/06/03 �` .'• 'tib �: �•:. CIRCUIT CITY STORES INC. LA QUINTA, CA this Section, whichever is later. 3.03 PREREQUISITES TO ALL PAYMENTS: A. Current and proper record documents are a prerequisite. B. Application to include Owner -approved Change Orders. C. Make application on A.I.A. Form G-702 and G -702a unless otherwise instructed. 1. Submit six signed and notarized copies to the Owner. 2. Provide waiver of mechanics liens statement from each subcontractor for previous payments; copy of release of lien form attached. Also find attached a format of a schedule that is to be used in. conjunction with the lien release form. 3. The Owner will review percentages as noted in the schedule of values. The Contractor shall be responsible for the mathematics or modifications required in Payment Request. D. Soils Engineer's certification that fill and backfill material: 1. Is approved. 2. Is controlled and compacted in accordance with governing agency requirements. SUBMITTALS (PREREQUISITES FOR PAYMENT) 01300-3 H1A 021003 .08/06/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA PREREQUISITES FOR FIRST PAY REQUEST List of Subcontractor with address and phone numbers Construction Progress Schedule Detailed cost breakdown per 01300 indicating the schedules of prices covering various divisions of the work Certification of bond coverage: (1) Performance Bond (2) Labor and Material Payment Bond Certification of Insurance - Showing Owner and Architect as Additional Insured: and holding the Owner and Architect Harmless from any and all claims for: (1) Workers' Compensation with endorsement. (2) Contractor's (Employers' Liability) (3) General Liability with endorsements/additions: Bodily Injury/Property Damage - Personal Injury and requirements of 00550. (4) Automobile (Owned/Non-Owned/Hired/Non-Hired) Z: Bodily Injury - Property Damage (5) Excess Liability (Umbrella Form) (6) Comprehensive Crime Bond: Employee Dishonesty Limit of Liability (7) Fire and Extended Coverage (Builders' Risk) Surveyors Certification indicating that actual locations of property lines, building locations and elevations have been correctly placed. Job signs installed Soils Engineers Certification that: (1) Fill and backfill material is approved by Soils Engineer and governing agencies, if any. (2) Fill and backfill material is controlled and compacted in accordance with Soils Report and governing agency. Contractor's Certification that: Existing grades, utilities, drains, elevations and similar items have been verified to be as shown on drawing. Copy of Construction Contract signed by Owner and Contractor. Contractor's written confirmation that: Availability of equipment or materials specified will not cause delaIL-y in Construction Progress Schedule. SUBMITTALS (PREREQUISITES FOR PAYMENT) 01300-4 H1A 021003 08/06/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA PREREQUISITE FOR FINAL PAYMENT ITEMS NOTED BELOW, AS OCCUR, ARE REQUIRED FOR THIS JOB SPECIFICATION GUARANTEES NO. OF YEAR REQUIRED SECTION AS -BUILT TRANSPARENCIES CERTIFICATION (INDICATE REQUIRED AS -BUILT PRINTS PERIOD VARYING FROM 1 YEAR) • NO. COPIES REQ'D 02282 Termite Control - - - 5 07530 Single Ply Membrane Roofing - - - 10 Additional Warrantee Time (Optional) - - - 5 07531 Single Ply Membrane Roofing Mechanically - - - 10 Fastened Additional Warrantee Time (Optional) - - - 5 07532 Single Ply Membrane Roofing Fully Adhered - - - 10 Additional Warrantee Time (Optional) - - - 5 07900 Joint Sealers - - - 5 08800 Glass and Glazing - - - 5 15400 Plumbing - Materials & Workmanship - - - 1 Water Heater - - - 3 15770 Heating Ventilating and Air Conditioning: A.C. Compressors - - - 5 Heat Exchangers - Roof Top Units - - - 10 Heat Exhangers - Unit Heaters - - 10 16010 Electrical General Provisions 2 1 2 2 NOTES: 1. SUBMIT ALL ITEMS INDICATED TOGETHER AS A PACKAGE WITH A COVER LETTER LISTING THE MATERIAL ENCLOSED. 2. GUARANTEES, WARRANTIES AND CERTIFICATES SHALL BE DATED FROM TIME OF PRELIMINARY ACCEPTANCE. PROVIDE THREE COPIES UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. -SUBMITTALS (PREREQUISITES FOR PAYMENT) H1A 021003 01300-5 08/06/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA AGREEMENT OF FINAL PAYMENT This Agreement is made as of the day of , 20 between Circuit City Stores, Inc. ("Owner") and ("Contractor"). WHEREAS, Owner and Contractor entered into a document entitled "Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor" (the "Contract"), dated 20 for improvements to be constructed at: (the "Project" WHEREAS, Contractor has substantially completed the Project, subject only to the following: WHEREAS, Owner and Contractor desire to enter into a final accounting on the Project: NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the mutual covenants herein contained, the parties hereto do hereby agree as follows: 1. Contract Sum. The original contract sum for the Project under the aforementioned Contract was change orders was , of which and total amount of has been paid by Owner to Contractor to date. The balance of (the "Balance") is to be paid by Owner upon Contractor's execution of and performance of obligations contained in this Agreement. 2. Final Payment. Contractor acknowledges and affirms that upon being paid the Balance herewith, it has been paid in full for the Project, including all claims for change orders, unanticipated work, and all items of material and labor incurred by it, whether heretofore invoiced to Contractor by its suppliers and subcontractors or not, it being the intent hereof that Owner shall have no obligation whatsoever to make any further payments to Contractor on account of the Project and Contractor's obligations under the Contract. Contractor, by its execution hereof, hereby unconditionally waives and releases its lien on the Project. SUBMITTALS (PREREQUISITES FOR PAYMENT) 01300-6 H1A 021003 08/06/03 0) v •Nr `CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA ••3.• Lien Waivers. Attached hereto are duly executed waivers of lien for all major subcontractors and material suppliers (i.e., those whose contract sum - exceeds $10,000.00) which cover all items of material and labor supplied to the Project and acknowledge receipt of full and final payment. For all major subcontractors and material suppliers for whom a waiver of lien is not attached, s Contractor hereby authorizes Owner to subtract the amounts owed such subcontractors and suppliers from the Balance and issue to Contractor check(s) in such amounts payable jointly to Contractor and the major subcontractors or suppliers. Contractor agrees that such check or checks in joint name shall be deemed the equivalent of payment directly to Contractor for purposes of computing the appropriate amount of the balance. 4. Indemnity. Contractor agrees to pay in full, or otherwise satisfy in full, all subcontractors and suppliers of material for the Project for all materials and equipment furnished, for all work, labor and services performed, and for -all known indebtedness and claims against the Contractor, including any claims for damages arising in any manner in connection with the Project, for which the Owner might in any way be held responsible or which may affect title to the Project. Contractor agrees to indemnify and hold harmless Owner, its agents, employees and successors in interest, from and against all claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys' fees, arising out of or resulting from the obligations contained in the Contract and this Agreement. 5. No Bar. The making of final payment hereunder by Owner shall in no way constitute a waiver of any of Owner's claims against Contractor whether for unsettled liens, "punch list" items, faulty or defective work, failure of work to comply with the Contract Documents, product liability, or the terms of any warranties.' 6. Conflict. If any of the provisions of this Agreement shall conflict with any of the provisions of the Contract, or its related or incorporated documents, such conflict shall be resolved in every instance in favor of the provisions of this Agreement. iA^!K'4Y 7. Changes. This Agreement may not be terminated, altered, waived, changed or SUBMITTALS (PREREQUISITES FOR PAYMENT) 01300-7 H1A 021003 08/06/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA modified in any way on behalf of the Owner except by an instrument in writing executed by the party against which enforcement of the termination, alteration, waiver, change or modification is asserted. 8. Governing Law. This agreement shall be deemed to be a Virginia contract and shall be construed and enforced in accordance with the laws of the of 9. Headings. The headings appearing in this Agreement are intended for convenience of reference, and are not to be considered in construing this instrument. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have caused this Agreement to be executed as of the day and year first above written. OWNER: CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. By CONTRACTOR: By DIRECTOR OF CONSTRUCTION: SEAN EASTER AS-BUILTS IN OFFICE: JOE FREEZE MAINTENANCE MANUALS IN OFFICE: BUD VYE SUBMITTALS (PREREQUISITES FOR PAYMENT) 01300-8 H1A 021003 08/06/03 �-1 017 40) CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA INSERT TWO SAMPLE FORMS HERE - (FORMS ARE NOT ON DISK - HARD COPIES ONLY) PLEASE REFER TO THE HARD COPY OF SPECIFICATION AND INSERT SAMPLE FORMS HERE. t SUBMITTALS (PREREQUISITES FOR PAYMENT) H1A 021003 01300-9 08/06/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA SECTION 01310 CRITICAL PATH SCHEDULE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. The General Contractor shall prepare a Computerized Critical Path Network Schedule according to Article 28 of the General Conditions and this section. General Contractor payment will be withheld until requirements of this section are fully met. Network schedule shall be kept up-to-date in accordance with the requirements of this section and utilized in planning, coordinating, and performing the work under this contract. B. The level of detail and breakdown of work activities shall be no less than the "Circuit City Prototype Schedule" issued with the Bid Documents. A diskette with the Prototype Schedule will be issued with the Letter of Intent to the successful contractor. 1.02 REQUIREMENTS A. General Requirements t 1. Personnel preparing Computerized CPM Progress Schedule shall be qualified and experienced in Critical Path Method (CPM) scheduling using Primavera Project Planner or Primavera SureTrak Project Manager and capable of fulfilling the requirements of this section including the preparation and production of network diagrams and computer-generated reports. The Contractor shall either hire a consultant to prepare and maintain the schedule or, if qualified may perform these f< services with his own organization. Contractor shall provide documentation of scheduling experience to the Owner for approval. 2. The Approved Critical Path Schedule shall be in the field office trailer. 3. The approved Critical Path Schedule will become PP part of the contract document and will be used by the Owner to track the progress of the work. Claims, disputes or decisions regarding the progress of the work will be considered in light of the impact to the Critical Path. Responsibility for developing the Schedule and monitoring actual progress as compared to the Contract completion. date rests with the Contractor. Inaccuracies or omissions in the Schedule, even though approved by the Owner, do not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for accomplishing the Work in a timely fashion in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Contractor warrants that the Schedule is the Contractor's committed plan to complete the Work within the Contract time and the Contractor assumes full responsibility for the execution of the Work as indicated. 4. The time of completion of the Project and each milestone shall adhere to the start and finish times in Notice to Proceed, unless Contractor requests and Owner approves in writing an earlier (advanced) time of completion. Approval of such request shall be entirely at Owner's discretion. 5. Include the listed tracking milestones below in the Schedule. Owner will monitor progress based on these milestones. 6. Any submitted schedule showing negative float shall be rejected. CRITICAL PATH SCHEDULE 01310-1 0797 P.A. NO. 303 07/30/96 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA 7. All cost for preparing, printing, mailing of all schedules (Baseline Schedule, Updated Schedules, and Recovery Schedules) shall be part of Contractor's base bid. 8. All requirements of Baseline Schedule below shall also apply to Updated and Recovery Schedules. B. Baseline Schedule Requirement 1. Schedule shall include activities for, but not limited to, all the applicable activities provided in the Schedule Prototype. Contractor shall include all items specific to the actual project. Contractor shall also include all Owner Action Required Items given in the Schedule Prototype. 2. Maximum duration of any construction related work task shall not exceed five working days. Any task longer than five working days shall be broken into smaller tasks to meet this requirement. 3. Activity Codes - The following activity codes and corresponding character widths are required (these date structures are set up and provided with the Prototype Schedule on diskette): PROC (Procedures) - 4 characters, DIV (CSI Division) - 2 characters, LOC (Location of Const Activity) - 4 characters, MILE (Milestones) - 3 characters, VAR (Variance) - 1 character, VARP (Variance to Prototype) - 1 character, VARB (Variance to Baseline) - 1 character. The total character positions used are 16 (Sixteen). If the contractor desires to set up additional activity codes, they shall begin with character position 17 (Seventeen). MILE, VAR, VARP and VARB are reserved for Owner's use. These activity codes and milestones are dictated by the Owner and are not to be changed in any way. Any needed change must be approved in writing by the Owner prior to the change. CODE. VALUE CODE TITLE a. PROC (Procedure) Currently Not Used b. DIV (CSI Division) 01 General Provisions 02 Site Work 03 Concrete 04 Masonry 05 Steel 06 Wood & Plastic 07 Thermal & Moisture Protection 08 Doors & Windows 09 Finishes 10 Specialities 11 Equipment 12 Furnishings 13 Special Construction 14 Conveyances 15 Mechanical 16 Electrical CRITICAL PATH SCHEDULE 01310-2 0797 P.A. NO. 303 07/30/96 0-0 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA 4. Activity ID - The following Activity ID and corresponding character widths are required: Character spaces 1 and 2 are for Subproject ID, a two -character alpha designation that will be provided by Owner. The provided Subproject ID shall be used with all activity ID's, the Owner will use this as a basis of monitoring projects. Character spaces 3, 4, 5, and 6 shall not be used by the Contractor; these character 7, 8, 9, } and 10 shall be used by the Contractor for numbering of work t activities. The following monitoring milestones (also referenced under Activity Codes) shall have the unique numeric destinations in character spaces 7, 8, 9, and 10 for the purpose of monitoring by Owner: 9001 Notice to Proceed 9002 Foundation Started 9003 Exterior Walls Started 9004 Slab on Grade Started 9005 Structural Steel Started 9006 Foundation Complete 9007 Exterior Walls Complete 9008 Slab on Grade Complete 9009 Roof Framing & Decking Delivery 9010 Building Dried -In 9011 Telephone Equipment Room Ready 9012 ACT Grid @ Sales Complete 9013 Warehouse Ready for Racks 9014 Ready for Fixtures 9015 Project Complete 5. The Tracking Milestones shall be fully integrated into the schedule using relationships in such a manner that the activity or activities that are associated with the particular milestone cannot start or be delayed without the milestone being started or delayed. 6. Do not use constraints on any activity or milestone. Do not constrain the completion date of the project. Limit the use of Lag (Planned Delay) to the extent necessary to accurately represent relationships between activities that. have work progressing simultaneously. Lag shall not be used in lieu of logical relationships to posit`i'on an activity in the schedule. CRITICAL PATH SCHEDULE 01310-3 0797 P.A. NO. 303 07/30/96 C. LOC (Location of Construction) SITE Site Work SLAB Foundation, Slab & Underslab Work SHEL Building Envelope (Shell, Structure & Ext. Finishes) INTR` All Building Interior Work d. MILE (Tracking Milestones) MO1 Notice to Proceed M02 Foundation Started M03 Exterior Walls Started M04 Slab on Grade Started M05 Structural Steel Started M06 Foundation Complete M07 Exterior Walls Complete M08 Slab on Grade Complete M09 Roof Framing & Decking Delivery M10 Building Dried -In M11 Telephone Equipment Room Ready M12 ACT Grid @ Sales Complete M13 Warehouse Ready for Racks M14 Ready for Fixtures M15 Project Complete 4. Activity ID - The following Activity ID and corresponding character widths are required: Character spaces 1 and 2 are for Subproject ID, a two -character alpha designation that will be provided by Owner. The provided Subproject ID shall be used with all activity ID's, the Owner will use this as a basis of monitoring projects. Character spaces 3, 4, 5, and 6 shall not be used by the Contractor; these character 7, 8, 9, } and 10 shall be used by the Contractor for numbering of work t activities. The following monitoring milestones (also referenced under Activity Codes) shall have the unique numeric destinations in character spaces 7, 8, 9, and 10 for the purpose of monitoring by Owner: 9001 Notice to Proceed 9002 Foundation Started 9003 Exterior Walls Started 9004 Slab on Grade Started 9005 Structural Steel Started 9006 Foundation Complete 9007 Exterior Walls Complete 9008 Slab on Grade Complete 9009 Roof Framing & Decking Delivery 9010 Building Dried -In 9011 Telephone Equipment Room Ready 9012 ACT Grid @ Sales Complete 9013 Warehouse Ready for Racks 9014 Ready for Fixtures 9015 Project Complete 5. The Tracking Milestones shall be fully integrated into the schedule using relationships in such a manner that the activity or activities that are associated with the particular milestone cannot start or be delayed without the milestone being started or delayed. 6. Do not use constraints on any activity or milestone. Do not constrain the completion date of the project. Limit the use of Lag (Planned Delay) to the extent necessary to accurately represent relationships between activities that. have work progressing simultaneously. Lag shall not be used in lieu of logical relationships to posit`i'on an activity in the schedule. CRITICAL PATH SCHEDULE 01310-3 0797 P.A. NO. 303 07/30/96 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA 7. Acceptance of Contractor's Baseline Schedule by the Owner will be based solely upon the Schedule's compliance with Contract requirements. After acceptance, the Baseline Schedule shall be used for the basis of measuring progress of subsequent schedule updates. C. Updated Schedule(s) 1. Each update shall show all Work activities including those already completed. These completed activities shall accurately reflect Aas-built@ information by indicating when activities were actually started and completed. 2. Actual starts and finishes, remaining duration, or percent complete shall not be automatically updated by default dates (except that early start that have not started can default to Atime now@ (date of update)). 3. Activities shall not be shown as having started if no progress has been achieved. (i.e. actual start with 0% complete) 4. Activities which have posted progress without predecessors activities being completed shall be allowed only on a case by case approval by the Owner, which may require logic changes to correct all such out of sequence progress. D. Recovery Schedule (Revised Baseline Schedule) 1. Contractor shall submit to Owner a revised Baseline Schedule showing how it is intended to reschedule activities to regain compliance with Contract milestones and completion dates. a. If progress indicated in an Updated Schedule shows slippage of more than fourteen (14) calendar days when compared to the current approved Baseline Schedule critical path, Contractor shall prepare a revised Baseline Schedule showing how it is intended to reschedule activities to regain compliance with Contract milestones and completion dates. b. A Contract Modification that affects the completion date of the sequence of activities. C. Delay on a non-critical activity, changes the course of the critical path. d. The Contractor changes his plan to the extent that it is not consistent with as -planned activities on the current accepted Construction Schedule. 2. Contractor shall identify any schedule that is being submitted as a Recovery Schedule and request Owner's review and approval as projects' revised Baseline Schedule. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit all schedules on a 3-1/2" High Density, MS-DOS computer disk and hard copy. B. At each Progress Meeting, submit for discussion a Gantt Chart schedule of work for the past weeks work and next three weeks. 0) CRITICAL PATH SCHEDULE 01310-4 0797 P.A. NO. 303 07/30/96 �i CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 HARDWARE/SOFTWARE A. Contractor or his scheduling consultant shall have and utilize his own licensed copy of the following software of the version number stated, or higher: Primavera Project Planner, Version 5.1 DOS Primavera Project Planner for Windows, Version 1.0 SureTrak Project Manager for Windows, Version 1.0 B. Alternate scheduling programs will not be considered. PART 3 - EXECUTION A. Submit the initial Baseline Schedule within 20 days of Notice to Proceed. Owner will review initial schedule and return review copy within 10 days after receipt. Incorporate any review comments made by the Owner and obtain approval for the schedule prior to the first Application for Payment or first required schedule update submittal. B. Updated Schedules shall be submitted on a twice -monthly basis after acceptance of Baseline Schedule through to Project Completion. Every other Updated Schedule should be submitted with payment request. All Updated Schedules shall be delivered to Owner by overnight mail service. C. Recovery Schedules shall be submitted within five calendar days after the time that either Owner or Contractor discover Schedule slippage per 1.02D. CRITICAL PATH SCHEDULE 0797 P.A. NO. 303 END OF SECTION 01310-5 07/30/96 • CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA SECTION 01340 SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES & SUBMITTALS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Requirements of Divisions 0 and 1 apply to work of this Section. 1.02 SCOPE: The provisions of this Section amend Article 4.12, Shop Drawings and Samples, of AIA General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, by establishing submittal procedures for shop drawings and samples required by various technical sections of the specifications. Submittals made by the General Contractor that are not specifically requested may, at the Project Manager's discretion, be returned without review. The Contractor is encouraged to provide a written "Letter of Intent" where the Contractor intends to provide, without deviation, specified materials, i.e. painting, wiring devices, plumbing fixtures, HVAC units, etc. 1.03 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: A. Prior to submission to Project Manager, all shop drawings, brochures, and other submission construction data shall be checked for quantity, size and dimensions by Contractor's personnel especially assigned for this purpose. Project Manager will answer questions raised by the Contractor or his subcontractors and will make all determinations regarding quality of materials and equipment, design and arrangement 'decisions and color selections, but will not be responsible for quantity, size or dimensional errors on shop drawings. In cases of omissions and obvious error and in cases of conflict, either between details on contract drawings, or specifications, such questions shall be called to Project Manager's attention and the Project Manager shall give prompt answers to such questions. All shop drawings and product submittals shall be made ` within 45 days of award of contract except all Concrete Mix Designs shall be made within 7 days of award of contract, and all Structural and Miscellaneous Steel, including Concrete Reinforcing shall be made within 21 days of award of contract. B.. Contractor shall carefully review Subcontractors submittals for completeness and correctness and acknowledge such review on submittals prior to transmitting to the Project Manager for his review. The Contractor will be responsible for payment of additional reviews required due to rejection of inaccurate or "noncomplying" submittals and multiple reviews due to incomplete or insufficient submittals. C. Close adherence to the requirements noted hereinbefore is required to avoid delays in the processing of the shop drawings by the Project Manager. Deviation from these requirements may result in rejection of the submittal. Contractor will be held responsible for the delays resulting from an improper submittal. D. Obtain approvals from required agencies prior to submittal to Project Manager. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. Shop drawings: 1. One transparent ozalid reproducible. 2. Five blueline prints - Bound in sequence. B. Brochures/Materials Lists/Specifications/Concrete Mix Designs: SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES & SUBMITTALS 01340-1 H1D 080603 08/06/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA 1. Six sets each - Bound in sequence. C. Samples: 1. Two each unless additional samples are requested by Owner. Clients requirements may increase quantity of samples of drawings to be submitted. 1.05 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES: A. All submittals shall be identified with the job name and location and shall be reviewed, stamped with approximately 3" x 1-1/2" identification stamp and signed approved by the Contractor prior to submission to the Project Manager. Each sheet of Drawings, both prints and transparencies, shall be so identified and signed. Any submittals received by the Project Manager without the required approval signature from the Contractor will be returned to the Contractor and the Contractor shall bear the responsibility for any delays incurred. Reviewed by: GENERAL CONTR. NAME JOB NAME JOB LOCATION Reviewed by CONTRACTOR'S NAME JOB NAME B. Bound sets of brochures, catalog sheets, specifications and materials lists shall include an index sheet completely identifying the entire contents of the submittal in sequential order. The Contractor may identify, stamp and sign only this index sheet at his option. C. In lieu of signing each brochure or specification sheet, the Contractor may indicate on the letter of transmittal that he has reviewed and approved all the material included. This does not eliminate the requirement for identification stamp information. Contractor shall send submittals to the Project Manager with a completed letter of transmittal indicating materials sent, required response time, and date sent. A copy of this letter of transmittal shall be sent to the Owner's Project Manager. D. Project Manager will return to the Contractor one copy of the ozalid transparency, two brochures and prints, stamped and signed with the corrections, if any. E. Resubmittals shall be handled the same as original submittals, but identified as such and bearing the Project Manager's original Shop Drawings number. F. Each submittal shall be accompanied by letter of transmittal containing a complete itemized and numbered list of the submitted material together with the subcontractor's name. Separate letters of transmittal shall accompany each submittal from different Subcontractors and different categories (trades and building units). G. Shop drawing submittals shall be segregated and submitted separately for each building unit comprising the entire project. The submittals shall be made as though each building unit and the site is a separate project and the submittal procedures to be as indicated heretofore. H. All submittals shall be forwarded to the office of the Project Manager. SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES & SUBMITTALS 01340-2 H1D 080603 08/06/03 • 0) 0) .k CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA I. Contractor Penalty: The sprinkler contractor will issue a credit to Circuit City Stores, Inc. for all shop drawing reviews required beyond the first two submissions. The dollar amount credit for each subsequent review will have the following value: ♦ 4 e 1. Third Review = $500 2. Fourth Review = $1,000 3. Fifth and each subsequent Review = $2,000 1.06 SAMPLES: A. Labeling: Identify each sample with at least a 3" x 4" label with the following information: 1. Complete identification stamp information in accordance with submittal procedure 1.05.A. 2. Name, finish and composition of material. 3. Location or intended use on the project. B. Size of samples: Provide samples of sufficient size to show all salient features of the material or item, and which are truly representative of the extremes of variation in color, texture, finish and construction to be expected in the installed work. Samples of framing materials shall include a corner joint. Samples to be large enough to receive the aforementioned label in addition to Project Manager's 3" x 5" label. SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES & SUBMITTALS 01340-3 H1D 080603 08/06/03 C. Mock-ups: Various specifications sections may require mock-ups of proposed construction elements using actual materials and full-size components. Such mock-ups shall be included in the Contract sum. D. Review of samples: Upon review, the samples will be stamped or labeled to indicate review and one of the samples returned to the Contractor. The reviewed sample retained by the Project Manager will constitute the standard of quality and appearance of all materials of the type represented by the samples to be installed. In the event samples are rejected, the Contractor will be given the reasons for rejection and he shall re -submit samples until acceptance is obtained. E. At the option of the Owner or Project Manager, samples will be subject to testing, and in such event additional samples as may be required shall be supplied by the Contractor at no additional cost. 1.07 SUBMITTALS REQUIRED OF GENERAL CONTRACTOR The following is a list of items to be submitted to the Owner's Representative as a part of the Contract requirements. Submittal of a Bid Proposal constitutes an acknowledgment of these requirements. A. Copy of signed Construction Contract B.. Copy of Highway Department Permits (if applicable) C. Copy of Insurance Certificates required under Article of the General Conditions prior to moving on the construction site D. Schedule of cost per Division E. F. Work Progress schedule per Division Physical Samples of Materials Per U ision G. Record Drawings SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES & SUBMITTALS 01340-3 H1D 080603 08/06/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA H. Permits and Certificates: 1. Building 2. Electrical 3. Plumbing 4. Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning I. Subcontractor Listing J. Shop Drawings to include but not limited to the following: 1. Termite Control (letter of guarantee) - Verify necessity with Circuit City Representative. 2. Site Work 3. Reinforcing Steel 4. Tilt Up Panels 5. Concrete Unit Masonry 6. Unit Masonry 7. Structural Steel 8. Steel Joist Girders 9. Steel Joists 10. Metal Roof Deck 11. Cold -formed Metal -Framing 12. Metal Fabrications 13. Interior Architectural Woodwork 14. Miscellaneous Building Insulation 15. Preformed Metal Panels 16. Single Ply Membrane Roofing (Ballasted) 17. Single Ply Membrane Roofing Mechanically Fastened 18. Single Ply Membrane Roofing Fully Adhered 19. Flashing and Sheet Metal 20. Roof Accessories 21. Joint Sealers 22. Overhead Coiling Doors (Fire Shutters) 23. Overhead Coiling Doors 24. Overhead Coiling Grilles 25. Sectional Overhead Doors 26. Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES & SUBMITTALS 01340-4 H1D 080603 08/06/03 "CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA 27. All Glass Doors 28. Automatic Entrance Doors 29. Glass and Glazing 30. Painting 31. Toilet Partitions 32.. Interior Signage 33. Pass -Through Receiver 34. Loading Dock Equipment 35. Window Treatment 36. Floor Mats 37. Plumbing Fixtures 38. Fire Sprinkler 39. H.V.A.C. Equipment 40. Electrical General Provisions 41. Outlet and Floor Boxes 42. Wiring Devices 43. Service Panelboards 44. Panelboards 45. Safety -Switches 46. -Grounding 47. Transformers 48. Fire Alarm Systems 49. Energy Management Systems 50. Site Lighting K. Certificate of Occupancy L. Contractor Guarantee (warranty book) to include but not limited to: 1. A through K above 2. Concrete 3. Roofing 4. Sheet metal work 5. Dampproofing and waterproofing 6. Caulking and sealants 7. Roof hatches 8.' Hollow metal door and frames 9. -Carpeting SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES & SUBMITTALS H1D 080603 01340-5 08/06/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA 10. Sheet vinyl flooring 11. Toilet Partitions 12. Toilet Accessories 13. Fire extinguishers 14. Loading dock equipment 15. H.V.A.C. a. Roof top units (with five (5) year warranty) b. Auto temperature control C. Equipment (duct, grilles, damper, gas heater) d. Air balance 16. Plumbing fixture cuts 17. Fire protection system (with certificate) 18. Electrical (all materials and fixtures used) 1.08 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (R.F.I.) A. The contractor shall electronically post all requests for information using the attached Request for Information form on the Circuit City Web Site. All information shown on the RFI form must be clearly identified. Incomplete RFI's will not be acted on by the Project Manager. The contractor is responsible for assigning sequential RFI numbers. The contractor shall notify the Project Manager of all RFI numbers that are not directed to the Project Manager. The contractor shall contact the Project Manager in order to confirm receipt of the RFI by the Project Manager if the contractor has not received a response within 24 hours after posting the RFI. END OF SECTION SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES & SUBMITTALS 01340-6 HID 080603 08/06/03 STORES, INC. Circuit City Submittal Log Project: Pmlact Numbak- c 0 CD o •� it a CL co Section Name/Submittal Item aSi — d E w H T E y F a CM C f0 rtf O O � 0 a a Receive t ami i5 Date Date 0 a U 0, Returned Resub. Resub. Status Received Returned Comments 00840 Warranty Manual 1 Warranty Manual 01045 Cutting and Patching 2 Procedural Proposal 01300 Submittals (Prerequisites for Payment) 3 Refer to Lists & Schedule. 01310 Critical Path Schedule 4 Schedule to Owner 01340 Shop Dw s, Samples, & Submittals 5 Refer to Submittal Lists. 01400 Quality Control 6 Reports 01700 Contract Closeout 7 Closeout Documents 02200 Earthwork for Buildings 8 Test Reports - Sitework(per 01340 Pavement loint la out 9 Form liners 10 02282 Soil Treatment(Termite Control 11 X X 03300 Cast -in -Place Concrete I Test Reports Reinforcing Steel 12 X Concrete 13 X 03470 Tilt -up Panels 14 X X X Test Reports H1A 021003 LA 0 A, CA 01340-7 08/06/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. Circuit City Submittal Log Project: Drnleef Number, c O m U) 01 Q (0 Section Name/Submittal Item aEi E j. V co N CD c '� P g c io c Q Y C3 is N n a v O Receive t o x Date Date 0) o- V 0 2. Returned Resub. Resub. Status Received Returned Comments 04200 Concrete Unit Masonry Masonry Units 15 X Cement Products 16 X X Reinforcement & Accessories 17 X X 04201 Unit Masonry Masonry Units 18 X Cement Products 19 1XIX Reinforcement & Accessories 20 X X 05120 Structural Steel 21 X X Design Calc's if request 05210 Steel Joist Girders 22 X X Design Calc's if requested) 05220 Steel Joists 23 X X jDesIgn Calc's if requested) 05300 Metal Roof Deck 24 X X 05400 Cold -Formed Metal -Framing 25 X X 05500 Metal Fabrications 26 X X 06402 Interior Architectural Woodwork 27 X X X 07200 Miscellaneous Building Insulation 28 X X MSDS 07240 Exterior Insulation and Finish System 29 X X X X Test Reports 07410 Preformed Metal Panels 30 X Warranty 07530 Single -Ply Membrane Rf Loose Ld 31 X X Warranty 07531 Single -Ply Membrane Rf Mech Fast 32 X X Warranty 07532 Single -Ply Membrane Rf Full Adh 33 X X Warranty 07600 Flashing and Sheet Metal 34 X X 07700 Roof Accessories 35 X X 07900 Joint Sealers 36 X LA QUINTA, CA 10 9/1 H1A OZ'i-�.r13 / 06/03 CIRC ,WTY STORES, INC. Circuit City Submittal Log Project: H1A 021003 LA �, CA 01340-9 08/06/03 Section Name/Submittal Item •. a Resub. -A Returned MINIM MINIM m • _ -.. - m1111111111��1©113111�111�111�� MEN! EM MEN■■ .: ®llllllll��l©1131111�1111�1111�� OEM v 0111111111111111 111O7�_�_I©�� NO MENE■�� MEN! MM MENEM NINE MINE OEM .: • ' • • _ lll�lll��l©113111�111�111�� MEN! ��■t■�� MINE MINIM H1A 021003 LA �, CA 01340-9 08/06/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. Circuit City Submittal Log Project: Prolect Number: 0 o d V) Section Name/Submittal ItemCL m= 2 — m E N n F g c co 3 is y O ;c� a ayi CLI Receive t � ami � Date Date W o_ v Returned Resub. Resub. Status Received Returned Comments 15000 Mechanical Requirements 47 O /Maint Instr. 15100 General Mechanical Requirements 48 Rec Dw s; O /Maint Instr. 15400 Plumbing 49 X 15500 Sprinkler Systems 50 X X X Calc's 15770 Heatin . Ventilating & Air Conditioning 51 X X Air Balance Report O /Maint Man'I; 's Cert'd Test Readings Rec Dw s 16010 Electrical General Provisions 52 X X Rec Dw s; O /Maint Instr 16130 Outlet & Floor Boxes X 16140 Wiring Devices X Wtv Man'[ 16160 Service Panelboard 53 X 16165 Panelboards 54 X 16170 Safety Switches X 16450 Grounding 55 Test Proc's & Results 16460 Transformers X to Owner 16500 Ughting 56 16700 Fire Alarm System 57 X Wiring Diagrams O /Maint Instr Inst/Service Certification 16710 Energy Management System 58 System Documentation Site Lighting X LA QUINTA, CA i 40-10 H1A 3 0/06/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. i'._5, LA QUINTA, CA SECTION01400 QUALITY ASSURANCE TESTING AND INSPECTION PART 1 - GENERAL. 1.01 REQUIREMENTS FOR QUALITY ASSURANCE TESTING AND INSPECTIONS A. The Owner will employ and pay ,for the services of an independent testing agency to provide certain quality assurance testing and inspections as enumerated in these specifications. The scope of the quality assurance testing to be provided by the owner are described in the following quality assurance testing and inspection proposal breakdown pages. All other testing or inspections shall be employed and paid for by the general contractor as noted in paragraph 1.01 B below. The testing agency shall be licensed in the state where the structure is located and shall meet the requirements of "Recommended Practices for Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete, Steel, and Bituminous Materials as Used in Construction" (ASTM E329). All testing and inspections shall be performed under the supervision of an engineer registered in the state where the structure is located. B. The Contractor will employ and pay for the services of an independent testing agency to provide other quality assurance testing and inspections as enumerated in these specifications. The testing agency shall be licensed in the state where the structure is located and shall meet the requirements of "Recommended Practices for Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete, Steel, and Bituminous Materials as Used in Construction" (ASTM E329). All testing and inspections shall be performed under the supervision of an engineer registered in the state where the structure is located. C. Materials and operations shall be tested and inspected as the work progresses. Failure to detect any defective work or material shall not in any way prevent later rejection when such defect is discovered nor shall it obligate the Owner's Representative for final acceptance. D.- The testing agency shall report all test and inspection results to the Project Manager, Owner and Contractor immediately after they are performed. All test and inspection reports shall be signed and sealed by an engineer registered in the state where the structure is located and shall include the exact location in the work represented by the test. E. At the completion of all work, the testing agency shall submit a quality assurance certification (control inspection report for site work, concrete, masonry, structural steel, etc.) signed and sealed by an engineer registered in the state where the structure is located, stating that all work subject to quality assurance testing and inspections has been constructed in accordance with the contract documents and all other applicable code requirements. Submit a quality assurance certification for each specifications section requiring quality assurance testing and inspections on the attached form. F. The testing agency and its representatives are not authorized to revoke, alter, relax, enlarge or release any requirement of the contract documents, approve or, accept any portion of the work, perform any duties of the Contractor, or be a party to scheduling of work. G. The contractor shall notify the testing agency and the Owner's Representative a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all structural steel operations and all reasonable facilities shall be made available for technicians. H. Records of inspection shall be kept available to the building QUALITY ASSURANCE TESTING AND INSPECTION 01400-1 H1A 021003 08/06/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA official during progress of work for two years after completion of the project. Records shall be preserved by the testing agency. I. Testing agency personnel shall have their time sheets signed by an authorized representative of the contractor. Copies of signed time sheets must be submitted with all invoices for payment. J. Professional Liability, General Liability and Worker's Compensation Insurance are required. Minimum coverage for Professional Liability Insurance is $500,000. 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK OF QUALITY ASSURANCE TESTING AND INSPECTION A. The specification sections requiring quality assurance testifig and inspections are shown in Schedule A (updated with each project). Specific requirements are shown in the project specifications for each section. B. Furnish all labor, materials, tools and supplies, and perform operations in connection with quality assurance testing and inspections. 1.03 SURVEILLANCE BY A LOCAL PROFESSIONAL A. Where required by local or state code or authority, the contractor shall retain an Architect or Civil Engineer, licensed in the state, to provide construction surveillance and final sign off of the project. 0) QUALITY ASSURANCE TESTING AND INSPECTION 01400-2 H1A 021003 08/06/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES INC. - LA QUINTA, CA PROPOSAL BREAKDOWN (page 1) PROJECT: LOCATION: I. GRADING AND SITEWORK Site Monitoring - "On-call" basis monitoring of site preparation and fill placement, review of compaction procedures, monitoring of utility installation, checking soil moisture, determining percent compaction, etc. 1. In -Place Density Tests (Level II or III Technician or Engineer) a. Mass Grading estimated visits @ $ per visit $ b. Standard Compaction Tests (Proctor or Nuclear Density) estimated tests @ $ per test or hours @ $ per hour $ 2. Subgrade Evaluation for footings, foundation belled piers, foundation walls, grade beams and slabs (other than pile -supported foundations) (Staff Engineer or ) estimated visits @ $ per visit or hours @ $ per hour $ 3. Backfill for Utility Lines and Above Foundations estimated visits @ $ per visit or hours @ $ per hour $ ,QUALITY ASSURANCE TESTING AND INSPECTION 01400-3 H1A 021003 08/06/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA PROPOSAL BREAKDOWN (page 2) 4. Pavement -Asphalt Surface and Graded Aggregate Base Course (if required) Inspection of asphalt placement and compaction, measurement of thickness, temperature, in-place density testing and sampling of mix for physical testing. a. In-place density testing of base course estimated visits @ $ per visit or hours @ $ per hour $ b. Modified Proctor Test estimated visits @ $ per visit $ C. Marshall Stability and Flow Test estimated tests @ $ per tests $ d. Extraction and gradation estimated tests @ $ per tests $ e. Engineering Report Review ( Engineer) estimated hours @ $ per hour $ SUBTOTAL SITEWORK TESTING $ II. CONCRETE Field Testing: May include sampling and testing fresh concrete for slump, reinforcing steel installation, forms, air content, unit weight (if required), molding and transporting test specimens to laboratory, and concrete compression testing. 1. Site Concrete Testing and Placement Evaluation (Level II Technician) a. Piers, tiltwall and other small pours estimated pours @ $ per pour or hours @ $ per hour $ QUALITY ASSURANCE TESTING AND INSPECTION 01400-4 H1A 021003 08/06/03 ''CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA PROPOSAL BREAKDOWN (page 3) ., b. Slabs: On -Grade, or other . Ad estimated pours @ $ per pour or hours @ $ per hour $ C. Cylinder pick-up when not on-site for other work estimated trips @ $ per trip $ 2. Concrete Compression Testing est. cylinders @ $ per cylinder $ 3. Engineering Report Review ( Engineer) estimated hours @ $ per visit $ SUBTOTAL CONCRETE TESTING $ III. STRUCTURAL -STEEL, BAR JOIST AND DECKING Erection Evaluation: Evaluation of any or all of the following, as established by project specifications: material storage conditions, column alignment, elevation verification, bolt hole alignment and bolt torque, welds by visual techniques, steel decking, built-up roofs, prime coat touch-up and/or final painting. 1. Erection Evaluation.of Structural Steel and Bar Joists estimated visits @ $ per visit or hours @ $ per hour $ 2. Engineering Report Review ( Engineer) estimated hours @ $ per hour $ SUBTOTAL STRUCT. STEEL TESTING $ TOTAL ALL TESTING QUALITY ASSURANCE TESTING AND INSPECTION 01400-5 H1A 021003 08/06/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA FOR: PROJECT: LOCATION: NAME: ADDRESS: CONTROLLED INSPECTION REPORT DATE: ,20 Professional Engineer or Registered Architect City State Zip Code I, have assumed responsibility for the inspection work designated above. I personally, or qualified personnel under my direct supervision, did perform the required inspections and tests; and all required inspection and test reports signed by me and tests are substantially in compliance to quantity required by project specifications. SIGNATURE: Supervising Engineer or Architect DATE: , 20 It is my professional opinion that: G All inspected material and work conforms to all applicable requirements. G All inspected material and work conforms to all applicable requirements, except as described below: SIGNATURE: DATE: , 20 Professional Engineer or Architect QUALITY ASSURANCE TESTING AND INSPECTION 01400-6 H1A 021003 08/06/03 1) •CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA SCHEDULE A SPECIFICATION SECTIONS AND DRAWINGS REQUIRING QUALITY ASSURANCE AND TESTING INSPECTIONS SPEC. SECTION TITLE 02200 Earthwork for Buildings 03300 Cast -in -Place Concrete 04200 Concrete Unit Masonry 04201 Unit Masonry 05120 Structural Steel 05210 Steel Joist Girders 05220 Steel Joists .05300 Metal Roof Deck DRAWINGS A2'1 A2.3 A3.1 A3.2 A3 3 S0.1 S1.1 S1.2 S2."1 S2.2 AA - QUALITY ASSURANCE TESTING AND INSPECTION H1A 021003 TITLE Floor Plan Roof Plan & Details Elevations Wall Sections Tower Wall Sections & Details General Notes & Typical Details Foundation Plan Foundations Details Roof Framing Plan Roof Framing Details 01400-7 08/06/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA SECTION 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Requirements of Divisions 0 and 1 apply to work of this Section. 1.02 SCOPE: Furnish materials and equipment and perform labor required to execute this work as indicated on the drawings, as specified herein and as necessary to complete the Contract. 1.03 SAFETY: A. Exercise precaution at all times for the protection of persons (including employees) and property. Observe the safety provisions of applicable laws, building and construction codes. Guard machinery, equipment, and all hazards in accordance with the safety provisions of the latest edition of the Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction, published by the Associated General Contractors of America, to the extent that such provisions are not in contravention of applicable law. Protect all hazards with adequately constructed guard rails or barricades and provide lanterns, warning lights, and the like, as necessary. Eliminate all attractive nuisances from the work and from the site. To this end, dispose, store, guard, and protect the premises and all work, materials, equipment and both permanent and temporary construction so as to preclude the unauthorized use thereof by children or others and particularly to eliminate possible consequent injury to all unauthorized persons. In no case shall the Owner or Project Manager be responsible for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures or for safety precautions and programs in connection with the work, nor shall the Owner or Project Manager be responsible for Contractor's failure to employ proper safety procedures. B. Structural design of all items used in the construction of structures and not in permanent part thereof, including but not necessarily limited to hoisting towers, shoring for concrete and masonry work, the temporary bracing for structural steel, and the shoring of cut earth banks is the sole responsibility of the Contractor. All such items shall conform to requirements of Governing Codes. 1.04 BARRICADES: A. The Contractor shall build and maintain all barricades required by the governing city agency in relation to buildings. 1.05 MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC: (In relation to buildings) A. Maintain traffic on all streets adjacent to or leading to the site, and to adjacent shops on the site. Where construction operations interfere with the free movement of traffic, provide traffic controls, flag men or similar devices to efficiently control traffic movement. B. Maintain the free flow of traffic on the site for vehicular and pedestrian access to the other building on the site. 1.06 CLEANING: TEMPORARY FACILITIES• 01500-1 H1A 021003 08/06/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA A. At all times during the course of this Contract keep the buildings, and the Owner's premises and the adjoining premises, including streets and driveways, free from accumulations of waste materials and rubbish caused by employees of work or by the employees or work of Subcontractors. Bury no rubbish on the Owner's premises. At completion of the work, or prior thereto if so directed, remove from the buildings and the premises all tools, appliances, surplus materials, debris, temporary structures, temporary construction and rubbish. Cleaning, polishing, sealing, waxing and all other such finish operations noted on the drawings or required in the specifications shall be taken to indicate the required condition at the time of acceptance of work under the contract. 1.07 DEWATERING: A. Surface or sub -surface water or other fluid shall not be permitted to accumulate in excavations nor under structures. Should such conditions develop or be encountered, the water or fluid shall be controlled and suitable disposed of by the Contractor by means of temporary pumps, piping, drainage lines and ditches. 1.08 PROJECT -OFFICE: A. Provide and maintain, for the duration of the Contract, a project office, complete with heat, light, air conditioning, ventilation and convenience outlets. Office shall be of sufficient size for Contractor's personnel and operations and shall provide desk space for use of the Project Manager and for inspection personnel. 1.09 TELEPHONES: • A. Provide and pay for all necessary temporary telephones. Maintain a minimum of two telephone lines and two telephones in continuous service on the project site during the course of the work and make available at all times, free and unrestricted, to Project Manager's 10) and -Owner's representatives for calls in direct connection with the work. Contractor shall also provide and maintain a fax machine and telephone answering machine at the Project Office. 1.10 TEMPORARY TOILETS: A. Provide temporary toilet facilities for all personnel employed on the project. Maintain toilets in a clean and sanitary condition at all times. Remove at project completion. 1.11 CONSTRUCTION WATER AND POWER: A. Make arrangements for all water and power required for the project. Provide all temporary lines and pay all bills. Remove temporary facilities at project completion. 1.12 JOB SIGN: A. A site sign will be installed by Contractor prominently identify future Tenants on the site information. This sign will be provided Contractor. 1.13 WATCHMAN SERVICES: TEMPORARY FACILITIES H1A 021003 This sign will with other pertinent and installed by 01500-2 08/06/03 10) CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA OUINTA, CA A. The Contractor`shahl provide such watchman services as he may deem necessary to properly safeguard materials, tools, appliances and work during all hours that operations under the Contract are not being actively prosecuted. The Owner will not assume any responsibility for the loss of, or damage to, materials, tools, ' appliances or work arising from acts of theft, vandalism, malicious mischief.,or other causes. 1.14 ADVERTISING SIGNS: A. The Owner reserves the right to advertising privileges about the premises. The Contractor shall not display nor permit any signs or advertisements without the Owner's and Tenant's consent. The Contractor shall provide and install temporary advertising sign per the drawing at the end of this Section. 1.15 PROJECT MANAGER'S SIGNS: A. The Contractor shall provide two signs, at the beginning of the job, and install them at the site at location as directed. Details for mounting signs shall be as indicated on the drawings or as directed by Project Manager. 1.16 SCAFFOLDING AND HOISTS: A. The Specifications provide that the various trades shall furnish all necessary scaffolding for their work. It shall be the prerogative of the Contractor to elect to furnish all scaffolding to the trades. B. The Contractor shall allow all Subcontractors to use scaffolds provided by him. C. All scaffolds shall be built in accordance with the requirements of all laws and regulations. END OF SECTION TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01500-3 H1A 021003 08/06/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA SECTION 01600 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 NUMBER OF ITEMS REQUIRED: A. Whenever an article, device, or piece of equipment specified herein is referred to in the singular number, such reference shall apply to as many such articles as are indicated on Drawings or required to complete the installation. 1.02 SUBSTITUTIONS: A. Substitutions of material and equipment will not be allowed after the bid date except when directed by unforeseen circumstances such as: 1. If a specified or prequalified item is delayed by a lengthy strike at the factory, shipment, or elsewhere, causing extensive delay in project completion, a substitute item will be considered by the Project Manager. 2. If a specified or prequalified item proves to be unusable because of changed or other circumstances, a substitution will be considered by the Project Manager. The requested substitution will need to be justified fully in writing by the Contractor, and any cost savings will be rebated to Owner. A written statement showing unit price and quantities involved shall be submitted to the Project Manager, together with other information justifying the substitution. B. The above shall not be construed to mean that substitution of materials and equipment will be allowed routinely. Owner reserves the right to disapprove and reject any request he deems irregular. 1.03 SUBSTITUTIONS AFTER CONTRACT AWARD: A. In the event the Contractor (GCC or his subcontractors) proposes substitutions to the Project Manager or to the Owner after the Contracthas been awarded, the Project Manager will record all time used by him, his employees, and/or his consultants in the evaluation of each such proposed substitution. B. Regardless of whether of not the Project Manager approves a proposed substitution, the Project Manager shall be reimbursed at the rate of two and one-half (2.5) times the direct cost of all time spent by the Project Manager and/or his consultants in evaluating each proposed substitution. A Change Order will be issued to reduce the Construction Contract by an amount equal to the fees charged by the Project Manager for reviewing one or more proposed substitutions. The Project Manager will be reimbursed by the Owner in accordance with the Change Order amounts. 1.04 MODEL NUMBERS AND PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS: P,. References used throughout the specifications are made to manufacturer's names and model numbers in conjunction with a written specification description of the product. In the event any specified model number has been superseded and/or been rendered out of date by the manufacturer's product line revisions, or in the event any specified model number identifies a product which is not identical with the specified written description in all respects, the Contractor shall notify the Project Manager for clarification and directions prior to ordering and/or purchasing the product in question.Contractor's failure to consider the combined intent of model numbers and specified product descriptions shall not be justification for additional payments. MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 0599 P.A. END OF SECTION 01600-1 06/19/98 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA ¢JMIAA, CA SECTION 01700 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 CLEANING A. Clean all interior and exterior building surfaces and make same ready for use, before final inspection and after completion of all building construction operations. Wash and rinse floors. Wash and polish both sides of window glass and remove labels. Wash fixtures and polish trim. Restore, or replace, all damaged or defaced surfaces to original condition. 1.02. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS: A. Submit one copy of.the following to Owner upon completion of work: 1. Notarized statement certifying payment of all bills. Use agreement of final payment form as outlined in Section 00820. 2. Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor and major Subcontractors and suppliers. 3. Guarantees, warranties, and bonds as required and as furnished by Subcontractors and suppliers. 4. Releases of liens covering all labor and materials. 5. Instructions and information on the maintenance and/or operation of equipment and finishes. 1.03 AS -BUILT DRAWINGS: A. Submit reproducible drawings with changes made according to requirements of SECTION 01010, Article 1.6 of the Specifications. As -Built Drawings must be submitted within thirty (30) days after issuance -of Certificate of Substantial Completion. 1.04 NOTICE OF COMPLETION A. When advised by Owner, arrange for publication of Notice of Completion in a local newspaper. Notice shall appear twice, with a seven-day interval between dates of publications. File a copy of newspaper notice with Clerk of the Court of the appropriate County. 1.05 CERTIFICATE OF OCCUPANCY: A. Prepare and file a request for Certificate of Occupancy with Building Department and deliver a copy of Certificate to Owner. 1.06 SYSTEMS OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS: A. Approximately one week prior to store opening, arrange for each installer of equipment that requires regular maintenance to meet with the store's management to provide instruction in proper operation and maintenance. If installers are not experienced in procedures, provide instruction by manufacturer's representatives. Include a detailed review of the following items: 1. Maintenance manuals 2. -Record documents 3. Spare parts and materials 4. Tools CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700-1 09/14/93 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. IA QUINM, CA 5. Lubricants 6. Fuels 7. Identification systems 8. Control sequences 9. Hazards 10. Cleaning 11. Warranties and bonds 12. Maintenance agreements and similar continuing commitments. B. As part of instruction for operating equipment, demonstrate the following procedures. 1. Start-up 2. Shut down 3. Emergency operations 4. Noise and vibration adjustments 5. Safety procedures 6. Economy and efficiency adjustments 7. Effective energy utilization END OF SECTION CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700-2 09/14/93 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA SECTION 01710 CLEAN-UP AND DISPOSAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Requirements of Divisions 0 and 1 apply to work of this Section. 1.02 SCOPE: A. Provide complete clean project ready for occupancy. 1. Combustible rubbish shall not be burned on the property. All residue and non-combustible rubbish shall be removed from the site, leaving the entire site clean. 2. As soon as the site and building is completed, the General Contractor shall thoroughly clean the interior; the floors shall be swept and wiped clean; all fixtures, hardware and equipment shall be cleaned and polished; all plaster spots, stains, paint spots and accumulated dust and dirt removed. All glass shall be thoroughly cleaned of all putty and paint marks; glass shall be washed clean, polished and left free of scratches and in perfect condition. All debris shall be removed from the roof and site. B. During the progress of the work, all debris shall be removed at least once each week from the premises. See specific Sections for cleaning up related to any particular work. C. Prior to the acceptance of the completed project, the entire premises shall be cleaned to the approval of the Project Manager and Owner. CLEAN-UP AND DISPOSAL H1A 021003 END OF SECTION 01710-1 08/06/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA SECTION 02200 EARTHWORK FOR BUILDINGS PART 1 - GENERAL t 1.01 EXCAVATION FOR MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL WORK: A. Excavation and backfill required in conjunction with underground mechanical and electrical utilities, and buried mechanical and electrical appurtenances is included as work of this section. 1.02 DEFINITION: A. "Excavation" consists of removal of material encountered to subgrade elevations indicated and subsequent disposal of materials removed. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Codes and standards: Perform excavation work in compliance with applicable requirements of governing authorities having jurisdiction. B. Testing and inspection service: A testing laboratory shall perform soil testing and inspections for quality control testing during earthwork operations. C. The Amended "Report of Geotechnical Exploration" attached at Appendix "A" establishes the recommendations for Earthwork Construction and said recommendations are a part of the Construction Contract. In the event of a confilt between this specification and the Geotechnical Report, the Geotechnical Report recommendations shall prevail. �.., 1.04 SUBMITTALS: r' A. Test reports -excavating: Submit following reports directly to the Project Manager from the testing services, with copy to Contractor: 1. Verification of each footing subgrade. 2. Field density test reports. 3. Report of actual unconfined compressive strength and/or results of bearing tests of each strata tested. .1.05 JOB CONDITIONS: A. Site information: Data on indicated subsurface conditions are not intended as representations or warranties of accuracy or continuity between soil borings. It is expressly understood that Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn therefrom by Contractor. Additional test borings and other exploratory operations may be made by Contractor at no cost to Owner. B. Existing utilities: Locate existing underground utilities in areas of work. If utilities are to remain in place, provide adequate means of support and protection during earthwork operations. 1. Should uncharted, or incorrectly charted, piping or other utilities be encountered during excavation, consult utility Owner immediately for directions. Cooperate with Owner and utility companies in keeping respective services and facilities in operation. Repair damaged utilities to satisfaction of Utility Owner. EARTHWORK FOR BUILDINGS 02200-1 0599 P.A. 06/19/98 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA 2. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied and used by Owner or others, during occupied hours, except when permitted in writing by the Project Manager and then only after acceptable temporary utility services have been provided. Provide minimum of 48-hour notice to the Project Manager, and receive written notice to proceed before interrupting any utility. 3. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be removed. Coordinate with utility companies for shut-off of services if lines are active. C. Use of explosives: The use of explosives is not permitted. D. Protection of persons and property: Barricade open excavations occurring as part of this work and post with warning lights. Operate warning lights as recommended by authorities having jurisdiction. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout and other hazards created by earthwork operations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SOIL MATERIALS: A. Definitions: 1. Satisfactory soil materials are defined as those complying with ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GW, GP, GM, SM, SW and SP. 2. Unsatisfactory soil materials are defined as those complying with ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GC, SC, ML, MH, CL, CH, OL, OH and PT. 3. Subbase material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, crushed slag, natural or crushed sand. 4. Gravel fill: Washed, evenly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel, with 100% passing a 1-1/2" sieve and not more than 58 passing a No. 4 sieve. 5. Backfill and fill materials: Satisfactory soil materials free of clay, rock or gravel larger than 2" in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetable and other deleterious matter. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXCAVATION: A. Excavation is unclassified, and includes excavation to subgrade elevations indicated, regardless of character of materials and obstructions encountered. A 1. Remove and dispose of existing underground foundations and rubble as required to complete the work. B. Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of materials beyond indicated subgrade elevations or dimensions without specific direction of the Project Manager. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by the Project Manager, shall be at Contractor's expense. 1-0 0) 1. Under footings, foundation bases, or retaining walls, fill unauthorized excavation by extending indicated bottom elevation of footing or base to excavation bottom, without altering required top elevation. Lean concrete fill may be used to bring elevations to proper position, when acceptable to the Project Manager. 0), EARTHWORK FOR BUILDINGS 02200-2 0599 P.A. 06/19/98 � �'{. a C'•! � P';,T� CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. '' t" LA QUINTA, CA 2. Elsewhere,..backfill and compact unauthorized excavations as specified for authorized excavations of same classification, unless otherwise directed by the Project Manager. C. Additional excavation: When excavation has reached required subgrade elevations, notify Testing and Inspection Service who will make an inspection of conditions. 1. If unsuitable bearing materials are encountered at required subgrade elevations, carry excavations deeper and replace excavated material as directed by the Project Manager. 2. Removal of unsuitable material and its replacement as directed will be paid on basis of contract conditions relative to changes in work. D. Stability of excavations: Slope sides of excavations to comply with local codes and ordinances having jurisdiction. Shore and brace where sloping is not possible because of space restrictions or stability of material excavated. Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in safe condition until completion of backfilling. D. Shoring and bracing: Provide materials for shoring and bracing, such as sheet piling, uprights, stringers and cross -braces, in good serviceable condition. Establish requirements for trench shoring and bracing to comply with local codes and authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain shoring and bracing in excavations regardless of time period excavations will be open. Carry down shoring and bracing as excavation progresses. E. Dewatering: Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from flowing into excavations and from flooding project site and surrounding area. 1. Do not allow water accumulate in excavations. Remove water to OR prevent softening of foundation bottoms, undercutting footings, and soil changes detrimental to stability of subgrades and foundations. Provide and maintain pumps, well points, sumps, suction and discharge lines, and other dewatering system components necessary to. convey water away from excavations. 2. Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside excavation limits to convey rain water and water removed from excavations to collecting or run-off areas. Do not use trench excavations as temporary drainage ditches. 3. Contractor shall install dewatering equipment, spaced equally around perimeter of building excavation. Contractor shall verify that groundwater is a minimum of 2 feet below the subgrade of excavation prior to beginning excavation. Dewatering shall remain in continuous operation during earthwork operations. F. Material storage: Stockpile satisfactory excavated materials until required for backfill or fill. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles for proper drainage. Locate and retain soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of trees indicated to remain. Dispose of excess soil material and waste materials as herein specified. FJ EARTHWORK FOR BUILDINGS 02200-3 0599 P.A. 06/19/98 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA G. Excavation for structure: Conform to elevations and dimensions shown within a tolerance of plus or minus 0.101, and extending a sufficient distance from footings and foundations to permit placing and removal of concrete formwork, installation of services, other construction, and for inspection. In excavating for footings and foundations, take care not to disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before concrete reinforcement is placed. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work. H. Excavation for trenches: Dig trenches to the uniform width required for particular item to be installed, sufficiently wide to provide ample working room. Provide 6" to 9" clearance on both sides of pipe or conduit. 1. Excavate trenches to depth indicated or required. Carry depth of trenches for piping to establish indicated flow lines and invert elevations. Beyond building perimeter, keep bottom of trenches sufficiently below finish grade to avoid freeze -ups. 2. For pipes or conduit 5" or less in nominal sizes and for flat- bottomed multiple -duct conduit units, do not excavate beyond indicated depths. Hand excavate bottom cut to accurate elevations and support pipe or conduit on undisturbed soil. 3. For pipes or conduit 6" or larger in nominal size, tanks and other mechanical/electrical work indicated to receive subbase, excavate to subbase depth indicated, or, if not otherwise indicated, to 6" below bottom of work to be supported. 4. Except as otherwise indicated, excavate for exterior water - bearing piping (water, steam, condensate, drainage) so top of piping is not less than 3'-0" below finished grade. 5. Grade bottoms of trenches as indicated, notching under pipe bells to provide solid bearing for entire body of pipe. 6. Backfill trenches with concrete where trench excavations pass, within 18" of column or wall footings and which are carried below bottom of such footings, or which pass under wall footings. Place concrete to level of bottom of adjacent footing. 7. Do not backfill trenches until tests and inspections have been made, and backfilling authorized by the Project Manager. Use care in backfilling to avoid damage or displacement of pipe systems. 8. For piping or conduit less than 2'-6" below _surface of roadways, provide 4" thick concrete base slab support. After installation and testing of piping or conduit, provide minimum 4" thick encasement (sides and top) of concrete prior to back filling or placement of roadway subbase. I. Cold weather protection: Protect excavation bottoms against freezing when atmospheric temperature is less than 35 degree F. 3.02 COMPACTION: A. General: Control soil compaction during construction providing minimum percentage of density specified for each area classification indicated below. 0 EARTHWORK FOR BUILDINGS 02200-4 0599 P.A. 06/19/98 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. " LA QUINTA, CA 1. Percentage of maximum density requirements: Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum density for soils which exhibit a well-defined moisture density relationship (cohesive soils) determined in accordance with ASTM D 1557; and not less than the following percentages of relative density, determined in accordance with ASTM D 2049, for soils which will not exhibit a well-defined moisture -density relationship (cohesionless soils). a. Structures, building slabs and steps: Compact top 12" of.subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 958 maximum density for cohesive material or 988 relative density for cohesionless material. b. Lawn or unpaved areas: Compact top 6" subgrade and each layer of a backfill or fill material at 908 maximum density for cohesive soils and 958 relative density for cohesionless soils. c. Walkways: Compact top 6" of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 958 maximum density for cohesive • material or 988 relative density for cohesionless material. 2. Moisture control: Where subgrade or layer of soil material must be moisture conditioned before compaction, uniformly apply water to surface of subgrade, or layer of soil material, apply water in manner to prevent free water appearing on surface during or subsequent to compaction operations. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, soil material that is too wet to permit compaction to specified density. Soil material that has been removed because it is too wet to permit compaction may be stockpiled or spread and allowed to dry. Assist drying by discing, harrowing or pulverizing until moisture content is reduced to a satisfactory value. 3.03 BACKFILL AND FILL: A. General: Place acceptable soil material in horizontal layers to required subgrade elevations,. for each area classification listed below. 1. In excavations, use satisfactory excavated or borrow material. 2. Under grassed areas, use satisfactory excavated or borrow material. 3. Under walks use subbase material, or satisfactory excavated or borrow material, or combination of both. 4. Under steps, use subbase material. 5. Under building slabs, use gravel fill material. 6. Under piping and conduit, use subbase material where subbase is indicated under piping or conduit; shape to fit bottom 90 degrees of cylinder. B. Backfill excavations as promptly as work permits, but not until completion of the following: 1. Acceptance of construction below finish grade including, where applicable, dampproofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation. EARTHWORK FOR BUILDINGS 02200-5 •0599 P.A. 06/19/98 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA 2. Inspection, testing, approval, and recording locations of underground utilities. 3. Removal of concrete formwork. 4. Removal of shoring and bracing, and backfilling of voids with satisfactory materials. 5. Removal of trash and debris. 6. Permanent or temporary horizontal bracing is in place on horizontally supported walls. C. Ground surface preparation: Remove vegetation, debris, unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface prior to placement of fills. Plow, strip, or break-up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so that fill material will bond with existing surface. When existing ground surface has a density less than that specified under "Compaction" for particular area classification, break up ground surface, pulverize, moisture- condition to optimum moisture content, and compact to required depth and percentage of maximum density. D. Placement and compaction: Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8" in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4" in loose depth for material compacted by hand -operated tampers. 1. Before compaction, moisten or aerate each layer as necessary to provide optimum moisture content. Compact each layer to required percentage of maximum dry density or relative dry density for each area classification. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice. 2. Place backfill and fill materials evenly adjacent to structures, piping or conduit to required elevations. Take care to prevent welding action of backfill against structures or displacement of piping or conduit by carrying material uniformly around structure, or piping or conduit to approximately same elevation in each lift.. 3.04 GRADING: A. General: Uniformly grade areas within limits of grading under this section, including adjacent transition areas. Smooth finished surface within specified tolerances, compact with uniform levels or slopes between points where elevations are indicated, or between such points and existing grades. B. Grading outside building lines: Grade areas adjacent to building lines to drain away from structures and to prevent ponding. 1. Finish surfaces free from irregular surface changes, and as follows: a. Lawn or unpaved areas: Finish areas to receive topsoil to within not more than 0.10' above or below required subgrade elevations. b. Walks: Shape surface of areas under walks to line, grade and cross-section, with finish surface not more than 0.10' above or below required subgrade elevation. EARTHWORK FOR BUILDINGS 02200-6 0599 P.A. 06/19/98 0 11 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. '-+ . •• LA QUINTA, CA C. Grading surface of fill under building slabs: Grade smooth and even, free of voids, compacted as specified, and to required elevation. Slope surface for positive drainage to under floor drains. Provide final grades within a tolerance of 1/2" when tested with a 10' straightedge D. Compaction: After grading, compact subgrade surfaces to the depth and indicated percentage of maximum or relative density for each area classification. 3.05 BUILDING SLAB DRAINAGE COURSE: A. General: Drainage course consists of placement of gravel fill material, in layers of indicated thickness, over subgrade surface to support concrete building slabs. B. Placing: Place gravel fill material on prepared subgrade. Place gravel in layers of uniform thickness, conforming to indicated cross- section and thickness. Maintain optimum moisture content for compacting material during placement operations. When a compacted drainage course is shown to be 6" thick or less, place material in a single layer. When shown to be more than 6" thick, place material in equal layers, except no single layer more than 6" or less than 3" in thickness when compacted. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY -CONTROL: A. Quality control testing during construction: Allow testing service to inspect and approve subgrades and fill layers before further construction work is performed. 1. Perform field density tests in accordance with ASTM D 1556 (sand cone method) or ASTM D 2167 (rubber balloon method), as applicable. 2. Footing subgrade: For each strata of soil on which footings will be placed, conduct at least one test to verify required design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of each footing subgrade may be based on a visual comparison of each subgrade with related tested strata, when acceptable to the Project Manager. 3. Paved areas and building slab subgrade: Make at least one field density test of subgrade for every 2000 sq. ft. of paved area or building slab, but in no case less than 3 tests. In each compacted fill layer, make one field density test for every 2000 sq. ft. of overlaying building slab or paved area, but in no case less than 3 tests. 4. Foundation wall backfill: In each compacted fill lager, make one field density test for every 1000 sq. ft., but in no case less than 3 tests. B. If in opinion of the Project Manager, based on testing service reports and inspection, subgrade or fills which have been placed are below specified density, provide additional compaction and testing at no additional expense. 3.07 MAINTENANCE: A. Protection of graded and erosion. Kee re-establish grades specified tolerances. EARTHWORK FOR BUILDINGS 0599 P.A. areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic Keep free of trash and debris. Repair and in settled, eroded, and rutted areas to 02200-7 06/19/98 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA B. Reconditioning compacted areas: Where completed compacted areas are disturbed by subsequent construction operations or adverse weather, scarify surface, reshape, and compact to required density prior to further construction. C. Setting: Where settling is measurable or observable at excavated areas during general project warranty period, remove surface (pavement, lawn or other finish), add backfill material, compact, and replace surface treatment. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of surface or finish to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greater extent possible. 3.08 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS AND WASTE MATERIALS: A. Removal from Owner's property: Remove excess excavated material, trash, debris and waste materials and dispose of it off Owner's property. END OF SECTION EARTHWORK FOR BUILDINGS 02200-8 0599 P.A. 06/19/98 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA SECTION 02282 TERMITE CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes soil treatment for termite control. 1.03 .SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data and application instructions. C. Certification that products used comply with U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) regulations for termiticides. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. In addition to requirements of these specifications, comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for preparing substrate and application. B. Engage a professional pest control operator who is licensed according to regulations of governing authorities to apply soil treatment solution. C. Use only termiticides that bear a federal registration number of the EPA and are approved by local authorities having jurisdiction. 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS A. Restrictions: Do not apply soil treatment solution until excavating, filling, and grading operations are completed, except as otherwise.required in construction operations. 1. To ensure penetration, do not apply soil treatment to frozen or excessively wet soils or during inclement weather. Comply with handling and application instructions of the soil toxicant manufacturer. 1.06• WARRANTY A. Warranty: Furnish written warranty, executed by Applicator and Contractor, certifying that applied soil termiticide treatment will prevent infestation of subterranean termites. If subterranean termite activity is discovered during warranty period, Contractor will re -treat soil and repair or replace damage caused by termite infestation. B. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and will be in addition to an run concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS TERMITE CONTROL 02282-1 0197 P.A. NO. 546 01/31/97 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA 2.01 SOIL TREATMENT SOLUTION A. General: Use an emulsible, concentrated termiticide that dilutes with water, specially formulated to prevent termites infestation. Fuel oil will not be permitted as a diluent. Provide a solution consisting of one of following chemical elements. B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Chloropyrifos: Dursban TC, Dow Chemical Co. 2. PermaThrin: Dragnet FT, FMC Corp. Torpedo, ICI Americas, Inc. 3. Cypermethrine: Prevail FT, FMC Corp. Demon, ICI Americas, Inc. 4. Fenvalerate: Gold Coast Tribute, DuPont 5. Isofenphose: Pryfon, Mobay Corp. C. Dilute with water to concentration level recommended by manufacturer. D. Other solutions may be used as recommended by Applicator if approved for intended application by local authorities having jurisdiction. Use only soil treatment solutions that are not harmful to plants. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATION A. Surface Preparation: Remove foreign matter that could decrease treatment effectiveness on areas to be treated. Loosen, rake, and level soil to be treated, except previously compacted areas under slabs and foundations. Toxicants may be applied before placing compacted fill under slabs if recommended by toxicant manufacturer. B. Application Rates: Apply soil treatment solution as follows: Fv, Under slab -on -grade structures, treat soil before concrete slabs are placed, using the following application rates: a. Apply 4 gallons of chemical solution per 10 linear feet to soil in critical areas under slab, including entire inside perimeter of foundation walls, along both sides of interior partition walls, around plumbing pipes and electric conduit penetrating slab, and around interior column footers. b. Apply 1 gallon of chemical solution per 10 sq. ft. as an overall treatment under slab and attached slab areas TERMITE CONTROL 02282_2 0197 P.A. NO. 546 01/31/97 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA where fill is soil or unwashed gravel. Apply 1-1/2 gallons of chemical solution to areas where fill is washed gravel or other coarse absorbent material. C. Apply 4 gallons of chemical solution per 10 linear feet �- of trench for each foot of depth from grade to footing, along outside edge. of building. Dig a trench 6 to 8 inches wide along outside of foundation to a depth of not less than 12 inches. Punch holes to top of footing at not more than 12 inches o.c. and apply chemical solution. Mix chemical solution with the soil as it is being replaced in the trench. .2. Under crawlspace and basement structures, treat soil along exterior and interior walls of foundations with shallow footings as specified above for exterior of slab -on -grade structures. 3. Treat soil under or around crawlspace structures as follows: a. Apply 4 gallons of chemical solution per 10 linear feet of trench along inside of foundation walls, along both sides of interior partitions, and around piers and plumbing. Do not apply an overall treatment in crawlspaces. b. Apply 4 gallons of chemical solution per 10 linear feet of trench, for each foot of depth from grade to footing, along outside of foundation walls, including part beneath entrance platform porches, etc. C. Apply 4 gallons of chemical solution per 10 linear feet along the inside and outside of foundation walls of porches. d. Apply one gallon per 10 sq. ft. of soil surface as an overall treatment only where attached concrete platform and porches are on fill or ground. 4. At hollow masonry foundations or grade beams, treat voids at rate of 2 gallons per 10 linear feet, poured directly into the hollow spaces. 5. At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slabs will be penetrated, apply at rate of 4 gallons per 10 linear feet of penetration. C. Post signs in areas of application to warn workers that soil termiticide treatment has been applied. Remove signs after areas are covered by other construction. D. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, landscape grading, or other construction activities following application. 0, END OF SECTION TERMITE CONTROL 02282-3 0197 P.A. NO. 546 01/31/97 _CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. La Quinta, CA SECTION 03300 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-1 H1D 080603 08/06/03 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. B. Unless otherwise shown or specified, the work shall conform to the following standards of the American Concrete Institute. 1. ACI 117-81 Standard Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials 2. ACI 211.1-89 Recommended Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight and Mass Concrete 3. ACI 212.2R-81 Guide for Use of Admixtures in Concrete 4. ACI 214-77(89) Recommended Practice for Evaluation of Strength Test Results of Concrete 5. ACI 302.1R-89 Recommended Practice for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction. 6. ACI 304R-89 Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete 7. ACI 304.2R-71(82) Placing Concrete by Pumping Methods 8. ACI 305R-89 Hot Weather Concreting 9. ACI 306R-88 Cold Weather Concreting 10. ACI 308-86 Standard Practice for Curing Concrete 11. ACI 309R-87 Guide for Consolidation of Concrete 12. ACI 315-80(86) Details and Detailing of Concrete 1 Reinforcement 13. ACI 318-89 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete 14. ACI 347R-88 Guide to Formwork for Concrete C. Unless otherwise shown or specified, the work shall conform to the following standards of the Concrete Reinforcing.Steel Institute. 1. Manual of Standard Practice, 1986 2. Placing Reinforcing Bars, 1986 D. Refer to drawings for extent and locations of all concrete work. Verify conditions and requirements of the job. 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK • A. Include all labor, materials and appliances, and perform all operations in connection with the installation of Concrete Work, and all related work incidental to the completion thereof, as shown on 1 the drawings, complete, as specified herein. in strict accordance with the drawings and Concrete work includes:. CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-1 H1D 080603 08/06/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. La Quinta, CA 1. Concrete, reinforcing and formwork for grade beams, footings, foundations, pilasters, slabs, concrete truck dock slab, compactor container pad, platforms, sidewalks around building, stairs, curbs, gutters, all site work concrete, foundations for light standards and signs, foundation pads for equipment, etc. 2. Installation of anchor bolts for steel columns, posts, and other anchored work as may be required. 3. Grouting of column bases. 4. All anchor slots, sleeves, and other inserts as required. 5. Shop drawings. 6. Vapor barrier under all interior concrete slabs on grade. 7. Granular subbase beneath slabs on grade. 8. All dowels from concrete into masonry walls. Install vertical dovetail slots at 2'-0" on center for all veneered concrete walls. 9. All other items required to make the work of this Section complete including staking for layout of footings, building layout, excavation, backfilling, etc. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shall be submitted for review only when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in these specifications. B. Reinforcing steel shop drawings shall be provided showing all details of construction, bending and placing, completely dimensioned. Before proceeding with the work, review of all shop drawings must be secured from the Project Manager. C. Submit concrete mix designs for review by The Project Manager well in advance of concrete placement. Concrete mix design submittal shall include all strength data necessary to show compliance with the strength requirements of this specification for either the trial batch method or the field experience method. D. Review of submittals will cover general design only. In no case shall this review relieve the contractor of the responsibility for strength of concrete, general or detailed dimension, quality or quantity of materials, or any other conditions, functions, performance or guarantees required. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General 1. The Owner will employ and pay for the services of an independent testing agency to provide testing and inspection of concrete work. The testing agency shall be licensed in the state where the structure is located and shall meet the requirements of "Recommended Practices for Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete, Steel, and Bituminous Materials as Used in Construction" (ASTM E329). All testing and inspections shall be performed under the supervision of an engineer registered in the state where the structure is located. 0) CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-2 H1D 080603 08/06/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. 7% ". r , Q. . ,. .•.. La Quinta, CA 2. Concrete materials and operations shall be tested and inspected as the work progresses. Failure to detect any defective work or material shall not in any way prevent later rejection when such defect is discovered nor shall it obligate the Owner's Representative for final acceptance. 3. The testing agency shall report all test and inspection results to the Project Manager, Owner and Contractor immediately after they are performed. All test and inspection reports shall include the exact location in the work represented by the test. 4. The testing agency and its representatives are not authorized to revoke, alter, relax, enlarge or release any requirement of the contract documents, approve or accept any portion of the work, perform any duties of the Contractor, or be a party to scheduling of work. 5. The contractor shall notify the testing agency and the Owner's Representative a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all concrete work and all reasonable facilities shall be made available for technicians. 6. Records of inspection shall be kept available to the building official during progress of work and for two years after completion of the project. Records shall be preserved by the independent testing agency. B. The testing agency shall conduct strength tests of the concrete during construction in accordance with the following procedures: 1. Secure composite samples in accordance with "Method of Sampling Fresh Concrete" (ASTM C172). Each sample shall be obtained from a different batch of concrete on a random basis, avoiding any selection of the test batch other than by a number selected at random before commencement of concrete placement. 2. Mold and cure three specimens from each sample in accordance with "Method of Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field" (ASTM C31). Any deviations from the requirements of this Standard shall be recorded in the test report. 3. Test specimens in accordance with "Method 'of Test for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens" (ASTM C39). Two specimens shall be tested at 28 days and one shall be tested at 7 days. The acceptance test results shall be the average of the strengths of the two specimens tested at 28 days. If one specimen in a test manifests evidence of improper sampling, molding or testing, it shall be discarded and the strength of the remaining cylindershallbe considered the test result. Should both specimens in a test show any of the above defects, the entire test shall be discarded. 4. Make at least one strength test (3 cylinders) for each 100 cu. yd., or fraction thereof, of each mix design of concrete placed in any 1 day. 5. Determine slump .of the concrete sample for each strength test and whenever consistency of concrete appears to vary, using "Method of Test for Slump of Portland Cement Concrete" (ASTM C143) . CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-3 H1D 080603 08/06/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. La Quinta, CA 6. Determine air content of normal weight concrete sample for each strength test in accordance with either "Method of Test for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method" (ASTM C231), "Method of Test for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method" (ASTM C173) or "Method of Test for Unit Weight, .Yield, and Air Content (Gravimetric) of Concrete" (ASTM C138). 7. Determine temperature of concrete sample for each strength test. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C33. B. Fine aggregate: ASTM C33. C. Portland cement: ASTM C150, Type V (unless testing of on site soils and import results in negligible sulphate content which will result in approval of type II cement. Provide letter of tests from geotechnical engineer). (Flyash not permitted). D. Water: Clear and free from injurious amounts of oil, acid, alkali, organic or other deleterious matter. E. Admixtures: 1. Water reducing, retarding, and accelerating admixtures: ASTM 2.02 REINFORCEMENT MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Steel Bars: ASTM A615, including Supplemental Requirements S1, Grade 60, unless noted otherwise. B. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A185 C. Steel Wire: ASTM A82. D. Metal Accessories: Include all spacers, ties, chairs and other devices required to properly support and fasten reinforcing steel in place in accordance with the requirements of the ACI Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforcing Concrete Structures. 2.03 FORM MATERIALS A. Removable forms shall be wood, metal or other approved material. B. Forms for unexposed concrete surfaces may be No. 2 common boards of dimension lumber of uniform thickness. 0 ) CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-4 H1D 080603 08/06/03 C494, may be used at the contractor's option. 2. Air -entraining admixtures: ASTM C260, for all air -entrained concrete. 3. Pozzolanic admixtures: ASTM C618, may be used upon review by the Project Manager. 4. Maximum chloride ion due to admixtures shall not exceed 0.1% by weight. 5. The addition of calcium chloride is not permitted. 6. All admixtures shall be used in conformance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 2.02 REINFORCEMENT MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Steel Bars: ASTM A615, including Supplemental Requirements S1, Grade 60, unless noted otherwise. B. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A185 C. Steel Wire: ASTM A82. D. Metal Accessories: Include all spacers, ties, chairs and other devices required to properly support and fasten reinforcing steel in place in accordance with the requirements of the ACI Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforcing Concrete Structures. 2.03 FORM MATERIALS A. Removable forms shall be wood, metal or other approved material. B. Forms for unexposed concrete surfaces may be No. 2 common boards of dimension lumber of uniform thickness. 0 ) CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-4 H1D 080603 08/06/03 E� CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. La Quinta, CA C. Earth cuts may be used for forms for footings if soil conditions permit. 2.04 RELATED MATERIALS A. Vapor Barrier: 6 mil polyethelyne. B. Premolded Filler: Non -bituminous fiber type as per ASTM D1741, Type III, Homasote "300" or approved equal all wood fiber board with the "Homex Plus" pull off strip for joints to be flash -patched. C. Curing Compound shall be L&M Cure as manufactured by L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. D. Form Ties: Black iron snap ties with a minimum 1 inch breakback. E. Control Joint Filler: "MM -80, two-part liquid, 100% solids, semi- rigid, epoxy resin filler as manufactured by Metzger/McGuire Company for filling of sawcut control joints in exposed concrete floor slabs that do not receive floor coverings. F. Form Releasing Agent: Non -staining. G. Grout shall be "Crystex" as manufactured by L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc. H. Granular subbase (beneath slabs on grade): Fine graded granular material conforming to the following requirements. Maximum Size: 1-1/4" Passing No. 200 sieve: 15% maximum Plasticity Index: 6 maximum Liquid -Limit: 25 maximum I. Chemical Hardener shall be L & M Seal Hard as manufactured by L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc. J. Water Repellent shall be L & M Aquapel Plus as manufactured by L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 CONCRETE PROPORTIONS A. The specified compressive strength of the concrete f'c for each portion of the structure shall be as designated on the drawings. Strength requirements shall be based on 28 -day compressive strength. B. Concrete exposed to weather shall be air -entrained. Air content shall be between 4 and 8 percent. C. Slump of concrete shall not exceed 4" unless a high range water - reducing admixture is used. The slump of concrete prior to addition of a high range water -reducing admixture shall not exceed 4". The slump of concrete containing a high range water -reducing admixture shall not exceed 10". D. The maximum size of coarse aggregate shall not be more than one- fifth of the narrowest dimension between sides of forms, one-third of the depth of slabs, nor three-fourths of the minimum clear _ spacing between reinforcing bars. E. The coarse aggregate size shall be No. 57 or larger. F. The minimum cement content of all concrete shall conform to the following table. . CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE H1D 080603 03300-5 08/06/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. La Ouinta, CA Specified Minimum Cement Content (pounds per cubic yard) Compressive Strength Non -Air Entrained Air -Entrained (psi) Concrete Concrete 3000* 470 517 4000* 564 611 4500 570 625 See structural drawings, sheet S0.1 for criteria. Attain the level of sulfate present in the soil prior to concrete production. G. In any mix, the maximum water -cement ratio shall not exceed 0.45 H. Concrete shall be proportioned by either the trial batch method or the field experience method. 1. Where the trial batch method is used, make three test cylinders for each trial batch. Break one cylinder at 7 days and two at 28 days to verify strength requirements. Adjust proportions to produce a design mix at least 1200 psi greater than the specified strength, f'c. 2. Where the field experience method is used, the required average compressive strength shall be determined in accordance with paragraph 5.3.2 of ACI 318. Documentation that proposed concrete proportions will produce an average compressive strength equal to or greater than the required average compressive strength shall consist of a field strength test record representing materials and proportions to be used for this project. A field strength test record shall consist of at least 10 consecutive tests encompassing a period of time of not less than 45 days and made within the past 18 months. Al 3.02 FORMWORK A. Forms shall be used, wherever necessary, to confine the concrete and shape it to the --required dimensions. Forms shall have sufficient strength to withstand the pressure resulting from placement and vibration of the concrete, and shall have sufficient rigidity to maintain specified tolerances. B. The design and engineering of the formwork, as well as its construction, shall be the responsibility of the contractor. C. Forms shall be sufficiently tight to prevent loss of mortar from the concrete. D. All exposed concrete corners shall have a 3/4" x 3/4" chamfer, CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-6 H1D 080603 08/06/03 except as otherwise noted. E. Form ties shall be broken off 1" or more back from concrete surfaces. No wire or strap ties will be permitted. Ties shall be of sizes and weights as required for pressures developed, and installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Form ties for exterior walls and grade beams shall be leakproof "waterseal type". F. Forms for exposed surfaces shall be coated with non -staining releasing agent, applied before the reinforcing steel is placed. G. Forms shall not be disturbed until the concrete has adequately hardened. Care shall be taken to avoid spalling the concrete surfaces. 0 H. All surfaces of forms and embedded materials shall be cleaned of any CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-6 H1D 080603 08/06/03 f • 4 1u • CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. =..z. -°+ La Quinta, CA accumulated mortar or grout from previous concreting and of all other foreign material before concrete is placed in them. 3.03 REINFORCEMENT A. Fabrication: 1. Reinforcing steel shall be accurately fabricated to the dimensions shown. a. Bends shall conform to bend dimensions defined as standard in accordance with details in the ACI Detailing Manual - 1980 (SP -66) and/or CRSI Manual of Standard Practice, unless otherwise shown. b. Bars shall be bent cold, and shall not be bent or straightened in a manner that will injure the material. C. Bars shall be fabricated within the tolerances shown in the ACI Detailing Manual - 1980 (SP -66) and/or CRSI Manual of Standard Practice. 2. Welding as an aid to fabrication and/or installation will not be permitted except as specifically shown on the drawings or as authorized by the Project Manager. B. Placing 1. Position reinforcement to 1/4" + in accordance with placement plans. 2. Unless noted otherwise, reinforcing shall be placed so that the minimum concrete cover shown on the drawings is provided. 3. It shall be the contractors responsibility to ensure that the intended reinforcement location is maintained during concrete placement. Tie bars at intersections with soft steel wire. 4. Lap splices of reinforcing shall be as called for on the drawings. 5. Do no splicing at points of maximum stress. Lap all bars at all corners and abrupt changes in direction of walls. Provide steel dowels between footings and walls, pilasters, columns and elsewhere, as indicated on drawings and/or as conditions require. 6. Do not drive nails into wood forms to support reinforcement. 7. Provide two (2) No. 5 bars around all openings in slabs and concrete walls, and at all re-entrant corners in floor slabs. 8. Reinforcing bars partially embedded in concrete shall not be field bent. 9. Iron worker to remain on job during concrete placing to correct displacement of reinforcement. C.• Cleaning and Protection: 1. Protect reinforcement from excessive rusting or mechanical injury. Store on skids or otherwise maintain at least 6 inches above ground. 2. After bars are tied in place take whatever precautions are CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-7 H1D 080603 08/06/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. La Quinta, CA necessary to protect bars from damage by construction equipment or careless workmen. Pay particular attention to bars projecting out of previously placed concrete. Damaged steel shall be replaced at no cost to Owner. 3.04 JOINTS A. Construction Joints 1. Provide construction joints as required by the drawings, specifications, and job conditions. Provide 1-1/2" deep key at joint. All reinforcement shall be continued across joints. Remove all laitance from joints prior to placing adjoining concrete. 2. Provide construction joints in walls at a maximum spacing of 50 feet unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. 3. Construction joints in slabs on grade are intended to function as formed control joints. See drawings for details. Locate construction joints in slabs on grade at locations shown on the drawings. For exterior slabs on grade the maximum spacing between construction joints shall be 20 feet. B. Control Joints 1. Locate control joints in interior slabs on grade as shown on the drawings. Install control joint filler in saw cut control joints in exposed concrete floor slabs that do not receive floor coverings. 2. Locate 1" deep scored control joints in sidewalks as shown on the drawings. The maximum spacing of scored joints shall be 8 feet. C. Isolation Joints 1. Locate isolation joints at all columns and where exterior slabs or walks abut vertical surfaces and elsewhere, as shown on the plans or as job conditions require. 2. Locate isolation (expansion) joints in sidewalks at locations shown on the drawings. The maximum spacing between isolation joints in sidewalks shall be 32 feet. 3. Locate isolation (expansion) joints in curbs at a maximum spacing of 20 feet. 4. Premolded filler for isolation joints shall be 1/2" thick. 3.05 PRODUCTION OF CONCRETE A. Ready -mixed concrete shall be batched, mixed and transported in accordance with ASTM C94. The ready -mixed concrete producer shall furnish duplicate delivery tickets, one for the Contractor and one given to the Owner's Representative, for each batch of concrete. The information provided on the delivery ticket shall include the quantities of all material batched including the amount of free water in the aggregate. The quantity of water that can be added at the site without exceeding the maximum water cement ratio specified shall be noted on the delivery ticket. B. For job mixed concrete, mixing shall be done in a batch mixer of approved type. The mixer shall be rotated at a speed recommended by the manufacturer and mixing shall be continued for 1-1/2 minutes after all materials are in the drum. For batches larger than 1 cubic yard, mixing time shall be increased 15 seconds for each CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-8 H1D 080603 08/06/03 (is .i. t•i nr '. e CIRCUIT CITY STORES. INC. CA additional cubic yard or fraction thereof. All concrete shall be mixed until there is a uniform distribution of the materials and shall be discharged completely before the mixer is recharged. C. The independent testing agency shall have access at all times to the batching and mixing plant for sampling of materials and inspection of all work performed for this job. D. In cold weather, the temperature of the concrete when delivered at the site of the work shall be at least 50 degrees F. E. In hot weather the ingredients shall be cooled before mixing, or flake ice or well -crushed ice of a size that will melt completely during mixing may be substituted for all or part of the mixing water if, due to high temperature, low slump, flash set or cold joints are encountered. When air temperature is between 80F and 90F, reduce maximum mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes. When air temperature exceeds 90F, reduce maximum mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. 3.06 PLACING A. Preparation for Placing Concrete 1. All bearing material shall be inspected by the geotechnical engineer prior to placement of concrete. The geotechnical engineer shall be the sole judge as to the suitability of the bearing material. 2. Before concrete is placed, all debris and ice shall be removed from the spaces to be occupied by the concrete. Remove surplus form releasing agent from the contact face of forms. Forms and the reinforcement shall be thoroughly cleaned of ice or other coatings. 3. Water shall be removed from place of deposit before concrete is placed. Concrete shall not be placed on frozen ground. 4. Notify all trades concerned and the Owner's Representative sufficiently in advance of the scheduled time for concrete placement to permit installation of all required work by other trades. - CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-9 H1D 080603 08/06/03 5. Before placing concrete, all required embedded items, including dovetail anchor slots, anchors, inserts, curb angles, metal frames, fixtures, sleeves, drains, stair nosings, accessory devices for Mechanical and Electrical installations shall be properly located; accurately positioned• and built into the construction, and maintained securely in place. 6. Build into construction all items furnished by the Owner and other trades. Provide all offsets, pockets, slabs, chases and recesses as job conditions require. Thicken slabs as required to maintain the intended slab thickness at embedded items. 7. Set anchor bolts furnished under the Structural Steel Section of these specifications. 8. Place and properly support reinforcing steel. B. Conveying 1. Concrete shall be conveyed from the mixer to the place of final deposit by methods which will prevent separation or loss of material. CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-9 H1D 080603 08/06/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. La Quinta, CA 2. Equipment for chuting, pumping and pneumatically conveying concrete shall be of such size and design as to insure a practically continuous flow of concrete at the delivery without separation of material. 3. Provide runways or other means for wheeled equipment to convey concrete to point of deposit. Construct runways so that supports will not bear upon reinforcement or fresh concrete. C. Depositing Concrete shall be deposited as nearly as practicable in its final position to avoid segregation due to rehandling or flowing. No concrete shall have a free fall of over three feet from truck, mixer or buggies. The concreting shall be carried on at such a rate that the concrete is at all times plastic and flows readily into the spaces between the bars. No concrete that has partially hardened or been contaminated by foreign materials shall be deposited in the work, nor shall retempered concrete by used. 2. When concreting is started, it shall be carried on as a continuous operation until the placing of the section is completed. 3. All concrete shall be thoroughly consolidated by mechanical vibrators during the placing operation and shall be thoroughly worked around the reinforcement and embedded fixtures and into the corners of the forms. Mechanical vibrators shall be applied directly to the concrete and used only under experienced supervision. Vibrators shall not be secured to forms or reinforcement. Compaction shall be carried on continuously with the placing of concrete. Keep a minimum of two vibrators on the job during concreting operations. 4. Protect adjacent surfaces from concrete drippings, spillage and splashes. Hardened or partially hardened splashes or accumulations of concrete on forms or reinforcement shall be removed before the work proceeds. Clean all damaged surfaces immediately. 5. All conveyances shall be thoroughly cleaned at frequent intervals during the placing of the concrete, and before beginning a new run of concrete all hardened concrete and foreign materials shall be removed from the surfaces. 6. The superintendent or foreman in charge of concrete work shall mark on the drawings the time and date of the placing of the concrete in the different areas and members. Location of concrete batches from which concrete test cylinders are made shall also be recorded on these drawings. Such drawings shall be kept on file at the job until its completion and shall be subject to the inspection of the Owner's Representative at all times. 3.07 REPAIR OF SURFACE DEFECTS A. Surface defects, including tie holes, shall be repaired immediately after form removal. B. All honeycombed and other defective concrete shall be removed down to sound concrete. If chipping is necessary the edges shall be perpendicular to the surface or slightly undercut. No featheredges will be permitted. The area to be patched and an area at least.6 in. wide surrounding it shall be dampened to prevent absorption of water from the patching mortar. A bonding grout shall be prepared using a mix of approximately 1 part cement to 1 part fine sand CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-10 H1D 080603 08/06/03 9) 10 0 'CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. La Quinta, CA passing a No. 300 mesh sieve, mixed to the consistency of thick cream, and then well brushed into the surface. C. The patching mixture shall be made of the same materials and of approximately the same proportions as used for the concrete, except that the coarse aggregate shall be omitted and the mortar shall consist of not more than 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand by damp loose volume. White portland cement shall be substituted for a part of the gray portland cement on exposed concrete in order to produce a color matching the color of the surrounding concrete, as .determined by a trial patch. The quantity of mixing water shall be no more than necessary for handling and placing. The patching mortar shall be mixed in advance and allowed to stand with frequent manipulation with a trowel, without addition of water, until it has reached the stiffest consistency that will permit placing. D. After surface water has evaporated from the area to be patched, the bond coat shall be well brushed into the surface. When the bond coat begins to lose the water sheen, the premixed patching mortar shall be applied. The mortar shall be thoroughly consolidated into place and struck off so as to leave the patch slightly higher than the surrounding surface. To permit initial shrinkage, it shall be left undisturbed for at least 1 hr. before being finally finished. The patched area shall be kept damp for 7 days. Metal tools shall not be used in finishing a patch in a formed wall which will be exposed. . E. After being cleaned and thoroughly dampened, all tie holes shall be filled solid with patching mortar. r'F1� 3.08 FINISHING OF FORMED SURFACES A. After removal of forms all concrete surfaces not exposed to view shall be finished with a rough form finish and all surfaces exposed to view shall be finished with a smooth form finish. B. For a rough form finish, tie holes and defects shall be patched and fins exceeding 1/4 in. in height shall be chipped off or rubbed off. Otherwise, surfaces may be left with the texture imparted by the forms. C. For a smooth form finish, the form facing material shall produce a smooth, hard, uniform texture on the concrete. The arrangement of the facing material shall be orderly and symmetrical, with the number of seams kept to the practical minimum. Tie holes and defects shall be patched. All fins shall be completely removed. 3.09 SLABS A. Preparation of subgrade for slabs on grade. 1. The subgrade shall be well drained and of adequate and uniform loadbearing nature. 2. Place granular subbase to thickness shown on the drawings and compact to a minimum of 98% of maximum density at optimum moisture per ASTM D698. 3. Place vapor barrier over granular subbase. Lap joints a minimum of six inches. 4. The subgrade shall be free of frost before concrete placing begins. If the temperature inside a building where concrete is to be placed is below freezing it shall be raised and maintained above 50 F. long enough to remove all frost from CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-11 H1D 080603 08/06/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. La Quinta, CA the subgrade. B. Edge forms and intermediate screed strips shall be set accurately to produce the designated elevations and contours of the finished surface, and shall be sufficiently strong to support vibrating screeds or roller pipe screeds. The concrete surface shall be aligned to the contours of screed strips by the use of strike -off templates or acceptable compacting type screeds. C. Placement 1. Mixing and placing shall be carefully coordinated with finishing. Concrete shall not be placed on the subgrade or forms more rapidly than it can be spread, straightedged, and darbied or bull floated. These operations must be performed before bleeding water has an opportunity to collect on the surface. 2. To obtain good surfaces and avoid cold joints, the size of finishing crews shall be planned with due regard for the effects of concrete temperature and atmospheric conditions on the rate of hardening of the concrete. 3. Concrete in slabs shall be thoroughly consolidated. Internal vibration shall be used along the bulkheads of slabs on grade. Consolidation of slabs shall be obtained with vibrating screeds, roller pipe screeds, internal vibrators, or other approved means. D. Concrete Floor Finishes 1. General: All finishes must be adequate in all respects to receive material to be applied to it, true to line and free of defects or blemishes. No driers, dry cement, nor cement -sand mixture shall be used in connection with any finish surfaces to absorb water, stiffen mix or for any other purpose. 2. Finish a. All interior floor slabs shall receive a troweled finish. b. All exterior stairs and sidewalks shall receive a light broom finish. C. All exterior slabs except stairs and sidewalks shall receive a rough broom finish. d. Floated finish - After the concrete has been placed, consolidated, struck off, and leveled, the concrete shall not be worked further until ready for floating. Floating with a hand float or with a bladed power trowel equipped with float shoes, or with a powered disc float shall begin when the water sheen has disappeared and when surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit the operation. During or after the first floating, planeness of surface shall be checked with a 10 -ft. straightedge applied at not less than two different angles. All high spots shall be cut down and all low spots filled during this procedure to produce a surface within a 1/4" in 10' tolerance throughout. The slab shall then be refloated immediately to a uniform sandy texture. CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-12 H1D 080603 08/06/03 i 10 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. La Quinta, CA e. Troweled finish - The surface shall first be float - finished as specified above. It shall next be power troweled, and finally hand troweled. The first troweling after -power -floating shall produce a smooth surface which is relatively free of defects but which may still show some trowel marks. Additional trowelings shall be done by hand after the surface has hardened sufficiently. The final troweling shall be done when a ringing sound is produced as the trowel is moved over the surface. . The surface shall be thoroughly consolidated by the hand troweling operations. The finished surface shall be essentially free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance and shall be plane to a 1/8" in 10' tolerance. On surfaces intended to support floor coverings, any defects of sufficient magnitude to show through the floor covering shall be removed by grinding. - f. Light broom finish - The surface shall first be trowel - finished as specified above. Immediately after final troweling, it shall be given a light transverse texture by drawing a broom across the surface. g. Rough broom finish - Immediately after the concrete has received a float finish as specified above, it shall be given a coarse transverse scored texture by drawing a broom or burlap belt across the surface. 3.10 CURING AND PROTECTION A. Beginning immediately after placement, concrete shall be protected from premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury, and shall be maintained with minimal moisture loss at a relatively constant temperature for the period necessary for hydration of the cement and hardening of the concrete. B. For concrete surfaces not in contact with forms, apply curing pP Y n g compound immediately after completion of placement and finishing. The compound shall be applied in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer immediately after any water sheen which may develop after finishing has disappeared from the concrete surface. For any surface against which additional concrete or other material is to be bonded, unless it is proven that the curing compound will not prevent bond, positive measures shall be taken to remove it completely from areas to receive bonded applications. C. Moisture loss from surfaces placed against wooden forms or metal forms exposed to heating by the sun shall be minimized by keeping the forms wet until they can be safely removed. After form removal apply curing compound in accordance with the recommendations. .of..the manufacturer. For any surface against which additional concrete or other material is to be bonded, unless it is proven that the curing compound will not prevent bond, positive measures shall be taken to remove it completely from areas to receive bonded applications. D. Temperature, Wind, and Humidity 1. Cold weather - When the mean daily outdoor temperature is less than 40 F., the temperature of the concrete shall be maintained between 50 and 70 F. for 7 days. When necessary, arrangements for heating, covering, insulating, or housing the concrete work shall be made in advance of placement and shall be adequate to maintain the required temperature without injury due to concentration of heat. Combustion heaters shall not be used during the first 24 hr. unless precautions are taken to prevent exposure of the concrete to exhaust gases which contain carbon dioxide. CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-13 H1D 080603 08/06/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. La Quinta, CA 2. Hot weather - When necessary, provision for windbreaks, shading, fog spraying, sprinkling, ponding, or wet covering with a light colored material shall be made in advance of placement, and such protective measures shall be taken as quickly as concrete hardening and finishing operations will allow. 10) 3. Rate of temperature change - Changes in temperature of the air immediately adjacent to the concrete during and immediately following the curing period shall be kept as uniform as possible and shall not exceed 5 F. in any 1 hr. or 50 F. in any 24 -hr. period. F. Protection from mechanical injury - During the curing period, the concrete shall be protected from damaging mechanical disturbances, such as load stresses, heavy shock, and excessive vibration. All finished concrete surfaces shall be protected from damage by construction equipment, materials, or methods, by application of curing procedures, and by rain or running water. Self-supporting structures shall not be loaded in such a way as to overstress the concrete. 3.11 CHEMICAL HARDENER AND WATER REPELLANT A. Chemical Hardener Installation: 1. New Concrete Surface Preparation: After final troweling and surface water glaze has dissipated, moist cure concrete or apply clear, non -residual curing compound. Plastic sheeting may be used, but care should be taken to prevent objectionable stains. Allow concrete to cure to minimum of three (3) days. Clean concrete of any dirt, debris or residual curing compound before installing the chemical hardener. Use of clear resin or wax curing compound complying with ASTM C 309, is also acceptable. However, these must be chemically removed with environmentally safe product prior to installation of the chemical hardener. a. Application: Apply directly from container, one undiluted, uniform coat at the rate of 5m2/L (200 SF/gallon). Aggressively scrub into surfaces with a mechanical scrubber or bristle broom. This scrubbing will help achieve maximum penetration and will begin to polish hard -troweled floors. Keep surfaces wet with chemical hardener for a minimum of 30 minutes and continue scrubbing and/or brooming. When product begins to thicken, sprinkle with water and scrub another 5-15 minutes. At this time, thoroughly flush excess chemical hardener with clean water and remove all solution from the floor by squeegee and wet vacuum. This residue solution is non-toxic and can be emptied into a sanitary sewer. Warning: Failure to thoroughly wash and remove all excess material from floor surfaces may result in unsightly white stains. Normally, one coat of chemical hardener is all that is required. However, under certain conditions application of two coats is recommended; namely, on porous, rough - textured, or broom finished surfaces; concrete that has been poorly finished or is under -strength; and in conditions where maximum protection from oil and other contaminate penetration is desired. The second application can be installed 2-4 hours following the first coat, or anytime thereafter. Floors are immediately available for occupancy after removal of the rinse residue. CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-14 HID 080603 08/06/03 �r Y CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. La Quinta, CA 2. Old (Existing) Concrete Surfaces Preparation: Surfaces must be clean and structurally. sound. Remove all residue, oil, sealers, contaminant, and laitance in order to insure maximum penetration and chemical reaction. Repair all holes, cracks and deteriorated areas. Avoid acid etching and mechanical abrasion if possible. Remove resin -based and acrylic curing compound products and unsightly black tire rubber markings. a. Application: Follow the same application procedures as found under New Concrete. Depending on surface porosity, application rate may range from 3-5m2/L (150- 200 SF/gallon). In addition, a second coat may be required in some situations due to porosity or extreme dusting. Application Temperature Limitations: 5°C to 40°C (40°F to 1000F). Drying Time: Two to four hours. 3. Application Temperature Limitations: 4.5°C to 37.8°C (40°F to 100°F). B. Water Repellant Installation: 1. Preparation: Concrete must be structurally sound and clean of all dirt, laitance, contaminants, oil, existing coatings or membrane curing compounds by chemical or mechanical means. Remove unsound concrete. Repair deteriorated area with product recommended by water repellent manufacturer. Rout and fill cracks. Caulking and sealant materials must cure a 2. minimum of 12 hours before applying water repellant. New Concrete: Apply non -residual curing compound, or water cure fresh concrete for best results. Allow concrete to cure a minimum of 21 days before applying water repellant. Remove surface laitance and other contaminants by pressure wash. 3. Installation: Stir water repellant before using to disperse active ingredients. Do not dilute. Apply water repellant directly from sealed containers using low pressure (1.5 kg/cm/20 psi) spray with fan nozzle, roller or bristle broom. Apply in a single, uniform, saturating application. Broom out all puddles. On extremely porous substrates, two coats may be necessary. Apply second coat as soon as surface drying of first coat has become visible. 4. Clean Up: Clean up equipment and overspray immediately with soap and water. For dry material use mineral spirits. 3.12 EVALUATION AND ACCEPTANCE OF CONCRETE A. Test results for standard molded and standard cured test cylinders shall be evaluated separately for each specified concrete mix design. Such evaluation shall be valid only if tests have been conducted in accordance with the specifications. B. For evaluation, each specified mix design shall be represented by at least five tests. C. The strength level of the concrete will be considered satisfactory so long as the averages of all sets of three consecutive strength �--� test results equal or exceed the specified strength, f'c, and no individual strength test result falls below the specified strength, f'c, by more than 500 psi. Should cylinder tests fail to meet these requirements or if deficient construction is suspected by Owner's CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-15 H1D 080603 08/06/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. La Quinta, CA Representative, core tests may be required and the cost of such tests shall be paid by the contractor. D. Testing by impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be used to determine relative strengths at various locations in the structure as an aid for selecting areas to be cored. Such tests shall not be used as a basis for acceptance or rejection. E. Where core tests are required, cores at least 2 in. in diameter shall be obtained and tested in accordance with "Methods of Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete" (ASTM C42). The cores shall be air dried (temperature 60 to 80 F, relative humidity less than 60 percent) for 7 days before test and shall be tested dry. F. At least three representative cores shall be taken from each member or area of concrete in place that is considered potentially deficient. The location of cores shall be determined by the Project Manager so as least to impair the strength of the structure. If, before testing, one or more of the cores shows evidence of having been damaged subsequent to or during removal from the structure, it shall be replaced. G. Concrete in the area represented by a core test will be considered adequate if the average strength of the cores is equal to at least 85 percent of and if no single core is less than 75 percent of the specified strength, f'c. H. Core holes shall be filled with low slump concrete or mortar. 3.13 ACCEPTANCE OF STRUCTURE A. Completed concrete work which meets all applicable requirements will be accepted without qualification. B. Completed concrete work which fails to meet one or more requirements but which has been repaired to bring it into compliance will be accepted without qualification. C. Completed concrete work which fails to meet one or more requirements and which cannot be brought into compliance may be accepted or rejected by the Owner's Representative. In this event, modifications may be required to assure that remaining work complies with the requirements. D. The cost of any additional tests or analysis, including additional architectural and engineering services, performed to prove the adequacy of the concrete work, shall be borne by the contractor. END OF SECTION CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-16 H1D 080603 08/06/03 �J 0) CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. La Quinta, CA SECTION 04201 UNIT MASONRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and provisions of the Contract, including General, Supplementary and Special Conditions, applicable Division 0 Sections and Division 1 Sections, apply to this Section. `1:02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Concrete unit masonry B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: 1: Division 7 Section 07200, "Insulation" for masonry insulation. C. Products installed but not furnished under this Section include the following: 1. Steel lintels and miscellaneous steel frames are specified in Section 05500 "Metal Fabrications." 2. Wood nailers and blocking built into unit masonry are specified in Section 06100 "Rough Carpentry". 3.. Sealants in masonry construction joints are specified in Section 07900, "Joint Sealers.". 4. Hollow metal frames in unit masonry openings are specified in Section 08110, "Steel Doors and Frames." 1.03 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A.. Provideunitmasonry that develops the following installed compressive strengths (f'm): 1. For concrete unit masonry: As follows: f'm = 1,900 psi (minimum). 2. For finished assembly: f'm = 1,500 psi (minimum) 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General:. Submit the following: 1. Product data for each different masonry unit, accessory, and other manufactured product indicated. 2. Material certificates for the following signed by manufacturer and Contractor certifying that each material complies with requirements. a. Each different cement product required for mortar and grout including name of manufacturer, brand, type, and weight slips at time of delivery. b. Each material and grade indicated for reinforcing bars. C. Each type and size of joint reinforcement. UNIT MASONRY 04201-1 H1D ADDENDUM 2 101003 10/10/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. La Quinta, CA d. Each type and size of anchors, ties, and metal accessories. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Unit Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 "Specifications for Masonry Structures, " except as modified herein. B. Fire performance characteristics: Where indicated, provide materials and construction which are identical to those of assemblies whose fire resistance has been determined per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting organization, by equivalent concrete masonry thickness, or by another means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Single -Source Responsibility for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of uniform texture and. color, or a .uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from one manufacturer for each different product required for each continuous surface or visually related surfaces. D. Single -Source Responsibility for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from one manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source and producer for each aggregate. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver masonry materials to project in undamaged condition B. Store and handle masonry units off the ground, under cover, and in a dry location to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, corrosion, and other causes. If units become wet, do not place until units are in an air-dried condition. C. Store cementitious materials off the ground, under cover, and in dry location. D. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. E. Store masonry accessories including metal items to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protection of Masonry: During erection, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress. 1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover securely in place. B. Do not apply uniform roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least 3 days after building masonry walls or columns. C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted., Remove immediately any grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry. 1. Protect base of walls from rain -splashed mud and mortar UNIT MASONRY 04201-2 H1D ADDENDUM 2 101003 10/10/03 0 0) OF • CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. La Quinta, CA splatter by means of covering spread on ground and over wall surface..,,,,.,,,, 2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes from mortar droppings. D. Cold -Weather Construction: Comply with reference unit masonry standard for cold -weather construction and the following: 1. Do not lay masonry units that are wet or frozen. 2. Remove masonry damaged by freezing conditions. WORK DAY CONSTRUCTION PROTECTION TEMPERATURE REQUIREMENT REQUIREMENT Above 40 F Normal masonry procedures. Cover walls with plastic or canvas at end of work day to prevent water entering masonry. 40 F - 32 F Heat mixing water to Cover walls and materials to produce mortar temperatures prevent wetting and freezing. between 40 F - 120 F. Covers should be plastic or canvas. 32 F - 25 F Heat mixing water and sand to produce mortar tempera- tures between 40 F - 120 F. 25 F - 20 F Mortar on boards should be maintained above 40 F. With wind velocities over 15 mph provide windbreaks during the work day and cover walls and materials at the end of the work day to prevent wetting and freezing. Maintain masonry above freezing for 16 hours using auxiliary heat or insulated blankets. 20 F - 0 F Heat mixing water and sand Provide enclosures and supply and below to produce mortar tempera- sufficient heat to maintain tures between 40 F - 120 F. masonry enclosure above 32 F for 24 hours. E. Hot -Weather Construction: Comply with reference unit masonry standard and the following: 1. Implement the following when the ambient air temperature exceeds the following: a. 100B F (38B C), or; b. 90B F (32B C) with a wind velocity greater than 8 mph (13 km/h). , 2. Do not spread mortar beds more than 4 ft. (1.2 m) ahead of masonry. 3. Set masonry units within one min. of spreading mortar. 1.08 SAMPLE WALL A. ' Construct a sample wall 4' x 4' minimum for review and approval of unit masonry and mortar finish. B. Leave approved sample wall intact until all masonry work on project . is accepted. UNIT MASONRY 04201-3 H1D ADDENDUM 2 101003 10/10/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. La Quinta, CA PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. Provide special shapes where indicated and as follows: 1. For lintels, corners, jambs, sash, control joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions. 2. Square -edged units for outside corners. B. Size: Comply with ASTM specifications for concrete masonry units. 1. Concrete Masonry Units: Manufactured to specified dimensions of 3/8 inch less than nominal widths by nominal heights by nominal lengths indicated on drawings. 2. Nominal Face Dimensions: 8" X 16" for full size units. 3. Nominal Face Dimensions: 10" X 16" for full size units. (See structural drawings for walls along loading dock grid line 2.8) C. Exposed Faces: Manufacturer's standard gray color and texture, unless otherwise indicated. D. Special finishes: Where indicated on drawings, provide units with exposed faces of the following general description: 1. Split Face Pattern 2. Color Standard Grey E. Hollow Load -Bearing Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90, and as follows: 1. Unit Compressive Strength: 1900 psi minimum average compressive strength. 2. Weight Classification: Medium weight. 2.02 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Mortar: Portland Cement -Lime Mortar, complying with ASTM C270 Type S. B. Grout: Conform to ASTM C476. 2.03 REINFORCING STEEL A. Steel Reinforcing Bars: Material and grade as follows: 1. Billet steel complying with ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed, unless noted otherwise. 2.04 JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: Provide joint reinforcement complying with requirements of referenced unit masonry standard and this article, formed from the following: 1. Galvanized carbon steel wire, coating class as required by referenced unit masonry standard for application indicated. UNIT MASONRY 04201-4 H1D ADDENDUM 2 101003 10/10/03 • 10) OF CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. La.Quinta, CA B. Description: Welded -wire units prefabricated with deformed continuous side rods and plain cross rods into straight lengths of not less than 10•,feet, with prefabricated corner and tee units, and complying with requirements indicated below: 1. Wire Diameter for Side Rods: 0.1483 inch (9 gage). 2. Wire Diameter for Cross Rods: 0.1483 inch (9 gage). 3. For single-wythe masonry provided type as follows with single pair of side rods: a. Ladder design with perpendicular cross rods spaced not more than 16 inches o.c. C. Manufacturers: Subject to, compliance with requirements, provide joint reinforcement by one of the following: 1. AA Wire Products Co. 2. Dur -O -Wal, Inc. 3. Heckman Building Products, Inc. 4. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. 5. Masonry Reinforcing Corp. of America 6. National Wire Products Industries 7. Southern Construction Products, Inc. 2.05 TIES AND ANCHORS, GENERAL A. General: Provide ties and anchors specified in subsequent articles that comply with requirements for metal and size of reference unit masonry standard and of this article. B. Galvanized Carbon Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, coating class as required by referenced unit masonry standard for application indicated. 1. Wire Diameter: 0.1875.inch. C. Steel Plates and Bars: ASTM A 36, hot -dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 123 or ASTM A 153, Class B2, as applicable to size and form indicated. D. Vertical Bar Positioners: Provide vertical bar positioners at top of first course and at bottom of top course at 48" maximum as manufactured by Dur -O -Wall, Inc. or equal. E. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements (unless noted otherwise on structural drawings), provide products by one of the following: 1. AA Wire Products Co. 2. Dur -O -Wal, Inc. 3. Heckman Building Products, Inc. 4. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. 5. Masonry Reinforcing Corp. of America 6. National Wire Products Industries 7. Southern Construction Products, Inc. 2.06 BENT WIRE TIES A. Individual units prefabricated from bent wire to comply with requirements indicated below: B.' Tie' Shape for Hollow Masonry Units Laid with Cells Vertical: Rectangular with closed ends and not less than 4 inches wide. UNIT MASONRY 04201-5 ..H1D ADDENDUM 2 101003 10/10/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. La Quinta, CA 2.07 RIGID ANCHORS A. Provide straps of form and length indicated, fabricated from metal strips of following width and thickness. 1. 1-1/2 inches wide by 1/4 inch thick 2.08 MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS A. • Unit Type Masonry Inserts in Concrete: Cast iron or malleable iron inserts of type and size indicated. B. Anchor Bolts: Steel bolts complying with A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; hot -dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153, Class C; of diameter and length indicated. C. Vertical bars shall be held in position at top and bottom and at intervals not exceeding 200 diameters of the reinforcing, not to exceed 10 feet. Bars shall be in place prior to grouting, as per Dur -O -Wal, Inc. or equal. 2.09 POST INSTALLED ANCHORS A. Anchors as described below, with capability to sustain, without failure, load imposed within factors of safety indicated, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing laboratory. 1. Type: Expansion anchors. 2. Corrosion Protection: Carbon steel components zinc -plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5 (5 Microns) for Class SC 1 service condition (mild). 3. For cast -in-place and post -installed anchors in concrete: Capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 4 times loads imposed by masonry. 4. For post -installed anchors in grouted concrete masonry units: Capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times loads imposed by masonry. 2.10 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS A. Laminated Flashing: Manufacturer's standard laminated flashing of type indicated below: 1. Copper -Fabric Laminate: Copper sheet of weight per sq. ft. indicated below, bonded with asphalt between 2 layers of glass fiber cloth. a. Weight: 3 oz. 2. Application: Use where flashing is fully concealed in masonry. B. Adhesive for Flashings: Of.type recommended by manufacturer of flashing material for use indicated. C. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Copper Fabric Laminate Flashing: a. "Copper Fabric," Afco Products Inc. b. "Type FCC -Fabric Covered Copper, " Phoenix Building UNIT MASONRY 04201-6 H1D ADDENDUM 2 101003 10/10/03 9) SO CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. La Quinta, CA Products C. "Copper Fabric Flashing," Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc. d. "York ,Copper Fabric Flashing," York Manufacturing, Inc. 2.11 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Preformed Control Joint Gaskets: Material as indicated below; designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated. 1. Styrene -Butadiene Rubber Compound: ASTM D 2000, Designation 2AA-805. B. Bond Breaker Strips: Asphalt -saturated organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt). C. Weep Holes: Provide the following: 1. Round Plastic Tubing: Medium -density polyethylene, 3/8 inch outside diameter by 4 inches long. 2:12 INSULATION A. Insulation: Refer -to Division 7, Section 07200, "Insulation" for masonry insulation. 2.13 MASONRY CLEANERS A. Sure Kiean, No. 600 detergent or "Vans Trol" by Pro SoCo, Inc. when expressly approved for intended use by manufacturer or masonry units and mortars being cleaned. 2.14. MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. General: Do not add admixtures including air -entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification, for types of mortar indicated below: 1. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland cement - lime. 2. For masonry, use type indicated below. a. Type S. 3.. Compressive strength of 1800 psi C. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C476. 1. Compressive Strength: 2000 psi 2. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation' tolerances and other specific conditions, and other conditions effecting performance of unit masonry. UNIT MASONRY 04201-7 H1D ADDENDUM 2 101003 10/10/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. La Quinta, CA B. Examine rough -in and built-in construction to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installation. C. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with referenced unit masonry standard and other requirements indicated applicable to each type of installation included in Project. B. Thickness: Build single-wythe wall to the actual thickness of the masonry units, using units of nominal thickness indicated. C. Build chases and recesses as shown or required to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections of Specifications. Provide not less than 8 inches of masonry between chase or recess and jamb of openings and between adjacent chases and recesses. D. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completion of masonry. After installation of equipment, complete masonry to match construction immediately adjacent to the opening. E. Cut masonry units with motor -driven saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units as required to provide continuous pattern and to fit adjoining construction. Use full-size units without cutting where possible. 3.03 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES A. Comply with construction tolerances of referenced unit masonry standard. 3.04 LAYING MASONRY WALLS A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint widths and for accurate locating of openings, movement -type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid the use of less -than -half-size units at corners, jambs, and where possible at other locations. B. Lay up walls to comply with specified construction tolerances, with courses accurately spaced and coordinated with other construction. C. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Lay exposed masonry in the following bond pattern; do not use units with less than nominal 4 - inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. 1. Running bond with vertical joint in each course centered on units in courses above and below unless otherwise indicated. D. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less than 2 inches. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less than nominal 4 -inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. E. Stopping and Resuming Work: In each course, rack back 1/2 -unit length for one-half running bond; do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry, and remove loose masonry units and mortar prior to laying fresh masonry. F. Built -In -Work: As construction progresses, build -in -items specified under this and other Sections of the Specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built -in -items. 1. Fill space between hollow metal frames and masonry solidly UNIT MASONRY 04201-8 H1D ADDENDUM 2 101003 10/10/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. La Quinta, CA with mortar, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core. 3. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 3 courses (24 inches) under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated. 3.05 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Lay hollow concrete masonry units as follows: 1. With full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells. 2. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters, and where adjacent D. Reinforce masonry openings greater than 1'-0" wide, with horizontal joint reinforcement placed in 2 horizontal joints approximately 8" apart, immediately above the lintel and immediately below the sill. Extend reinforcement a minimum of 2'-0" beyond jambs of the opening except at control joints. 1. In addition to wall reinforcement, provide additional reinforcement at openings as required to comply with the above. 3.07- ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL MEMBERS A. Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces structural members to comply with the following: 1. Provide an open space not less than 1 inch in width between masonry and structural member, unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar or other rigid materials. 2. Anchor masonry to structural members with flexible anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure. 3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches o.c. vertically and 36 inches o.c. horizontally. UNIT MASONRY 04201-9 H1D ADDENDUM 2 101003 10/10/03 to cells or cavities to be filled with grout. 3. For starting course on footings where cells are not grouted, spread out full mortar bed including areas under cells. B., Joint Tooling: Tool all exposed joints slightly concave unless otherwise indicated. 3.06 HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: Provide continuous horizontal joint reinforcement as indicated. Install longitudinal side rods in mortar for their entire length with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcing a minimum of 6 inches. B. Cut or interrupt -joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by use of prefabricated "L" and "T" sections. Cut and bend reinforcement units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions. D. Reinforce masonry openings greater than 1'-0" wide, with horizontal joint reinforcement placed in 2 horizontal joints approximately 8" apart, immediately above the lintel and immediately below the sill. Extend reinforcement a minimum of 2'-0" beyond jambs of the opening except at control joints. 1. In addition to wall reinforcement, provide additional reinforcement at openings as required to comply with the above. 3.07- ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL MEMBERS A. Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces structural members to comply with the following: 1. Provide an open space not less than 1 inch in width between masonry and structural member, unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar or other rigid materials. 2. Anchor masonry to structural members with flexible anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure. 3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches o.c. vertically and 36 inches o.c. horizontally. UNIT MASONRY 04201-9 H1D ADDENDUM 2 101003 10/10/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. La Quinta, CA 3.08 MOVEMENT (CONTROL AND EXPANSION) JOINTS A. General: Install control and expansion joints in unit masonry where indicated. Build in related items as the masonry progresses. Do not form a continuous span through movement joints unless provision are made to prevent in -plane restraint of wall or partition movement. B. Place control joints in the following locations: 1. Changes in wall height or thickness. 2. At construction joints in foundation, in roof, and in floors (where CMU bears on floor slab). 3. At.chases and recesses for piping, columns, fixtures, etc. 4. At abutment of wall and columns. 5. At return angles in AL@,AT@ and AU@ shaped structures. 6. At one or both sides of wall openings. a. Place control joint at one side of an opening less than six feet in width and at both jambs of openings over six feet wide. Extend control joint through wall finishes where -applied directly to masonry units. b. Provide horizontal slip plane where reinforced lintel beam terminates at a control joint. Provide horizontal slip plane at junction of roof and load- bearing masonry terminating at a control joint. Bond between roof and wall should be broken 12-15 feet back from corners, with slip plane. {� C. For walls without openings or other points of stress concentrations, control joints shall be located to divide a wall into a series of isolated panels. Then length of panel between control joints depends on wall height and amount of horizontal reinforcement. The most restrictive of the following C.J. spacing procedure shall be followed: 1. National concrete masonry Association: Control joint spacing for moisture controlled Type 1 concrete masonry units is expressed as a ratio of panel length of height (L/H). For vertical spacing of joint reinforcement at 16" o.c., the maximum ratio (L/H) = 3 with panel length not to exceed 40 feet. 2. Masonry walls (30) feet and lower: C.J. spacing shall not exceed 1 2: 1 ratio. 3. Masonry walls (30) feet and higher: C.J. spacing shall not exceed 1:1 ratio. D. Form control joints in concrete masonry as follows: 1. Install special shapes designed for control joints. Install bond breaker strips at joint. Keep head joints free and clear of mortar or rake joint. Fill joints with elastomeric sealant; refer to Section 07900, "Joint Sealers." 3.09 LINTELS A. Install loose steel lintels where indicated. UNIT MASONRY 04201-10 H1D ADDENDUM 2 101003 10/10/03 • �" CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. La Quinta, CA B. Provide masonry lintels where shown and wherever openings of more than 2'-0" for block size units are shown without structural steel or other -supporting lintels. Provide formed -in-place masonry lintels. Cure precast lintels before handling and installation. Temporarily support formed -in-place lintels. 1. For hollow concrete masonry unit walls, use specially formed bond beam units with reinforcement bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout. 2. Install pre-engineered precast concrete lintels where indicated and where concrete masonry will be concealed by other work. 3. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. C. Install loose steel lintels and miscellaneous steel frames where indicated. 3.10' FLASHING/WEEP HOLES A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles; lintels, ledges, other obstructions to the downward flow of water in the wall, and where indicated. B. Prepare masonry surfaces so that they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing. Place through -wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Seal penetration in flashing with adhesive/sealant/tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer before covering with mortar. C. Install flashings as follows: 1. Extend flashing from exterior face of outer wythe of masonry through the, outer wythe, turned up a minimum of 4" and inserted 3/4" into the outer face shell of inner wythe. Do not extend flashing full depth of inner wythe. Installation into inner wythe may be accomplished by raking out horizontal joint, inserting flashing and sealing joint with sealant and backer rod. 2. At heads and sills, extend flashing as specified above unless otherwise indicated but turn up ends not less than 2 inches to form a pan. 3. Cut off flashing flush with face of wall after masonry wall construction is completed. D. Install weep holes in the head joints in exterior wythes of the first course of masonry immediately above embedded flashings and as follows: 1. Form weep holes with specified plastic tubing 2. Space weep holes 24 inches o.c. 3.11 INSTALLATION OF REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY A. General: Install reinforced unit masonry to comply with requirements of referenced unit masonry standard. B. Temporary Formwork: Construct formwork and shores to support reinforced masonry elements during construction. 1. Construct formwork to conform to shape, line, and dimensions UNIT MASONRY 04201-11 H1D ADDENDUM 2 101003 10/10/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. La Quinta, CA shown. Make sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry. C. Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained sufficient strength to resist grout pressure. D. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and other temporary loads that may be placed on them during construction. 3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Contractor shall employ an independent testing laboratory and Owner will pay to perform field quality control testing of masonry grout. 3.13 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or if units do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units and in fresh mortar or grout, point to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge any voids or holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point -up all joints including corners, openings, and adjacent construction to provide a neat, uniform appearance, prepared for application of sealants. C. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave 1/2 panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Project Manager's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry. 3. Protect adjacent nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent, polyethylene film, or waterproof masking tape. 4. Wet wall surfaces with water prior to application of cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing thoroughly with clear water. 5. Clean concrete masonry by means of cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 45 applicable to type of stain present on exposed surfaces. D. Protection: Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to Installer, that ensure unit masonry is without damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION UNIT MASONRY 04201-12 H1D ADDENDUM 2 101003 10/10/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA OUINTA, CA • SECTION 04730 • SIMULATED STONE VENEER PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Related Documents: General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract, Division 1 General Requirements and Drawings are applicable to this Section. B. Section Includes: 1. Simulated stone veneers for exterior applications. 2. Reinforcement, anchorages, mortar, and accessories. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 04201 - Unit Masonry 2. Section 05400 - Cold Formed Metal Framing 3. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers 4. Section 09100 - Lath and Plaster 5. Section 09260 - Gypsum Drywall 1.2 SUBMITTALS D. Submit following in accordance with Section 01300 and 01340.- 1. 1340.1. Product Data: Submit for fabricated wire reinforcement and each type of stone specified. Include all applicable physical • and performance data. 2. Samples: Submit 3 - 18 in. x 24 in. samples of simulated stone units to illustrate color, texture, and size range of each type unit. 1.2 FIELD SAMPLES A. • General: Comply with Section 01340. B. Sample Installation: Construct stone wall at job site 4 feet x 8 feet in size, including mortar, special shapes, bonding, joint work, reinforcement, moisture barrier, grouting, corbelling, mortar color, expansion control joints, and accessories. 1. Obtain Architect's approval before beginning work. Protect and retain sample as a basis on which the quality of the work will be judged. Do not remove until Substantial Completion. 2. Accepted Field Sample: May not remain as part of completed Work unless approved by Owner and Architect. SIMULATED STONE VENEER SECTION 04730 - 1 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA OUINTA, CA 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer: Minimum 5 years experience in similar types of work of similar scope and be able to furnish list of previous jobs and references if requested by Architect. B. Fabricator: Licensee of manufacturer with not less than 5 years experience manufacturing simulated stone products of size, type, and quantity as required for this project. C. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints as indicated on Drawings or if not indicated, install at frequency and in accordance with details and as recommended by manufacturer. Confirm locations and frequency with Architect before beginning work. D. Certifications: 1. Provide written documentation that products have met or exceeded at least one of the following certifications for a minimum of 10 years: a. ICBG - International Conference of Building Officials; 2. Provide written documentation that stone products comply with specified minimum criteria when tested in accordance with testing standards specified in Part 2 of this Section. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Minimum air temperature of 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) prior to, during, and for 48 hours after completion of work; and 2. Cold Weather Requirements: IMIAC (International Masonry Industry All -Weather Council) - Recommended Practices and Guide Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, handle, and protect materials in accordance with Section 01600. 1. Store mortar materials on pallets in dry place. 2. Protect materials from rainmoistureand freezing temperatures. 3. Protect reinforcement and accessories from elements. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Prepare and submit in accordance with Section 00840. 1. Provide 40 -year warranty against manufacturing defects in manufactured stone products." PART 2 PRODUCTS SIMULATED STONE VENEER SECTION 04730 - 2 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA OUINTA, CA 2.1 MANUFACTURERS " A. Manufacturer: Coronado Stone Products Inc. 11191 Calabash Avenue FontanaCalifornia 92337 909.357.8295 Voice http://www.coronado.com B. Stone Product: Subject to compliance with requirementsprovide the following product: 1. Coronado Product: Canyon Ledge as manufactured by Coronado Stone Products a. Stone Color: Chablis as manufactured by Coronado Stone Products 2.2 STONE MATERIALS A. Simulated Stone: 1. Precast simulated stonecomposed of following materials: a. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type 1, 2, or 3 depending upon color to be produced. b. Course Aggregates: ASTM C 330, lightweight type, color as necessary to obtain final approved color of stone. C. Sand: ASTM C 144, special color if required to match approved sample., d. Iron oxide colors. e. Water: Clean and free from deleterious substances. 2.3 MORTAR MATERIALS A. Tilesetter's Thinset: Mix thinset (tilesetter's) into mortar in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for dry stack applications. Formula: 1/2 part thinset, 1 part cement, 2-1/2 parts sand. B. Pigments: Meeting ASTM C 979, mineral oxide type. C. Bonding Agent: As recommended by simulated stone manufacturer for direct bonding of simulated stone to masonry or concrete substrates when not using metal lath. D. Mixing: Use thinset with acrylic additive in accordance with thinset manufacturer's recommendation. SIMULATED STONE VENEER SECTION 04730 - 3 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC LA OUINTA, CA 1. Thoroughly mix mortar and grout ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use. Mix grout to ASTM C 270, Type S proportions and mortar to ASTM C 270, Type S requirements. 2. Do not use anti -freeze compounds to lower freezing point of mortar. 2.4 RELATED MATERIALS A. Setting Accessories: 1. Moisture Barrier: a. ASTM D 226, No. 15 non -perforated asphalt saturated organic felt or as required by code. 2. Joint Sealant: Refer to Section 07900. 3. Fasteners: Coated 1-1/2 inch nails, staples, or screws of type and for spacing as recommended by simulated stone manufacturer. 4. Cleaner: Nonacid cleaner as recommended by simulated stone manufacturer. 5. Sealer: Section 07175 - Clear Water -Repellent. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION A. Examination: Examine conditions and proceed with work in accordance with Section 01400. 1. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. 2. Verify items provided by other Sections of work are properly sized and located. 3. Verify that built-in items are in proper location and ready for roughing into masonry work. 4. Verify correct product prior to installation. 5. Verify that masonry and concrete substrates do not have residual coatings (paint, bond breaker, curing compounds, etc.) present, which may affect bonding of mortar to substrate. a. Install metal lath if residual coatings are present on substrate. 6. Consult Owner and manufacturer if deficiencies exist. Correct deficiencies in accordance with stone manufacturer's recommendations. SIMULATED STONE VENEER SECTION 04730 - 4 a CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA OUINTA, CA A. Protect surrounding area from possible damage during installation work. B. Initiating installation constitutes Installer's acceptance of existing surfaces and substrate. APPLICATION A. Moisture Barrier: 1. Apply sheets horizontallystarting at the base of the wall, and lapping each successive upper sheet over the previous lower sheet. 2. Lap horizontal and vertical joints 6 inches. 3. Cut and seal joints, penetrations, openings, and projections with manufacturer's recommended tape. 4. Install with corrosion -resistant staples. B. Lathing: Apply metal lath taut, with long dimension perpendicular to supports. 1. Lap ends minimum 1 inch. Secure end laps with tie wire where they occur between supports. 2. Lap sides of lath minimum 1-1/2 inches. 3. Attach metal lath to framing using nails or screws of type, size and spacing as.recommended by system manufacturer. 4. Continuously reinforce internal angles with corner mesh, except where the metal lath returns 3 inches from corner to form the angle reinforcement; fasten at perimeter edges only. 5. Place 4 inch _wide strips of metal lath centered over junctions of dissimilar backing materials. Secure rigidly in place. C. Mortar: 1. Apply bonding agent to masonry or concrete substrates in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Apply mortar-thinset adhesive mixture to the back of the stone. D. Simulated Stone Veneer: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. SIMULATED STONE VENEER SECTION -04730 - 5 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA 1. Canyon Ledge: To achieve the appearance of Canyon Ledge as shown in our catalog, either the top or bottom side of each stone MUST be installed on a level or near -level position. Stone should not be installed in a vertical position. Select stones from several different boxes to ensure a proper blend of size and color variation.. See brochure photos for recommended installation pattern. 2. For drystack applications, begin stone installation at bottom of wall, maintaining unit level and plumb. 3. Press units firmly into position, wiggle each piece slightly and apply light pressure to unit to ensure firm bonding, causing mortar to extrude slightly around edges of units and to leave a joint width of 0" (drystacked). 4. Place units in dry stack fashion, without mortar joints. 5. Install outside corner return units with short and long lengths alternated. 6. Install accessory pieces (quoins, caps, sills, moldings) as work progresses, using same techniques as units in field of wall. E. Plan work to minimize jobsite cutting. Perform necessary cutting with proper tools to provide uniform edges; take care to prevent breaking unit corners or edges. 9) F. Remove excess mortar; do not allow mortar to dry on face of units. 1. Point and tool joints before mortar has set. 2. Clean and finish joints in accordance with architect's and manufacturer's instructions. G. Control Joints: Size in accordance with Section 07900 for sealant performance, but in no case larger than adjacent mortar joints in exposed stone units. H. Expansion Joints: Provide where indicated on Drawings or as recommended by system manufacturer. I. Built-in Work: As work progresses, build in door and window frames, nailing strips, anchor bolts, plates, and other items specified in various sections. 1. Build in items plumb and level. 2. Bed anchors of metal door and glazed frames in mortar joints. Fill frame voids solid with mortar. 3. Do not build in organic materials subject to deterioration. SIMULATED STONE VENEER SECTION 04730 - 6 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA OUINTA, CA 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Cutting and Fitting: Cut and fit for chases, pipes, conduits, leeves, and grounds. Cooperate with other sections of work to provide correct size,'shape, and location. 1. Obtain approval prior to cutting or fitting any area not indicated or where appearance or strength of masonry work may be impaired. 3.4 CLEANING AND SEALING A. Cleaning: Comply with Section 01710. 1. Remove excess mortar and smears using brush or steel wool. 2. Leave surfaces thoroughly clean and free of mortar using a non -acidic solution. B. Sealer: Apply sealer to completed surface in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION SIMULATED STONE VENEER SECTION 04730 - 7 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. La Quinta, CA SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1 - GENERAL . 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. B. Unless otherwise shown or specified, this work shall conform to the following standards: 1. AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges (1986) except as modified herein. Paragraph 4.2.1 of the above code is hereby modified by deletion of the following sentence: "This approval constitutes the Owner's acceptance of all responsibility for the design adequacy of any detail configuration of connections developed by the fabricator as part of his preparation of these shop drawings". 2. AISC Specification for Structural Steel Buildings (1989). 3. AISC Specification for Structural Joints using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts (1985). 4. AWS (D1.1) Structural Welding Code - Steel (1985). 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-1 H1A 021003 08/06/03 A. Include all labor, materials and appliances, and perform all operations in connection with the installation of all Structural Steel and all related work, complete, in strict accordance with the drawings, and as specified herein. Structural steel work includes: 1. Design of structural steel connections. 2. All structural steel including columns, beams, girders, column base and cap plates, joist and beam bearing plates, angles and channels. 3. Framing for all openings in metal deck. 4. Connection angles, bolts and -electrodes for welding work. 5. Framing and supports for roof top units. 6. Shop painting. 7. Shop drawings. 8. Furnishing of anchor bolts (installation of anchor bolts shall be by the concrete contractor). 9. Connections of masonry straps and anchors to columns and beams. 10. Connections for steel joist girders and steel joists to structural steel. 11. All other items required to make the work of this section complete. 1.03 SUBMITTALS STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-1 H1A 021003 08/06/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. La Quinta, CA A. Shall be submitted for review only when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in these specifications. B. Shop Drawings: it 1. Submit shop drawings to the Project Manager for review prior to fabrication. 2. Items requiring field measuring shall have all dimensions verified in the field before fabrication. 3. Prepare in accordance with applicable standards and specifications listed in this Section. 4. All structural steel shall be detailed, fabricated and erected in accordance with the AISC Code of Standard Practice, except as modified herein. 5. Submit shop drawings, including complete details and schedules for fabrication and assembly of structural steel members, procedures and diagrams. Include details of cuts, connections, camber, holes and other pertinent data. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols and show size, length and type of each weld. Furnish erection drawings referencing erection marks to shop detail drawing numbers. Provide setting drawings, templates and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other anchorages to be installed by others. Type of fasteners shall be clearly shown for all members. 6. Fabricator's erection drawings and shop details shall clearly show the design loads of the connections designed by the Fabricator. 7. The fabricator's engineer shall be responsible for the design, adequacy and safety of all connections. All shop drawings shall be signed and sealed by the fabricator's engineer with the registered engineer's seal for the state where the structure is located. Engineer's seal may be qualified "For Design of Connections Only". C. Connection Design Certification: Submit connection design certification stating that all structural steel connections have been designed in accordance with the drawings, project specifications and AISC specifications. Connection design certification shall be signed and sealed by the fabricator's engineer with the registered engineer's seal for the state where the structure is located. D. Connection Design Calculations: Design calculations for all connections designed by the fabricator's engineer shall be submitted only when requested by the Owner's Representative for submittal to the building official or for information. Connection design calculations will not be reviewed by the Project Manager. All design calculations shall be signed and sealed by the fabricator's engineer with the registered engineer's seal for the state where the structure is located. E. Review of submittals is only for review of general conformance with the design concept, including verification of the connection design loads shown on the shop drawings. In no case shall this review relieve the contractor of the responsibility for design, adequacy and safety of all connections, correctness of fit, general or detailed dimensions, quality or quantity of materials, or any other conditions, functions, performance or guarantees required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 10) STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-2 H1A 021003 08/06/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. $ La Quinta, CA 2.01 MATERIALS A. Structural Shapes and Plates (except wide flanges): ASTM A36 Typical, unless noted. B. All Wide Flange Sections: A992, Fy = 50 KSI. 3. Structural Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B, Fy = 46 KSI. D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Grade B, Fy = 35 KSI. E. Bolts: ASTM A325. F. Welding Electrodes for Arc Welding: Series E70. G. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A307 Typical, unless noted. H. Paint (Shop Coat): Fabricator's standard metal primer paint. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 DESIGN OF CONNECTIONS A. Unless- otherwise shown or called for on the drawings, all shop connections may be either bolted or welded and all field connections shall be bolted. The fabricator is responsible for the design of all connections. Connections shown on the structural drawings are schematic and are only intended to show the relationship of members connected. Connection details indicated on the drawings shall be incorporated into the fabricator's connection design. B. Unless noted otherwise, connections shall be designed to support half of the allowable load on the beam, defined in the AISC Beam Tables as R/2, or the reaction shown on the drawings, whichever is greater. For connections not covered above, notify Engineer of need for additional information. C. Unless noted otherwise, connections shall be designed as "simple framing" connections (unrestrained, free -ended) with the ends of beams and girders connected for shear only, and. free to rotate with some inelastic, but self-limiting, deformation of connection parts, under gravity load. D. Unless otherwise noted, bolted connection shall be designed as bearing type connections using the values for bearing type connection with threads included in the shear plane. A minimum of two bolts per connection must be used. E. Single plate connections may be used only if the connections are designed in accordance with the design -procedure given in -- "Engineering for Steel Construction" published by the AISC. F. The fabricator is responsible for verifying the tension capacity of axially loaded members after a section is reduced for bolt holes. Member size may be increased or connection plates added as required. 3.02 FABRICATION A. Shop Fabrication and Assembly: Fabricate and assemble structural assemblies in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate items of structural steel in accordance with AISC Specifications and as indicated on final shop drawings. Provide camber in structural members where indicated. B. Properly mark and match -mark materials for field assembly. ` Fabricate for delivery sequence which will expedite erection and minimize field handling of materials. STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-3 H1A 021003 08/06/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. La Quinta, CA C. Structural steel fabricator must coordinate details, provide connections and punch holes for other trades as shown on structural, architectural, electrical and mechanical drawings. D. Shop splicing of material will not be permitted unless each individual splice is shown on the shop drawings and is subsequently approved by the Project Manager. E. Painting 1. All surfaces of steel to be painted shall be cleaned and primed according to Steel Structures Painting Council Specification SSPC-SP-3-63 and as hereinafter modified. 2. Paint all structural steel items with one shop coat applied at a rate to produce a minimum dry film thickness of 1.0 mil. F. Inspection: All fabrication work shall be subject to inspection by Owner's Representative and/or an independent testing laboratory. All reasonable facilities shall be made available for the inspectors at all times. Contractor shall bear costs of testing work performed by his field and shop forces necessary to insure performance of contract. G. Substitutions 1. In cases where material shown or specified is not readily available, proposed substitutions must be submitted for review by the Project Manager. 2. All substituted material must be of equivalent section to that specified and any additional cost due to increased weight is to be borne by this Contractor. 3. Substitutions must not interfere with Architectural, Plumbing, Mechanical, Electrical, etc. requirements. H. Steel shall be delivered as required in accordance with a schedule approved by the Owner's Representative. 3.03 ERECTION A. The steel structure is a non -self-supporting steel frame and is dependent upon diaphragm action of the metal roof deck and attachment to the masonry/ concrete walls for stability and for resistance to wind and seismic forces. Provide all temporary supports required for stability and for resistance to wind and seismic forces until these elements are complete and are capable of providing this support. B. Furnish to concrete contractor all required anchor bolts and other incidental items of structural steel required to be built into concrete or masonry. Furnish templates and location plans for installing these items. C. Thoroughly examine and check the placement of anchor bolts and any supports on which the structural steel work is in any way dependent and notify the Owner's Representative in writing of any defects which would affect the satisfactory completion of this work. The starting of structural steel erection shall imply acceptance of the underlying surfaces. D. Set and shim all base plates to the elevations shown on the contract drawings. •. E. All work shall be carefully and accurately assembled to carry out STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120-4 H1A 021003 08/06/03 0 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. La Quinta, CA the design as shown. Erect the steel in order of sequence and schedule as previously arranged with the Owner's Representative. F. Use care in handling and erection to insure that steel shall not be twisted, bent or otherwise damaged, and should any difficulty be encountered, it shall immediately be reported to the Owner's Representative. No cutting of structural shapes will be done in the 'field without the consent of the Owner's Representative. G. Furnish all erection equipment, power, planking, bracing, guys, bolts, shims, etc., necessary in executing this part of the work. H. Welders shall be certified by an independent testing and inspection service. Tests for uncertified welders shall be at the expense of this contractor.. I. Misfits, due to shop or 'drafting errors, will be corrected or replaced in field at the fabricator's expense. J. All steel shall be erected square, plumb and true to lines and levels Any measures required to correct out of plumb steel columns, etc., will be at this contractor's expense. K. Field touch up painting shall be done with the same type of paint as the shop coat. Touch up shall include erection damage, cleaning and painting of field connections or welds, bolts, nuts, and areas adjacent to welds not primed. STRUCTURAL STEEL H1A 021003 END OF SECTION 05120-5 08/06/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. La Quinta, CA SECTION 05210 STEEL JOIST GIRDERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. B. Unless otherwise shown or specified, this work shall conform to the following standards adopted by the Steel Joist Institute: 1. Standard Specifications for Joist Girders (1991). 2. Recommended Code of Standard Practice for Steel Joists and Joist Girders (1991). 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK A. The work required under this section consists of all steel joist girders, accessories and related items necessary to complete the work indicated on the drawings and as specified. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shall be submitted for review only when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in these specifications. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit shop drawings to the Project Manager for review prior to fabrication. 2. Items requiring field- measuring shall have all dimensions verified in the field before fabrication. 3. Furnish detailed drawings and lists showing the mark, number, and location of all joist girders. Show type of paint and all accessories and details as may be required for proper installation of joist girders. -4. Show design loads and location of loads on each joist girder. 5. All shop drawings shall be signed and sealed by the manufacturer's engineer with the registered engineer's seal for the state where the structure is located. C. Manufacturer's Certification: Submit manufacturer's certification stating that all steel joist girders used on this project have been designed and manufactured in accordance with the drawings, project specifications and SJI.specifications. Manufacturer's certification shall be signed and sealed by the manufacturer's engineer with the registered engineer's seal for the state where the structure is located. D. Steel Joist Institute Certification: Submit Certification from the Steel Joist Institute that the manufacturer's design of Joist Girders have been checked by the Steel Joist Institute and found to conform toits standard specifications and load tables. E. Design Calculations: Design calculations for all joist girders used STEEL JOIST GIRDERS 05210-1 01/07/94 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. La Quinta, CA on this project shall be submitted only when requested by the Owner's Representative for submittal to the building official or for information. Design calculations will not be reviewed by the Project Manager. All design calculations shall be signed and sealed by the manufacturer's engineer with the registered engineer's seal for the state where the structure is located. F. Review of submittals is only for review of general conformance with the design concept including verification of the design loads shown on the shop drawings. In no case shall this review relieve the contractor of the responsibility for design, general or detailed dimensions, quality or quantity of materials, or any other conditions, functions, performance or guarantees required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Steel for Joist Girders: Comply with SJI Specifications. B. Shop paint: Shall conform to the Steel Structures Painting Council Specification 15-68T, Type 1. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 DESIGN A. Steel joist girders shall be designed by the manufacturer. The manufacturer's engineer shall be responsible for the design, adequacy and safety of all steel joist girders. All shop drawings shall be signed and sealed by the manufacturer's engineer with the engineer's seal for the state where the structure is located. Design shall be in accordance with the Standard Specifications for Joist Girders. B. Unless otherwise noted, steel joist girders shall be designed as simply supported primary members with all loads equal in magnitude and evenly spaced along joist girder top chord. C. Additional design loads from roof top equipment of other concentrated loads shown on the drawings shall be considered as collateral loads. These loads shall be considered in the design of the joist girders. Refer to the architectural and mechanical drawings for locations and weights of equipment. Where such loads do not occur at the panel points of the joist girder, auxiliary framing shall be added to the joist girder or the top chord shall be designed for the effects of the load. D. Joist girders shall be designed to support the design loads without exceeding a deflection of L/240. E. When net uplift forces due to wind are shown on the drawings, the manufacturer shall design the joist girders and connections of the joist girders to the supporting structure for the net uplift. F. Comply with structural drawings, sheet S0.2 for additional requirements 3.02 FABRICATION A. Steel joist girders shall be fabricated in accordance with the Standard Specifications for Joist Girders. B. Provide strutted ends of the bottom chord of sufficient strength and rigidity to restrain the lateral movement of the bottom chord. STEEL JOIST GIRDERS 05210-2 01/07/94 0) UJ i CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. La Quinta, CA C. Before application of shop coat, clean steel free of all foreign substances. Give all items one (1) shop coat applied at a minimum rate of 1 mil dry film thickness. Members to have subsequent painting in the field shall be delivered to the job site free of any markings, grease, oil,or other deleterious material. D. Camber all joist girders in accordance with the Standard Specifications for Joist Girders. 3.03 ERECTION A. Steel joist girders shall be erected in accordance with the Standard Specifications for Joist Girders. B. Thoroughly examine the structural steel and other supports on which the steel joist girder work is in any way dependent and notify the Owner's Representative in writing of any defects which would affect the satisfactory completion of this work. The starting of work in connection with steel joist girders shall imply acceptance of the underlying surfaces. C. During the construction period, the contractor shall provide means for the adequate distribution of concentrated loads so that the carrying capacity of any joist girder is not exceeded. D. No other loads shall be placed on the Joist Girder until the steel joists bearing on the girder are in place and attached thereto. E. Field touch up painting shall be done with the same type of paint as the shop coat. Touch up shall include bare, abraded, welded and rusted areas. F. Repair or replace all damaged joist girders. The Project Manager shall be the sole judge as to whether a joist girder can be repaired or must be replaced. END OF SECTION • STEEL JOIST GIRDERS 05210-3 01/07/94 'CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. La Quinta, CA SECTION 05220 STEEL JOISTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. B. Unless otherwise shown or specified, this work shall conform to the following standards adopted by the Steel Joist Institute: 1. Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists, K -Series (1991). 2. Recommended Code of Standard Practice for Steel Joists and Joist Girders (1991). 3. Standard Load Table - Open Web Steel Joists, K -Series (1987). 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK A. The work required under this section consists of all standard open web joists, accessories and related items necessary to complete the work indicated on the drawings and as specified. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shall be submitted for review only when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in these specifications. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit shop drawings to the Project Manager for review prior to fabrication. 2. Items requiring field measuring shall have all dimensions verified in the field before fabrication. 3. Furnish detailed drawings and lists showing the mark, number, type, location, and spacings of all joists. Show bridging type, mark, method of attachment to the joists and anchorage at the ends. Show type of paint and all accessories and details as may be required for proper installation of joists. 4. Show design loads on each joist. 5. All shop drawings shall be signed and sealed by the manufacturer's engineer with the registered engineer's seal for the state where the structure is located. C. Manufacturer's Certification: Submit manufacturer's certification stating that all steel joists used on this project have been designed and manufactured in accordance with the drawings, project specifications and SJI specifications. Manufacturer's certification shall be signed and sealed by the manufacturer's engineer with the registered engineer's seal for the state where the structure is located. D. Steel Joist Institute Certification: Submit certification from the Steel Joist Institute that the manufacturer's design of K Series Steel Joists have been checked by the Steel Joist Institute and found to conform to its standard specifications and load tables. E. Design Calculations: Design calculations for all joists used on STEEL JOISTS 05220-1 01/07/94 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. La Quinta, CA this project shall be submitted only when requested by the Owner's Representative for submittal to the building official or for information. Design calculations will not be reviewed by the Project Manager. All design calculations shall be signed and sealed by the manufacturer's engineer with the registered engineer's seal for the state where the structure is located. 0- F. Review of submittals is only for review of general conformance with the design concept including verification of the design loads shown on the shop drawings. In no case shall this review relieve the contractor of the responsibility for design, general or detailed dimensions, quality or quantity of materials, or any other conditions, functions, performance or guarantees required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Steel: Comply with SJI Specifications. B. Bridging: Comply with SJI Specifications. C. Shop Paint: Conform to the Steel Structures Painting Council Specifications 15-68T, Type 1. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 DESIGN A. Steel joists shall be designed by the manufacturer. The manufacturer's engineer shall be responsible for the design, adequacy and safety of all steel joists. All shop drawings shall be signed and sealed by the manufacturer's engineer with the engineer's seal for the state where the structure is located. Design shall be in accordance with the Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists, K -Series. , B. Unless otherwise noted, steel joists shall be designed as simply supported, uniformly loaded trusses with the top chord braced against lateral buckling. The uniform design load shall be the total safe uniformly distributed load as shown in the SJI Standard Load Table. C. When net uplift forces due to wind are shown on the drawings, the manufacturer shall design the joists, bridging and connections of the joists to the supporting structure for the net uplift. A single line of bottom chord bridging must be provided near the first bottom chord panel points whenever uplift due to wind forces is shown on the design drawings. D. When nonuniform or concentrated loads are shown on the drawings, the manufacturer shall design the joists in accordance with Paragraph 4.1 of the Standard Specification for Open Web Steel Joists, K - Series. 3.02 FABRICATION A. Steel joists shall be fabricated in accordance with the Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists, K -Series. B. Provide extended ends, special depth ends, etc., where indicated on the drawings and as job conditions require. C. Before application of shop coat, clean steel free of all foreign substances. Give all steel items one (1) shop coat applied at a STEEL JOISTS 05220-2 01/07/94 r t� CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. La Quinta, CA minimum rate of 1 mil dry film thickness. Members to have subsequent painting in the field shall be delivered to the job site free of any markings, grease, oil or other deleterious material. D. Camber all steel joists for roofs in accordance with the Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists, K -Series. 3.03 ERECTION A. Steel joists shall be erected in accordance with the Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists, K -Series. B.. Thoroughly examine the structural steel and other supports on which the steel joist work is in any way dependent and notify the Owner's Representative in writing of any defects which would affect the satisfactory completion of this work. The starting of work in connection with open web steel joists shall imply acceptance of the underlying surfaces. C. During the construction period, the contractor shall provide means for the adequate distribution of concentrated loads so that the carrying capacity of any joist is not exceeded. D. All bridging and bridging anchors shall be placed and joist ends fixed prior to the application of any loads. E. Field touch up painting shall be done with the same type of paint as the shop coat. Touch up shall include bare, abraded, welded and rusted areas. F. Repair or replace all damaged joists. The Project Manager shall be the sole judge as to whether a joist can be repaired or must be replaced. END OF SECTION STEEL JOISTS 05220-3 01/07/94 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. La Quinta, CA SECTION 05300 METAL ROOF DECK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. B. Unless otherwise shown or specified, this work shall conform to the following standards. 1. SDI Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck (1992). 2. SDI Diaphragm Design Manual 2nd Edition (1987). 3. AWS (D1.3) Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel (1981). 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK A. Include all labor, material and equipment to furnish and install metal roof decking in accordance with the drawings and as specified. B. Furnish and install all perimeter filler strips, closures and accessories as required, to complete the metal deck work and make it ready to receive roofing. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shall be submitted for review only when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in these specifications. ��-•-... B. Shop Drawings 1. Submit drawings to the Project Manager for shop review prior to fabrication. 2. Items requiring field measuring shall have all dimensions verified in the field before fabrication. 3. Furnish detailed drawings and lists showing the mark, number, type, and location of all metal roof deck. Show method of attachment to the supporting structure. Show all openings for hatches, stacks, etc. Show type of paint and all accessories and details as may be required for proper installation of metal roof deck. C. Manufacturer's Certification: Submit manufacturer's certification that all metal roof deck used on this project has been manufactured in accordance with the drawings, project specifications and SDI specifications. D. Review of submittals is only for review of general conformance with the design concept. In no case shall this review relieve the contractor of the responsibility for design, general or detailed dimensions, quality or quantity of materials, or any other conditions, functions, performance or guarantees required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. 1. Steel: Comply with SDI Specifications. 2. Comply with structural notes on sheet S0.1 B. Accessories: Manufacturer's Standard METAL ROOF DECK 05300-1 01/07/94 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. La Quinta, CA C. Sump Pans: Manufacturer's Standard D. Shop Paint: Manufacturer's standard shop paint (white or light grey). 0 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Metal roof deck shall be erected and fastened in accordance with the SDI Specifications and the manufacturer's specifications and erection layouts. Metal roof deck shall be continuous over at least three spans. Cutting openings through the deck which are less than 16 square feet in area and all skew cutting shall be performed in the field. B. Metal roof deck and its attachment to the structure shall be designed for a gross uplift of 30 pounds per square foot, or the gross uplift shown on the drawings, whichever is larger. C. Metal roof deck shall receive one primer coat of manufacturer's standard paint. Members to have subsequent painting in the field shall be delivered to the job site free of markings, grease, oil or other deleterious materials. D. Top and bottom faces and edges of deck materials where cuts have been made shall have prime coating touched -up with a heavy coat of same material as used in shop. E. Do not hang or support any loads from metal roof deck. F. All deck damaged, dented or chipped during shipping or erection to render it unsightly shall be replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. The Project Manager shall be the sole judge as to whether 0 metal roof deck must be replaced. END OF SECTION METAL ROOF DECK 05300-2 01/07/94 (0 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. La Quinta, CA SECTION 05400 COLD -FORMED METAL -FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and provisions of the Contract including General, Supplementary and Special Conditions, applicable Division 0 Sections and Division 1 Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Types of cold -formed metal framing units include the following: 1. C-shaped steel studs B. Plywood and gypsum sheathing are specified in section 06100, "Rough Carpentry." C. Light gage metal framing and gypsum board at interior partitions are specified in Section 09260, "Gypsum Drywall." 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings for special components and installations not fully dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's product data; otherwise provide product data only. 2. • Include placing drawings for framing members showing size and gage designations, number, type, locations, and spacing. Indicate supplemental strapping, bracing, splices, bridging, accessories, and details required for proper installation. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Component Design: Calculate structural properties of studs and joists in accordance with American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) "Specification for Design of Cold -Formed Steel Structural Members." B. Welding: Use qualified welders and comply with American Welding Society (AWS) D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel." C. Fire -Rated Assemblies: Where framing units are components of assemblies indicated for a fire -resistance rating, including those required for compliance with governing regulations, provide units that have been approved by governing authorities that have jurisdiction. D. Pre -Installation Conference: Prior to start of installation of metal framing systems, meet at project site with installers of other work including door and window frames and mechanical and electrical work. Review areas of potential interference and conflicts, and coordinate layout and support provision for interfacing work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: 1. Alabama Metal Industries Corp. 2. Dale Industries, Inc. COLD -FORMED METAL -FRAMING 05400-1 H1D 041003 08/06/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. La Quinta, CA 3. Dietrich Industries, Inc. 4. Marino Industries, Inc. 5. Superior Steel Studs, Inc. 6. Unimast, Inc. 7. United States Steel 8. Wheeling Corrugating Co. 2.02 METAL FRAMING A. System Components: Manufacturers' standard load-bearing steel studs of type, size, shape, and gage as indicated. With each type of metal framing required, provide manufacturer's standard steel runners (tracks), blocking, lintels, clip angles, shoes, reinforcements, fasteners, and accessories for applications indicated, as needed to provide a complete metal framing system. 2. All framing members shall be manufactured and supplied by one manufacturer. C. Materials and Finishes: 1. For 54 mil (16 ga) and heavier units, fabricate metal framing components of structural quality steel sheet with a minimum yield point of 50,000 psi; ASTM A 446, A 570, or A 611. 2. For 43 mil (18 ga), 33 mil (20 ga) and lighter units, fabricate metal framing components of commercial quality steel sheet with a minimum yield point of 33,000 psi; ASTM A 446, A 570, or A 611. 3. Provide galvanized finish to metal framing components complying with ASTM A 525 for minimum G 60 coating. 4. Fasteners: Provide nuts, bolts, washers, screws, and other fasteners with corrosion -resistant plated finish. 5. Electrodes for Welding: Comply with AWS Code and as recommended by stud manufacturer. 6. Galvanizing Repair: Where galvanized surfaces are damaged, prepare surfaces and repair in accordance with procedures specified in ASTM A 780. The physical and structural properties listed by the Steel Stud Manufacturer Association shall be considered the minimum permitted for all framing members. 2.03 FABRICATION A. General: Framing components may be prefabricated into assemblies before erection. Fabricate panels plumb, square, true to line, and braced against racking with joints welded. Perform lifting of prefabricated units to prevent damage or distortion. B. Fabricate units in jig templates to hold members in proper alignment and position and to assure consistent component placement. C. Fastenings: Attach similar components by welding. Attach dissimilar components by welding, bolting, or screw fasteners, as standard with manufacturer. D. Wire tying of framing components not permitted. E. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate units to a maximum allowable tolerance variation from plumb, level, and true to line of 1/8 inch in 10 feet with a maximum deflection of L/360. �a COLD -FORMED METAL -FRAMING 05400-2 H1D 041003 08/06/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. La Quinta, CA PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Install metal framing systems in accordance with manufacturer's printed or written instruction and recommendations. B. Runner Tracks: Install. continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately to layout at base and tops of studs. Secure tracks as recommended by stud manufacturer for type of construction involved, except do not exceed 24 inches o.c. spacing for nail or power -driven fasteners or 16 inches o.c. for other types of attachment. Provide fasteners at corners and at ends of tracks. C. Installation of Wall Studs: Secure studs to top and bottom runner tracks, by either welding or screw fastening at both inside and outside flanges. D. Splicing of studs will not be permitted. 5. Cutting: All cutting shall be done with a power -driven saw with appropriate abrasive blade. No hand cutting will be permitted. All cuts shall be clean, accurate, and true to line. 6. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements. G. Where stud system abuts structural columns or walls, including masonry walls, anchor ends of stiffeners to supporting structure. H. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing in metal framing system wherever walls or partitions are indicated to support fixtures, equipment, services, casework, heavy trim and furnishings, and similar work requiring attachment to the wall or partition. Where type of supplementary support is not otherwise indicated, comply with stud manufacturer's recommendations and industry standards in each case, considering weight or loading resulting from item supported. I. Frame wail openings larger than 2 feet square with double stud at each jamb of frame except where more than two are either shown or indicated in manufacturer's instructions. Install runner tracks and jack studs above and below wall openings. Anchor tracks to jamb studs with stud shoes or by welding, and space jack studs same as full -height studs of wall. Secure stud system wall opening frame in manner indicated. J. Frame both sides of expansion and control joints with separate studs; do not bridge the joint with components of stud system. K. Install horizontal stiffeners in stud system, space (vertical distance) at not more than 54 inches o.c. Weld at each intersection. L. Erection Tolerances: Bolt or weld wall panels (at both horizontal and vertical junctures) to produce flush, even true -to -line joints. 1. Maximum variation in plan and true position between prefabricated assemblies should not exceed 1/16 inch. M. Installation of Joists: Install level, straight, and plumb complete with bracing and reinforcing as indicated on drawings. Provide not less than 1-1/2 inch end bearing. COLD -FORMED METAL -FRAMING 05400-3 H1D.041003 08/06/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. La Quinta,.CA 1. Reinforce ends with end clips, steel hangers, steel angle clips, steel stud section, or as otherwise recommended by joist manufacturer. . END OF SECTION COLD -FORMED METAL -FRAMING 05400-4 H1D 041003 08/06/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and provision of the Contract, including General, Supplementary and Special Conditions, applicable Division 0 Sections and Division 1 Sections, apply to this Section. -1.02 SUMMARY A. Extent of rough carpentry work is indicated on drawings and includes, but is not limited to, the following: 1. Miscellaneous wood framing 2. Wood nailers for blocking 3. Plywood sheathing 4. Gypsum glass matted sheathing B. Interiors custom cabinet work is specified in Section 06402, "Interior Architectural Woodwork." •1.03 PRODUCT HANDLING: A. Delivery and Storage: Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect against exposure to weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber as well as plywood and other panels; provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings including polyethylene and similar materials. 11. For lumber and plywood pressure treated with waterborne chemicals, provide stacker between each course to provide air. circulation. 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS: A. Coordination: Fit carpentry work to other work; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. Correlate location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds and similar supports to allow attachment of other work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 LUMBER, GENERAL: A. Lumber Standards: Manufacture lumber to comply with PS 20 "American Softwood Lumber Standard" and with applicable grading rules for inspection agencies certified by American Lumber Standards Committee's (ALSC) Board of Review. B., Inspection Agencies: Inspection agencies and the abbreviations used to reference with lumber grades and species include the following: 1. NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority (Canadian) 2. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau 3. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau 4. WWPA - Western Wood Product Association ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-1 H1D 041003 08/06/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA C. Grade Stamps: Factory -mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of inspection agency evidencing compliance with grading rule requirement and identifying grading agency, grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill. D. Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detail dimensions. Provide actual sizes and required by PS 20, for moisture content specified for each use. 1. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide seasoned lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing and shipment for sizes 2" or less in nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated. 2.02 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER: A. Provide wood for miscellaneous framing, support or attachment of other work including bucks, nailers, blocking, furring, grounds, stripping and similar members. Provide lumber of sizes indicated, worked into shapes shown, and as follows: B. Moisture content: 19 percent maximum for lumber items not specified to receive wood preservative treatment. C. Grade: Standard grade light framing size lumber of any species or board size lumber as required. No. 3 Common or Standard grade boards per WCLIB or WWPA rules or No. 3 boards per SPIB rules. 2.03 CONSTRUCTION PANELS: A. Plywood Construction Panel Standards: Comply with PS 1 "U.S. Product Standard for Construction and Industrial Plywood" for plywood panels and, for products not manufactured under PS 1 provisions, with American Plywood Association (APA) "Performance Standard and Policies for Structural -Use Panels", Form No. E445. 1. Trademark: Factory -mark each construction panel with APA trademark evidencing compliance with grade requirements. 2. APA Performance -Rated Panels: Where construction panels will be used for the following concealed types of applications, provide APA Performance -Rated Panels complying with requirements indicated for grade designation, span rating, exposure durability classification, edge detail (where applicable) and thickness. a. Wall Sheathing: APA RATED SHEATHING 1. Exposure Durabilitv Classification: EXPOSURE 1. a) Span Rating: 40/20, 19/32 - inch thick minimum, unless indicated otherwise. Use where 5/8 -inch plywood is indicated on drawings. b) Span Rating: 32/16, 15/32 -inch thick where 2 -inch plywood is indicated on drawings. b. Plywood Backing Panels: For mounting electrical or telephone equipment, provide plywood panels with grade designation, APA C -D PLUGGED INT with exterior glue, in thickness indicated, or, if not otherwise indicated, not less than 23/32". 0) ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-2 H1D 041003 08/06/03 16) `'.;. �tSx-!'+.i-.+Si. V'ek�, rt2t1�'t?"•i.)R�Ct �.. r . .. •,. ti+a CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA 2. Gypsum Glass Matted Sheathing: Comply with ASTM D3273, ASTM E136 (non -combustibility) and ASTM E79, E84 and E119 and shall carry a 10 year substrate limited warranty with a 5 year limited manufacturing defect warranty., 1. Acceptabld products: 5/8" Dens Glass Gold Fireguard Exterior Guard manufactured in accord with ASTM C1177 with glass matt both sides and long edges, water-resistant treated core and fire -resistance in accord with ASTM E 136. 1) Sealants, caulk and tape: 1. Dow Corning 795 or equivalent; Pecora 895 equivalent. 2. Borden HPPG Elmers Siliconized Acrylic La Caulk or equivalent; Pecora AC -20 acrylic la sealant; GE Silicone Silpruf Sealant; Tremco Dymonic. 3. 2" Wide 10 x 10 glass mesh Quick Tape of equivalent. 2.04 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS: A. Fasteners and Anchorages: Provide size, type, material and finish as indicated and as recommended by applicable standards, complying with applicable Federal Specifications for nails, staples, screws, bolts, nuts, washers and anchoring devices. Provide metal hangers and framing .anchors of the size and type recommended by the manufacturer for each use including recommended nails. 1. Where rough carpentry work is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners and anchorages with a hot -dip zinc coating (ASTM A153). • B. Building Paper: ASTM D 226, Type I; asphalt saturated felt, non- perforated, 15-lb..type. 2.05 WOOD TREATMENT BY PRESSURE PROCESS (For Combustible Construction Types): A. Preservative Treatment: Where lumber or plywood is indicated as "Trt-Wd" or "Treated," or is specified herein to be treated, comply with applicable requirements of AWPA standards C2 (Lumber) and C9 (Plywood) and of AWPB Standards listed below. Mark each treated item with the AWPB Quality Mark Requirements. B. Pressure -treat above ground items with water -borne preservatives to comply with AWPB LP -2. After treatment, kiln -dry lumber and plywood to a maximum moisture content, respectively, of 19 percent and 15 percent. Treat indicated items and the following: I 1. Wood nailers, curbs, equipment, support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers and waterproofing. 2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. 3. Wood framing member less than 18" above grade. 4. Wood floor plates installed over concrete slabs directly in contact with earth. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-3 H1D 041003 08/06/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA C. Complete fabrication of treated items prior to treatment, where possible, If cut after treatment, coat cut surfaces with heavy brush coat of same chemical used for treatment, and to comply with AWPA M4. Inspect each piece of lumber or plywood after drying and discard damaged or defective pieces. 4# NOTE TO DESIGNER: Delete Article 2.05 above if building is of non- combustible construction type. Delete Articles 2.05 and 2.06 below if building is of combustible construction type. 2.05 PRESERVATIVE/FIRE TREATED WOOD (For Non-combustible Construction Types): A. General: Where indicated as "Trt-Wd" or "Treated" lumber and plywood installed in above ground weather protected locations shall be pressure treated with "DRICON" fire retardant chemicals. The species of wood used in these location shall meet the requirement of AWPA C31, UC1 and UC2, providing wood that effectively withstands damage from fungal decay and termites. Each piece shall bear the UL label or imprint certifying the flame spread rating and be kiln dried after treatment (KDAT). Each piece shall carry a National Evaluation Services report number. B. Preservative/Fire Retardant Treatment: 1. All preservative/ fire retardant treated wood must have a flame spread rating less than 25 when tested in accordance with ASTM E-84, NFPA 255 or UL 723. 2. All lumber must be kiln dried to maximum moisture content of 19% after treatment. 3. All fire retardant wood must meet Interior Type A requirements in AWPA standard C-20 for lumber and C-27 for plywood. 2.06 FIRE RETARDANT TREATED WOOD A. General: Where indicated as "Fire Treated" lumber and plywood shall be pressure treated with "DRICON" or "Pyro-Guard" fire retardant chemicals. Each piece shall bear the UL label or imprint certifying the flame spread rating, an interior Type A product and be kiln dried after treatment (KDAT). Each piece shall carry a National Evaluation Services report number. B. Fire Retardant Treatment: 1. All fire retardant treated wood must have a flame spread rating less than 25 when tested in accordance with ASTM E-84, NFPA 255 or UL 723. 2. All lumber must be kiln dried to maximum moisture content of 19% after treatment. 3. All fire retardant wood must meet Interior Type A requirements in AWPA standard C-20 for lumber and C-27 for plywood. C. Substitutions will not be allowed. 2.07 EXTERIOR DECORATIVE LOUVERS 1. Provide Molded Ornamental Louvers where indicated on drawings. 2. Model #660RT-B Rectangular Louvers as manufactured by Fypon Molded Millwork, Stewartson, PA, Tel: (800) 537-5349. 1. Style: Open. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-4 H1D 041003 08/06/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA 2. Fypon Standard: High density Polymer comparable to Kiln Dried White Pine Millwork Higher Skin Density. 3. Moisture Resistance: Non -water absorbing. 4. Finish: Factory coated with a High Quality Grade Exterior Acrylic Emulsion Paint. Color as indicated on drawings. 5. Provide Assembly Package and Manufacturers Installation Instructions. c PART 3 - EXECUTION 3:01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Discard units of material with defects which might impair quality of work, and units which are too small to use in fabricating work with minimum joints or optimum joint arrangement. B. Set carpentry work to required levels and lines, with members plumb and true to line and cut and fitted. C. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as shown and as required by recognized standards. D. Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes. E. Use common wire nails, except as otherwise indicated. Use finishing nails for finish work. Select fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting of wood; predrill as required. 3.02 WOOD NAILERS AND BLOCKING A. Provide wherever shown and where required for attachment of other work.. Form to shapes as shown and cut as required for true line and level of work to be attached. Coordinate location with other work involved. B. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading. Countersink bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. Build into masonry during installation of masonry work. Where possible, anchor to formwork before concrete placement. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF SHEATHING A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations contained in Form No. E 30F, "APA Design/Construction Guide - Residential & Commercial," for types of construction panels and applications indicated. B. Fastening Method: Attach to metal_ framing members using Phillips drive, bugle head screws. C. Gypsum Glass Matted Sheathing Boards: 1. Preparation: a) Examine subframing; verify that surface of framing and furring members to receive sheathing does not vary more that 1/4" from the placement of faces of adjacent members. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-5 H1D 041003 08/06/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA 2. Sheathing: a) Provide DensGlass Gold Exterior guard were indicated on drawings. Install sheathing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and applicable instructions in GA -253 and ASTM C1280. b) Install DensGlass Gold Exterior Guard with gold side out. c) Use maximum lengths possible to minimize number of joints. d) Metal Framing: Attach DensGlass Gold Exterior Guard to metal framing with screws spaced 8" o.c. at perimeter where there are framing supports; and 8" o.c. along intermediate framing in field. e) Drive fasteners to bear tight against and flush with surface of sheathing. Do not countersink. f) Locate fasteners minimum 3/8" from edges and ends of sheathing panels. g) Building Paper: If required, install building paper or equal with flashing around openings. h) Finishing: 1. Seal fasteners using Dow Corning 795 or Borden HPPG Elmers Siliconized Acrylic Latex Caulk or equivalent. 2. Finish joints using Dow Corning 795 or Borden HPPG Elmers Siliconized Acrylic Latex Caulk or equivalent. Reinforce with 2" wide 10 x 10 glass mesh Quick Tape or equivalent. END OF SECTION 1) ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-6 H1D 041003 08/06/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA SECTION 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. .This Section includes the following: Interior standing and running trim. B. Related Sections: The following Section contains 'requirements that relate to this Section: Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for furring, blocking, and other carpentry work not exposed to view. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed finish carpentry similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery and Storage: Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect against exposure to weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. r•...., Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels. Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings. B. Do not deliver interior finish carpentry until environmental conditions meet requirements specified for installation areas. If finish carpentry must be stored in other than installation areas, store only where environmental conditions meet requirements specified for installation areas. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior finish carpentry until building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet - work in space is completed and nominally dry, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels through -the -remainder of construction period. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Lumber Standards: Comply with DOC PS 20, "American Softwood Lumber Standard",. for lumber and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review. B. Inspection Agencies: Inspection agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. WWPA - Western Wood Products Association. FINISH CARPENTRY 1098 P.A. NO. CR 06200-1 10/31/97 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA C. Grade Stamps: Provide lumber with each piece factory marked with grade stamp of inspection agency evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying grading agency, grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill. 2.02 FIRE RETARDANT TREATED WOOD A. General: Lumber and plywood shall be pressure treated with "DRICON" fire retardant chemicals. Each piece shall bear the UL label or imprint certifying on FR -rating, an interior Type A product and kiln dried after treatment (KDAT). Each piece shall carry a National Evaluation Services report number. B. Fire Retardant Treatment: 1. All fire retardant treated wood must have an FR -5 rating (flame spread and smoke developed less than 25) when tested in accordance with ASTM E-84, NFPA 255 or UL 723. 2. All lumber must be kiln dried to maximum moisture content of 19% after treatment. 3. All fire retardant wood must meet Interior Type A requirements in AWPA standard C-20 for lumber and C-27 for plywood. C. Substitutions will not be allowed. 2.03 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM A. Softwood Trim: Provide finished lumber and moldings complying with the following requirements including those of the grading agency listed with species: Species: Douglas fir; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. Grade: C & Btr. Finish, C Select, or Choice. Texture: Surfaced (smooth). Lumber for Painted Finish: Glued -up lumber or solid lumber stock. B. Hardwood Trim: Provide finished hardwood lumber and moldings complying with the following requirements: Species: Clear, kiln -dried white hardwoods. Species and Cut: Rift -sawn, clear, kiln -dried red oak selected for compatible grain and color. Moldings for Painted Finish: P -Grade. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting installation and performance of finish carpentry. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application. B. Condition finish carpentry to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before installation, for a minimum of 24 hours FINISH CARPENTRY 06200-2 1098 P.A. NO. CR 10/31/97 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA unless longer conditioning is recommended by manufacturer. 3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Do not use finish carpentry materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished, inadequately seasoned, or too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements. B. Do not use manufactured units with defective surfaces, sizes, or patterns.. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Repair damaged or defective finish carpentry where possible to eliminate functional or visual defects. Where not possible to repair, replace finish carpentry. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. END OF SECTION i FINISH CARPENTRY 06200-3 1098 P.A.M. CR 10/31/97 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA SECTION 06402 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. _ Drawings and provision of the Contract, including General, Supplementary and Special Conditions, applicable Division 0 Sections and Division 1 Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Extent of each type of architectural woodwork is indicated on drawings and in schedules. B. Types of architectural woodwork include the following: 1. Plastic laminate clad shelves and counters. 2.01 MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials of good quality and suitable for use indicated and complying with reference product standards that apply to products indicated. Panel product shall be flat without bow, twist or warp. 1. Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD -3 of thickness, type and grade designation indicated in colors or patterns and finishes as indicated on drawings. 2. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1 mat -formed particleboard, Grade 1- M-2 with minimum density of 40 lbs. per cubic foot, internal -� bond of 60 psi, and minimum screwholding capacity of 225 lbs. on faces and 200 lbs. on edges. 3. Hardboard: ANSI A135.4, Class 1, tempered. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK H1D 041003 06402-1 08/06/03 2. Plywood shelves and coat rods. 3. Exposed trim. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. AWI Quality Standard: Comply with applicable requirements of "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" published by the Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI), except as otherwise indicated. B. Installer Qualifications: Arrange for installation of architectural woodwork items by same firm which fabricated them. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Quality Certification: Submit woodwork Manufacturer's (Fabricator's) certification, stating that fabricated woodwork complies with quality grades and other requirements indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large scale details, attachment devices and other components. C. Samples: +Submit the following samples for verification purposes: Plastic Laminate, 2" x 3" for each type, color, pattern and surface finish. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials of good quality and suitable for use indicated and complying with reference product standards that apply to products indicated. Panel product shall be flat without bow, twist or warp. 1. Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD -3 of thickness, type and grade designation indicated in colors or patterns and finishes as indicated on drawings. 2. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1 mat -formed particleboard, Grade 1- M-2 with minimum density of 40 lbs. per cubic foot, internal -� bond of 60 psi, and minimum screwholding capacity of 225 lbs. on faces and 200 lbs. on edges. 3. Hardboard: ANSI A135.4, Class 1, tempered. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK H1D 041003 06402-1 08/06/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA 4. Softwood Plywood: PS 1, APA Group 1, Exterior, Grade as indicated. 5. Hardwood Plywood: PS 1-83, 7 ply, APA A -A, Group 2, Exterior, Luan Veneer sanded. 6. Joiner Adhesive: Waterproof, phenol resin, fungus resistant. 7. Contact adhesive: Modified ureaformaldehyde 8. Trim: clear pine, premium grade 9. Hardwood: clear, premium grade hardwood of any species. B. Formaldehyde Emission Levels: Comply with formaldehyde emission requirements of each voluntary standard referenced below: 1. Particleboard: NPA 8. 2. Medium Density Fiberboard: NPA 9. 3. Hardwood Plywood: HPMA FE. 2.02 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for moisture content of lumber at time of fabrication and for relative humidity conditions in the installation areas. B. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated with openings and mortises precut, where possible, to receive hardware and other items and work. C. Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work before shipment to project site to maximum extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. D. Pre -Cut Openings: Fabricate architectural woodwork with pre-cut openings, where possible, to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates and roughing -in diagrams for proper size and shape. Smooth edges of cutoffs and, where located in countertops and similar exposure seal edges of cutouts with water- resistant coating. E. Measurements: Before proceeding with fabrication of woodwork required to be fitted to other construction, obtain field measurements and verify dimensions and shop drawing details as required for accurate fit. 1. Where sequence of measuring substrates before fabrication would delay the project, proceed with fabrication (without field measurements) and provide ample borders and edges to allow for subsequent scribing and trimming of woodwork for accurate fit. 2.03 CONSTRUCTION INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK H1D 041003 06402-2 08/06/03 I* 1) INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-3 H1D 041003 08/06/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA A. Core Material: 1. Laminate clad or carpet wrapped platforms, counters and {0 shelves: Hardwood veneer plywood of thickness indicated on drawings. 2. Painted shelves: softwood plywood, APA grade A -A of thickness shown on drawings. 3. Particleboard shall be used only where indicated on drawings. 4. Plastic laminate clad cabinets; Particle board. B. Concealed Material: Any sound, dry solid lumber, or plywood or combination thereof, without defects affecting strength, utility or stability. C. Stiles and rails: Sound, dry solid lumber. D. Sub -bases: Preservative treated nominal 2 X lumber of height indicated or required. Preservative treat all lumber and plywood in concealed spaces or in contact with concrete or masonry. 1. Comply with applicable requirements of AWPA Standards C2 (for lumber) and C9 (for plywood). Mark each treated item with AWPB Quality Mark Requirements. 2. Pressure -treat items with water -borne preservatives to comply • with AWPB LP -2. After treatment, kiln -dry lumber and plywood to a maximum moisture content, respectively, of 19 percent and 15 percent. 3. Complete fabrication of treated items prior to treatment, where possible. If cut after.treatment, coat cut surfaces with heavy brush coat of same chemical used for treatment and to comply with AWPA M4. Inspect each piece of lumber or plywood after drying and discard damaged or defective pieces. E. Plastic laminate cladding: Where indicated to be plastic laminate clad provide .050 inch thick plastic laminate bonded to core material using contact adhesive indicated. F. Joiner: All joints shall be tight, neatly fit and joined using glue and nails. Use wood screws where indicated or required for strength. 2.04 'HARDWARE AND ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. General: Provide hardware and accessory items as indicated on drawings and schedules or if not indicated, as required for complete units of good quality and workmanship. B. Provide cabinet hardware equal to the following: 1. Vertical wall standards to be "Crown Metal" #5130 - 1" slots at 2" oc with #5102 brackets with snap -in clips. Finish to be satin Kromolite (paintable). 2. Wire Pulls - Epco MC -402-4, DC. 3. Hinges.- Grass System 1003 VZ. 4. Magnetic Catches - Epco #541. 5. Shelf Standards - Knape -Vogt 255 NP. 6. Shelf Supports - Knape -Vogt 256- 7. Sliding Door Hardware: INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-3 H1D 041003 08/06/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA a. Extruded Aluminum Upper T -Guide: Knape Vogt #953ZC b. Track and Upper Guide: Knape Vogt #469ZC. C. Enclosed Sheave: Knape Vogt #402STL. d. Door Pull: Knape Vogt #813ANO. 8. Locks - Knape Vogt 987NP. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas prior to installing. B. Pre -Installation Meeting: Meet at project site prior to delivery of architectural woodwork and review coordination and environmental controls required for proper installation ambient conditioning in areas to receive work. Include in meeting the Contractor; Owner Representative, (if any); Installers of architectural woodwork, wet work such as plastering, other finishes, painting, mechanical work and electrical work; and firms or persons responsible for continued operation (whether temporary or permanent) of HVAC system as required to maintain temperature and humidity conditions. Proceed with woodwork installation only when everyone concerned agrees that required ambient conditions can be maintained. Prior to installation of architectural woodwork, examine shop fabricated work for completion, and complete work as required, including back priming and removal of packing. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install woodwork plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions. Shim as required using concealed shims. Install to a tolerance of 1/8" in 8'-0" for plumb and level (including tops); and with no variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces. B. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged finish at cuts. C. Pressure Treated Wood: Handle, store, and install pressure treated wood in compliance with recommendations of chemical treatment manufacturer including those for adhesives, where required for installation. 1. For preservative treated lumber cut or drilled in field, treat cut ends with preservative solution used for original treatment by brushing, spraying, dipping or soaking; as required by AWPA M4. D. Anchor woodwork directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners as required for a complete installation. Use oval countersunk head fasteners and finishing washers for anchoring fixed base and storage cabinets to substrate. E. Tops: Anchor securely to base units and other support systems as indicated. 3.03 ADJUSTMENT, CLEANING, FINISHING, AND PROTECTION A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork where possible to eliminate defects functionally and visually; where not possible to repair INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-4 H1D 041003 08/06/03 ok 0-) • 0 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-5 H1D.041003 08/06/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA replace woodwork. Adjust joiner for uniform appearance. B. Clean, lubricate and adjust hardware. C. Clean woodwork'on exposed and semi -exposed surfaces. Touch-up shop - applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. D. Complete the finishing work specified as work of this section, to whatever extend not completed at shop or prior to installation of woodwork. E. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to Fabricator and Installer, which ensures architectural woodwork being without damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion. END OF SECTION • 0 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-5 H1D.041003 08/06/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA OUINTA, CA SECTION 07175 �.: CLEAR WATER-REPELLENT 1_0 GENERAL: Requirements of Division 0 and 1 apply to work of this Section. 1.1 DESCRIPTION: A. Clear water repellent. Apply to exterior building masonry, simulated stone veneer, plaster over masonry and concrete. Apply at integral color and painted surfaces with methods recommended by manufacturer. B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 03300 - Cast -in -Place Concrete 2. Section 04201 - Unit Masonry. 3. Section 04730 - Simulated Stone Veneer 4. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers. 5. Section 09900 - Painting. 1.2 OUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Applicator qualifications: Approved in writing by manufacturer of clear water repellent used, with copy to Architect. 1.3 SUBMITTALS• A. Product data: Submit complete• manufacturer's descriptive literature and specifications. 1. Materials list: Submit complete lists of materials proposed for use, giving the manufacturer's name, catalog number, and catalog cut for each item where applicable. 2. Manufacturer's recommendations: Submit the manufacturer's current recommendation methods of installation, including relevant limitations, safety and environmental cautions, and applications rates. B. Samples: 1. Coating on one half exposed face of Masonry Block or similar piece of concrete as applicable. 2. Samples of treated surfaces for visual inspection, water absorption testing and caulking adhesion testing, when requested by Architect. 3. Submit substrate samples to water repellent manufacturer for testing to determine most effective coverage rates. f� C. Test reports: Submit certified laboratory test reports confirming physical characteristics of materials used in the performance of the work of this Section. CLEAR WATER-REPELLENT Section 07175 - 1 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC LA OUINTA, CA D. Sample curing documentation: Submit in writing to Architect and water repellent manufacturer exact curing of substrate prior to application of water repellent. 1. Cure substrate a minimum of 30 days prior to application of water repellent. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect the materials of this Section before, during and after installation. Keep dry until ready for use. B. Store materials in area protected from rain or standing water, where temperatures are not less than 40' F., with adequate ventilation, unless otherwise authorized by the manufacturer. C. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS: A. Temperature and relative humidity conditions for period before, during and after application: As recommended and controlled by manufacturer. 1. Do not apply if ambient temperatures or surface temperature are below 40° F., or exceed 100° F. Do not apply materials during rainy weather or if heavy rain is anticipated within 2 hours of application. 2. If rain occurs, allow surfaces to dry a minimum of 5 days. B. Material shall be applied to dry substrates only or as recommended by manufacturer. C. Provide adequate ventilation during and after application, such that water repellent odors are not apparent. D. Protect plants and vegetation from overspray. Protect asphalt based materials such as paving, roofing, caulking and joint fillers from overspray. E. Protect glass, glass products and frames as directed by manufacturer. 1.6 CERTIFICATION: Each shipment of repellent materials delivered to the site shall be accompanied by duplicate copies of an affidavit from the manufacturer certifying that, each classification or ,type of material furnished complies with specification requirements wand is in compliance with Local and State Air Quality requirements. Deliver one copy of affidavit to the Contractor and one copy to the Architect. CLEAR WATER-REPELLENT Section 07175 - 2 'CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC LA OUINTA, CA 1.7 WARRANTY: ' A. Furnish a 10 -year written labor and material warranty jointly signed by manufacturer and applicator stating that surfaces treated will remain water repellent and that manufacturer's technical representative was present at job site during application. B. Commencement of warranty: At time of completion and final acceptance of work. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1- ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: A. Materials shall be the products of one manufacturer and shall be either products of a listed manufacturer or approved in writing in advance. 2.2 MATERIALS• A. "Weather Seal Siloxane "WB" - by PROSOCO, INC. B. "Stifel VC" - by Nox-Crete, Inc. C. "Enviroseal/Double 7" - by Hydrozo, Inc. D. "Rainguard Blok-Lok by Rainguard Products Co. E. "Chemstop Barricade/ME" - by Tamms Industries 2.3 Characteristics.of water repellent. 1. Free from darkening, yellowing, staining or discoloring surfaces. 2. Free from changing reflectivity of natural surfaces, without sheen or gloss when dry. 3. Allow treated surfaces to retain vapor permeability. _ 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION: r A. Examine surfaces scheduled to receive clear, non -yellowing, water repellent with water repellent manufacturer's representative to, assure that conditions are satisfactory for application of materials. Notify Architect of any conditions that will adversely affect execution, permanence and quality of work. Obtain written acceptance of surfaces from manufacturer's representative. B. Verify that exterior surfaces are- cured and dry. Moisture -content of surfaces before application shall be not greater than CLEAR WATER-REPELLENT Section 07175 - 3 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA OUINTA, CA 7%. C. Arrange for pointing of cracks other than hairline cracks. Do not apply clear water repellent until conditions are satisfactory. 3.2 PREPARATION• I A. Verify that surfaces to receive clear water repellent are clear of dirt, dust, oil, wax, other coatings, efflorescense or other deleterious materials. Clean satisfactory surfaces, where necessary, with high pressure water, sand blasting, or other methods suitable to Architect. 3.3 FIELD TEST ON PROJECT PRIOR TO APPLICATION: A. Apply water repellent to three square feet of each type of surface to be treated in accordance with manufacturer's recommended instructions. B. Verify that water repellent has chemically reacted with substrate by visual inspection. 3.4 APPLICATION• A. Protect adjacent finished materials from spray. B. Apply to all exterior areas of pp y exposed masonry in both vertical 0, and horizontal conditions. C. Apply materials as supplied by manufacturer with no dilution or alteration in any way. D. Perform application with low pressure spray equipment. 1. Apply water repellent with low pressure airless equipment using a fan spray course nozzle. Maximum pressure at application point shall not exceed 20 psi. Pressure pot equipment not recommended. Use nozzle no smaller than .035 inches. Manufacturer shall test sample of substrates for determining most effective 'coverage rates. Apply water repellent at approximate coverage rates as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Request presence of manufacturer's technical representative at job site during all material applications. E. Start application at top of masonry wall and work down surface, keeping a wet edge at all times, eight to ten inch rundown. Avoid letting liquid dry between passes. F. Heavily coat exposed top and bottom exterior walls. 3.5 ADJUST AND CLEAN• CLEAR WATER-REPELLENT Section 07175 - 4 1 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA A. Clean spillage and overspray from adjacent surfaces as recommended by water repellent manufacturer. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Spray test: After water repellent has dried, spray a representative wall area with water. 1. Use a water hose 'with a garden type spray nozzle, so located that water strikes wall at 450 downward angle. Run continuously for three hours. END OF SECTION Section 07175 - 5 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA SECTION 07200 MISCELLANEOUS BUILDING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL _'1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and provisions of the Contract, including General, Supplementary and Special Conditions, applicable Division 0 Sections and Division.1 Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. '.Extent of insulation work is shown on drawings and indicated by provisions.of this section. B. Applications of insulation specified in this section include the following: 1. Blanket -type building insulation 2. Foam in place masonry insulation 3. Perimeter insulation C. Roof insulation is specified in the Division 7 Section 07530 (07531), Flexible Sheet Roofing System, in which other roofing products, including,roofing membrane is covered. . D. Sound insulation is specified in Section 09260 Gypsum Drywall. E. Suspended acoustical ceilings are specified in section 09510, "Acoustical Ceilings." 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Certified Test Reports: With product data, submit copies of certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance values, including r -values (aged values for plastic insulations), densities, compressions strengths, fire performance, perm ratings, water absorption ratings and similar properties. B. Formaldehyde Certification: Submit written certification signed by the insulation manufacturer stating that foam -in-place insulation does not contain formaldehyde. C. Material Safetv Data Sheet: Submit Material Safety Data Sheet complying with OSHA Hazard Communication Standard, 29 CRF 1910 1200. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturing Standards: Provide insulation of each type produced by a single manufacturer. B. Installer Qualifications for Foam -In -Place Masonry Insulation• Engage an experienced installer who has been trained by and licensed by the foam -in-place insulation manufacturer and which has not less than 3.years direct experience in the installation of the product used. , C. Thermal Conductivity: Where thermal conductivity properties of insulation materials are designated by K -values, they represent the rate of heat transmitted by conductivity through 1 s.f. of 1" thick homogeneous material in one hour, where there is a difference of 1EF across the two surfaces. D. Thermal Resistivity: Where thermal resistivity properties of MISCELLANEOUS BUILDING INSULATION 07200-1 0300 P.A. NO. 04 & CR 03/03/99 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA insulation materials are designated by R -values they represent the resistance to heat flow through a homogeneous material. Thermal resistivity is expressed as the thickness of the material divided by the thermal conductivity (K). E. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide insulation materials which are identical to those whose fire performance characteristics, as listed for each material or assembly of which insulation is a part, have been determined by testing, per methods indicated below, by UL or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Surface Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84. .Fire Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 316. F. Formaldehyde Emission: Materials used in foam -in-place insulation shall not contain formaldehyde. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General Protection: Protect insulations from physical damage and from becoming wet, soiled, or covered with ice or snow. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for handling, storage and protection during installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: 1. Manufacturers of Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation: a. Amoco Foam Products Co. b. Dow Chemical U.S.A. C. Minnesota Diversified Products, Inc. d. UC Industries 2. Manufacturers of Glass Fiber Insulation: a. CertainTeed Corp. b. Knauf Fiber Class GmbH. C. Manville Corp. d. Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corp. 3. Manufacturers of Foam -In -Place masonry Insulation: a. "Core -Fill 500;" Tailored Foam Products b. ARapco Foam"; Jesco, Inc. C. No substitutions allowed. 2.02 INSULATING MATERIALS MISCELLANEOUS BUILDING INSULATION 07200-2 0300 P.A. NO. 04 & CR 03/03/99 s CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. ' LA QUINTA, CA ' 4 A. General: Provide insulating materials which comply with requirements indicated for materials, compliance with referenced standards, and other characteristics. 1. Preformed Units: Sizes to fit applications indicated, selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths and lengths. B. Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation: Rigid, cellular thermal insulation with closed -cells and integral high density skin, formed by the expansion of polystyrene base resin in an extrusion process to comply with ASTM C 578 for Type indicated; with 5 -year aged r - values of 5.4 and 5 at 40 and 75 deg F (4.4 and 23.9 deg C), respectively; and as follows: 1. Type IV, 25 lbs/sq.ft. compressive strength minimum. C. Faced Mineral Fiber Blanket/Batt Insulation: Thermal insulation produced by combining fibers made of glass with thermosetting resins to comply with ASTM C 665 for Type III, Class A (blankets with reflective vapor -retarder membrane facing with flame spread of 25 or less); foil -scrim -kraft vapor -retarder membrane on one face, respectively; and as follows: 1. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spread and smoke developed values of 25 and 50, respectively. D. Foam -In -Place Masonry Insulation: Two component thermal insulation, when properly rationed and mixed, together with compressed air produce a cold -setting foam insulation in the hollow cores of hollow unit masonry walls. 1. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spread, smoke developed and fuel contributed of 25, 145 and 0 respectively. 2. Thermal value: R of 4.37/in. minimum @ 75 degrees F mean; 4.63/in. minimum @ 35 degrees F mean; ASTM C 177. 3. Moisture absorption: Not more than 3 percent. 4. Density: 0.8 lb/cu. ft. 2.03 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS A. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer, and complying with requirements for fire performance characteristics. B. Mechanical Anchors: Type and size indicated or, if not indicated as recommended by insulation manufacturer for type of application and 'condition of substrate. C. Mastic Sealer: Type recommended by insulating manufacturer for bonding edge joints between units and filling voids in work. D. Protection Board: Premolded; semi-rigid asphalt/fiber composition board, 1/4" thick, formed under heat and pressure, standard sizes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION A. Require Installer to examine substrates and conditions under which insulation work is to be performed. As satisfactory substrate is one that complies with requirements of the section in which 1 substrate and related work is specified. Obtain Installer's written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of work in this section. Do not proceed with installation of insulation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. MISCELLANEOUS BUILDING INSULATION 07200-3 0300 P.A. NO. 04 & CR 03/03/99 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA B. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulations or vapor retarders, including removal of projections which might puncture vapor retarders. 3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for particular conditions of installation in each case. If printed instructions are not available or do not apply to project conditions, consult manufacturer's technical representative for specific recommendations before proceeding with work. B. Extend insulation full thickness as shown over entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions, and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections which interfere with placement. C. Apply a single laver of insulation of required thickness, unless otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF PERIMETER AND UNDER -SLAB INSULATION A. On vertical surfaces set units in adhesive applied in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Use type of adhesive recommended by manufacturer of insulation. B. Protect Top Surface of horizontal insulation (from damage during concrete work) by application of protection board. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION A. Apply insulation units to substrate by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's recommendations. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. B. Set vapor retarder faced units with vapor retarder toward side of construction, except as otherwise indicated. Do not obstruct ventilation spaces, except for firestopping. 1. Tape Joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of insulation to surrounding construction to ensure air -tight installation. C. Set reflective foil -faced units accurately with air space in front of foil as shown. Provide not less than 0.75" air space where possible. D. Stuff loose glass fiber insulation into miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where shown. Compact to approximately 408 of normal maximum volume (to a density of approximately 2.5 lbs. per cu. ft.). 3.05 INSTALLATION OF FOAM -IN-PLACE MASONRY INSULATION A. General: Install foam -in-place insulation from interior prior to installation of interior finish work; comply with manufacturer's instructions. B. Installation: Fill all open cells and voids in hollow concrete masonry walls where shown on drawings. 0 1. Drill series of holes in exterior wall face horizontally and at vertical spacings required to assure complete filling of all open cells and voids. 2. Pump manufacturer's proprietary foam mix and compressed air into open cells and cavities through holes. 0 MISCELLANEOUS BUILDING INSULATION 07200-4 0300 P.A. NO. 04 & CR 03/03/99 • .0 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. `� t ►". "' LA QUINTA, CA 3. Provide for visual evidence that all cells are filled top to bottom with foam insulation. 4 Notify Ownek" when work is completed. Do not proceed until accepted by Owner. 5. Remove excess foam and plug holes with mortar and strike flush. 6. Clean up and remove all debris. 3.06 PROTECTION A. General: Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from harmful weather exposures and from possible physical abuses, where possible by non -delayed installation of concealing work or, where that is not possible, by temporary covering or enclosure. END OF SECTION MISCELLANEOUS BUILDING INSULATION 0300 P.A. NO. 04 & CR 07200-5 03/03/99' CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA ` SECTION 07410 PREFORMED METAL PANELS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and provisions of the Contract, including General, Supplementary and Special Conditions, applicable Division 0 Sections and.Division 1 Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Extent of preformed metal panels is indicated on drawings and includes the following: 1. Factory finished metal wall panels 1.03 SUBMITTALS 1: Submit,the following: 1. Samples of color for verification purposes. Submit samples on actual panel material. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. Structural Design Requirements: Comply with structural requirements indicated based on design procedures of AISI "Specifications for the Design of.Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members." 1. Design Wind Load: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. hk 1.05 WARRANTY 1. Finish Warranty: Furnish panel manufacturer's written warranty covering failure of the factory -applied exterior finish on metal wall panels within the warranty period. This warranty shall be in addition to and not a limitation of other rights.with Owner may have against the Contractor under the Contract Documents. 1. Warranty period for factory applied exterior finishes on wall panels is 20 years after the date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS 1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide wall panels by one of the following: 1. Belvedere Rib Panel; BWR 360; Atlas International, Inc. 2. HR -26 or Box Rib Panel; IMSA Building Products 3. Style -Rib Panel; Centria Architectural Systems 4. 7.2 Panel; MBCI Metal Roofing and Wall Systems 5. Mega -Rib Panel; McElroy Metal, Inc. 2.02 MATERIALS 1. Steel for Painting / Coating: 24 gage, hot -dip zinc coated steel sheet, ASTM A446, Grade A, except as otherwise indicated, G90 zinc coating, surface treated for maximum coating performance. 2. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard stainless steel fasteners with 1, . heads gasketed where exposed on exterior. 1. Fastener heads shall match color of panels. PREFORMED METAL PANELS 07410-1 H1A 112601 08/06/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA 3. Accessories: Provide manufacturer's standard and accessories as required for a complete installation including trim, corner units, clips, seam closures, gaskets, sealants, and similar items. 2.03 FINISHES 1. Metal Finishes: Apply coatings indicated to coil stock before forming and fabricating panels, as required by coating process or for maximum coating performance. Provide colors or color matches as indicated on drawings and schedules. 2. Fluoropolymer Coating: Baked -on fluororpolymer coating system consisting. of epoxy or urethane primer and fluoropolymer topcoat formulated with "Kynar 500 resins", with dry film thickness of not less than 0.2 mil for primer and 1.0 mil for topcoat. 2.04 FABRICATION 1. Fabricate and finish panels and accessories at factory to greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes to produce panels of type indicated and to comply with indicated profiles, and to dimensional performance requirements indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION 1. Comply with panel manufacturers instructions for anchorage, joint sealers, flashing and trim for the proper and permanent installation of panels, with provisions for thermal expansion, erected in panel pattern indicated. END OF SECTION PREFORMED METAL PANELS 07410-2 H1A 112601 08/06/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA SECTION 07500 BUILT-UP ROOFING • 1 1 GENERAL PART - � 1.01 SCOPE, Furnish materials and perform labor required to execute this work as indicated on the drawings, as specified and as necessary to complete the Contract, including, but not limited to, these major items: A. Asphalt -fiberglass composition built-up roofing system. B. Modified membrane base flashing. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: A. Steel, deck. B. Steel Joists. C. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Owner will furnish and pay for the services of a roofing consultant to inspect the work of this Section. Contractor will be furnished a list of items of work requiring the presence of the roofing consultant, including attendance at pre -roofing conference, review of substrates and related flashing immediately prior to starting roofing, commencement of roofing work, and inspection of completed work. Contractor shall give the roofing consultant not less than 48 hours notice when work requiring the presence of .the roofing consultant is to be performed. Such work shall be done only when the roofing consultant is present B. If the Contractor's work is faulty, or if the Contractor's schedule requires additional services of the roofing consultant, in the opinion of the Architect, the Contractor shall pay the cost of such additional services. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION: A. Built -Up Roofing Membrane: Three ply asphalt fiberglass built-up roof membrane system including mineral surface capsheet finish, UL class "A" Fire Rating over rigid insulation board. 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): Class A Fire Hazard Classification. B. California Building Code. BUILT-UP ROOFING 07500-1 H1D ADDENDUM 2 101003 10/10/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA 1.06 STANDARDS AND REFERENCES: A. Comply with the following standards: 1. Uniform Building Code (latest edition). 2. California Health and Safety code, sections 1400 to 1421. 3. Title 19, California Code of Regulations (State Fire Marshal), latest edition. 4. Title 17, California Code of Regulations (State Department of Public Health). 5. Title 8, California Code of Regulations (State Department of Industrial Relations). 6. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 1.07 SUBMITTALS Federal Specifications (FS). Simplified Practice Recommendations (SPR). Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA). Accepted roofing manufacturers' current specification manual, sheets and catalogues. National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA) "ROOFING AND WATERPROOFING MANUAL." A. Submit manufacturer's specifications and material application guide. B. Submit manufacturers most recent product data for each roofing product proposed for the project and manufacturer's safety data sheet (MSDS). C. Submit one 12" square sample of each felt and flashing product proposed for the project. D. Submit MSDS of each liquid product proposed for use on this Project. E. Submit current certification that Contractor is approved by the manufacturer to apply the accepted materials. Provide project identification number and built-up roofing system to be installed. Submit certification of Contractor qualifications for application of accepted built-up roofing. 1.08 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Deliver materials on pallets in manufacturers original containers, dry, undamaged, seals and labels intact. BUILT-UP ROOFING 07500-2 H1D ADDENDUM 2 101003 10/10/03 0 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. " ` LA QUINTA, CA B. Distribute materials placed on structures to avoid overloading. C. Store materials in weather, protected environment, clear of ground and moisture. D. Store bulk asphalt ''in heated tanker at 325 degrees F. Do not store without use for more than 72 hours. E. Stand roll materials on end; protect from lateral compression (deforming of roll)... F. Protect water-based emulsions and paints from freezing. 1.09 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS: A. Do not apply roofing membrane or repair products during inclement weather or when air temperature may fall below 40 degrees F. (5 degrees C.), or when precipitation is imminent. B. Do not apply roofing membrane to damp surfaces. Steel deck shall be dry. C. Do not expose material vulnerable to water or sun damage in quantities greater than can be weather -proofed during same working day. 1.10 PREINSTALLATION CONFERENCE: A. Convene a preconstruction conference at least one week prior to commencing,work of the section. B.• Require attendance of parties directly affecting work of this section, and Quality Control Agency, if applicable. C. Review installation procedures and coordination required with related work. Check roof slope to drain. Coordinate /verify with construction documents. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Provide a fifteen (15) year warranty within 15 days after final inspection by manufacturer for new built-up roofing materials and installation including work of Section 07600, Flashing and Sheet Metal. Warranty shall cover any damage to roofing- resulting from failure to resist penetration of moisture or material failure. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NO ASBESTOS - CONTAINING PRODUCTS ALLOWED. 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Membrane roof system shall qualify as UL class "A" Fire Retardant, as systems listed below: 1. Johns Manville Specification No. 3GIC. 2. GAF Specification No. 1-0-3-M. -BUILT-UP ROOFING - 07500-3 H1D ADDENDUM 2 101003 10/10/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA 3. U. S. INTEC. B. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation of roof membrane and flashing installation. 2.02. SHEET MATERIALS: A. Glass Fiber Felt: ASTM D2178, Type IV, B. Cap Sheet Glass fiber felt, asphalt coated, surfaced with white mineral granules, conforming to ASTM 03909, Type III. C. Glass Fabric: ASTM D1668. 2.03 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS: A. Asphalt Bitumen: ASTM 0312, Type III. B. Asphalt Primer ASTM D41. C. Asphalt Plastic cement: ASTM D4586, cutback asphalt, Type II. 2.04 INSULATING MATERIALS A. General: Provide insulating materials to comply with requirements indicated for materials and compliance with referenced standards in sizes to fit application indicated, selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. 1. Provide insulation acceptable to membrane manufacturer. B. Perlite/Polyisocyanurate Composite Board Roof Insulation: Rigid OF thermal composite insulation with polyisocyanurate closed -cell foam core with rigid perlite board laminated to one side and manufacturer's standard facing laminated to other side; complying with FS HH -I-1972/3, Class 1. 1. 6 Month Thermal Resistance Rating: R-20 minimum, composed as follows: a. 1/2" Perlite: R-1.3 b. Polyisocyanurate: 2-1/2" minimum thickness and providing a minimum 6 month aged R -value of 18.2. Additional polyisocyanurate thickness greater than 2- 1/2" must be provided as required by the manufacture's insulative property in order to achieve the minimum R -value of 18.2. C. Total Thickness: .50" (Perlite) + 2-1/2" (Polyisocyanurate) @ = 3.0" total thickness, minimum. 2.05 AUXILIARY INSULATION MATERIALS A. Mechanical Anchors: Corrosion -resistant type as recommended by insulation manufacturer for deck type and complying with fire and insurance uplift rating requirements. BUILT-UP ROOFING 07500-4 H1D ADDENDUM 2 101003 10/10/03 • CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA 2.04& MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS: A. Cant Strips and Tapered Edge Strips: ASTM C208. Cant strip 3 inch leg, minimum. B. 4 lb. Lead in drain sumps. 2.07 ACCESSORIES: A. Mechanical Fasteners: Per manufacturers recommendations. B. Fasteners: 1. Exposed fasteners at vertical parapet or canopy walls to have 5/8 inch steel/neoprene washers under heads and specially treated to be rust and corrosion resistant. No exposed fasteners are acceptable for built-up roof system. 2. Concrete/Masonry Fasteners for Metal to Concrete Attachment - Specially threaded Tapcon type, 3/16 inch minimum diameter, length to penetrate minimum 1-1/2 inches, with 5/8 inch steel/neoprene washers as manufactured by Buildex. Installed withdrawal resistance recommended to be a minimum of 150 lbs. per fastener. Fasteners to be set 16 inches on center. 3. Wood Fasteners for Metal to Wood Attachment a. Exposed Applications - No. 8 minimum screws applicable for 1-1/2 inch penetration into wood, watertight steel/neoprene washers under exposed heads. Minimum screw withdrawal resistance of 150 lbs. 4. Metal to Metal Applications - One half (1/2) inch self - tapping sheet metal screws, minimum #8 diameter. 2.08 CONCRETE BLOCK WALL COATING: A. Provide and install elastomeric coatings as approved by roofing manufacturer. 2.09 METAL COUNTERFLASHINGS: A. Contractor shall provide new 2 -piece 24 ga: galvanized iron surface mounted reglet and counterflashing assembly similar to Fry Tape Surface Mount or Stucco Flashing, meeting minimum of ASTM A 526, G-90 coating designation. Flashing clips, if used, to be installed on approximately 30 inch centers. 2.010 SEALANTS A. Elastomeric sealant to be a low modulus, high performance, one - part polyurethane conforming to Federal. Specifications No. TT -S - 00230C, Type II, Class A, manufactured by Mameco, Vulkem 921; Sika, Sikaflex-15LM, or equal. BUILT-UP ROOFING 07500-5 H1D ADDENDUM 2 101003 10/10/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA 2.11 ROOF TRANSITION COMPONENTS A. Curb Cant Strip: Mineral fiber insulation, 4" high cant strips as manufactured or approved by roof system manufacturer. B. Mineral fiber insulation Curbing, Crickets, arid Cants complying with manufacturer's system for membrane compatibility. 1. Type: Perlite ASTM C726; Wood Fiber, C208, at parapet and wall conditions. FRTW wood cant at curbs, curbed openings, and platforms as indicated on drawings. 2. Size: To fit 4 inches up by 4 inches out, or as required by roof conditions, or otherwise detailed. C. Tapered Edge Strips. 1. Type: Perlite, ASTM C728; Wood Fiber, C208. 2. Size: 1-5/8 (Minimum) by 18 inches, or as required by roof conditions. D. Cricket Insulation: As required by primary membrane manufacturer. 1. Type: Perlite, ASTM C728. 2. Size: as required. 2.12 LEAD FLASHING A. Minimum 4 pound/square foot .common desilvered pig lead flashing at all roof drain and stack vent applications. 2.13 STACK FLASHING, EQUIPMENT CURB, FENCE SUPPORT SYSTEMS A. Per manufacturer's requirements 1. Base Ply: GlasPly, Type VI. 2. Size: Plate size as approved by FM for fastener specified; fastener length as required by the fastener manufacturer for the insulation thickness specified. 2.14 ROOF WALKWAY PADS A. Walkpads as recommended by roofing manufacturer for compatibility with roofing system. 2.15 PIPING BLOCKS A. Pillow Block Model No. 02, as manufactured by Miro Industries, or approved equal. 2.16 OTHER PRODUCTS A. Provide all other products necessary for complete installation and operation. Such products shall be subject to the review of the architect. BUILT-UP ROOFING 07500-6 H1D ADDENDUM 2 101003 10/10/03 0) EJ 1 ]� CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA i PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Prior to installation of roofing system. carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may property commence. B. Verify that all work can be installed in strict accordance with all pertinent codes and regulations, the original design, reviewed submittals, and manufacturers' recommendations. C. Obtain review and inspection by roofing system manufacturers representative before proceeding with installation. D." In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been Fully resolved. E. Provide Architect with written acceptance of surface conditions, certifying that all surfaces are suitable for work of this section to proceed. F. Notify OSH and manufacturer's representatives a minimum of two weeks prior to beginning construction of the roof membrane so that representatives can properly schedule all inspections. G. Installation of conduits or piping between the deck - and the membrane is not acceptable. All openings in the deck or projections through the deck shall be completed before starting the application of the roof system. H. The surface to receive roof systems shall be smooth, dry, clean, and free of sharp projections and depressions. I. The roof deck must provide positive drainage. Outlets must be placed and installed to remove water promptly and completely from the roof. J. Expansion joints, roof vents, roof drains, etc., must be installed using acceptable industry standards. 3.02 INSULATION INSTALLATION A. General: Extend insulation full thickness in one layer, over entire surface to be insulated, cutting and fitting tightly around obstructions. Form crickets, saddles, and tapered areas with additional material as shown and as required for proper drainage of membrane. B. Do not install more insulation each day than can be covered with membrane before end of day or before start of inclement weather. C. Secure roof insulation to substrate with mechanical anchors of type and spacing indicated, but in no case provide less than one anchor per 4 square feet of surface area or less anchorage than required by FM "Loss Prevention Data�Sheet 1-28." -BUILT-UP ROOFING 07500-7 H1D ADDENDUM 2 101003 10/10/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA D. Where perlite/polyisocyanurate composite boarded roof insulation is required, the perlite face of the board shall be installed face up, away from the metal roof deck. 3.03 INSTALLATION.OF ROOFING MEMBRANE SYSTEMS A. Install temporary water cut-offs at the end of each day's work. B. Phased construction of roofing felts within the membrane system is not permitted. C. Proceed with roof membrane only when existing and forecasted weather conditions comply with reference standards. D. Bitumen Handling and Installation: 1. Do not heat bitumen to or above the actual COC (Cleveland Open Cup) Flash Point (FP). 2. Do not heat and hold bitumen above the FBT (Finished Blowing Temperature) in excess of 4 hours. Discard batch if four hour maximum is exceeded. 3. The bitumen application or embedment temperature shall be above 400 degrees Fahrenheit or at the EVT whichever is higher. 4. Establish control procedures to insure compliance with the above asphalt heating requirements. Cease all work if EVT temperatures cannot be maintained without exceeding flashpoint. 5. Verify that each kettle has both thermostatic controls and an accurate, visible and properly maintained thermometer. E. Membrane Installation: 1. Install per specification criteria, specified criteria, and reference standards. 2. Install GlasBase, over approved deck, including cants, using approved fasteners. 3. Install as intermediate felts and G1asKap in a full mopping of asphalt, utilizing the "mop and flop" technique at rate of 23 pounds per square. 4. Broom sheet per manufacturer's recommendations. 5. Verify that all edges are fully sealed. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF FLASHING SYSTEMS AND MISCELLANEOUS COMPONENTS A. Install per Johns -Manville FE series specifications, referenced standards, and as shown on the Drawings. B. Membrane Flashing at Parapet - Spec. FE -3: BUILT-UP ROOFING 07500-8 H1D ADDENDUM 2 101003 10/10/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA 1. Provide single ply of GlasBase fastened to approved substrate per manufacturers recommendations. Extend up and fully under starter strip of shingles and down onto and covering at least half of base cant. 2. Mechanically fasten to wall and cant per manufacturer's requirements. Mop solidly over the GlasBase at rate of 23 pounds per square and imbed G1asTite extended completely over top edge_of base ply and a -minimum of four inches onto roof membrane. 3. Strip with G1asKap per Johns -Manville recommendations. 4. Install asphalt shingles on parapet per manufacturers recommendations. C. Roof Jacks/Sleeve Flashings - Spec. FE Series: 1. After roofing membrane has been installed, flanges of roof jacks and sleeved flashings shall be embedded in flashing cement or hot asphalt as recommended by the Johns -Manville. 2. Prime top of metal flange, then install stripping felts as recommended by Johns -Manville. 3. Set all stripping plies in hot, Type Ill asphalt. D. Flashing For Roof Drains 1. After roofing membrane has been installed, install 4 pound lead flashing extending minimum 12 inches beyond drain body. 2. Embed lead in approved flashing cement, prime, then install 3. Install GlasTite a minimum of 3 inches beyond the lead flashing and strip with DynaKap. 4. All felts shall be embedded in hot, Type Ill asphalt per roofing manufacturer. E. Walking Pads: 1. Embed walkway panels in a solid coat of manufacturer's approved adhesive asphalt with layout configuration as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Panels shall be set firmly and solidly in a neat and symmetrical layout with 6 to 9 inch wide separations. 3. All installed panels shall be square edged, free from cracks and gouges, or other imperfections. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 0) . BUILT-UP ROOFING 07500-9 HID ADDENDUM 2 101003 10/10/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA A. Hose test roof drain and flashing joint conditions at a time mutually agreed to by Contractor and Architect. 1. Test shall be of duration and intensity as established by industry standards. 2. Repair all leaks and retest until free of defects. B. Contractor shall provide written certification that all products were installed in accordance with manufacturers recommendations and specifications. 3.06 ROOF REPAIR A. Repair per roofing manufacturer's recommendation. 1. In the event that any such defects are present, cut out blisters, bubbles, creases and fishmouths before additional felts are installed. 2. Repairs shall be performed per manufacturer's recommendations. 3.07 CLEANUP A. Remove bituminous markings from finished surfaces. In areas where finished surfaces are soiled by asphalt or any other source caused by work of this section, consult the manufacturer of surfaces for cleaning advice and conform to their instructions.. B. Upon completion of roofing work, contractor shall remove all excess materials, debris, and leave the building and work site in a neat, clean and undamaged condition. 3.08 RESPONDING TO LEAK CALLS: A. In order to qualify as an approved roofing applicator for Circuit City Stores, Inc., a timely and proper response to service calls (whether for guaranteed work or non -guaranteed work) is imperative. The following are the requirements for service call procedures: 1. Upon completion of roofing, the warranty documents and a roof plan, with all penetrations marked, must be presented to the Owner's representative. 2. In addition to the company phone number, a 24-hour (including weekends and holidays) emergency number must be provided by the roofing Contractor. 3. When a contractor receives a request for leak repairs either from the individual facility or from the Main office, a qualified repairman must be dispatched to the facility within 4 hours. 4. When arriving at a facility, the repairman must meet with BUILT-UP ROOFING 07500-10 H1D ADDENDUM 2 101003 10/10/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA the Facility Engineer, Store Director or Operations Manager and sign in. 5. Before proceeding to the roof, the repairman will identify anti mark on the roof plan the areas that are leaking inside the facility. The repairman will be accompanied by a store representative during the process. 6. After locating the source of the leaks, repairs must be made with the same material as the roofing system. If, for emergency reasons, only temporary repairs can be made during this initial visit, permanent repairs must be completed within one (1) week, weather permitting. 7. All repairs must be performed in a workmanlike manner and all excess materials and debris must be removed from the roof area immediately after completion of repair. 8. Upon completion of repairs, the repairman will mark on the roof plan the actual areas where the water had entered the roof system and write a comment on the back of the drawing as to the cause of the leaks) and the type of repairs performed. 9. Before leaving the facility, the repairman must return a copy of the marked -up roof plan with comments to the Facility Engineer, Store Director or Operations Manager he checked in with and also retain a copy for his company files. 10. Roofing Contractors that have specific personnel for repair work must arrange for their repairman to attend a final jobwalk on the facility being roofed in order to familiarize himself with the job and the store procedures. END OF SECTION BUILT-UP ROOFING 07500-11 H1D ADDENDUM 2 101003 10/10/03 i • • CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUOTA, CA SECTION 07600 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and provisions of the Contract, including General, Supplementary and Special Conditions, applicable Division 0 Sections and Division 1 Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Extent of flashing and sheet metal work is indicated on drawings and includes the following: 1. Metal flashings and counter flashings 2. Scuppers 3. Gutters (rain drainage) and downspouts 4. Coping caps 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA) "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM MATERIALS 1. Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation, structural quality, mill phosphatized (paint grip) for field painting; 22 gauge, unless otherwise indicated. Units shall be of profile and dimensions shown on drawings complete with formed joint covers and flashing assembly. Prefabricated (mitered and welded) inside and outside corner units, and at directional changes at parapet steps. Cap flashing joints shall have a backup plate, joint sealant, and a 6" cover plate at lap joint (expansion joint) spaced at a maximum 10'-0" o.c. Cover plate shall be screwed, with neoprene washers, to wood blocking. 2. Gutters: SMACNA Manual shall be used as a minimum guideline for gutter thicknesses. Refer to drawings for thickness of specific gutters. 2.02 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES A. Cleats and Straps: Same type and thickness of metal as gutter, downspouts, and conductor heads. 2. Fasteners: Same metal as flashing/sheet metal or stainless steel. Match finish of exposed heads with material being fastened. C. Bituminous Coating: SSPC - Paint 12, solvent type bituminous mastic, nominally free of sulfur, compounded for 15 -mil dry film thickness per coat. D. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; non -hardening, non -skinning, non- drying, non -migrating sealant. E. Elastomeric Sealant: Single component polyurethane sealant. Comply with Sections 07900, "Joint Sealers F. Epoxy Seams Sealer: 2 -part noncorrosive metal seam cementing .FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07600-1 H1D 041003 08/06/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUIM, CA compound, recommended by metal manufacturer for exterior/ interior non-moving joints including riveted joints. G. Adhesives: Type recommended by flashing sheet manufacturer for waterproof/weather-resistant seaming and adhesive application of flashing sheet. H. Paper Slip Sheet: 5 -lb. rosin -sized building paper. I. Metal Accessories: Provide sheet metal clips, straps, anchoring devices and similar accessory units as required for installation of work, matching or compatible with material being installed, noncorrosive, size and gage required for performance. J. Elastic Flashing Filler: Closed -cell polyethylene or other soft closed -cell material recommended by elastic flashing manufacturer as filler under flashing loops to ensure movement with minimum stress on flashing sheet. 2.03 FABRICATED UNITS A. General Metal Fabrication: Shop -fabricate work to greatest extent possible. Comply with details shown, and with applicable requirements of SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and other recognized industry practices. Fabricate for waterproof and weather -resistant performance; with expansion provisions for running work, sufficient to permanently prevent leakage, damage or deterioration of the work. Form work to fit substrates. Comply with material manufacturer instructions and recommendations for forming material. Form exposed sheet metal work without excessive oil -canning, buckline and tool marks, true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. B. Cap Flashing (Coping) and Parapet Drops at Corners: Corners shall be pre -fabricated with factory applied mill phoshatized, or mitered and folded in accordance with SMACNA sheet metal manual and approved by the Architect of Record. 3. Cleats: Continuous cleats, front and back. 4. Seams: Fabricate non-moving seams in sheet metal with flat -lock seams. Form seams with epoxy seam sealer; rivet joints for additional strength where required. E. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in work cannot be used, or would not be sufficiently water/weatherproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints). 1. Provide for thermal expansion of running gutters and other exposed items. Maintain a water tight seal at expansion joints. Locate expansion j.oints midway between drains, at high points in slopes, but in no case more than 50'-0" maximum spacing. F. Sealant Joints: Where movable, non -expansion type joints are indicated or required for proper performance of work, form metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant, in compliance with SMACNA standards. G. Separations: Provide for separation of metal from non -compatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed surfaces at locations of contact, with bituminous coating or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer/fabricator. PART 3 - EXECUTION FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07600-2 HID 041003 08/06/03 C� • 01" CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. IA QUIM, CA 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Anchor work in place with noncorrosive fasteners, adhesives, setting compounds, tapes and other materials and devices as recommended by manufacturer of each material or system. Provide for thermal expansion and building movements. Comply with recommendation of "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" by SMACNA. B. Isolate from masonry, concrete and other dissimilar materials to prevent electrolysis, using bituminous paint or neoprene pads. 3. Sheet Metal: Install sheet metal fascias and flashings with drip by screwing clips into wood nailer at 16" o.c. maximum. Screws shall be countersunk flat head type. Provide sheet metal in 12'-0" lengths with 1/4" expansion joints between lengths. Caulk using exterior building sealant as specified in Caulking and Sealants Section. 4. Install gutters to provide for positive drainage. 5. Install metal cap flashing with hemmed edges and continuous cleats each side. Allow 2" expansion joint between cap flashing ends and provide joint cap as specified. The use of exposed fasteners to secure interior vertical leg of cap flashing to substrate .is unacceptable. 3.02 PERFORMANCE A. Performance: Water-tight/weatherproof performance of flashing and sheet metal work is required. 3.03 CLEANING A. Clean metal surfaces of substances which could cause corrosion. END OF SECTION FLASHING AND SHEET METAL H1D 041003 07600-3 08/06/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA SECTION 07700 ROOF ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and provisions of the Contract, including General, Supplementary and Special Conditions, applicable Divisions 0 Sections and Division 1 Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Extent and locations of roof accessories is indicated on the 0-1 2.02 PREFABRICATED ROOF HATCHES ROOF ACCESSORIES 07700-1 05/01/95 drawings and includes the following: 1. Roof hatches. B. Roofing accessories to be built into roofing system are specified in section 07530, "Single Ply Membrane Roofing." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS A. Provide manufacturer's standard units, modified as necessary to comply with requirements. Shop fabricate each unit to greatest extent possible. 2.02 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy 3003, temper as required for ' forming and performance; AA-C22A41 clear anodized finish, except mill finish prepared for painting where _indicated for field painting. B. Extruded Aluminum: Manufacturer's standard extrusions of sizes and general profiles -indicated, alloy, 6063-T52; 0.078" minimum thickness for primary framing and curb member legs, 0.062" for secondary legs; AA-C22A41 clear anodized finish on exposed members, except as otherwise indicated. C. Insulation: Manufacturer's standard rigid or semi-rigid board of _ glass fiber. D. Fasteners: Same metal as metals being fastened, or nonmagnetic stainless steel or other noncorrosive metal as recommended by manufacturer. Match finish of exposed fasteners with finish of material being fastened. 1. Where removal of exterior exposed fasteners affords access to building, provide non -removable fastener heads. E. Gaskets: Tubular or fingered design of neoprene or polyvinyl chloride, or block design of sponge neoprene. F. Elastomeric Sealant: Generic type recommended by unit manufacturer, which is compatible with joint surfaces. 0-1 2.02 PREFABRICATED ROOF HATCHES ROOF ACCESSORIES 07700-1 05/01/95 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA A. General: Fabricate units of sizes shown, single -leaf type for 40 lbs. per sq. ft. external loading and 20 lbs. per sq. ft. internal loading pressure. Frame with 12" high integral -curb double-wall construction with 1-1/2" insulation, cant strips and cap flashing (roofing counter -flashing), with welded or sealed mechanical corner joints. Provide double-wall cover (lid) construction with 1" insulation core. Equip units with complete hardware set including hold -open devices, interior padlock hasps, and both interior and exterior latch handles. Provide gasketing. Fabricate units of following materials. Materials: Aluminum sheets or extrusions. B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide prefabricated roof hatch units by one of the following: 1. Bilco Co.; New Haven Ct. 2. Bohem Skylites, Inc.; Burlington, NJ 3. Bristol Fiberlite Industries; Santa Anna, CA 4. Dur -Red Products; Cudahy, CA 5. Faulkner Plastics, Inc.; Tampa, FL 6. Hillsdale Industries, Inc.; Knoxville, TN 7. Naturalite, Inc.; Garland, TX 8. Milcor, Inc.; Lima, OH 9. O'Keefe's, Inc.; San Francisco, CA 10. Plasteco, Inc.; Houston, TX 11. Wasco Products, Inc.; Sanford, ME PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Coordinate with installation of roof deck and other substrates to receive accessory units, and roof insulation, roofing and flashing; as required to ensure that each element of the work performs properly, and that combined elements are waterproof and weathertight. Anchor units securely to supporting structural substrates, adequate to withstand lateral and thermal stresses as well as inward and outward loading pressures. B. Flange Seals: Except as otherwise indicated, set flanges of accessory units in a thick bed of elastomeric sealant. C. Cap Flashing: Where cap flashing is required as component of accessory, install to provide adequate waterproof overlap with roof flashing (as counter -flashing). D. Operational Units: Test operate units with operable components. Clean and lubricate joints and hardware. Adjust for proper operation. 3.02 CLEANING AND PROTECTION ROOF ACCESSORIES 07700-2 05/01/95 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA A. Clean exposed metal and plastic surfaces in accordance with _manufacturer's instructions. Touch up damaged metal coatings. 0 END OF SECTION 07700-3 05/01/95 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA SECTION 07900 JOINT SEALERS -PART 1 - GENERAL'0 A 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS Or A. Drawings and provisions of the Contract, including General, Supplementary and Special Conditions, applicable Division 0 Sections and Division 1 Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Joint sealers include the following: 1. Horizontal control joints in concrete floor slabs 2. Vertical control joints masonry walls 3. Perimeter of doors, windows and other framed wall openings 4. Bedding sealant for sills, thresholds, flanges and similar items requiring sealant. 5. General sealant applications where watertight or weathertight sealing is required. 6. Fire stopping where required at floor, wall and roof penetrations 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. 'Submit samples of manufacturer's standard sealant colors for selection by Owner of colors for exposed sealants. 1.04 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE A. Provide joint sealers that have been produced and installed to establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous seals. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an Installer who has successfully completed within the last 3 years at least 3 joint sealer applications similar in type and size to that of this project and who will assign mechanics from these earlier applications to this project. B. Single Source Responsibility for Joint Sealer Materials: Obtain joint sealer materials from a single manufacturer for each different product required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealers, joint fillers and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by testing and field experience. B. Colors: Provide color of exposed joint sealers indicated, or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected by Owner from manufacturer's standard colors. 2.02 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS JOINT SEALERS 07900-1 0498 P.A. NO. CR 04/30/97 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealant of base polymer indicated which complies with ASTM C 920 requirements, including those for Type, Grade, Class, and Uses. B. Multi -Part Nonsag Urethane Sealant: Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, and complying with the following requirements for uses: 1. Uses NT, M, A and as applicable to joint substrates indicated, 0. 2. Use as a non -traffic sealant in interior and exterior vertical control joints in masonry walls and in other non - traffic horizontal and vertical joints where dynamic movement will occur. 3. Joint Width: 1/2 inch to 2 inches. C. Multi -Part Pourable Urethane Sealant: Type M; Grade NS; Class 25, Uses T, M, A and as applicable to joint substrates indicated, 0. 1. Use in traffic horizontal control and expansion joints in concrete floor slabs where indicated or required. 2. May also be used in exterior control joints at concrete slabs, walkways, and curbs. 3. Joint Width: 3/8 inch to 2 inches • D. One -Part Nonsag Urethane Sealant: Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, M, A and as applicable to joint substrates as indicated, 0. 1. Use as an interior and exterior non -traffic general construction sealant and caulking where low joint movement y will occur. / 2. Joint Width: Less than 1/2 inch. E. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Multi -Part Nonsag Urethane Sealant for Uses NT, M, A and 0: a. "Isoflex 2000"; The Harry S. Peterson Co. b. "Vulkem 227"; Mameco International, Inc. C. "Isoflex 881"; The Harry S. Peterson Co. d. "Dymeric"; Tremco Inc. 2. Multi -Part, Pourable, Urethane Sealant: a. "Chem -Calk 550"; Bostik Construction Products Div. b. "Vulkem 245"; Mameco International, Inc. C. "Pourthane"; W. R. Meadows, Inc. d. "NR 200"; Pecora Corp. e. "Isoflex 880 G.B."; The Harry S. Peterson Co. f. "Sonolastic Paving Joint Sealant"; Sonneborn Building Products Div., Rexnord Chem. JOINT SEALERS 07900-2 0498 P.A. NO. CR 04/30/97 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA g. "THC 900"; Tremco, Inc. 3. One -Part Nonsag Urethane Sealant a. "Chem -calk 900"; Bostik Construction Products Div. b. "Spec 300"; Geocel Corp. C. "Vulkem 116"; Mameco International d. "Dynatrol I"; Pecora Corp. e. "Sikaflex lA"; Sika Corp. f. "Sonolastic NP 1"; Sonneborn Building Products Div., Rexnord Chem g. "Dymonic"; Tremco Inc. 2.03 FIRE-RESISTANT JOINT SEALERS A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard sealant and accessory materials with fire -resistance rating indicated which are identical to those of assemblies whose fire endurance has been determined by testing per ASTM E 814 by Underwriters Laboratory, Inc. or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Foamed -in -Place Fire Stopping Sealant: Two-part, foamed -in-place, silicone sealant formulated for use as part of a through -penetration fire -stop system for filling openings around cables, conduit, pipes and similar penetrations through walls and floors. C. One -Part Fire -Stopping Sealant: One part elastomeric sealant formulated for use as part of a through -penetration fire -stop system for sealing openings around cables, conduit, pipes and similar penetration through walls and floors. D. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Foamed -in -Place Fire -Stopping Sealant: a. "Dow Corning Fire Stop Foam"; Dow Corning Corp. b. "Pensil 851"; General Electric Co. 2. One -Part Fire -Stopping Sealant: a. "Dow Corning Fire Stop Foam"; Dow Corning Corp. b. "3M Fire Barrier Caulk CP -2511; Electrical Products Div./3M 2.04 JOINT SEALANT BACKING ' A. General: Provide sealant backings of materials and type which are non -staining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Plastic Foam Joint -Fillers: Preformed, compressible, resilient, non -waxing, non -extruding strips of plastic foam of material indicated below, and of size, shape and density to control sealant JOINT SEALERS 07900-3 0498 P.A. NO. CR 04/30/97 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance. 1. Closed -cell polyethylene foam, non -gassing. C. Bond -Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing bond between sealant and joint filler or other materials at back (3rd) surface of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. 2.05 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Provide type recommendation by joint sealer manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint sealer -substrate and field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Provide non -staining, chemical cleaner of type acceptable to manufacturer of sealant and sealant backing materials which are not harmful to substrates and adjacent nonporous materials: C. Masking Tape: Provide non -staining, non-absorbent type compatible with joint sealants and to surfaces adjacent to joints. D. Accessory materials for Fire -Stopping Sealants: Provide forming, joint -fillers, packing and other accessory materials required for installation of fire -stopping sealants as applicable to installation conditions indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Require Installer to inspect joints indicated to receive joint sealers for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances and other conditions affecting joint sealer performance. Do not allow joint sealer work to proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealers to comply with recommendations of joint sealer manufacturers and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates which could interfere with adhesion of joint sealer, including dust; paints, except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer; oil; grease waterproofing; water repellents; water; surface dirt and frost. 2. Clean concrete, masonry, unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile and similar porous joint substrate surfaces, by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, acid washing or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealers. Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil -free compressed air. 3. Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete. Clean metal, glass, porcelain enamel, glazed surfaces of ceramic tile and other non -porous surfaces by chemical cleaners or other means which are not harmful to substrates or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint JOINT SEALERS 07900-4 0498 P.A. NO. CR 04/30/97 i CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. w ``• " LA QUINTA, CA sealers. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended by joint sealer manufacturer based on preconstruction joint sealer -substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealer manufacturer's recommendations. Confine primers to areas of joint sealer bond, do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces which otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALERS A. General: Comply with joint sealer manufacturer's printed installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply. B. Elastomeric Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with ASTM C 962. C. Installation of Sealant Backings: Install sealant backings to comply with the following requirements. 1. Install joint -fillers of type indicated to provide support of sealants during application and at position required to produce the cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths which allow optimum sealant movement capability. a. Do not leave gaps between ends of joint -fillers. b. Do not stretch, twist, puncture or tear joint -fillers C. Remove absorbent joint -fillers which have become wet prior to sealant application and replace with dry material. 2. Install bond breaker tape between sealants back of joints where required to prevent third -side adhesion of sealant to back of joint. D. Installation of Sealants: Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants directly contacting and fully wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint configuration and providing uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths which allow optimum sealant movement capability. E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and prior to time skinning or curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated, to eliminate air pockets and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents which discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer. 1. Concave joint configuration per Figure ~6A in ASTM C 962, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Flush joint configuration per Figure 6B in ASTM C 962, where indicated.... OF 3. Recessed joint configuration per Figure 6C in ASTM C 962, of recess depth and at location indicated. JOINT SEALERS 07900-5 0498 P.A. NO. CR 04/30/97 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA a. Use masking tape to protect adjacent surfaces of recessed tooled joints. F. Installation of Fire -Stopping Sealant: Install sealant including forming, packing and other accessory materials to fill openings around mechanical and electrical services penetrating floors and walls to provide fire -stops with fire resistance ratings indicated for floor or wall assembly in which penetration occurs. 3.04 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Protect joint sealers during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are without deterioration or damage at time of substantial completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealers immediately and reseal joints with new materials to produce joint sealers installations with required areas indistinguishable for original work. B. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealers and of products in which joints occur. END OF SECTION JOINT SEALERS 07900-6 0498 P.A. NO. CR 04/30/97 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA SECTION 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and provisions of the Contract, including General, Supplementary and Special Conditions, applicable Division 0 Sections and Division 1 Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A Extent of standard steel doors and frames is indicated and scheduled on drawings. B. Finish hardware is scheduled on drawings. C. Building in of anchors and grouting of frame in masonry construction is specified in Division 4. 1.03 SPECIAL CONDITIONS A. Steel doors and frames and associated accessories are to be purchased by the contractor (not the subcontractor) for a pre-set price from the listed contact. Contractor to obtain freight quote from the supplier and shall include the cost in the bid. Delivery will be made to the installer, who will be responsible for receiving shipment. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings': Submit for fabrication and installation of steel doors and frames. Include details of each frame type, elevations of door design types, conditions at openings, details of construction, location and installation requirements of finish hardware and reinforcements, and details of joints and connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. 1. Provide schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on contract drawings. 2. Indicate coordination of glazing frames and stops with glass and glazing requirements. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide doors and frames complying with Steel Door Institute "Recommended Specifications: Standard Steel Doors and Frames" (SDI - 100) -and as herein specified. B. Fire -Rated Door Assemblies: Where fire -rated door assemblies are indicated or required, provide fire -rated door and frame assemblies that comply with NFPA 80 "Standard for Fire Doors and Windows", and have been tested, listed, and labeled in accordance ASTM E 152 "Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies" by a nationally recognized independent testing and inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Bullet -Resisting Doors: Where indicated or required, provide CECO's "ArmorShield" Door System tested in accordance with UL Standard for safety, bullet resisting equipment est, UL752 for the most powerful handgun rating: SPSA (Super Power Small Arms -- .44 magnum revolver). 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-1 H1D ADDENDUM 6 041204 04/12/04 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA A. Deliver hollow metal work cartoned or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage. B. Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum 4" high wood blocking. Avoid use of non -vented plastic or canvas shelters which could create humidity.chamber. If cardboard wrapper on door becomes wet, remove carton immediately. Provide 1/4" spaces between stacked doors to promote air circulation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER: A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provided products by the following: 1. Ceco Door Products, No Substitutions. 2.02 SUPPLIER A. Steel doors and frames shall be supplied by the following: 1. Mills and Nebraska, Orlando, FL, Avorice Holman, Tel: (407) 298-5600, ext. 411, Fax: (407) 578-2881. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Hot -Rolled Steel Sheets and Strip: Commercial quality carbon steel, pickled and oiled, complying with ASTM A 569 and ASTM A 568. B. Cold -Rolled Steel Sheets: Commercial quality carbon steel, complying with ASTM A 366 and ASTM A 568. C. Galvanized Steel Sheets: Zinc -coated carbon steel sheets "of commercial quality, complying with ASTM A 526, with ASTM A 525, G60 zinc coating, mill phosphatized. D. Supports and Anchors: Fabricate of not less than 18 -gage galvanized sheet steel. E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units, except hot -dip galvanize items to be built into exterior walls, complying with ASTM A 153, Class C or D as applicable. F. Primer: Rust -inhibitive enamel or paint, either air -drying or baking, suitable as a base for specified finish paints. 2.04 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Fabricate steel door and frame units to be rigid, neat in appearance and free from defects, warp or buckle. Wherever practicable, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. B. Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory -assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at project site. Comply with SDI -100 requirements as follows: 1. Interior Doors: SDI -100, Grade II, heavy-duty, Model 2, minimum 18 -gage faces. 2. Exterior Doors: SDI -100, Grade III, extra heavy-duty Model 2, minimum 16 -gage faces. C. Fabricate exposed faces of doors from only stretcher level cold- rolled steel. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-2 H1D ADDENDUM 6 041204 04/12/04 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. •., ` '" ' "" LA QUINTA, CA D. Fabricate frames, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers and moldings from either cold -rolled or hot -rolled steel (at fabricator's option). 1. Interior Frames: 16 gage 2. Exterior Frames: 16 gage E. Fabricate exterior doors, panels, and frames from galvanized sheet steel. Close top and bottom edges of exterior doors as integral part of door construction or by addition of minimum 16 gage inverted steel channels. F. Cap top of all.doors, interior and exterior with flush weatherproof cap. G. Thermal -Rated (Insulating) Assemblies: 1. At exterior locations and elsewhere as shown or scheduled, provide doors which have been fabricated as thermal insulating door and frame assemblies and tested in accordance with ASTM C 236. a. Unless otherwise indicated, provide thermal -rated assemblies with U factor of 0.24 Btu/(hr.ftZ.OF) or better. b., Use glass fiber insulation. Polystyrene core is not acceptable. H. Finish Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed finish hardware in accordance with final Finish Hardware Schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI.A115 series specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware. 1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface -applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface -applied finish hardware may be done at project site. 2. Grid pattern reinforcement will•conflict with exit devices specified and is not recommended. 3. Locate finish hardware as indicated on final shop drawings or, if not indicated, in accordance with "Recommended Locations for Builder's Hardware", published by Door and Hardware Institute. I. Shop _Painting: 1. Clean, treat, and paint exposed surfaces of steel door and frame units, including galvanized surfaces. 2. Clean steel surfaces of mill scale, rust, oil, grease, dirt, and other foreign materials before application of paint. 3. Apply shop coat of prime paint of even consistency to provide a uniformly finished surface ready to receive finish paint. 2.05 DOORS/LOUVERS A. Provide metal doors of types and styles indicated on drawings. B. Provide sightproof stationary louvers for interior doors where i indicated, constructed of inverted V-shaped or Y-shaped blades formed of 18 gauge cold -rolled steel. Space blades to provide not less than 20% free air opening. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-3 H1D ADDENDUM 6 041204 04/12/04 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA 2.06 STEEL FRAMES A. Provide metal frames for doors, of types and styles as shown on drawings and schedules. Conceal fastenings. 1. Fabricate frames with mitered and welded corners. 2. Fabricate frames with mitered corners knocked -down, for field assembly where indicated on drawings. B. Form exterior frames of hot -dip galvanized steel. C. Door Silencers: Except on weatherstripped frames, drill stops to receive 3 silencers on strike jambs of single -swing frames and 2 silencers on head of double -swing frames. D. Plaster Guards: Provide 26 gage steel plaster guards or mortar boxes, welded to frame, at back of finish hardware cutouts where mortar or other materials might obstruct hardware operation and to close off interior of openings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Install standard steel doors, frames, and accessories in accordance with final shop drawings, manufacturer's data, and as herein specified. B. Placing Frames: Comply with provision of. SDI -105 "Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames", unless otherwise indicated. 1. At masonry and concrete construction coat entire inside surface of frames with asphaltic paint to reduce corrosion. 2. In masonry construction, locate 3 wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike levels. 3. At in-place concrete or masonry construction, set frames and secure to adjacent construction with machine screws and masonry anchorage devices. 4. Install fire -rated frames in accordance with NFPA Std. No. 80. 5. In metal stud partition, install at least 3 wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike levels. In open steel stud partitions, place studs in wall anchor notches and wire tie. In closed steel stud partitions, attach wall anchors to studs with tapping screws. C. Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified in SDI -100. D. Place fire -rated doors with clearances as specified in NFPA Standard No. 80. E. Prime Coat Touch-up: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch-up of compatible air -drying primer. 3.02 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Final Adiustments: Check and readjust operating finish hardware items, leaving steel doors and frames 'undamaged and in complete and proper operating condition. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-4 H1D ADDENDUM 6 041204 04/12/04 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA END OF SECTION STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES H1D ADDENDUM 6 041204 08110-5 04/12/04 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA SECTION'08330 ROLLING FIRE DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and provisions of the Contract, including General, Supplementary and Special Conditions, applicable Division 0 Sections and Division 1 Sections. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Manual automatic closing rolling fire doors. B. Related Sections: 1. 05400 Cold Formed Metal Framing 2. 06100 Rough Carpentry. Door opening jamb and head members. 3. 09900 Painting. 4. Division 16. Connection to alarm system. C. Products That May Be Supplied, But Are Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Smoke/heat detectors. 1.03 SPECIAL CONDITIONS r A. Rolling fire doors and associated accessories are to be purchased by the contractor (not the subcontractor) for a pre-set price from the listed contact. Contractor to obtain freight g t quote from the supplier and shall include the cost in the bid. Delivery will be made to the installer, who will be responsible for receiving shipment. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Performance Requirements: 1. Provide doors with Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. label for the fire rating classification indicated on the drawings. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Reference Section 01330 Submittal Procedures; submit the following items: 1. Product Data. 2. Shop Drawings: Include special conditions not detailed in Product Data. Show interface with adjacent work. 3. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: a. Provide proof of manufacturer ISO 9002 registration. b. Provide proof of manufacturer and installer r qualifications - see 1.06 below. C. Provide manufacturer's installation instructions. 4. Closeout Submittals: a. Operation and Maintenance Manual. ROLLING FIRE DOORS 08330-1 HID ADDENDUM 6 041204 04/12/04 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA b. Certificate stating that installed materials comply with this specification. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer Qualifications: ISO 9002 registered and a minimum of five years experience in producing fire doors of the type specified. 2. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's approval. 1.07 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Reference Section 01600 - Product Storage and Handling Requirements. B. Follow manufacturer's instructions. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Standard Warranty: Two years from date of shipment against defects in material and workmanship. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2:01 MANUFACTURER A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. Wayne -Dalton, Eric Ocepak, Tel: (800) 598-3667, ext. 38171, Fax: (330) 763-4038, No Substitutions. 9,i 2.02 MATERIALS A. Curtain: 1. Slats: No. 17, interlocked flat -faced slats, 2 inches high by 1/2 inch deep, 22 gauge galvanized steel with plain steel bottom bar and vinyl astragal. 2. Fabricate continuous interlocking slat sections with high strength galvanized steel endlocks riveted to slats per UL requirements. 3. Slat Finish: a. Galvanized Steel: Phosphate treatment followed by light gray baked -on polyester enamel coating, minimum 0.6 mils (0.015 mm) cured film thickness. 4. Bottom Bar Finish: a. Steel: Phosphate treatment followed by a light gray baked -on polyester powder coat; minimum 2.5 mils (0.065 mm) cured film thickness. B. Guides: 1. Steel: Roll formed angles. l 2. Finish: ROLLING FIRE DOORS 08330-2 H1D ADDENDUM 6 041204 04/12/04 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC: LA QUINTA, CA a. Steel: Phosphate treatment followed by a black primer coat. C. Counterbalance Shaft Assembly: 1. Barrel: Steel pipe capable of supporting curtain load with maximum deflection of 0.03 inches per foot (2.5 mm per meter) of.width. 2.' Spring Balance: Oil -tempered, heat-treated steel helical torsion spring assembly designed for proper balance of door to ensure that maximum effort to operate will not exceed 25 lbs (110 N). Provide wheel for applying and adjusting spring torque. D. Brackets: Fabricate from reinforced steel plate with permanently lubricated ball or roller bearings at rotating support points to support counterbalance shaft assembly and form end closures. 1. Finish: a. Steel: Phosphate treatment followed by a light gray baked -on polyester powder coat; minimum 2.5 mils (0.065 mm) cured film thickness. E. Hood and mechanism covers: 24 gauge galvanized steel with reinforced top and bottom edges. Provide minimum 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) steel intermediate support brackets as required to prevent excessive sag. 1. Finish: a. Galvanized Steel: Phosphate treatment followed by light gray baked -on polyester enamel coating, minimum 0.6 mils (0.015 mm) cured film thickness. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Ionization Smoke Detector: UL listed. 2.04 OPERATION A. Manual Push -Up: Manual lift or pole with hook. B. Automatic Closing and Speed Governor Mechanism: 1. Fusible Link with SS90-B2 Release Device: a. Activation: Local smoke and heat detectors or power outage in excess of 72 hours or melting of fusible link. b. Average Closing Speed: Not less than 6 inches (152 mm) nor more than 24 inches (610 mm) per second. C. Reset Procedure: Reset spring tension and mechanical dropouts; reset SS90B2 or replace fusible link. PART 3 EXECUTION - 3.01 EXAMINATION ROLLING FIRE DOORS 08330-3 H1D ADDENDUM 6.041204 04/12/04 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA A. Examine substrates upon which work will be installed and verify conditions are in accordance with approved shop drawings. B. Coordinate with responsible entity to perform corrective work on unsatisfactory substrates. C. Commencement of work by installer is acceptance of substrate. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: Install door and operating equipment with necessary hardware, anchors, B. Comply with NFPA 80 and follow manufacturer's installation instructions. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Following completion of installation, including related work by others, lubricate, test, and adjust doors for ease of operation, free from warp, twist, or distortion. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Site Test: Test doors for normal operation and automatic closing. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction to witness test and sign. Drop Test Form. 1. Test door closing when activated by operation of smoke detector fire release system. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean surfaces soiled by work as recommended by manufacturer. B. Remove surplus materials and debris from the site. 3.06 DEMONSTRATION A. Demonstrate proper operation to Owner's Representative. B. Instruct Owner's Representative in maintenance procedures. END OF SECTION ROLLING FIRE DOORS 08330-4 H1D ADDENDUM 6 041204 04/12/04 10 Wayne -Dalton Corp. • National Accounts Division 1 Door Drive • P.O. Box 67 • Mt. Hope, Ohio 44660 800-598-3667 • FAX 330-763-8038 Circuit City 2004 Rolling Grille and Fire Door Purchase Order Form for New Construction Project Primary Point of Contact Eric B. Ocepek-Sales Representative Ext. 4 eocepek(@wayne-dalton.com Order Date: Secondary Point of Contact Pat Stevens -Project Manager Ext. 3 pstevens@wayne-dalton.com Required Installation Date: Ship dates will be based on the above required installation date. Should installation date change, please notify Pat Stevens S days prior to ship date. PROJECT/SITE INFORMATION Store # Address Ci /State Zip Code Phone Fax Contact Email Notes: 1.General contractor to forward order form to Wayne Dalton no later than 3 weeks after the start of construction. 2.Wayne Dalton to supply shop drawings within 10 days of receiving order. 3.Shop drawing approval to be returned to Wayne Dalton within 5 days. (Approved drawing are required for fabrication) 4.Wayne Dalton to coordinate unloading of material with General Contractor. 5.General contractor to provide markings on the floor for the location of rolling grille tubes. 6.General Contractor to fax completed purchase order form along with Wayne Dalton proposal to (330)763-8038. BILLING INFORMATION Company Address Address Ci /State Zip Code County Phone Fax PRICING Product Rolling Grille #1: $ Rolling Grille #2: $ Fire Door: $ Labor Rolling Grille #1: $ Rolling Grille #2: $ Fire Door: $ Freight Tax Total LABOR REQUIREMENT: Union_ Non -Union Contact Name: Phone Number: Wayne Dalton Proposal M Signature: 10) CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA SECTION 08331 OVERHEAD COILING SECURITY GRILLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY d A. This Section includes overhead tube mounted coiling security grilles, including curtains, guides, counterbalance mechanisms, hardware, operators, and installation accessories. B. Electrical connections are specified on electrical drawings. 1.02 SPECIAL CONDITIONS A. Overhead coiling security grilles and associated accessories are to be purchased by the contractor (not the subcontractor) for a pre-set price from the listed contact. Contractor to obtain freight quote from the supplier and shall include the cost in the bid. Delivery will be.made to the installer, who will be responsible for receiving shipment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS. 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. Wayne -Dalton, Eric Ocepak, Tel: (800) 598-3667, ext. 38171, Fax: (330) 763-4038, No substitutions. ff 2.02 GRILLE CURTAIN A. Curtain: 1. Horizontal Rods: Solid 5/16 inch diameter, galvanized steel, covered with 3/8 inch hollow aluminum tubes. a. Vertical,Spacing: 2 inches on center. 2. Vertical Chains: Eyeletted Aluminum Links, 3/4 inch wide, positioned by E -rings on 9 inch centers. Provide double E - rings on horizontal bars on both sides of end chains to retain curtain in guides. 3. Bottom Bar: Extruded aluminum tubular section reinforced with aluminum angles (if required). 4. Finish: 1. Aluminum Curtain and Bottom Bar: 1) Curtain: Clear Anodized. 2) Bottom Bar: Clear Anodized. B. Guides, Tube Mounted: Heavy duty extruded aluminum sections with snap -on cover to conceal fasteners and polypropylene pile runners on both sides of curtain. Provide steel tubes, floor saddles and hardware as recommended by manufacturer to support grille. 1. Finish, Aluminum Sections: Clear Anodized. 2. Finish, Steel Tubes: Primed. C. Counterbalance Shaft Assembly: OVERHEAD COILING SECURITY GRILLES 08331-1 H1D ADDENDUM 6 041204 04/12/04 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA 1. Barrel: Steel pipe capable of supporting curtain load with maximum deflection of 0.03 inches per foot (2.5 mm per meter) of width. 2. Spring Balance: Oil -tempered, heat-treated steel helical torsion spring assembly designed for proper balance of door to ensure that maximum effort to operate will not exceed 25 lbs (110 N). Provide wheel for applying and adjusting spring torque. D. Brackets: Fabricate from minimum 3/16 inch (5 mm) steel plate with permanently lubricated ball or roller bearings at rotating support points to support counterbalance shaft assembly and form end closures. 1. Phosphate treatment followed by a corrosion inhibitive baked - on zinc -rich gray polyester powder coat; minimum 2.5 mils (0.065 mm) cured film thickness. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Locking: 1. Motor Operated: Keyed cylinder locking into both jambs operable from both sides' with motor interlock cutout switches. Grille to unlock from exterior with a keyed cylinder and from the interior with a shrouded thumbturn. B. Emergency Egress System: Provide wall mounted pull handle to disengage motor operator and automatically open grille for emergency egress without the use of electrical power. Release of pull handle shall reset grille to normal motor operation. 2.04 ELECTRIC MOTOR OPERATORS A. Motor Operated: UL listed, belt drive operator, horsepower as recommended by manufacturer, 120v single phase service. Provide open drip -proof motor, removable without affecting auxiliary pushup operation or setting of limit switches; transformer with 24v control secondary; and all integral electrical components prewired to terminal blocks. Include removable electrical control panel. 1. Control Station: Flush Mounted, "Open/Close" Key Switch; NEMA 1B. B. Sensing Edge: Provide automatic reversing control by an automatic sensing switch within neoprene or rubber astragal extending full width of grille bottom bar. 1. Contact with switch before fully closing shall cause door to immediately stop downward travel and reverse direction to the fully opened position. 2. Provide retracting safety cord and reel connection to control circuit. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates upon which work will be installed and verify conditions are in accordance with approved shop drawings. B. Coordinate with responsible entity to perform corrective work on unsatisfactory substrates. C. Commencement of work by installer is acceptance of substrate. OVERHEAD COILING SECURITY GRILLES 08331-2 H1D ADDENDUM 6 041204 04/12/04 0 F/ CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: Install grille and operating equipment with necessary �. hardware, anchors, inserts, hangers and supports. B. Follow manufacturer's.installation instructions. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Following completion of installation, including related work by others, lubricate, test, and adjust grilles for ease of operation, free from warp, twist, or distortion. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean surfaces soiled by work as recommended by manufacturer. B. Remove surplus materials and debris from the site. 3.05 DEMONSTRATION A. Demonstrate proper operation to Owner's Representative. B. Instruct Owner's Representative in maintenance procedures. END OF SECTION r OVERHEAD COILING SECURITY GRILLES 08331-3 H1D ADDENDUM 6 041204 04/12/04 Wayne -Dalton Corp. • National Accounts Division 1 Door Drive • P.O. Box 67 • Mt. Hope, Ohio 44660 800-598-3667 • FAX 330-763-8038 Circuit City 2004 Rolling Grille and Fire Door Purchase Order Form for New Construction Project Primary Point of Contact Secondary Point of Contact Eric B. Ocepek-Sales Represeritative Pat Stevens -Project Manager Ext. 4 Ext. 3 eocepek(@wayne=dalton.com pstevens(a)wayne-dalton.com Order Date: Required Installation Date: Ship dates will be based on the above required installation date. Should installation date change, please notify Pat Stevens 5 days prior to ship date. PROJECT/SITE INFORMATION Store # Address Ci /State Zip Code Phone Fax Contact Email Notes: 1.General contractor to forward order form to Wayne Dalton no later than 3 weeks after the start of construction. 2.Wayne Dalton to supply shop drawings within 10 days of receiving order. 3.Shop drawing approval to be returned to Wayne Dalton within 5 days. (Approved drawing are required for fabrication) 4.Wayne Dalton to coordinate unloading of material with General Contractor. 5.General contractor to provide markings on the floor for the location of rolling grille tubes. 6.General Contractor to fax completed purchase order form along with Wayne Dalton proposal to (330)763-8038. BILLING INFORMATION Company Address Address Ci /State Zip Code County Phone Fax PRICING Product Rolling Grille #1: $ Rolling Grille #2: $ Fire Door: $ Labor Rolling Grille #1: $ Rolling Grille #2: $ Fire Door: $ Freight Tax Total LABOR REQUIREMENT: Union Non -Union Contact Name: Phone Number: Wayne Dalton Proposal #: Signature: Y CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA SECTION 08360 SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and provisions of the Contract, including General, Supplementary and Special Conditions, applicable Division O Sections and Division 1 Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Extent of sectional overhead doors is shown on drawings. B. Type(s) of sectional overhead doors include the following: 1. Manual operated; insulated steel panels. 1.03 SPECIAL CONDITIONS A. Sectional overhead doors and associated accessories are to be purchased by the contractor (not the subcontractor) for a pre-set price from the listed contact. Freight is a flat rate of $75.00 per delivery and shall include.the cost in the bid. Delivery will be made to the installer, who will be responsible for receiving shipment. 1. 04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data, roughing -in diagrams, and installation instructions for each type and size of overhead door. Include manufacturer's operating instructions and maintenance data. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide each sectional overhead door as a complete unit produced by one manufacturer, including frames, sections, brackets, guides, tracks, counterbalance mechanisms, hardware, operators and installation accessories, to suit openings and head room allowable. B. Inserts and Anchorages: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices which must be set in concrete or built into masonry for installation of units. Provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchorage devices. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay. 1.- See concrete and masonry sections of these specifications for installation of inserts and anchorage devices. C. Wind Loading: 1. Sectional overhead doors shall be designed to comply with the wind loading provisions of the local building code. 2. As a minimum, provide assemblies capable of withstanding a uniform test pressure of 30 PSF inward and 30 PSF outward when tested in accordance with ASTM E330. 'PART 2 - PRODUCTS SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08360-1 H1D ADDENDUM 6 041204 04/12/04 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 0,1. Clopay Building Products Co., Michelle Romie Tel: (800) 526- 4301, Ext. 7329, Fax: (800) 526-1618; No Substitutions. 2.02 STEEL SECTIONS A. Construct door sections from galvanized commercial quality carbon steel sheets complying with ASTM A 526, with minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi, and a minimum G90 zinc coating complying with ASTM A 525. 1. Exterior Steel Face Sheet: .034" minimum stucco embossed 2. Interior Steel Face Sheet: .016 minimum stucco embossed B. Fabricate sections from a single sheet to provide units not more than 24" high, and nominal 2" deep. Roll horizontal meeting edges to a continuous shiplap, rabbeted, or keyed weather seal, with a reinforcing flange return. 1. Exhaust Ports: Manufacturer's standard located in bottom section where indicated on the drawings. C. Enclose open section with 18 ga. galvanized steel channel end stiles welded in place. Provide intermediate stiles, cut to door section profile, spaced at not more than 48" o.c. and welded in place. D. Reinforce bottom section with a continuous channel or angle conforming to bottom section profile. E. Reinforce sections with continuous horizontal and diagonal reinforcing, as required by door width and design wind loading. Provide galvanized steel bars, struts, trusses 'or strip steel, formed to depth, and bolted or welded in place. F. Insulate inner core of steel sections with manufacturer's standard expanded polystyrene, foam type insulation. 1. Insulating value: R9.1. G. Finish door sections as follows: 1. Pretreat zinc -coated steel with a zinc phosphate conversion coating after cleaning. 2. Apply manufacturer's standard baked on"epoxy primer (.2 mil) coat. 3. Apply manufacturer's standard pre -painted polyester (white) top coat (.8 mil). 2.03 TRACKS, SUPPORTS, AND ACCESSORIES A. Tracks: Provide manufacturer's standard galvanized steel track system, sized for door size and weight, and designed for clearances shown. Provide complete track assembly including brackets, bracing and reinforcing for rigid support of ball bearing roller guides, for required door type and size. Slot vertical sections of track at 2" o.c. for door drop safety device. Slope tracks at proper angle from vertical, or otherwise design to ensure tight closure at jambs when door unit is closed. Weld or bolt to track supports. ; B. Track Reinforcement and Supports: Provide galvanized steel track reinforcement and support members. Secure, reinforce and support tracks as required for size and weight of door to provide strength SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08360-2 H1D ADDENDUM 6 041204 04/12/04 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA and rigidity, and to ensure against sag, sway, and detrimental vibration during opening and closing of doors. C. Support and attach, tracks to'opening jambs with continuous angle welded to tracks and attached to wall. Support horizontal (ceiling tracks) with continuous angle welded to track and supported by laterally -braced attachments to overhead structural members at curve and end of -tracks. D. Weather Seals: Provide continuous rubber, neoprene, or flexible vinyl adjustable weatherstrip gasket at tops and compressible astragal on bottoms of each overhead door. 1. In addition, provide continuous flexible seals at door jamb edges for a fully weathertight installation. 2.04 HARDWARE A. Provide heavy-duty, rust -resistant hardware, with galvanized or cadmium -plated or stainless steel fasteners, to suit type of door. B. Hinges: Provide heavy steel hinges at each end stile and at each intermediate stile, per manufacturer's recommendations for size of door. Attach hinges to door section through stiles and rails with bolts and lock nuts or lock washers and nuts. Use rivets or self - tapping fasteners where access to nuts is not possible. Provide double -end hinges, where required, for doors exceeding 16'-0" in width, unless otherwise recommended by door manufacturer. C. Rollers: Provide heavy-duty rollers, with steel ball bearings in case-hardened steel races, mounted with varying projections to suit slope of track. Extend roller shaft through both hinges where double hinges are required. Provide roller tires to suit size of track (3" diameter for 3" track; 2" diameter for 2" track) and as follows: 1. Case-hardened steel tires, for normal installations. D. Provide interior locking device assembly with spring loaded dead bolt, to engage through slots in tracks. 1. Provide for locking with padlock. 2.05 COUNTERBALANCING MECHANISMS A. Torsion Spring: Hang door assembly for operation by torsion spring counterbalance mechanism, consisting of adjustable tension tempered steel torsion springs mounted on a case-hardened steel shaft, and connected to door with galvanized aircraft type lift cable. B. Provide cast aluminum or grey iron casting cable drums, grooved to receive cable. Mount counterbalance mechanism with manufacturer's standard ball-bearing brackets at each end of. shaft with one additional mid -point bracket for shafts up to 16' long and 2 additional brackets at 1/3 -points to support shafts over 16' long, unless closer spacing recommended by door manufacturer. C. Include a spring-loaded steel or bronze cam mounted to bottom door roller assembly on each side, designed to stop door automatically if either cable breaks. Provide either a compression spring or leaf spring bumper installed at end of each horizontal track to cushion door at end of opening operation. ..2.06 MANUAL DOOR OPERATORS A. Push-up: Provide lift handles and pull rope for raising and lowering doors, operating with not more than 25 lbs. lift or pull. SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08360-3 H1D ADDENDUM 6 041204 04/12/04 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install door, track, and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, jamb and head mold stops, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports in accordance with final shop drawings, manufacturer's instructions and as herein specified. B. Fasten vertical track assembly to framing at not less than 24" o.c. Hang horizontal track from structural overhead framing with angle or channel hangers, welded and bolt -fastened in place. Provide sway bracing, diagonal bracing, and reinforcing as required for rigid installation of track and door operating equipment. C. Upon completion of installation, including work by other trades, lubricate, test and adjust doors to operate easily, free from warp, twist, or distortion and fitting weathertight for entire perimeter. END OF SECTION SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08360-4 H1D ADDENDUM 6 041204 04/12/04 CLOPAY BUILDING PRODUCTS COMPANY 101 Miller Rd., Box 39 Russia, OH 45363 SOLD TO Name " General Contractor"' Street 1 Street 2 CRY State, Zi Circuit CiiVrder Form Clopay Primary Contact: Michelle Romle E-mail: mromle@ciopay.com Fax: 800-526-1618 Phone: 800-526.4301 ext 7329 PHOJEGT NAME / 5MIP TV Name — Circuit City Store ## f Street 1 Street 2 r Quote Nu :'C20755 Required Delivery Date: NOTES Terms of Payment: 1%, 20, Net 60 Days Order form and purchase order must be submmed to Clopay alx waaka prior to required date Must Notify Clopay two weeks prior to required Installation date The General Contractor will sign Clopays commencement and dompletion form upon installation Title for doors and completed Installation will pass upon signed completion form If actual opening dimensions are different than those listed above, call Clopay for a quote Order Form Submitted by: (To be filled in by General Contractor) Contact Name Phone Number Date Signature Billing Information: Company Name Address City / State Contact / Phone Tax ID ## Tax Exempt - YES or NO Clopay Secondary Contact: Mark Sand E-mail: msand@clopay.com 517-862-3099 Fax: 517-668-8704 Phone: Sales Tax Total t C.C. Door DOOR DOOR Opening Opening GLASS COLOR DOLOR TRACK MISC. per door Circle one Material Price Extended Price QTY MODEL Number WIDTH HEIGHT WIDTH HEIGHT OR SOUD FINISH LOCK SPRINGS Size Mount Uft NON-UNION eachC20755-1 3220 10'2 10'3 10'0° 10'2° Solkl White Inside Torsion 2° track RA -steel 108°HL 2° bottom brackets/Exhaust rt 400.00 $ 300.00 $ 543.92 !UNION C20755-2 3220 8'2 10 8'0° 10'0° Solid White Inside Torsion 2° track RA -steel Full Vertical 2°safety bottom brackets 400.00 $ 300.00 $ 475.96 All Doors to Include top seal and reverse angle seal I Subtotal NOTES Terms of Payment: 1%, 20, Net 60 Days Order form and purchase order must be submmed to Clopay alx waaka prior to required date Must Notify Clopay two weeks prior to required Installation date The General Contractor will sign Clopays commencement and dompletion form upon installation Title for doors and completed Installation will pass upon signed completion form If actual opening dimensions are different than those listed above, call Clopay for a quote Order Form Submitted by: (To be filled in by General Contractor) Contact Name Phone Number Date Signature Billing Information: Company Name Address City / State Contact / Phone Tax ID ## Tax Exempt - YES or NO Clopay Secondary Contact: Mark Sand E-mail: msand@clopay.com 517-862-3099 Fax: 517-668-8704 Phone: Sales Tax Total t CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA SECTION 08410 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and provisions of the Contract, including General, Supplementary and Special Conditions, applicable Division 0 Sections ' and Division 1 Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Extent of aluminum entrances and storefronts is indicated on drawings and schedules. B. Aluminum entrance and storefront types required for the project include: 1. Aluminum Storefront. 2.- Interior doors. 3. Frames for interior doors. 4. Bent Aluminum (closures). C. Glazing: Refer to "Glass and Glazing" section 08800. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product specifications, technical products data, standard details, and installation recommendations for each type of entrance and storefront product required. Include the following information: . 1. Fabrication methods. 2. Finishing. 3. Hardware. 4. Accessories. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication and installation of entrances and storefronts, including the following: 1. Elevations. 2. Detail sections of typical composite members. 3. Hardware; mounting heights. 4. Anchorages and reinforcements. 5. Expansion provisions. 6. Glazing details. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Performance Requirements: Provide aluminum entrance and storefront assemblies that comply with specified performance characteristics. 1. Thermal Movement: Provide systems capable of withstanding ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410-1 HID 080603 08/06/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA thermal movements resulting from an ambient temperature range of 120 deg. F (67 deg. C), that could cause a metal surface temperature range of 180 deg. F (100 deg. C) within the framing system. 2. Wind Loading: For interior assemblies, uniform test pressure shall be minimum of 20 psf inward and 20 psf outward when tested in accordance with ASTM E330. B. Fixed Framing Transmission Characteristics: Provide aluminum entrance and storefront framing system that complies with requirements indicated for transmission characteristics. 1. Air Infiltration: Provide framing system with an air infiltration rate of not more than 0.06 CFM per sq. ft. of fixed area (excluding operable door edges) when tested in accordance with ASTM E 283 at an inward test pressure differential of 6.24 psf. 2. Water Penetration: Provide framing systems with no water penetration (excluding operable door edges) as defined in the test method when tested in accordance with ASTM E 331 at an inward test pressure differential of 6.24 lb. per sq. ft. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility: Provide entrance and storefront produced by a single manufacturer capable of showing prior production of units similar to those required. B. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Provide entrances and storefront produced by a single manufacturer with not less than 5 years successful experience in the fabrication of assemblies of the type and quality required. C. Installer's Qualifications: Entrances and storefront shall be 0 installed by a firm that has not less than 5 -years successful -F1 experience in the installation of systems similar to those required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: 1. Rawneer Company, Inc. 2. Cronstroms Mfg., Inc. 3. Amarlite/Arco Metal Co. 4. PPG Industries, Inc. 5. Tubelite Div., Indal Inc. 6. United States Aluminum Corp., International Aluminum Corp. 7. Vistawall Architectural Products 8. YRR Architectural Products 2.02 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Members: Provide alloy and temper recommended by the manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required finish; comply with ASTM B 221 for extrusion and ASTM B 209 for sheet or plate. B. Fasteners: Provide fasteners of aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or other materials warranted by the manufacturer to be noncorrosive and compatible with aluminum components, hardware, anchors and other components. C. Reinforcement: Where fasteners screw -anchor into aluminum less than 0.125" thick, reinforce the interior with aluminum or nonmagnetic ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410-2 H1D 080603 08/06/03 •CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA stainless steel to receive screw threads, or provide standard noncorrosive pressed -in splined grommet nuts. C D. Exposed Fasteners: `Except where unavoidable for application of hardware, do not use exposed fasteners. For the application of hardware, use fasteners that match the finish of member or hardware being fastened. Provide Phillips flat -head machine screws for exposed fasteners. E. Concealed Flashing: Provide 26 gage minimum dead -soft stainless steel, or 0.026" minimum extruded aluminum of allow and type selected by manufacturer for compatibility with other components. F. Brackets and Reinforcements: Where feasible, provide high-strength aluminum brackets and reinforcements; otherwise provide nonmagnetic stainless steel or hot -dip galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 386. G. Concrete/Masonry Inserts: Provide concrete and masonry inserts fabricated from cast-iron, malleable iron, or hot -dip galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 386. H. Glass and Glazing Materials: Comply with section 08800, "Glass and Glazing". 2.03 COMPONENTS A. Storefront Framing System: Provide inside -outside matched resilient flush -glazed storefront framing system with provisions for glass replacement. Shop -fabricate and preassemble frame components where possible. 1. The system required at the main entry vestibule is. 2" x 4-1/2" as indicated on the drawings. Provide Trifab VG451 System both interior and exterior vestibule walls. 2. The .system required in all other interior areas is 1 3/4" x 4 1/2" as indicated on the drawings. Provide Trifab VG450 System. B. Stile -and -Rail Type Aluminum Doors: 1. Frame: Provide tubular frame members, fabricated with mechanical joints using heavy inserted reinforcing plates and concealed tie -rods or j -bolts. 2. Design: Provide 1-3/4" thick doors of design indicated. a. Medium stile (3-1/2" nominal width); 10" bottom rail. 3. Glazing: Fabricate doors to facilitate replacement of glass without disassembly of stiles an rails. Provide snap -on extruded aluminum glazing stops, with exterior stops anchored for non -removal. 2.04 HARDWARE A. General: Refer to drawings and schedules for hardware requirements. B. Provide manufacturer's heavy-duty hardware units as indicated, scheduled, or required for operation of each door, including the following items of sizes, number, and type recommended by manufacturer for service required; finish to match door. 2.05 FABRICATION A. General: Sizes of door and frame units, and profile requirements, ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410-3 H1D 080603 08/06/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA are indicated on drawings. B. Prefabrication: Before shipment to the project site, complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work to the greatest extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. 1. Preglaze door and frame units to greatest extent possible. 2. Do not drill and tap for surface -mounted hardware items until time of installation at project site. 3. Perform fabrication operations, including cutting, fitting, forming, drilling and grinding of metal work to prevent damage to exposed finish surfaces. For hardware, perform these operations prior to application of finishes. C. Welding: Comply with AWS recommendations; grind exposed welds smooth and restore mechanical finish. D. Reinforcing: Install reinforcing as required for hardware and necessary for performance requirements, sag resistance and rigidity. E. Dissimilar Metals: Separate dissimilar metals with zinc chromate primer, bituminous paint, or other separator that will prevent corrosion. F. Continuity: Maintain accurate relation of planes and angles, with hairline fit of contacting members. 1. Uniformity of Finish: Abutting extruded aluminum members shall not have an integral color or texture variation greater than half the range indicated in the sample pair submittal. G. Fasteners: Conceal fasteners wherever possible. . H. Weatherstripping: At interior door locations without weatherstripping, provide neoprene silencers on stops to prevent metal -to -metal contact. 2.06 FINISHES A. Natural Anodized Finish: Provide NAAMM AA-M12C22A31, Class II (mechanical finish, non -specular as fabricated; chemical etch, medium matte; minimum thickness 0.4 mil) clear anodic coating. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation. B. Set units plumb, level, and true to line, without warp or rack of framing members, doors, or panels. Provide proper support and anchor securely in place. 1. Separate aluminum and other corrodible metal surfaces from sources of corrosion of electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials. Comply with requirements specified under paragraph "Dissimilar Materials" in the Appendix to AAMA 101-85. C. Drill and tap frames and doors and apply surface -mounted hardware items. Comply with hardware manu'facturer's instructions and template requirements. Use concealed fasteners wherever possible. ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410-4 H1D 080603 08/06/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC LA QUINTA, CA D. Refer to "Glass and Glazing" section 08800 for installation of glass indicated to be glazed into doors and framing, and not preglazed by manufacturer. 1. Type of glass for each opening is indicated on drawings. 3.02 ADJUSTING A. Adiust operating hardware to function properly, for smooth operation without binding, and.for weathertight closure. 3.03 CLEANING A. Clean the completed system, inside and out, promptly after installation, exercising care to avoid damage to coatings. B. Clean glass surfaces after installation, complying with requirements contained in the "Glass and Glazing" section for cleaning and maintenance. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt and other substances from aluminum surfaces. 3.04. PROTECTION A. Institute protective measures required throughout the remainder of the construction period to ensure that aluminum entrances and storefronts will be without damage or deterioration, other than normal weathering, at time of acceptance. END OF SECTION 0 WA"L "'WP. ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08410-5 H1D 080603 08/06/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA SECTION 08460 AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL ` 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and provisions of the Contract, including General, Supplementary and Special Conditions, applicable Division 0 and Division 1 Sections, apply to this section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Extent and configuration of automatic entrance doors is indicated on drawings and schedules. B. Automatic entrance doors consist of the manufacturer's assembled units including entrance doors and frames, powered door operators, and.operator controls.and accessories. C. Types of automatic entrance door operations include the following: 1. Bi -parting sliding. D. Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts are specified elsewhere in Division 8. E., Glass and glazing is specified elsewhere in Division 8. F: Electrical connections are specified in Division 16. 1.03 SPECIAL CONDITIONS A. Automatic entrance doors and associated accessories. are to be purchased by the contractor (not the subcontractor) for a pre-set price from the listed contact. Freight will be paid for by Circuit City in a "third party billing" arrangement. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Performance Requirements: Provide automatic entrance door assemblies that have been designed and fabricated to comply with applications indicated. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication and installation of automatic entrance doors and associated components not included in manufacturer's product data. Include the following: 1. Elevations. 2. Hardware. 3. Anchors and reinforcements. 4. Expansion provisions. 5. Glazing details. 6. Relationship to contiguous work. B. Templates and Diagrams: Furnish templates, diagrams and other data to fabricators and installers of related work, as necessary for AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS 08460-1 H1D ADDENDUM 6 041204 04/12/04 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA coordination of the automatic entrance door installation. C. Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's maintenance and service data, including the name, address and telephone number of the nearest authorized service representative. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer's Qualifications: Engage an Installer who is an authorized representative of the automatic entrance door manufacturer for both the installation and maintenance of the type of units required for the project. B. Maintenance Proximity: The installer shall maintain offices and repair or service facilities not more than two (2) hours normal travel time from the project site. C. BHMA Standard: Automatic entrance doors shall comply with applicable requirements of ANSI A156.10 (BHMA 1601), Power Operated Pedestrian Door Standard. D. UL Standard: Powered door operators shall comply with UL 325, Electric Door, Drapery, Gate, Louver and Window Operators and Systems. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Check openings by field measurement before fabrication to ensure proper fitting of work; show measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of work. Where necessary, proceed with fabrication without measurements, and coordinate fabrication tolerances to ensure proper fit. PART 2 —PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. Besam Automated Entrance Systems, Inc.; Unislide Fixed Sidelite Bi -Parting Sliding Doors, Mary Anne Schwartz, Tel: (609) 443-5800, ext. 20345, Fax: (609) 443-3440, No Substitutions. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Extrusions: Provide alloy and temper recommended by the producer or finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with not less than the strength and durability properties specified in ASTM B 221 for 6063-T5. Provide main extrusions of not less than 0.125" wall thickness. B. Provide extruded glazing stops and other applied trim extrusions with minimum wall thickness of 0.062". C. Aluminum Sheets: Provide alloy and temper recommended by the producer or finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with not less than the strength and durability properties specified in ASTM B 209 for 5005-H15. D. Fasteners: Provide aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or other noncorrosive metal fasteners compatible with aluminum components, AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS 08460-2 H1D ADDENDUM 6 041204 04/12/04 10 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC.- LA QUINTA, CA A. Capacity: Provide operators of the size recommended by the manufacturer for door size, weight and movement, for condition of exposure, and for long-term maintenance -free operation under normal traffic load for the type of occupancy indicated. B. Adjustment Features: Provide operators that are fully adjustable without removal of the doors. Provide adjustment for opening, AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS 08460-3 H1D ADDENDUM 6 041204 04/12/04 hardware, anchors and other items being fastened. E. Exposed Fasteners: Except where unavoidable for application of hardware, do not use exposed fasteners. For the application of hardware, use fasteners that match the finish of the member or hardware being fastened. 1. For exposed fasteners provide Phillips flat -head screws with finish matching item fastened. F. Steel Reinforcement and Brackets: Provide manufacturer' standard steel reinforcement and brackets with 2.0 oz. hot -dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 123. Apply after fabrication. G. Sliding Weatherstripping: Provide replaceable weatherstripping of polypropylene or nylon woven pile, with nylon fabric and aluminum strip backing. Sliding weatherstripping includes stripping at jamb rails, head rails and meeting rails. H. Sealants and Gaskets: Use sealants and gaskets in fabrication, assembly and installation of the work, that are recommended and guaranteed by manufacturer to remain permanently elastic, non - shrinking and nonmigrating. 1. Refer to Division -7 sections for sealants and gaskets required for installation of door units at the project site. I. Glazing Materials: Refer to other Division 8 sections for gaskets and sealants required for glass installation at the project site. 2.03 HARDWARE A. General: Refer to Drawings and Schedules for Hardware Requirements. B. Provide the door manufacturer's standard heavy-duty hardware units as indicated, schedule or required for operation of each door, including the following items, of sizes, number and type recommended by the manufacturer for service indicated. C. Deadlock: Provide hookbolt deadlocks for sliding entrance doors accepting U -change mortise cylinder. D. Operation: Exterior Entry Doors, shall be provided with a keyed cylinder on the exterior and a thumb turn on the interior. On the interior entry doors provide a dummy cylinder on the exterior side and a thumb turn on the interior side. Cylinders are supplied under another section for keying into building system. E. Thresholds for Automatic Entrance Doors: Provide manufacturer's standard extruded aluminum threshold with lead upon one side in mill finish as scheduled, complete with anchors and clips. F. Install hardware, except surface -mounted hardware, at the fabrication plant. Remove only as required for final finishing operation and for delivery and installation of the work at the project site. 2.04 DOOR OPERATORS A. Capacity: Provide operators of the size recommended by the manufacturer for door size, weight and movement, for condition of exposure, and for long-term maintenance -free operation under normal traffic load for the type of occupancy indicated. B. Adjustment Features: Provide operators that are fully adjustable without removal of the doors. Provide adjustment for opening, AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS 08460-3 H1D ADDENDUM 6 041204 04/12/04 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA closing and checking speeds, as well as length of time door remains open. C. Electro -Mechanical Operators for Sliding Doors: Provide self- contained, concealed overhead electro -mechanical drive units, with power opening and power closing, and checking for both opening and closing cycles. Provide connections for power and control wiring. Provide safety release clutch for obstructed closing. Provide for easy manual sliding when power is off. D. For Doors Provide emergency breakaway swing feature as indicated on drawings. 2.05 DOOR OPERATOR CONTROL SYSTEMS A. The Wizard Sliding Door Sensing System: Uses planar K -band microwave technology to detect motion and focused active infrared technology to detect presence, in a single housing. The focused active infrared presence technology overlaps the motion pattern. The active infrared is comprised of 96 spots of detection made out of four rows of 24 spots of detection each (two rows on each side of the door). The focused presence technology never shuts off during closing cycle of the door. For aesthetic purposes the unit comes in black ABS plastic housing. The Wizard must be totally self - monitored (motion and presence sensor) and have the ability to make adjustments with a universal coded remote control to be provided by door installer. Operating temperature range of -30E F to +131E F. Mounting heights, 7' to 12' above finished floor. As manufactured by B.E.A., Inc., Pittsburgh, PA 15215 Tel: (800) 523-2462, Fax: (412) 782-5154. 1. Size: 14-1/4" "W" x 1-1/2" "H" x 1-3/8" "D".. 2. No substitutions. B. Detection Devices: Provide detection devices to allow both automatic enter and exit function or exit only function as indicated on the drawings. C. Electrical Interlocks: Wherever feasible, provide electrical interlocks to prevent operation of the unit when operation of the door is prevented by lock and latch or door bolts, unless units are equipped with self -protected devices or circuits. Furnish magnetic alarm contacts as required similar to Besam Security Kit #CC -15-002 wired to terminal block; extend from terminal block to 12" above finished ceiling. D. Sliding Door Opening Width Control Switch: Provide a five (5) position switch which includes reducing the opening to a selected partial opening width. Furnish exterior to entry jamb switch where required. 2.06 ACCESSORIES A. Sill Configuration at Sliding Entrance Doors: Provide sill members and bottom guide system of configuration indicated. 1. Provide threshold across door and side lights opening with applicable type of guide track system at side lights unless otherwise indicated or required. 2.07 FABRICATION AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS 08460-4 H1D ADDENDUM 6 041204 04/12/04 i> Y.y Y , , ;}- CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. 1. 1. '.. ,..s..-.,,- ,•, LA QUINTA, CA A. General: Sizes of door and frame units, and profile requirements, are indicated on the drawings. Variable dimensions are indicated with maximum and minimum dimensions required to achieve design requirements and coordination with other work. B. Prefabrication: Provide automatic entrance doors as prefabricated packaged units complete with doors, muntins, side lights, frames, transoms, door operators and related components, hardware and accessories. Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware applications and other work before shipment to project site. C. Do not drill and tap for surface -mounted hardware items until time of installation at project site. D. Perform fabrication operations, including cutting, fitting, forming, drilling and grinding of metal work in manner which prevents damage to exposed finish surfaces'. For hardware, perform these operations prior to application of finishes. E. Welding: Comply with AWS recommendations; grind exposed welds smooth and restore mechanical finish. F. Reinforce the work as necessary for performance requirements, and for support to the structure. Separate metal surfaces at moving joints with nonmetallic separators to prevent "freeze-up" of joints. G. Dissimilar Materials: Separate dissimilar metals with zinc chromate primer, bituminous paint, or other separator that will prevent corrosion. H. Maintain continuity of line and accurate relation of planes and angles. Provide secure attachment and support at mechanical joints, with hairline fit of contacting members. I. Fasteners: Conceal fasteners wherever possible. J. Weatherstripping: Provide sliding weatherstripping as manufacturers standard. K. Aluminum Door and Side Light Framing: 1. Fabricate tubular and channel frame assemblies in configuration indicated, with welded or mechanical joints in accordance with manufacturer's standards. Provide concealed fasteners wherever possible. Reinforce internally with steel shapes as indicated, or as necessary to support the required loads. L. Provide glazing systems for frames to receive lights and for replacement of glass, but for non -removal of glass from the exterior. 1. Provide type and profile of glazing system indicated, to receive glazing materials indicated. M. Fabricate frame assemblies for exterior walls with flashing and weeps to drain penetrating moisture to the exterior. Provide anchorage and alignment brackets for concealed support of assembly from the building structure. Allow for thermal expansion of exterior units. 2•..08 FINISHES r,Kzxsae xm.r., . . AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS 08460-5 H1D ADDENDUM 6 041204 04/12/04 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA A. Natural Anodized Finish: Provide NAArM4 AA-C23A31, Class II (mechanical finish, non -specular as fabricated; chemical etch, medium matte; minimum thickness 0.4 mil) clear anodic coating. B. If doors are to be painted, do so in accordance with door manufacturer specifications. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's specifications and recommendations. B. Set units plumb, level and true to line, without warp or rack of frames or doors. Anchor securely in place. Separate aluminum and other corrodible metal surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials. C. Set sill members in a bed of sealant or with joint fillers or gaskets as indicated to provide weathertight construction. Comply with requirements of Division 7 sections for sealants, fillers and gaskets to be installed during installation of doors and frames. D. Refer to Division 7 sections for compounds, joint fillers and gaskets (if any) to be installed after installation of frame assemblies. E. Set tracks, header assemblies, operating brackets, rails and guides level and true to location, with adequate anchorage for permanent support. 3.02 ADJUSTING A. After repeated operation of completed installation equivalent to three (3) days use by normal traffic (100 to 300 cycles), readjust door operators and controls for optimum operating condition and safety, and for a weathertight closure. Lubricate hardware, operating equipment and other moving parts. 3.03 CLEANING A. Cleaning glass and aluminum surfaces promptly after installation. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt and other substances. Exercise care to avoid damage to coatings. B. Comply with requirements contained in the "Glass and Glazing" section for cleaning and maintenance of glass. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Institute protective measures required throughout the remainder of the construction period to ensure that automatic entrance doors will be without damage or deterioration, other than normal weathering, at the time of substantial completion. END OF SECTION t) AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS 08460-6 H1D ADDENDUM 6 041204 04/12/04 Circuit City 2004 Automatic Door Purchase OrderForm for New Construction Project *Besam-Automated Entrance Systems Inc. 84 Twin Rivers Drive Hightstown, NJ 08520 Phone: 609-443-5800 Fax: 609-443-3440 Order Date: Primary Point of Contact MaryAnne Schwarz -Project Manager Extension: 20345 Email: mschwarz(EObesam-usa.com Secondary Point of Contact Scott Lindsay -Sales Manager Extension: 20455 Email: slindsay6�Obesam-usa.com Required Installation Date: Ship dates will be based on the above required installation date Should installation date change, please notify MaryAnne Schwarz prior to ship date PROTECT/SITE INFORMATION BILLING INFORMATION Company Address Address City, ST Zi County Phone Fax Email PRICING Page # Amount Page 2 Page 3 Sales Tax Total r Notes: 1. Freight charges will be billed separately 2. If Kynar 500 painted finish is required supply either PPG or Valspar color number or sample of finish to be matched (allow 10 working days for color matching). Allow eight (8) weeks delivery time from receipt of "APPROVED COLOR". 3. Installation performed during normal business hours. Order Form Submitted By: Contact Name: Phone Number: Signature: Page 1 of 2 LABOR REQUIREMENT ❑ Union ❑ Non -Union Store # Address City, ST Zi Phone Fax Contact r Notes: 1. Freight charges will be billed separately 2. If Kynar 500 painted finish is required supply either PPG or Valspar color number or sample of finish to be matched (allow 10 working days for color matching). Allow eight (8) weeks delivery time from receipt of "APPROVED COLOR". 3. Installation performed during normal business hours. Order Form Submitted By: Contact Name: Phone Number: Signature: Page 1 of 2 LABOR REQUIREMENT ❑ Union ❑ Non -Union bo "Z60 Lilo, l:lrcult malty ZUU4 Door Type: PAGE: 2 of 2 TYPE OF DOOR AUTOMATION: BESAM UniSlide-2-OCS-FSL-CL-NT Bi Parting sliding door with 2 door. leafs and 2 fixed side lights` Transom Circuit City Standard Size: 158" wide x 92 118" (clear door opening =67'1) PUnDITt'T nRAWM1r_r PRODUCT DESCRIPTION: TOTAL PRICE E Per Package: $3,548.50 (-.Material $2,820 Labor $728.56) INCLUDING: i year warranty nvTrnive. DELIVERY TIME: four (4) wee Clear Anodized • Add for Powder Coat Finish Per slider UnisSlide automatic sliding door • Add for K nar 500 standard two 2 coat color non -XL, non -exotic Per slider Aluminium Doors Security Switch UniSlide Concealed system consisting of $1,064.00 • Add for Union Labor Per slider t Sliding Door 1 Sliding door operator with 2 active of a proved color match. Operator sliding door leafs with emergency '/d' clear tempered glass breakout and 2: fixed sidelights 1 Operator UniSlide-2-OCS-FSL-CL-NT including: 1 Cover in aluminium. UniSlide • 1 Besam standard threshold w/lead-up one side g 2 Wizard motion/presence sensors 1 5 position switch (on/off/hold open/one o Wizard way/reduced opening) Sensor 1 Jamb tube set_ Excludes: x 1) Plumb and level prepared openings F to receive slider framing. 2 Active sliding Door leafs with emergency a 2)110volt electrical service to each breakout, 4" bottom rails, glazed with 1/4" clear operator. tempered glass, with U -change lock cylinder 3) Caulking 2 fixed sidelights, 4" bottom rails, glazed with 1/4" clear tempered glass. 1 Door-, side light- frames and covers in anodized clear aluminium (Class In ,Clear Door Opening Note: Standard Rough Opening Sizes Delivery, installation and starting up „ Package Width (other that std) required=1581/x" x 92 3/8" TOTAL PRICE E Per Package: $3,548.50 (-.Material $2,820 Labor $728.56) INCLUDING: i year warranty nvTrnive. DELIVERY TIME: four (4) wee Clear Anodized • Add for Powder Coat Finish Per slider $610.00 • Add for K nar 500 standard two 2 coat color non -XL, non -exotic Per slider $920.0.0 • Add for K nar XL or exotic color Per slider $1,064.00 • Add for Union Labor Per slider $142.00 Note: special finishes require four (4) weeks additional delivery time from receipt of a proved color match. Version 2.0 3/19/04 Door Type Qty Required Total Price Special Finish Union Labor Sub Total this a e CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA SECTION 08700 FINISH HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and provisions of the Contract, including General, Supplementary and Special Conditions, applicable Division O Sections an Division 1 Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Extent of finish hardware is indicated on drawings and schedules. B. Types of finish hardware items are indicated on drawings and schedules. 1.03 SPECIAL CONDITIONS A. Finish hardware is to be purchased by the contractor (not the subcontractor) for a pre-set price from the listed contact. Contractor to obtain freight quote from the supplier and shall include the cost in the bid. Delivery will be made to the installer, who will be responsible for receiving shipment. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit final hardware schedule organized by "hardware sets", to indicate specifically the product to be furnished for each item required on each door. " 1. Include catalog cut -sheets of each item. r 2. Include installation instructions for each item. 3. Furnish templates to each fabricator of doors and frames, as required for preparation to receive hardware. .1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Supplier: A recognized architectural finish hardware supplier with warehousing facilities, who has been furnishing hardware in the project's vicinity for a period of not less than 2 years, and who is, or who employs an experienced architectural hardware consultant who is available, At reasonable times during the course of the work, for consultation about project's hardware requirements, to Owner, and Contractor. B. For fire -rated openings provide hardware tested and listed by UL or FM (NFPA&Standard 80). On panic exit devices, provide UL or FM label indicating "Fire Exit Hardware". PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SCHEDULED HARDWARE A. Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size and other distinctive qualities of each type of finish hardware is indicated in the Door Schedule and Hardware Legend on drawings. B.- Substitutions will not be'allowed. .rn ...: ""'2.02 SUPPLIER FINISH HARDWARE 08700-1 H1D ADDENDUM 6 041204 04/12/04 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA A. Finish hardware shall be supplied by the following: 1. Mills and Nebraska, Orlando, FL, Avorice Holman, Tel: (407) 298-5600, ext. 411, Fax: (407) 578-2881. 2.03 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION A. Hand of Door: Furnish each item of hardware for proper installation and operation of door movement as indicated on drawings. B. Finish and base material designations are indicated in accordance with ANSI A156.18 or the nearest traditional U.S. commercial finish. 1. Where base material and quality of finish are not otherwise indicated, provide at least the commercially recognized quality specified in ANSI A156 series standards applicable to each particular type of hardware. C. Tools and Maintenance Instructions for Maintenance: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of finish hardware. 2.04 HINGES AND BUTTS A. Templates: Provide on template produced units. B. Hinge Pins: Provide hinge pins as follows: 1. Exterior Doors and Outswing Corridor Doors: Non -removable pins. 2. Interior Doors: Non -rising pins unless indicated to be non - C. Tips: removable. Flat button finished le and matching plug, to match leaves. D. Number of hinges: Provide not less than 3 hinges for each door leaf. 1. Provide two (2) pair of hinges for 4'-0" wide doors. 2.05 LOCK CYLINDERS AND KEYING A. Keying System: Review the keying system with Owner's Representative and provide type of system required (Master, grandmaster or great - grandmaster). B. Equip locks with manufacturer's special 6 -pin tumbler cylinders, with construction master key feature, which permits voiding of constructions keys without cylinder removal. C. Where indicated provide locks with high security cylinders which comply with Grade 1, ANSI A156.5 and which have been tested for pick and drill resistance requirements of UL 437 and are UL -listed. D. Metals: Construct lock cylinder parts from brass/bronze, stainless steel or nickel silver. E. Key Material: Nickel silver only. F. Key Quantity: Provide 3 change keys for each lock, plus 5 master keys for each master key system unless otherwise directed by Owner's Representative. Stamp keys "DO NOT DUPLICATE." 2.06 CLOSERS FINISH HARDWARE 08700-2 H1D ADDENDUM 6 041204 04/12/04 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA A. Size of Units: Except as otherwise specifically indicated, comply with closer manufacturer's recommendations for size of door control unit. ,. 1. Provide parallel arms for all overhead closers, except as otherwise indicated. B. Access -Free Manual Closers: Where manual closers are indicated for doors required to be accessible to the physically handicapped, provide adjustable units complying with ANSI A117.1 provisions for door opening force and delayed action closing. C. Adjust Closing Time: Adjust closing time of closer from fully open to fully closed (latched) as follows: `1. Delayed Action Closers: Comply with the most stringent local or Federal code requirements. 2. Standard Closers: 7 seconds. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Hardware Mounting Heights: Door and Hardware Institute "Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames", except as otherwise indicated. B. Install each hardware item to comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. C. Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of butyl -rubber or polyisobutylene mastic sealant. Remove excess sealant and clean adjacent surfaces. D. Hardware Adjustment: Return to project one month after Owner's occupancy, and adjust hardware to proper operation and function. Instruct Owner's personnel in proper maintenance and adjustment. END OF SECTION FINISH HARDWARE 08700-3 H1D ADDENDUM 6 041204 04'/12/04 • CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA SECTION 08800 GLASS AND GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings • and provisions of the Contract, including General, Supplementary and Special Conditions, applicable Division 0 Sections and Division 1 Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Extent of glass and glazing is indicated on drawings. B. Types of work in this sections include glass and glazing for: 1. Exterior storefront framing construction. 2. Interior storefront framing construction. 3. Exterior entrance doors. 4. Interior entrance doors. 5. Interior doors. 6. Interior door/window vision panels. 7. Tinting window film.. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product specifications, technical product data, standard details and installation recommendations. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Provide glass and glazing that has been produced, fabricated and installed to withstand normal thermal movement, wind loading and impact loading (where applicable), without failure including loss of breakage of glass, failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight, deterioration of glass and glazing materials and other defects in the work. B. Deterioration of laminatedlg ass is defined as the development of manufacturing defects including edge separation or delamination which materially obstructs vision through glass. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Glazing Standard: Comply with FGMA "Glazing Manual" and "Sealant Manual". B. Safety Glazing Standard: Comply with ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR Part 1201 for category II materials. C. Fire Resistance Rated Wire Glass: Provide UL -labeled and listed products, identical with those tested per ASTM E 163 (UL 9). 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING GLASS AND GLAZING 08800-1 H1D ADDENDUM 6 041204 04/12/04 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA A. Protect glass and glazing materials during delivery, storage and handling to comply with manufacturer's directions and as required to prevent edge damage to glass, and damage to glass and glazing materials from effects of moisture including condensation, of 10) temperature changes, of direct exposure to sun, and from other causes. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by glazing material manufacturer or when joint substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation or other causes. 1. Install liquid sealants at ambient and substrate temperatures above 40 deg. F (4.4 deg. C). PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Sizes: Fabricate glass of thicknesses indicated and to sizes required for glazing openings indicated, with edge clearances and tolerances complying with recommendations of glass manufacturer. 2.02 GLASS TYPES (Refer to drawings for locations) A. Type 1: Clear, tempered glass 1/4" thick, ASTM 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Class 1, Quality q3. B. Type 2: Clear polished wire glass, 1/4" thick, ASTM C1036, Type II, Class 1, Quality q3, Form 1, Mesh m2 (square), polished both faces.- ANSI aces;ANSI 297.1. �\t C. Type 3: Clear, float glass, 1/4" thick, ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q3. D. Type 4: Laminated glass, consisting of two (2) panes of 1/8" clear float glass with clear plastic interlayer, 0.060" thick. Nominal 1/4" thick overall. E. Type 5: Insulating Units, consisting of 1/4" clear outboard and inboard lites with 1/2" air space, both lites laminated. F. Type 6: Clear, tempered glass 1/2" thick, ASTM 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Class 1, Quality q3. G. Type 7: Not Used H. Type 8: Insulating Units, consisting of 1/4" clear outboard and inboard lites with 1/2" air space, both lites heat strengthened. 2.03 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. Tinting Window Film: Provide Sunscape Satin 330 (Grey) film on inside surface of all exterior storefront or curtainwall glazing. Manufacturer to be CHB Industries, Smithtown, NY 11787, Tel: (800) 220-2525. Provide literature, samples and product recommendation, to CCSI Representative for approval. 1. Required Performance Data: a. Visible light transmittance: 320 b. U -Value: 1.09 C. Shading Coefficient: .50 d. Ultraviolet Light rejected: 99% GLASS AND GLAZING 08800-2 H1D ADDENDUM 6 041204 04/12/04 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA END OF SECTION GLASS AND GLAZING 08800-3 H1D ADDENDUM 6 041204 04/12/04 e. Total Solar Energy rejected: 56% B. Glazing Sealant:.,Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers for selection of glass sealants which suit project application and installation conditions and which are compatible with surface contacted. C. Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets: ASTM C 864, extruded or molded neoprene, EPDM, or thermoplastic polyolefin rubber. D. Cellular Elastomeric Preformed Gaskets: ASTM C 509, Type II, black; extruded or molded neoprene. E. Cleaners, Primers and Sealers: type recommended by manufacturer of .sealants/gaskets. F. Blocks and Spacers: Neoprene, EPDM or silicone as required for compatibility with glazing sealants; of 80 to 90 Shore A hardness for setting blocks and, for spacers and edge blocks, of hardness recommended by glass and sealant manufacturer for application indicated. PART 3 -.EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION _ A. - General: Comply with referenced FGMA standards and instruction of manufacturers of glass, glazing sealants, and gaskets, to achieve airtight and watertight performance, and to minimize breakage. B. Set units of glass in each series with uniformity of pattern, draw bow and similar characteristics. 3.02 PROTECTION AND CLEANING '0 A. Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation. Inspect glass during installation and discard pieces with edge damage that could affect glass performance. B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations; remove any such substances by method approved by glass manufacturer. C: Wash glass on both faces not more than 4 days prior to date scheduled for inspections intended to establish date of substantial completion. Wash glass by method recommended by glass manufacturer. END OF SECTION GLASS AND GLAZING 08800-3 H1D ADDENDUM 6 041204 04/12/04 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC LA OUINTA, CA SECTION 09100 LATH & PLASTER 1.0 GENERAL: Requirements of Division 0 and 1 apply to work of this Section. 1.1 SCOPE: Furnish materials and perform labor required to complete Lath and Plaster work as indicated on the drawings, as specified and as necessary to complete the Contract, including, but not limited to these major items: A. Plaster reinforcement and lath of all types. B. Lathing accessories including expansion screeds, casing beads, corner beads and all similar items normal to lathing and plastering. C. All plastering work. D. Protection of vent screeds during plastering. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: A. Masonry B. Wood framing. C. Clear waterproofing of unpainted integral colored plaster if required by this Project Manual or the Drawings. D. Insulation in walls. E. All work in connection with gypsum drywall. F. Painting of standard colored stucco finish. 1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: A. Field conditions: Verify drawing dimensions with actual field conditions. Inspect related work and adjacent surfaces. Report to .the Architect all conditions which prevent proper execution of this work. B. Delivery: Deliver all materials in their original containers with seals unbroken and manufacturer's name and product identification clearly legible on each package. C. Storage: Store so as to preclude damage from moisture or from any other source. D. Scaffolding and protection: Provide, install and maintain for the duration of the work all scaffolding, staging, trestles and planking necessary for the work in strict conformity with applicable laws and ordinances, and so as not to interfere with or obstruct the work of others. Provide all forms of protection,as necessary to preserve the work of other trades free from damage. E., Reference specifications: Unless otherwise indicated or LATH & PLASTER SECTION 09100-1 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA OUINTA, CA specified, all materials and workmanship shall conform to the applicable requirements of "Plaster And Drywall Systems Manual" as published by the Information Bureau, Lath, Plaster and Drywall, Los Angeles, California, which is hereby made a part of this specification. 1.4 SUBMITTAL The contractor shall prepare 48" x 48" square field sample of the required Stucco or Cement Plaster Finish at the site for written approval by the Architect. See Section 01340. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: A. Lathing accessories: Longest available lengths; fabricated of zinc -alloy for exterior. 1. Metal lath with waterproof backing: "Stucco -Rite", standard type SFB with double grade "D" paper backing as required by UBC 2506A.4 over all exterior sheathing and single grade "D" paper backing at unsheathed exterior stud walls, as manufactured by the K -Lath Corporation for use on vertical surfaces with Portland Cement Plaster. 2. Bitumen underlayment: "Perm -A -Barrier" as manufactured by Grace Construction Products for use at all horizontal surfaces under lath and plaster. 3. Corner reinforcement (exterior): Fabricate from expanded metal lath with large openings or 18 gage minimum welded or woven wire. 4. Expansion joints: 28 gage, plain, perforated or expanded flange. As per plans or vertically @ 20' o.c. if not specifically designated. Verify with Architect. 5. Special screeds: Preformed to profiles as detailed with perforated flanges (see drawings). 6. Provide stucco stop at all plaster terminations. B. Materials for Plastering: 1. Portland cement: ASTM C150, Type I. Use only one company's brand throughout the work. 2. Hydrated lime: Normal hydrated, conforming to ASTM C6, Type N, made into putty, or special finish hydrated, conforming to ASTM C206, Type S. 3. Aggregates:0 a. Sand aggregates (washed natural sand): Clean, LATH & PLASTER SECTION 09100-2 0 .s CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA OUINTA, CA sharp, and free from clay, loam or other foreign matter. b. Cement plaster: Conform to ASTM C144, graded as follows: Sieve Size % Retained Sieve Size % Retained 4 0 30 30- 65 8 0-10 50 70- 90 16 10-40 100 90-100 For base coats: Not more than 50% retained between any two consecutive sieves nor more than 25% between the No. 50 and No. 100 sieves. Finish coat: 20/30 Grade Sand for fine sand float finish, unless otherwise indicated. Where smooth finish is indicated, use 30/60 Grade Sand. Provide standard float finish with 16/20 Grade Sand only as specifically indicated on drawings. 4. Water: Clean and from a source intended for domestic consumption. 5. Finish color coat: See color schedule on drawings. Provide a manufactured, 'medium textured aggregate, Portland cement and lime product, specifically formulated for spray application in a standard color and texture as indicated on the drawings. Submit samples for the approval of the Architect. Standard color shall be as close as possible to painted color listed on drawings. 6. Bonding agent (when required): Conform to ASTM C631; "Weld -Crete" for Portland cement plaster, or equivalent products of Upco or H. B. Fuller. 2.2 MIXES: A. Portland cement plaster: 1. Scratch coat: 1 part cement, 4 parts sand, 1/10 part lime or lime putty, and water. 2. Brown coat: 1 part cement, 5 parts sand, 1/10 part lime or lime putty, and water. 3. If plastic cement is used, omit the lime or lime putty. 4. Finishing coats: For typical sand finish, use one part Portland cement and 3 parts find sand with sufficient hydrated lime added to make mortar work easily under the trowel, but not in excess of 10% of cement volume. LATH & PLASTER a. Mix integrally colored plaster in accordance with SECTION 09100-3 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA OUINTA, CA manufacturer's directions. 2.3 MEASURING AND MIXING: A. Measure all materials in calibrated boxes; shovel measurements are prohibited. For mechanical mixing, completely discharge the mixer and remove all set or partially hardened material before loading the next batch. Partially set material may not be retempered or used. B. Mix all materials sufficient water application. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 LATHING: in the proportions specified, adding only to attain proper consistency for proper A. Metal lath: Apply to all surfaces to receive plaster, in plane with studs and on all areas so scheduled. Tie lath with 18 gage wire. Use typical metal lath for areas not otherwise indicated. B. Bitumen underlayment: Apply bitumen underlayment to all horizontal surfaces at "plant -ons", exposed parapet wall tops, plastered barrel vaults or any other horizontal surface under lath and plaster. Penetrating roofing nails shall be smooth shank electro -galvanized. Install according to manufacturers recommendations and specifications. C. Reinforce all penetrations with additional metal lath. 3.2. PLASTERING: A. Perform the work in accordance with the best standards of practice related to the trade, and properly coordin-ate the plastering work with the work of other trades. Comply with all applicable requirements of the govern-ing Building Code, including Fire -Resistive Standards. B. Arrange and install plastering work when and as required to conceal or connect with work of others in a finished manner. Ascertain if inspections of concealed work are necessary or have been made before this work is installed. Uncover any work covered before inspections are made when directed by the Architect or other authority having jurisdiction. C. Application of plaster by machine methods is approved providing it can be demonstrated that uniformly satisfactory results can be obtained. D. Rod and straightedge plaster to uniform surfaces in true plane and finish free form laps, cracks, checks or other structural defects, and surface imperfections, and flush with grounds, corner beads, base screed, outlet boxes and similar details. LATH & PLASTER SECTION 09100-4 10, r CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA OUINTA, CA E. Finish at flush trim: Tool to a slight "V" where detailed. Provide scoring where indicated. Plane surface shall not vary more than 1/8" when tried with a 10 ft. straightedge, except where closer tolerances are specified. F. Take special care when working into re-entrant corners to see that the plaster is not allowed to build out beyond the established finished wall plane. Do not lap successive coats over laps in former coats. Avoid joining marks by working top and bottom of area at same time. 3.3 APPLICATION OF PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER: A. Thickness of plaster: Not less than 7/8" thick on Lath and 1/2" thick on Masonry for all exterior plastering. B. Portland cement plaster base coats on metal lath: Apply scratch coat to metal reinforcement with sufficient material and pressure to embed the reinforcement in a full 1/2" of plaster. Before the scratch coat has hardened, rake in a horizontal direction to provide keying for the brown coat. After initial set, keep continuously moist for 48 hours, then allow to dry. Apply brown coat to scratch coat, bring out to grounds 1/8" below finish coat, straighten to a true surface, float and compact, and leave sufficiently rough to assure adequate bond for finish coat. Make no cold joints in brown coat over cold joints in the scratch coat. �`. Leave brown coat surface free of imperfections which might reflect in the finish coat. Moist cure brown coat for 48 hours and allow to set for 7 days before applying finish coat. C. Portland cement finish: Lightly dampen brown coat before applying finish coat. Apply finish coat to an approximate thickness of 1/8" and bring to a finish to match approved sample. D. Plaster on masonry and concrete: Apply bond coat in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Apply and cure Portland cement plaster in two coats to total required thickness. 3.4 INSPECTION, PATCHING AND REPAIR: A. Inspection: Plaster will be rejected if finished surfaces are not of uniform thickness, not plumb or true to plane, are not of uniform texture, or if excessive cracking results. 3.5 PREPARATION FOR PAINTING: A. Prior to the start of painting: Repair damaged portion of plastering. Neatly and accurately patch and repair work to match finish of adjoining work. Where plaster surfaces are marred, discolored, stained or otherwise damaged, carry patching and repairing to the limits as determined and, where necessary, remove the finish coat and replace with new and acceptable work. Cut out broken or damaged portions of plasterand repair with new work. Cut out cracks not less than 1" wide, undercut to form key, and plaster full and smooth. Moisten edges of patch area before new LATH & PLASTER SECTION 09100-5 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA OUINTA, CA plaster is applied. Match plaster patches to adjacent work. B. All integral color stucco color not to be painted shall have final application of fog coat to assure uniformity of color. W, END OF SECTION LATH & PLASTER SECTION 09100-6 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA SECTION 09105 FOAM (EPS) TRIM AND FINISH SYSTEM 1.0 GENERAL: Requirements of Division 0 and 1 apply to work of this Section. 1.1 SCOPE: Provide all labor, materials and equipment necessary to install field -applied foam (EPS) and finish coating. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM: A. Expanded polystyrene foam (EPS) shapes adhered to cement plaster brown coat by a polymer -modified cementitious coating and coated on exposed side with the same material to embed reinforcing mesh and prepare surface for finish Stucco or Plaster. B. Foam/Expanded Polystyrene (EPS) shall be high density cut to shapes as shown on drawings. Material to be produced by approved manufacturers. C. Reinforcing Mesh: A fiberglass mesh used to strengthen the base coat. Material to be produced by approved manufacturers. D. Primer/Adhesive. base coat: Primer/Adhesive formulation containing polymer modified portland cement and aggregate specifically manufactured for use with foam shapes and materials. Material to be produced by approved manufacturers. 2 1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: A. Carpentry and Millwork - 06100 B. Sheet Metal - Section 07600 C. Lath and Plaster - Section 09100 D. Painting - Section 09900. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Qualifications: 1. Installer/Applicator shall have a minimum of five (5) previous foam installations available for examination and five (5) years experience in the Lath and Plaster and/or E.I.F.S. trades. 2. The Installer/Applicator shall verify that the system and substrate is acceptable to the applicable regulatory authorities prior to application. B. Design and Detailing: 1. Acceptable Substrates: Applicator to verify acceptable substrate of plaster brown coat, exterior grade cement/fiberglass sheathing, unit masonry, concrete or brick (plywood not acceptable) for foam shapes. . aC. -Approvals, Listings and Classifications. FOAM (EPS) TRIM AND FINISH SYSTEM 09105-1 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA 1. The foam products shall be as classified by Underwriters Laboratories and carry the UL stamp if required by the governing f agency. 2. The foam products shall conform to ICBO #4059, #4169 and #3414 where required by the governing agency. 3. The finish products shall meet all requirements of the California Air Resources Board and local AQMD. 1.5 SUBMITTALS• A. Submit one 2'-0" long sample of the foam and finish system including description with technical references required below of all materials for each finish to be used on the project. B. Submit complete shop drawings for foam and finish system including erection drawings and details using the same tools and techniques as for the project. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Deliver all materials in original unopened packages or containers with labels intact. B. All materials shall be protected from weather and temperatures not less than 40°F or greater than 110°F before and during or as recommended by manufacturer. 1.7 JOB CONDITIONS: A. Ambient air temperature shall be 40°F or greater and rising at the time of installation of the foam and finish system or as recommended by the finish manufacturer. 1.8 ALTERNATES: A. Systems to be considered equal to those specified herein shall be approved by the Architect, in writing, at least ten working days prior to the project bid date. 1.9 WARRANTY: A. The contractor shall deliver to the Owner and Architect a one year warranty as required by Section 01750 of these specifications covering the material and installation for work of this section. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL: A. All components and products for work of this section shall be supplied by manufacturers and fabricators regularly engaged in production of foam and finish materials for exterior Architectural applications. FOAM (EPS) TRIM AND FINISH SYSTEM 09105-2 6. Approved Fabricators: a. Advanced Foam, Gardena, CA, (310) 515-0617 b. Expo Builders Supply, San Diego, CA, (619) 566-4343 c. Vefo Incorporated, Walnut, CA, (714) 598-3856 d. Western Insulfoam, Chino, CA (714) 591-7425 e. Falcon Foam Corp, Los Angeles, CA (310) 515-7102 f. Equal approved in writing. B. Reinforcing Mesh: 1. Shall be produced by an approved manufacturer. 2. Shall be treated, open weave, glass fiber type. 3. Shall be available in 38" and 48" standard widths. C. Cementitious finish and adhesive: 1. Shall be cementitious mix of copolymers and Portland Cement. 2. The bond strength to various substrates shall meet or exceed the following values when tested according to A.S.T.M. D-897: a. Cement Plaster: 200 psi min. b. Concrete Block: 200 psi min. c. Exterior Cementitious Sheathing: 200 psi min. i 3. Portland Cement: Type VII, A.S.T.M. designated C150-56, Federal Specification SS -C-1920. 4. No additives, except as recommended by manufacturer. 5. Approved Products: a. Omega Dry Bond or Styro-Glue Adhesive as FOAM (EPS) TRIM AND FINISH SYSTEM 09105-3 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA 2.2 MATERIALS• A. Foam or Expanded Polystyrene (EPS) Shapes: 1. Shall conform to minimum requirements of Federal Specification No. C-578 for Type VIII, minimum density of 1.15 PCF. Type II or IX of greater density acceptable. .2. Shall be aged as follows: a. Six weeks at•680F minimum. b. Five days at 140°F minimum. 3. Maximum Flame spread and Smoke Development, when tested in accordance with A.S.T.M. E-84 shall not exceed 25 and 450, respectively. 4. Shall be produced under the RADCO Quality Control, Labeling and Listing Program, unless otherwise approved. 5. Foam (EPS) shapes may be precoated with one coat of Primer/Adhesive with embedded reinforcing mesh and applied per fabricator specification. 6. Approved Fabricators: a. Advanced Foam, Gardena, CA, (310) 515-0617 b. Expo Builders Supply, San Diego, CA, (619) 566-4343 c. Vefo Incorporated, Walnut, CA, (714) 598-3856 d. Western Insulfoam, Chino, CA (714) 591-7425 e. Falcon Foam Corp, Los Angeles, CA (310) 515-7102 f. Equal approved in writing. B. Reinforcing Mesh: 1. Shall be produced by an approved manufacturer. 2. Shall be treated, open weave, glass fiber type. 3. Shall be available in 38" and 48" standard widths. C. Cementitious finish and adhesive: 1. Shall be cementitious mix of copolymers and Portland Cement. 2. The bond strength to various substrates shall meet or exceed the following values when tested according to A.S.T.M. D-897: a. Cement Plaster: 200 psi min. b. Concrete Block: 200 psi min. c. Exterior Cementitious Sheathing: 200 psi min. i 3. Portland Cement: Type VII, A.S.T.M. designated C150-56, Federal Specification SS -C-1920. 4. No additives, except as recommended by manufacturer. 5. Approved Products: a. Omega Dry Bond or Styro-Glue Adhesive as FOAM (EPS) TRIM AND FINISH SYSTEM 09105-3 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA manufactured by Omega Products Corp, Santa Ana, CA (714) 556-3830. b. Expo ProBond Adhesive Primer as manufactured by Expo Builders Supply, San Diego, CA, (619) 566-4343. c. STO Grundex, STO Plex-W, STO BTS -B and or STO Flexyl as manufactured by STO Industries, Glendale, AZ, (602) 931-6458. d. DURALITE-Exterior, as manufactured by Squires -Belt, San Diego, CA, (619) 232-8188. e. THOROWALL Primer Base/Adhesive, as manufactured by Thoro System Products, Newark, CA, (805) 644-4914. f. Equal approved in writing. D. Plaster Finish Coat to match building plaster. See Section 09100, Lath and Plaster. 1. Color coat plaster: See color schedule on drawings. A medium textured aggregate, Portland cement and lime product, specifically manufactured for spray application in a color and texture as indicated on the drawings. Submit samples for the approval of the Architect. Color shall be as close as possible to paint color listed on drawings. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION• A. Examination of Substrate (Brown Coat or as approved): 1. The substrate shall be true and straight with a maximum deviation of 1/4" in 10'-011. 2. The substrate shall be free of foreign materials such as oil, dust, dirt, form -release agents, paint, wax, glaze, water, moisture, frost, etc. 3. The substrate shall be examined for compliance with contract documents. 4. The substrate shall be examined for soundness, such as tightness of connections, crumbling or looseness of surface, voids, and projection, etc. B. The architect and G.C. shall be advised of all discrepancies. Work shall not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 MIXING A. Mixing (if required) 1. Place material in mechanical mixing device and start mixer at lowest speed. Add about two thirds of recommended water. Mix for about 1-2 minutes, until thoroughly wet. 2. With mixer on, add remaining water until the. consistency is acceptable. Mix for three minutes. • FOAM (EPS) TRIM AND FINISH SYSTEM 09105-4 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA ` 3. Stop the mixer and wait five minutes - then mix again and wait five minutes _.then mix again for about one minute to break the 40initial set. 4. The mixed Primer/Adhesive should be sticky and have sufficient body to' take up any minor irregularities in the surface of the substrate and provide physical support for EPS shapes. 3.3 INSTALLATION• A. EPS to Brown_ Coat: 1. Cover both the surfaces of the shape and the brown coat completely where shape will join brown coat. 2. Press shape into position on the brown coat. Generally, the adhesion of the thick Primer/Adhesive will be sufficient to hold the shape in place. On larger shapes use nails to prevent the shape from sliding until adhesive starts to set. Countersink and fill holes with Primer/Adhesive. 3. Primer/Adhesive must be applied to all butt joints before application of minimum 2 -inch embedded fiberglass mesh. B. Reinforcing mesh embedded in primer over exposed EPS: 1. Apply a smooth coat of Primer/Adhesive and reinforcing mesh to all exposed EPS to completely embed mesh and provide base for Plaster or Stucco finish. C. Curing: 1. Wait a minimum of 24 hours before further work on the surface of bonded components in order to avoid any movement which would weaken the bond between the components. D. Temperature: - 1. Installation and materials shall be protected from direct exposure to weather conditions at temperatures less than 40°F or greater than 110°F. 3.4 PLASTER/STUCCO FINISH COAT: A. Exterior Stucco 1. After curing for at least 24 hours, exterior plaster or stucco finish may be applied directly over the primer/adhesive coated EPS Shape. Just before applying finish coat, paint the shapes with bonder (ExpoBond or equivalent) and add 1/4 cup bonder to each sack of stucco when mixing. 3.5 CLEAN UP: A. Material left over by sub -contractor at the jobsite shall be removed. B. The sub -contractor shall clean adjacent materials and surfaces and the work area of foreign materials resulting from the work. END OF SECTION FOAM (EPS) TRIM AND FINISH SYSTEM 09105-5 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA SECTION 09260 GYPSUM DRYWALL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and provisions of the Contract, including General, Supplementary and Special Conditions, applicable Division 0 Sections and Division 1 Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Extent of each type of gypsum drywall construction required is indicated on Drawings. B. This sections includes the following types of gypsum board construction: 1. Steel framing members to support gypboard framing. .2. Steel framing members to receive gypsum board. 3. Gypsum board screw -attached to steel framing and furring members. C. Sound/Attenuation-insulation is specified in this section. D. Safing insulation related to gypsum drywall work is specified in this section. E. Cold Formed Metal Framing is specified in Section 05400. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire -Resistance Ratings: Provide gypsum drywall construction fire - resistance ratings indicated, conforming to assemblies tested per ASTM E 119 by inspecting and testing organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. •Deliver materials in original packages, container or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier. B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic and other causes. Neatly stack gypsum boards flat to prevent sagging. C. Handle gypsum boards to prevent damage to edges, ends, and surfaces. Do not bend or otherwise damage metal corner beads and trim. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions, General: Establish and maintain environmental conditions for application and finishing gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840 and with gypsum board manufacturer's recommendations. B. Minimum Room Temperatures: For nonadhesive attachment of gypsum board to framing, maintain not less than 40 deg F (4 deg C). For adhesive attachment and finishing of gypsum board maintain not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 48 hours prior to application and continuously thereafter until drying is complete. GYPSUM DRYWALL 09260-1 H1D ADDENDUM 4 122303 12/23/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC._ LA OUINTA. CA C. Ventilate building spaces to remove water not required for drying joint treatment materials. Avoid drafts during dry, hot weather to prevent materials from drying too rapidly. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: 1. Steel Framina and Furrin a. The Steel Network 2. Bostwick Steel Framing Co. C. Dale Industries, Inc. d. Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co. e. Incor, Inc. f. Marino Industries Corp. g. United States Gypsum Co. 2. Gypsum Boards and Related Products: a. Centex American Gypsum Co. b. Domtar Gypsum Co. C. Georgia-Pacific Corp. d. Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co. e. United States Gypsum Co. 2.02 STEEL FRAMING COMPONENTS FOR DRYWALL CEILINGS, SOFFITS AND BULKHEADS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 754 where applicable to Components indicated. B. Channels: Cold -rolled steel, 0.0598 inch minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and 7/16 inch wide flanges, protected with rust - inhibitive paint, and as follows: 1. Carrying Channels: 1-1/2 inch deep, 475 lbs per 1000 ft., unless otherwise indicated. C. Steel Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, hat -shaped, depth of 7/8 inch, and minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal of 0.0329 inch, unless otherwise indicated on drawings, galvanized. D. Steel Stud Framing For Ceilings, Soffits and Bulkheads: ASTM C 645, with flange edges bent back 90 deg and doubled over to form 3/16 inch minimum lip (return), 0.0329 inch minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal unless otherwise indicated on drawings. 1. Depth: As indicated on drawings. 2. Finish: Galvanized. E. Wire for Hangers and Ties: ASTM A 641, soft, Class 1 zinc coating. 1. Wire Size: 0.1620 inch diameter (8 gage), unless otherwise indicated on drawings. 2.03 STEEL FRAMING FOR WALLS AND PARTITIONS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 754 and the following: 1. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645, hot dipped galvanize, see drawings for specific gauge. 2. Depth: As indicated on drawings. GYPSUM DRYWALL 09260-2 H1D ADDENDUM 4 122303 12/23/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA B. Steel Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 20 gauge, 7/8 inch <`< 1 1/2 inch depth, hot dipped galvanized. "^- 3. Vertical Deflection Connection: Provide VertiTrackTm deflection - Accommodating device, by the STEEL Network, Inc., Tel: (888) 474- 4876. Products shall conform to the following properties and ' performance criteria: 1. Code Criteria 1. Meet required head of wall connection criteria as required by applicable code for cyclic wall movement. .2. Material Composition: Meeting ASTM A653/A, SS Grade 50, class 1, 50ksi minimum yield strength, 65ksi minimum tensile strength, G-60 hot -dipped galvanized coating. 3. Material Thickness: 0.036 inch for VertiTrack VTD series (interior walls), 0.068 inches for VertiTrack VTX series (exterior walls). 4. Clips.shall be designed for positive attachment to structure and stud web using step bushing technology to provide frictionless vertical movement. 5. Provide clips with attached bushings and screws of the series, size,.and configuration as recommended by the manufacturer. 2.04 GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Provide gypsum board of thickness indicated on drawings and of types indicated in maximum lengths available to minimize end joints. f� B. Exposed Gypsum Board: ASTM C 36, thickness as indicated. 1. Type: Regular. 2. Type: Type X for fire -resistance -rated assemblies. 3. Edges: Tapered. C. Gypsum Backing Board for Multi -Layer Applications: ASTM C. 442 or A 36, thickness as indicated on drawings. 1. Type: Type X for fire -resistance -rated assemblies. D. Water -Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 630, thickness as indicated. 1. Type: Regular, (for toilet areas) 2. Type: Type X for fire -resistance -rated assemblies. 2.05 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: ASTM C 840: mfr's standard trim accessories, including cornerbead and edge trim of beaded type with face flanges for concealment.in joint compound except where semi -finishing or exposed types is indicated. B. Material: 1. Interior Application: Formed sheet steel zinc coated. C. Provide one-piece control joints with 1/4 inch wide by 7/16 inch deep vee -shaped slot, covered with removable tape, of roll -formed zinc as recommended by gypsum board mfr. GYPSUM DRYWALL 09260-3 H1D ADDENDUM 4 122303 12/23/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA 2.06 GYPSUM BOARD JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: ASTM C 475 and ASTM C 840 and manufacturer's recommendations of gypsum board and joint treatment materials for application indicated. B. Joint Tape: Paper reinforcing tape, unless otherwise indicated. C. Drying -Type Joint Compounds: Factory -prepackaged vinyl -based products complying with the following requirements: 1. Ready -Mix Formulation: Factory -premixed. 2.07 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Laminating Adhesives: Product recommended by gypsum board mfr. B. Gypsum Board Screws: ASTM C 1002. C. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I, unfaced mineral fiber blanket insulation: 3" thick, and Thermafiber Sound Attentuation Fire Blankets (SAFB) by Thermafiber LLC. U.S. Gypsum Company is Sales Agent. Walls and ceiling with a 61 STC rating. D. Semi -Refractory Fiber Board Safing Insulation: Semi-rigid boards designed for use as a fire stop at openings between drywall framing and other construction, produced combining semi -refractory mineral fiber manufactured from slag with thermosetting resin binder to comply with ASTM C 612, Class 1 and 2; nominal density of 4.0 lbs. per cu. ft.; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics; r - value of 4.0 at 75 deg. F (23.9 deg. C). E. Access Panels: Milcor Type M, size and location indicated on the drawings. Provide key -operated cylinder lock for all access panels located in ceilings (see drawings for locations). F. Security Mesh: "Ryex" expanded metal (flattened) by Joseph T. Ryerson & Son, Inc.(773) 762-2121. 1. Type: 3/4" no. 16-18 2. Weight: Plain, .51 lbs/s.f. 3. Sheet Size: 36" or 48" wide x longest lengths practical for intended use. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with ASTM C754 and ASTM C840. B. Do not bridge building expansion joints with support systems, frame both sides of joints with furring and other supports as indicated. C. Secure hangers to structural support by connecting directly to structure where possible, otherwise connect to inserts, clips, other anchorage devices or fasteners. D. Provide indirect -hung metal support system with carrying channels (main runners) spaced 4'-0" o.c., hangers 4'-0" o.c. along runners and rigid furring members 16 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. E. Install steel studs with bottom and top runner tracks anchored to substrates. Isolate system from building structure to prevent transfer of loading and deflections into metal support system, both vertically and horizontally. GYPSUM DRYWALL 09260-4 H1D ADDENDUM 4 122303 12/23/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA F. Frame door and other openings with studs and runners and gage, Screw gypsum board to metal supports. number and arrangement to comply with mfr's recommendations for size of opening, weight of doors and height and stud size, unless otherwise indicated. G. Erect thermal insulation to comply with mfr's directions. H. Install supplementary framing, runners, furring, blocking and bracing at openings and terminations in gypsum drywall and where indicated between boards, and trim both edges for installation of required for support of other work which cannot be adequately supported on gypsum board alone. I. Install and finish gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840 and as follows: N. 1. Isolate drywall construction from abutting structural and masonry work; provide edge trim and acoustical sealant as between gypsum boards. Apply compounds indicated below at accessory recommended by mfg. J. Install sound attenuation blankets where indicated, without gaps; and support where necessary to prevent movement or dislocation. K. Install water-resistant backing board where indicated to receive thin -set tile and similar rigid applied finishes at toilet room walls and similar "wet" areas. GYPSUM DRYWALL 09260-5 H1D ADDENDUM 4 122303 12/23/03 L. Screw gypsum board to metal supports. 1. Screw both layers to supports where double -layer work is indicated or otherwise required. M. Do not bridge building expansion joints. Leave space of the width indicated between boards, and trim both edges for installation of sealant or gasket. N. Drywall Finishing: Apply joint tape and joint compound at joints between gypsum boards. Apply compounds indicated below at accessory flanges, penetrations, fastener heads and surface defects. 1. Install. compound in 3 coats (plus prefill of cracks where ' -recommended by manufacturer); sand between coats and after last coat. 2. Treat water-resistant gypsum board joints, fastener heads, cut - edges and penetrations in water-resistant backing board to comply with gypsum board manufacturer's directions. 0. Security Mesh: 1. Install specified security mesh in accordance with manufactures' recommendation. Screw attached to new or existing framing at 24" o.c. maximum. 2. Sheets shall be butted together with ends and edges of sheets occurring over supports. 3. Make cutouts for grilles, receptacles, etc. where required. END OF SECTION f GYPSUM DRYWALL 09260-5 H1D ADDENDUM 4 122303 12/23/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA SECTION 09510 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and Provisions of the Contract, including General, Supplementary and Special Conditions, applicable Division 0 Sections and Division 1 Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Extent of acoustical ceilings is indicated on drawings and schedules and includes the following types: 1. Lay -in mineral compcsition panels, exposed "T" grid. B. Refer to Division 15 Sections of grilles, registers, and diffusers in acoustical ceilings. C. Refer to Division 16 Sections for lighting fixtures in acoustical ceilings. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experience Installer who has successfully completed acoustical ceilings similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for Project. B. Fire -Performance Characteristics: Provide acoustical ceilings that are identical to those tested for the following fire -performance characteristics, per ASTM test method indicated below, by UL or other testing and inspecting organizations acceptable to authorities f having jurisdiction. Identify acoustical ceiling components with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization. 1. Surface Burning Characteristics: As follows, tested per ASTM E 84 and complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class A products. a. Flame Spread: 25 or less. b. Smoke Developed: 50 or less. C. Single -Source Responsibility for Ceiling Units: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling unit from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work. 1. Obtain suspension system from same manufacturer that produces acoustical ceiling units. D. Coordination of Work: Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical ceiling units and suspension system components with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire -suppression system components (if any), and partition system (if any). 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver acoustical ceiling units to project site in original, unopened packages and 'store them in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. B. Before installing acoustical ceiling units, permit them to reach ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510-1 H1C 062402 ADDENDUM 3 ITEM NO. 13 12/16/02 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA room temperature and a stabilized moisture content. C. Handle acoustical ceiling units carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS 6), A. Space Enclosure: Do not install interior acoustical ceilings until space is enclosed and weatherproof, wet -work in space is completed and nominally dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient conditions of temperature and humidity will be continuously maintained at values near those indicated for final occupancy. 1.06 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with appropriate labels. 1. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Furnish 2 full boxes of each type. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PROCEDURES A. The successful subcontractor must;, 1. Bid the project using the following specified items (no equals will be considered). 2. Contact Phyllis Miller at the Armstrong Customer Service Center, at (800) 442-4212. 3. Indicate material is for Circuit City and the store number when ordering material. 9 ) 4. Pay for material in accordance with the Distributor's normal terms. 2.02 MINERAL -BASED ACOUSTICAL PANELS AND SUSPENSION SYSTEM . A. Mineral Base Acoustical Panels: Provide mineral -based acoustical lay -in ceiling panels with manufacturer's washable painted finish of types, patterns, sizes, color and edge detail indicated on drawings. Comply with ASTM E-1264. B. Panel Suspension System: Provide manufacturer's standard 15/16 -inch wide, double web suspension system consisting of main runners and cross tees and as follows: 1. Standards: Comply with ASTM C-635 as applicable. 2. Structural Classification: Intermediate Duty. 3. Finish: Corrosion resistant coating for field painted grid. a. Finish: Standard white finish on grid for mineral base acoustical panels. 4. Wire for Hangers and Ties: ASTM A-641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. a. Gage: Provide wire sized so that stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM C-635), Table 1, Direct Hung), will be less than yield stress of wire, but not less than 0.106 inch diameter (12 gage). ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510-2 H1C 062402 ADDENDUM 3 ITEM NO. 13 12/16/02 END OF SECTION ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510-3 H1C 062402 ADDENDUM 3 ITEM NO. 13 12/16/02 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. a LA QUINTA, CA PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: All acoustical materials and suspension systems shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions and current recommendations, and in compliance with ASTM C636 and the governing code of jurisdiction. B. Deflection of any grid components shall not exceed 1/360 of the span, of 1/8" in 12'-011. C. Suspend main beams from overhead construction with 12 gauge hanger .wires spaced 4'-0" on center along the length of the main runner. Hanger wires shall be plumb and straight. D. Install wall molding at intersection of suspended ceiling and all vertical surfaces. Miter corners where wall moldings intersect of install corner caps. E. For tegular of reveal edge panels: Cut and reveal or rabbet edges of ceiling tiles at all border areas and vertical surfaces. 3.02 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Clean acoustical ceiling, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension members pursuant to manufacturer's recommendations. Remove and replace damaged components which cannot be successfully restored. .. END OF SECTION ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510-3 H1C 062402 ADDENDUM 3 ITEM NO. 13 12/16/02 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA SECTION 09650 RESILIENT FLOORING , PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A.. Drawings and Provisions of the Contract, including General, Supplementary and Special Conditions, applicable Division "0" Sections and Division 1 Sections, apply to this Section. B. The Owner will employ and pay for the services of an independent testing agency to provide calcium chloride moisture tests on the concrete floor slabs of.the designated areas to receive the resilient flooring. Moisture test must be performed, and results confirmed in writing with copies sent to the Owner, Project Manager, General Contractor, and to Tile Installer, immediately after they are performed. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Extent of resilient flooring and accessories is shown on drawings and in schedules and includes the following types: 1.. Vinyl composite tile. 2. Vinyl base and accessories. 3. Rubber flooring. 1.03 SPECIAL CONDITIONS A. VCT Flooring, rubber flooring and associated adhesives are to be purchased by the contractor (not the subcontractor) for a pre-set ( price from the listed contact. Freight will be paid for by Circuit City in a "third party billing" arrangement. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's installation and maintenance instructions for each type of resilient flooring. B. Samples for Verification Purposes: Submit the following samples of each type, color, and pattern of resilient flooring required, showing full -range of color and pattern variations. 1. Full size tile samples. 2. 2-1/2 inch long samples of vinyl base and edge strips. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. The Installer shall notify the General Contractor at least 48 hours prior to floor tile installation to maintain minimum temperature between 65 deg. F. and 80 deg F. in spaces to receive resilient flooring for at least 24 hours prior to installation, during installation, and for not less than 48 hours after installation unless otherwise specified. Resilient flooring materials shall be stored in spaces intended for tile installation and protected from freezing, direct sun and moisture for at least 24 hours before beginning installation. Subsequently, the General Contractor shall be informed to maintain a minimum temperature of 65 deg. F in areas where resilient tile work has been completed. B. Install resilient flooring and accessories after other building finishing operations, including paint-ing, have been completed. Do RESILIENT FLOORING 09650-1 ADDENDUM 5 030104 03/01/04 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA CA not install resilient flooring over concrete slabs until the slabs have been cured and have been treated with the specified moisture preparation materials. Moisture test must be performed in all cases before resilient tile installation and results confirmed in writing. C. General Contractor shall be notified to provide broom clean surfaces for resilient materials installation. After addressing the questions of job site conditions and moisture testing, the floor can be prepared for the installation of a new vinyl floor. Remove any sealers, curing compounds, dirt, grease, paint, or old adhesives which have been applied to the surface of the concrete. These can hinder the adhesive bond. DO NOT INSTALL NEW FLOORING OVER CONCRETE SEALERS OR CURING COMPOUNDS. The use of solvents or chemical adhesive removers is not allowed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 RESILIENT FLOORING COLORS AND PATTERNS A. Provide resilient flooring, colors and patterns as indicated on drawings and schedules. 2.02 TILE FLOORING A. Vinyl Composition Tile: Mannington Commercial, Style: Designer Essentials 12" x 12" x 1/8" thick meeting ASTM F 1066, Class 2 - through pattern. Color and type to be as indicated on the drawings. 1. Contact: Mannington Commercial Tel: (800) 241-2262, Ext. 6581 Fax: (706) 625-6210 Contact: Eteva Baldwin .d 2. Substitutions will not be allowed. B. Rubber Flooring: Mats, Inc. Recycled Rubber Flooring in the styles and colors as indicated on the drawings. Rolled products shall be 4' wide. The rolled rubber surface will have an overall thickness of 4 mils. 1. Contact: Mats, Inc., Tel: (800) 628-7462, ext. 241; Fax: (781) 344-1537. Contact: Donna McCleod, C. Vinyl Wall Base: FS SS -W-40, Type II; 4" high; 0.080" gauge; with matching stops and preformed corner units; standard top -set cove; unless otherwise indicated. 1. Vinyl Wall Base Manufacturer: Roppe Rubber Corporation. 2. Substitutions will not be allowed. D. Resilient Edge Strips: Not less than 1" wide; 1/8" gauge; tapered bullnose edge, color to match flooring. E. Transitions Strips: For VCT to concrete Johnsonite #SSR -40-B. F. Adhesive: 1. Vinyl Composition Tile Adhesive: Mannington V-11 Premium i RESILIENT FLOORING 09650-2 ADDENDUM 5 030104 03/01/04 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA Latex Adhesive,.Clear. 2. Rubber Flooring Adhesive: Mats, Inc. Decathalon Rubber Adhesive, CX -941 Urethane Bond Adhesive. 2.03 FLOOR LEVELER/UNDERLAYMENT A. Floor Patching Underlayment (Cementitious Type): Use Plani/Patch Plus Primer, then Ultra/Plan or Ultra/Plan MB by Mapei, or P-51 Primer, then K-15 or SD -L by Ardex, for filling and repair of holes, cracks, depressions, sawcuts, etc. B. Skim Coat and Patching Compound: Use Plani/Patch, or CP2/LL2 by Mapei or SD -F Feather Finish or SD -P Instantpatch by Ardex. "2.04 MOISTURE CORRECTION SYSTEM: To be used only if necessitated by the results of the moisture test, and as directed by CCSI Project Manager. A. Provide one of the following products: .1. Millennium Para -Seal 2007 as manufactured by Para -Chem, Tel: (800) 763-7272. 2. Resin Membrane as manufactured by Floor Seal Technology, Inc., Tel: (800) 295-0221. B. Product to be applied by a manufacturer's approved installation contractor. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION - EXISTING CONSTRUCTION A. Any existing substrates from which previous floor covering was removed •must be prepared to remove all previous adhesives and patching compound to ensure that subfloor is clean, well prepared and,porous. 1. Conduct calcium chloride moisture tests on concrete slabs to determine if a Damp Proof Membrane is required (results of greater than 5 lb. Per 1000 sq. ft. per 24 hours indicate the necessity for membrane). 2. The areas to receive the specified moisture correction system must be at least 66 degrees Fahrenheit and no more than 80 degrees Fahrenheit for 48 hours before commencing installation. Installer shall verify that General Contractor has complied with temperature requirements of stores and in place materials. 3. It is imperative that all floor preparation cure times are strictly followed. 4. The general contractor will be responsible to see that the floor is broom clean and free of all paint, dry wall compound, and dirt. 5. The general contractor will mark the areas to receive the moisture correction system with a chalk line. The membrane is applied approximately. 6" beyond the edge of the resilient floor. 6. Application in strict accordance with manufacturer's installation instruction, and allowed to cure as described in RESILIENT FLOORING 09650-3 ADDENDUM 5 030104 03/01/04 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA the installation procedure. 7. The resilient flooring contractor shall inspect the floor before laying out the tiles. Any hollows, wrinkles or areas that were scratched or damaged by other trades must be corrected to the satisfaction of the resilient flooring contractor. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Preinstallation Inspection: The resilient flooring installer, the Contractor and the Owner shall examine the flooring substrate and all other conditions under which'resilient flooring installation is to be performed. Resilient flooring work shall not proceed until all conditions meet manufacturer's specifications and are acceptable to the Owner. Particular attention shall be paid to the moisture content of the concrete slab (maximum 3 lbs. of water/1000 sq. ft. of slab in a 24-hour period when tested by Owner's independent laboratory, and shown to be in accord with the ASTM F1869-98 calcium chloride test) and to the use of the specified type of adhesive recommended by the Manufacturer for proper adhesion of the resilient flooring. B. Surface Preparation: On existing construction, after removal of previous flooring adhesives, compounds, and dirt, the resilient flooring contractor shall be responsible for the necessary preparation for installation. If necessary, preparation shall include final cleaning, patching, and leveling. C. Installation: Install in strict accordance with flooring manufacturer's recommendations for type(s) of materials, project conditions, and intended use. D. Clean Floors and apply patching compound if required. E. Apply adhesive recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. F. Lay tile flooring from center marks established with principal walls; adjust as required to avoid use of cut units less than 2 tile wide at perimeters. Match tiles for color and pattern by using manufactured and packaged sequence. Do not bridge floor expansion joints, stop at both sides of expansion joint covers. G. Apply wall base in lengths as long as practicable to walls, columns, and all permanent fixtures where indicated. Mitered outside corners not acceptable. 1. On masonry or other irregular surfaces, fill voids behind base and along top edge with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler. H. Install resilient edge strips at edges of resilient flooring which would otherwise be exposed. I. Installer to Clean floors and accessories after installation in accordance with flooring manufacturer's instructions. Do not apply polish on "no -wax" flooring and tile indicated for "no -wax maintenance". J. POST INSTALLATION - Install the appropriate protection upon ' RESILIENT FLOORING 09650-4 ADDENDUM 5 030104 03/01/04 11 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC.' .. _ LA QUINTA, CA completion. Allow newly installed resilient flooring to set, free of traffic, for a minimum of 24 hours. Periodically clean the flooring as instructed. Sweep the floor regularly to keep grit off. Clean up any spillage immediately. K. Apply three (3) coats of wax to vinyl composition tile after completion of installation. END OF SECTION RESILIENT FLOORING 09650-5 ADDENDUM 5 030104 03/01/04 ,CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA SECTION 09680 CARPETING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and Provisions of the Contract, including General, Supplementary and Special Conditions, applicable Division 0 Sections and Division 1 Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Extent of carpeting is indicated on drawings and schedules and includes the following: 1. Floor carpeting - modular carpet. 1.03 SPECIAL CONDITIONS A. Carpet and adhesive are to be purchased by the contractor (not the subcontractor) for a pre-set price from Mannington. Freight will be paid for by Circuit City in a "third party billing" arrangement. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's installation and maintenance with fire performance characteristics specified. 1.94 05 •QUALITY ASSURANCE' A. Installers Qualifications: Installer(s) must have a minimum of five (5) years experience on jobs of this scope and installing loop -pile graphic carpet. Installation shall be accomplished by a floor covering installation board (FCIB) certified installation firm or an installer who can demonstrate compliance with FCIB certification program requirements. Call (248) 592-3242 for verification or certification. Installation procedures shall comply with Mannington's "Professional Carpet Installation Guide" (copy supplied with every order). Where FCIB instructions/procedures conflict with Mannington's "Professional Carpet Installation Guide", the latter publication shall supersede. B. Carpet Surface Burning Characteristics: Provide carpet identical to that tested for the following fire performance characteristics, per test method indicated below, by UL or other testing and inspecting a authorities having jurisdiction. Identify carpet with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization. 1. Carpet Used As Floor Covering: a. Methenamine Pill Test (ASTM -D-2859): Passes. b. Flooring Radian Panel Test (ASTM -E-648: Class 1 (Direct Glue). C. N.B.S. Smoke Chamber Test (ASTM -E-662): Less than 450 (Flaming Mode) C. The moisture and alkalinity in concrete sub -floors must be tested on glue down type installations. The dealer, builder or the contractor for the installation of the carpet, must test the concrete slab to insure that the levels of both moisture and alkalinity are acceptable. The alkalinity test should have a PH reading of between 5-9. Any reading higher requires that the slab be treated to remove the excess alkalinity. To treat the slab for excess alkalinity, wash floor with one ounce of vinegar to one gallon of water. Rinse +� twice with cold water, wait 24 hours;,;,,,,.„and retest. CARPETING 09680-1 H1D ADDENDUM 5 030104 03/01/04 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA D. Moisture should be tested by using a calcium chloride test kit. The slab must be at least 55 degrees F. Any temperature cooler can cause inaccurate test results. As a rule of thumb, a reading of 3 lbs. or less per 1000 square feet per 24 hour period is acceptable for most carpet with a backing of porous construction and can be installed successfully. A slab is not acceptable if a,reading or higher than 3 lbs. is obtained. It should be noted that the test for emission rate takes 72 hours. E. The installation of the carpet requires preplanning in order to accomplish the required tests as well as the proper conditioning of the carpet prior to its installation. Ideally, the carpet should be installed when its temperature is between 65 and 95 degrees F and the slab temperature is not less than 65 degrees F. The carpet should be unrolled and allowed to relax and ventilate itself for at least 23 hours prior to being installed. A written copy of the pH and moisture test results should be on file with the end user and/or mill. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Products: Carpet type, style, pattern, color and supplier are indicated below and on drawings and schedules. No substitutions allowed. 1. Mannington Commercial Modular Carpet Tile - Style: C1R5M; Color: AM25; Construction: Patterned Loop; Face Fiber: Dupont 6.6 Nylon; Dye Method: 100% Solution; Gauge: 1-1/2"; Average Yarn Weight: 18 oz.; Tufted Pile Thickness: .156 average; Total Thickness: .281; Total Weight: 142 oz./sq. yd.; Type Static Control: Fiber Inherent; Primary Backing: _. 100% Woven Synthetic; Secondary Precoat: 100% Vinyl Non - Aqueous Close Cell Polymer; Secondary Backing: Infinity Modular Reinforced Vinyl; Composite Closed Cell Size: 24" by 24". 2. Modular Carpet Adhesive - Mannington MT -711 Pressure Sensitive water based adhesive. 3. Contact: Mannington Commercial P. 0. Box 12281 Calhoun, GA 30703 Tel: (800) 241-2262, Ext. 6581 Fax: (706) 625-6210 Contact: Eteva Baldwin B. Miscellaneous Materials: 1. Transition Strips and Edge Strips: Vinyl. a. Carpet to tile B Johnsonite CTA -40-K b. Carpet to concrete B Johnsonite CTA -40-K (trimmed) 2. Provide tapes, thread, nails, staples and similar products as recommended by carpet supplier and Installer. 3. Cleaning Agent: Per Mannington publication "Recommended Guidelines for Carpet Maintenance" (copy provided with each order). PART 3 - EXECUTION CARPETING 09680-2 H1D ADDENDUM 5 030104 03/01/04 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA 3.01 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Contractor shall be responsible for preparing the surfaces scheduled to receive carpet. Preparation shall include cleaning and patching and shall be in accordance with carpet manufacturer's recommendations. B. New Concrete: Floors must be clean, cured, and dry. Sanded dry -wall compounds should be swept and then wet mopped to remove dust. Curing compounds can also cause a bonding problem on new concrete. Tests for high alkalinity should be made by wetting floor and using pH test paper. If pH range is over 9, wash floors with one ounce of vinegar to one gallon of water. Rinse twice with cold water, wait 24 hours, and retest. C. Old Concrete: Floors must be clean, dry, and free of any contaminants such as oils, paints, etc. Old adhesives must be compatible with new adhesives or removed. Cracks should be filled with Portland Cement Based latex patching compound. Large patched areas should be sealed. D. General - New and old concrete floors should be checked for porosity before adhesive is spread. Latex adhesive contains water, which will be absorbed rapidly by a porous floor. Adhesive will set up too quickly, and there will be insufficient time to spread adhesive and lay carpet into it before it starts to dry. To test, pour a little water on the floor. If water is absorbed quickly by concrete, the floor is too porous! This condition can be helped by damp mopping floor with a solution of one -tablespoon ammonia to one gallon of -water. If water forms beads on the surface, it is acceptable and the adhesive can be applied. E. Existing Floors: Sheet vinyl and linoleum floors should be removed. Direct gluing of carpet to these types of floors is not recommended. t Vinyl Composition tiles should be checked for looseness and test conducted for adhesive compatibility. Remove tiles and adhesive if there are any doubts. New wood floors are usually porous and should be sealed with a primer to improve bonding surface. Non -porous floors such as terrazzo, ceramic, marble, and slate will require adjustments to adhesive open time. 1. WARNING: In preparing any subfloor surface for installation of carpet, if the surface contains existing floor tile or resilient floor covering, you must exercise caution. Do not remove existing resilient floor covering, backing, or lining felt by sanding or dry scraping because they may contain asbestos fibers. Inhalation of asbestos dust may cause asbestosis or other serious bodily harm. Smoking greatly increases the risk of serious bodily harm. 2. Removal of existing floor covering is recommended only as a final alternative. If it is necessary to remove the floor covering, consult the manufacturer for specific recommendations, or follow the procedures outlined in the "Recommended Work Procedures for Resilient Floor Coverings" brochure available through the Resilient Floor Covering Institute. 3. Asbestos Containing Resilient Floor Coverings must be removed (or covered with an approved underlayment) by a qualified technician that is specifically trained in asbestos removal. Government regulations may apply to asbestos removal. Do not attempt to remove these types of floor coverings yourself. Mannington does not recommend the installation of permanently adhered floor coverings directly over existing flooring known to contain. asbestos such as Vinyl Asbestos Tiles. If specifications require that new flooring materials be installed permanently in those areas, the existing material CARPETING 09680-3 H1D ADDENDUM 5 030104 03/01/04 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA must be removed in accordance to the procedures outlined in the "Recommended Work Procedures for Resilient Floor Coverings" brochure available through the Resilient Floor Covering Institute at 301-340-8580. 4. Mannington Commercial's modular carpet may be installed directly over existing asbestos containing floor coverings without the expensive cost of removal and/or abatement. The installation of the carpet tile must be releasable so that disruption of the asbestos material does not occur when the new material has reached the end of its life cycle. The carpet tile may be installed with Mannington's MT -711 Pressure Sensitive releaseable and rebondable adhesive only. Note that if the decision is made to install carpet over asbestos containing floor coverings, the flooring contractor assumes all responsibility as to the suitability of the installation and its removal as well as the responsibility for all consequences or possible exposure to asbestos fibers. If you have questions or require further assistance, please contact the Technical Services Department at (800) 241-2262, Ext. 3. 5. Removal of cut-back adhesives: Mannington does not recommend the installation of our products directly over pre-existing "cut-back" adhesives without carefully removing and/or coating the floor with an appropriate trowelable underlayment. Cutback adhesives, derived from solvent -based asphalts, can cause new adhesive to fail and/or carpet backings to break down. Since some cutback adhesives contain asbestos, it must be assumed that pre-existing cutback adhesive does contain asbestos until analysis affirmatively indicates otherwise. The removal of asbestos -containing materials requires special training techniques. Therefore, removal must not be attempted by persons without the specific skills required to safely remove asbestos containing materials. For more information regarding the removal of cut back adhesives, contact the Resilient Floor Covering Institute at 301-340-8580. 6. Encapsulating existing cutback adhesive: Shaw recognizes two methods for encapsulating cutback adhesive. a. The first method requires trowelling latex based Portland Cement directly over the cutback adhesive. Approximate thickness of the applied cement should be 1/8". Make sure that all ridges are completely encapsulated. b. The alternate method of encapsulating cutback adhesive is by applying two coats of MD -10 Barrier Coat or Aim's G-100 Barrier Coat with a heavy nap paint roller. To purchase MD -10 Contact Mac klandburg-Duncan 1-800-851- 1813. To purchase G-100, contact AIM at 1-800-543-7616. Prior to installing new carpet over encapsulated cutback make sure the sealer has cured. Normally, new adhesive may be troweled over underlayment or MD -10 or G-100 24 hours after application. Pressure sensitive adhesive normally may be applied with a paint roller approximately 2 hours after the sealer is applied. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: Install carpeting in strict accordance with carpet supplier's instructions. B. Pre -installation Inspection: Installer of carpeting, the Contractor, and Owner's Representative shall examine the substrate to which carpet is to be applied. Carpeting work shall not proceed • until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer, Contractor and Owner's Representative. Particular attention shall be paid to the moisture content of the CARPETING 09680-4 H1D ADDENDUM 5 030104 03/01/04 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA concrete floor slab and to type of carpet adhesive for proper adhesion of carpeting. C. Special Instructions for Mannington Commercial Modular Carpeting 1. SITE AND MODULAR MATERIAL CONDITIONING: Floor temperatures must be a minimum of 65 degrees F for 48 hours prior to installation. Floor temperature can usually vary 5-10 degrees F lower than room temperature. Modules must be conditioned to room temperature for 24 hours prior to installation. These conditions must also be maintained for 48 hours after completion of installation. 2. SURFACE PREPARATION: Dust, dirt debris, and non -compatible adhesive must be removed before installation begins. Surfaces must be smooth and level with all holes and cracks filled with a latex based Portland cement patching compound. 3. MOISTURE TESTING: Subfloor surfaces must be tested for moisture content. It is the responsibility of the general contractor and/or installer to perform moisture test before starting the installation. Modules will not resolve moisture problems. a. A calcium chloride test must be performed on the concrete to detect the presence of moisture. Acceptable results require that moisture content does not exceed 3 lbs. per 1,000 square feet per 24 hours. One calcium chloride test should be performed for every 1,000 square feet of space to be carpeted. b. Alkalinity tests must also be performed. pH should register between 5 and 9. If pH exceeds 9, wash floor as described in Paragraph 3.01-B. Rinse twice and re- test after 24 hours. C. Note that calcium chloride and alkalinity tests state only the condition of the floor at the time of the test. Test results are not indicative, nor do they predict how environmental conditions may impact moisture or alkalinity in the future. 4'. NEW CONCRETE: New concrete must be fully cured and free of moisture. New concrete requires a curing period of approximately 90 days. 5. OLD CONCRETE: Old concrete should be checked for moisture. Dry, dusty, porous floors must be sealed. Sealers will not correct a moisture problem. Old adhesive must be compatible with new adhesive or removed. Solvent based or cut back adhesives must be completely removed. (See Removal of Cut Back Adhesive). 6. WOOD: Wood floors must be smooth and level. If floor is uneven, an approved underlayment may be required. Old finishes must be tested for compatibility with adhesives or removed and porous wood sealed. 7. TERRAZZO/MARBLE:. Level all grout lines with a latex based Portland cement patching compound. Glossy surfaces must be sanded for adhesive bond. 8. HARD SURFACES: Tiles must be well secured to the floor or removed. Broken, damaged, or loose tiles must be replaced. Waxmust be removed from VCT before applying adhesive. Existing sheet vinyl is not a suitable substrate for modular ,installation and should be removed. CARPETING 09680-5 H1D ADDENDUM 5 030104 03/01/04 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA 9. OLD CARPET: Remove old carpet and check adhesive for compatibility. Old adhesive must be compatible with new adhesive. If unsure, remove or cover adhesive with a Portland based patching compound or encapsulate with TopCoat #7055 (800) 213-3614. 0 10. REMOVAL OF CUT BACK ADHESIVE: Cut back adhesive is not compatible with Mannington's vinyl backings. Cut back adhesives must be wet scrapped and covered with TopCoat #7055 adhesive sealer (800) 213-3614. Note: Failure to remove or seal old cut back adhesive may cause installation failure, plasticizer migration, shifting, buckling or edge curling; these conditions will not be covered under warranty. 11. LATEX ADHESIVE REMOVAL: Latex adhesives must be removed and floors sanded or covered with 'a skim coat of Portland patching compound. Latex wet scrapped and covered with TopCoat #7055 adhesive sealer (800) 213-3614. Note: Failure to remove or seal latex adhesive may causinstallation failure, plasticizer migration, shifting, buckling or edge curling; these conditions will not be covered under warranty. 12. MEASUREMENTS: Measure area to be carpeted to determine best starting positions. Chalk two lines that intersect these positions at right angles. Proper planning should avoid trimming perimeter tiles more than 2 their width. 13. FULL ADHESIVE METHOD: Fully spread Mannington's MT -711 pressure sensitive adhesive in starting quadrant using a 1/32 x 1/16 x 16 "U" or "V" notch trowel or an equivalent that will achieve the proper coverage. Allow to dry so adhesive does not transfer when touched. Proceed with tile placement. Spread rate should be approximately 25 sq. yds. per gallon for trowel on applications. Note: Inadequate amounts of adhesive can cause modules to shi- ft nd move and will not be covered under warranty. Strictly adhere to recommended spread rates. Note: For Mannington's 15 -year bond warranty, MT -711 must be used. No other adhesive will be allowed. 14. TILE PLACEMENT: Starting in the corner of one quadrant, install tiles in a pyramid at 90° (perpendicular) to the front wall, using the control grids to keep tiles straight. Install tiles by butting edges together evenly, being careful not to compress modules (this can cause peaked edges). Arrows are embossed on the module backings to show pile direction. Lay tiles in quarter turn fashion. To ensure proper alignment, check spacing every ten modules. Measure eight 24 -inch modules for a total of 192 inches; proper spacing should be within 1/4 inch. Continue to check spacing every eight modules throughout the entire installation. 15. PALLET AND BOX SEQUENCING: It is very important to install Mannington Modular tiles in the order they were manufactured. This is"easily accomplished by selecting pallets in sequential order and following the numbers located on each carton of tiles. Typically an installation will begin with the lowest carton numbers and progress through the highest numbers until the project is complete. Installing Mannington Modular tiles by carton sequence will assure the most even uniform look possible. 16. CUTTING/ TRIMMING: Carpet modules will require cutting at perimeters, floor electrical outlets, and door openings. Loop pile modules may require some trimming or clipping of tufts. This is typical of this type construction and is not a manufacturing problem. Small pieces of carpet tile should also have a glue applied to the backing to help hold them in CARPETING 09680-6 H1D ADDENDUM 5 030104 03/01/04 CIRCUIT CITY STORES INC.— LA QUINTA, CA place. 17. FINISHED INSTALLATION: Do not allow traffic on modules unless they are anchored at control grids and perimeters (or full spread). When heavy furniture and wheeled traffic is moved over tiles, use,plywood runners to avoid tile shifting. Roll entire job with 75-100 lb. roller after completion of installation. 18. CHAIR PADS: Chair pads are recommended for use under chairs with roller casters. Casters should be the flat round type with a 5/8" to 1" width minimum. If chair pads are not used, the appearance of the modules will decrease. Maintenance and/or shifting of the modules may be required more frequently if pads are not used. 19. REPLACEMENT TILES: On occasion, it may be necessary to replace a damaged or heavily soiled module. Modules can be replaced with new Mannington tiles from on-site inventory or from another area of this installation. A difference of appearance may be noticed when modules are replaced; this difference usually diminished in a short time. 20. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: Obtain additional information from: Mannington Commercial Technical Services Department at (800) 241-2262, Ext. 3. D. Clean substrates scheduled to receive carpeting to remove cementitious and resinous materials. Comply with instructions of carpet supplier. E. Patch and repair damaged and defective substrate using quick -set patching compound acceptable to carpet supplier. F. Pre -plan installation for uniform direction of pattern and lay of pile, and proper sequencing with other work. Locate seams properly, centered under doors and without seams in direction of traffic at doorways and similar traffic patterns. Do not bridge building expansion joints. Extend carpet under removable obstructions and into closets and alcoves. G. Clean adhesive and cement from face of carpet promptly; replace carpet which cannot be cleaned. H. Vacuum completed carpet installation with beater -in -nozzle type commercial vacuum cleaner. Remove any protruding face yarn with sharp scissors. I. Save carpet tile scraps, defined as pieces larger than 16" x 24" and deliver to Owner's storage space as directed. Dispose of smaller pieces. END OF SECTION �y V:.uaa CARPETING 09680-7 H1D ADDENDUM 5 030104 03/01/04 ,CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA SECTION 09900 PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and Provisions of the Contract, including General, Supplementary and Special Conditions, applicable Division O Sections and Division 1 Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Extent of painting work is indicated on drawings and schedules, and as herein specified. B. Coating systems are specified on drawings and schedules. C. Work includes painting and finishing of- interior and exterior exposed items and surfaces throughout project, except as otherwise indicated. 1. Surface preparation, priming and coats of paint specified are in addition to shop -priming and surface treatment specified under other sections of work. D. Work includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color coding where applicable), and of hangers, exposed steel and iron work, and primed metal surfaces of equipment, installed under mechanical and electrical work, except as otherwise indicated. E. "Paint" as used herein means all coating systems materials, including primers, emulsions, enamels,.stains, sealers and fillers, and other applied materials whether used as prime, intermediate or finish coats. F. Surfaces to be Painted: Except where natural finish of material is specifically noted as a surface not to be painted, paint exposed surfaces whether or not colors are designed in "schedules". Where items or surfaces are not specifically mentioned, paint the same as similar adjacent materials or areas. If color or finish is not designated, Project Manager will select these from standard colors or finishes available. G. Following categories of work are not included as part of field - applied finish work. 1. Pre -Finished Items: Unless otherwise indicated, do not include painting when factory -finishing or installer finishing is specified for such items as (but not limited to) toilet enclosures, prefinished partition systems, acoustic materials, architectural woodwork and casework, and finished mechanical and electrical equipment including light fixtures, switchgear and distribution cabinets. 2. Concealed Surfaces: Unless otherwise indicated, painting is not required on surfaces such as walls or ceilings in concealed areas and generally inaccessible areas, furred areas, utility tunnels, pipe spaces, duct shafts and elevator shafts.. 3. Finished Metal Surfaces:, Unless otherwise indicated, metal surfaces of anodized aluminum, stainless steel, chromium plate, copper, bronze and similar finished materials will not require finish painting. 4. Operating Parts: Unless otherwise indicated, moving parts of operating units, mechanical and electrical parts, such as :PAINTING 09900-1 H1D 080603 08/06/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA valve and damper operators, linkages, sinkages, sensing devices, motor and fan shafts will not require finish painting. H. Following categories of work are included under other sections of these specifications. I. Shop Priming: Unless otherwise specified, shop priming of ferrous metal items is included under various sections for structural steel, metal fabrications, hollow metal work, and similar items. 1. Unless otherwise specified, shop priming of fabricated components such as wood casework and shop -fabricated or factory -built mechanical and electrical equipment or accessories is included under other sections of these specifications. J. Do not paint over any code -required labels, such as Underwriters' Laboratories and Factory Mutual, or any equipment identification, performance rating, name, or nomenclature plates. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical information including paint label analysis and application instructions for each material proposed for use. B. Certification by the manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs). 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Single Source Responsibility: Provide primers and other undercoat paint produced by same manufacturer as finish coats. B. Use only primers and thinners approved by paint manufacturer. 1. Use thinners only within recommended limits. C. Use coatings, primers, and thinners acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE: A. Deliver materials to job site in original, new and unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and following information: 1. Name or title of material. 2. Fed. Spec. number, if applicable. 3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 4. Manufacturer's name. 5. Contents by volume, or major pigment and vehicle constituents. 6. Thinning instructions. 7. Application instructions. 8. _Color name and number. B. Store materials not in actual use in tightly covered containers. Maintain containers used in storage of paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 1. Store materials in secure storage area away from building interior. 2. Protect from freezing where necessary. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take all precautions to ensure that workmen and work areas are adequately protected from fire hazards and health hazards PAINTING 09900-2 H1D 080603 08/06/03 A. . Mildew resistance: Provide coatings which are formulated and mixed at the point of manufacture with mildewcides and fungicides to inhibit growth of mildew as encountered in the tropical and subtropical regions of the United States, such as Hawaii, Florida, Louisiana, and Texas Gulf Coast. 1. Mildewcides and fungicides containing compounds of mercury, lead, or other heavy metals are not acceptable. B. Material Quality: Provide best duality grade of various types of coatings as regularly manufactured by acceptable paint materials manufacturers. Materials not displaying manufacturer's identification as a best -grade product will not be acceptable. C. Color Pigments: Pure, non -fading, applicable types to suit substrates and service indicated. D. Lead content in pigment is not acceptable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Protection: Protect work of other trades. Correct any painting related damages by cleaning repairing or replacing, and refinishing, PAINTING 09900-3 H1D 080603 08/06/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA resulting from handling, mixing and application of paints. 1.06. JOB CONDITIONS: A. Apply water -base paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 deg F (10 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C), unless otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer's printed instructions. B. Apply solvent -thinned paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 45 deg F (7 deg C) and 95 deg F ( 35 deg C ) , unless otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer's printed instructions. C. Do not apply paint in rain, fog, or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85%; or to damp or wet surfaces; unless otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer's printed instructions. 1. Painting may be continued during inclement weather if areas and surfaces to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by paint manufacturer during application and drying periods. D. Do not apply paint to surfaces whose moisture content exceeds 4 percent unless otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer's printed instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Interior Surfaces: "Benjamin Moore", "Sherwin Williams" B. Exterior surfaces: "ICI Dulux", ABenjamin Moore", ASherwin Williams@, AInduron@ C. Substitution for the above specified manufacturers will not be allowed. 2.02 MATERIALS A. . Mildew resistance: Provide coatings which are formulated and mixed at the point of manufacture with mildewcides and fungicides to inhibit growth of mildew as encountered in the tropical and subtropical regions of the United States, such as Hawaii, Florida, Louisiana, and Texas Gulf Coast. 1. Mildewcides and fungicides containing compounds of mercury, lead, or other heavy metals are not acceptable. B. Material Quality: Provide best duality grade of various types of coatings as regularly manufactured by acceptable paint materials manufacturers. Materials not displaying manufacturer's identification as a best -grade product will not be acceptable. C. Color Pigments: Pure, non -fading, applicable types to suit substrates and service indicated. D. Lead content in pigment is not acceptable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Protection: Protect work of other trades. Correct any painting related damages by cleaning repairing or replacing, and refinishing, PAINTING 09900-3 H1D 080603 08/06/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA as directed by Owner. B. Coordination: Provide finish coats which are compatible with prime paints used. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers where required. Notify Owner in writing of anticipated problems using specified coatings with substrates primed by others. C. Surface Preparation: Perform preparation and cleaning procedures in strict accordance with coating manufacturer's instructions for each substrate condition. 1. Remove hardware and accessories, machined surfaces, plates, lighting fixtures and similar items in place and not to be finish -painted or provide surface -applied protection. Reinstall removed items and remove protective coverings at completion of work. 2. Prepare cementitious surfaces of concrete, concrete block and similar materials to be painted by removing efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease and oils, and by roughing to remove glaze. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces to be painted before beginning painting. Do not paint over surfaces where alkalinity or moisture content exceeds manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Seal wood required to be job -painted. Prime edges, ends, face, undersides and backsides of trim, counters, cases, cabinets, counters, etc. Use spar varnish for backpriming where transparent finish is required. 4. Backprime interior paneling only where masonry, plaster, or other wet wall construction occurs on backside. 5. Clean ferrous surfaces which are not galvanized or shop - coated. Remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale and other foreign substances by solvent or mechanical cleaning. Touch- up shop -applied prime coats wherever damaged. 6. Clean galvanized surfaces free of oil and surface contaminants with non -petroleum based solvent. a. Wash galvanized metal surfaces with a solution of chemical phosphoric metal etch and allow to dry. 3.02 APPLICATION A. General: Apply painting and finishing materials in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Application of all paint materials shall be by brush, roller or spraying, however, spraying of paints is not acceptable for Showroom and Office Areas. 1. Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final paint coat, until paint film is of uniform finish, color and appearance. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only before equipment is installed. 3. Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers, or grilles, flat, non -specular black. 4. Paint back sides of access panels, and removable or hinge covers to match exposed surfaces. 5. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms and edges same as 10) exterior faces, unless otherwise indicated. PAINTING 09900-4 H1D 080603 08/06/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC.. LA QUINTA, CA 6. Sand lightly between succeeding enamel or varnish coats. 7. Omit first coat (primer) on metal surfaces which have been shop -primed and touch-up painted, unless otherwise specified. I t*. 8. Apply prime coat to material which is required to be painted or finished, and which has not been prime coated by others. 9. Apply each material at not less than the manufacturer's recommended spreading rate, to provide a total dry film to thickness of not less than 4.0 mils for entire coating system of prime and finish coats for 3 -coat work. 10. Provide a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.5 mils for entire coating system of prime and finish coat for 2 -coat work. B. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture and coverage. Remove, refinish or repaint work not in compliance with ` specified requirements. 3.03 COATING SYSTEMS: A. Provide coatings as indicated on drawings and schedules. 1. Use primers, sealer, thinners and solvents as recommended by manufacturer of finish coat materials. END OF SECTION PAINTING HID 080603 09900-5 08/06/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA f SECTION 09986 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and provisions of the Contract, including General, Supplementary and Special Conditions, applicable Division 0 Sections and Division 1 Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Extent of fiberglass reinforced panels is indicated on drawings and schedules. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide panels and molding only from the manufacturer specified to ensure warranty and color -harmonization of accessories. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery of Materials: Package sheets on skids or pallets for shipment to project site. B. Storage of Materials: Store panels in a dry place at the project site. C. Handling: Remove foreign matter from face of panel by use of a soft bristle brush, avoiding abrasive action. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Installation shall not begin until building is enclosed, permanent heating and cooling equipment is in operation, and residual moisture from plaster, concrete or terrazzo work has dissipated. B._ During installation and for not less than 48 hours before, maintain an ambient temperature and relative humidity within limits required by type of adhesive used and recommendation of adhesive manufacturer. C. Provide ventilation to disperse fumes during application of adhesive i y as recommended by the adhesive manufacturer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURES A. Provide fiberglass reinforced panels by: 1. Kemlite Co., Joliet, IL; Tel: (800) 435-0080. Contact: Bob Kilbourne. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Wall Panels 1. Finish, thickness and color to be: a. Embossed .090"(2.3 mm) Glasbord-P with Surfaseal. See drawings for color. b. Independent laboratory ASTM E-84 testing. C. `Class C Flame Spread of 200 or less, Smoke Developed of FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELS 09986-1 H1D 041003 08/06/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA 450 or lower per ASTM E-84 latest version. d. Barcol Hardness (scratch resistance) per ASTM D-2583 of 40 for embossed .09" (2.3 mm) Korelock. e. Panels will exhibit no more than a 0.0388 weight loss it after a 25 -cycle Taber Abrasion Test. f. Gardner Impact Strength of 7.0 ft. lbs./in. for Korelock. g. Meets USDA Requirements. h. ICBO Report Number 1065. i. A means of frontside identification and confirmation of meeting Class III (C) interior finish requirements after installation and while in service (without labels) - embossed panels only. B. Division Bars, Corner Trim: Panel manufacturer's standard length extruded vinyl pieces; longest length possible - to eliminate end joints. 1. Moldings: Harmonizing PVC (polyvinyl chloride) moldings shall be silver. C. Fasteners: Non -corrosive drive rivets. 1. Rivets: Optional. Specify rivets in harmonizing colors (by color name and number) in areas where there are wide changes in temperature or humidity, where the substrate is unusually uneven, and in all low temperature or cold storage applications. Refer to Installation Guide for rivet pattern and installation instructions. D. Adhesive: C-375/376 construction adhesive. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Examine backup surfaces to determine that corners are plumb and straight, surfaces are smooth, uniform, clean and free from foreign matter, nails countersunk, joints and cracks filled flush and smooth with the adjoining surface. B. Do not begin installation until backup surfaces are put into satisfactory condition. 3.02 APPLICATION A. Do all cutting with carbide tipped saw blades or drill bits, or cut with snips. B. Install panels with manufacturer's recommended gap for panel field and corner joints. C. Fastener holes in the panels must be predrilled 1/8" (3.2 mm) oversize. D. For trowel type and application of adhesive, follow adhesive manufacturer's recommendation. E. Using products acceptable to manufacturer, install the FRP panel FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELS 09986-2 H1D 041003 08/06/03 0) CIRCUIT CITY STORES, -INC.LA QUINTA, CA system in accordance with panel manufacturer's printed instructions, Installation Guide. 3.03 CLEANING A. Remove any adhesive or excessive sealant from panel face using solvent or cleaner recommended by panel manufacturer. END OF SECTION , FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELS 09986-3 H1D 041003 08/06/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA SECTION 10150 TOILET PARTITIONS PART 1 - GENERAL -1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and Provisions of the Contract, including General, Supplementary and Special Conditions, applicable Division O Sections and Division 1 Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Extent of toilet partitions is indicated on drawings and includes the following types: Overhead braced (Floor Supported) toilet compartments. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Coordination: Furnish inserts and anchorages which must be built into other work for installation of toilet partitions and related work; coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay. PART 2 -.PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A.- Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: Manufacturer 1.1 Flush -Metal Partition Corp. • 2. Knickerbocker Partition Corp. 3. Global Steel Products Corp. 2.02 MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials which have been selected for surface flatness and smoothness, exposed surfaces which exhibit pitting, roller marks, stains, discolorations, or other imperfections on finished units are not acceptable. B. Sheet Steel: ASTM A 591, Class C, galvani zed-bonderi zed, of following minimum thicknesses: 1. Pilasters (Overhead Braced): 20 gage. 2. Panels and screens: 20,gage. 3. Doors: 22 gage. 4. Concealed Reinforcement for Anchorages: 12 gage. 5. Concealed Reinforcement for Tapping: 14 gage. C. Core Material: Manufacturer's standard sound -deadening, honeycomb, impregnated Kraft paper core. D. Pilaster Shoes c AISI Type 302/304, 20 -gage stainless steel, 311. t high, finish to match hardware. Furnish shoes at each pilaster. E. Stirrup Bracket: Manufacturer's standard extruded aluminum, clear TOILET PARTITIONS 10150-1 H1D 041003 08/06/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA anodized, or satin finish stainless steel or satin chrome plated brass. Die cast zamac not acceptable. F. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard, heavy-duty operating hardware and accessories, stainless steel or brass alloy with satin chrome finish or clear oxidized aluminum. Die cast zamac not acceptable. G. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard theft -proof exposed fasteners, finished to match hardware. H. Overhead Bracing: Continuous extruded aluminum tubing in anti -grip profile, with clear anodized finish. I. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed and concealed fasteners. 1. Concealed fasteners shall be hot -dipped galvanized. 2. Exposed fasteners shall be stainless steel with theft - resistance type heads. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Fabrication: Pressure laminate face sheets to core, edges sealed with continuous locking strip or lapped and formed edges. Miter and weld corners with welds ground smooth. 1. Furnish units with cut-outs, drilled holes, and internal reinforcement to receive. partition mounted hardware and accessories. 2. Doors and Panels: Not less than 1" thick units, size shown. a. Door Dimensions: Unless otherwise indicated, furnish 24" wide inswinging doors for ordinary toilet stalls and 32" wide (clear opening) outswinging doors at stalls equipped for use by handicapped. 3. Overhead -Braced Pilasters: 1-1/4" thick, with galvanized steel floor, supports and leveling bolts. Overhead brace, continuous extruded aluminum tube, anti -grip design with clear anodized finish, unless otherwise indicated. Set and secure brace into top of each pilaster. 4. Provide brackets, base anchorages and shoes to match compartment units. B. Hardware and Accessories: Furnish for each door, as follows: 1. Hinges: Cutout inset pivot type, adjustable hold door open at any angle up to 90 deg. 2. Latch and Keeper: Recessed latch unit, with combination rubber -faced door strike and keeper. 3. Coat Hook and Bumper: Manufacturer's standard unit, rubber - tipped. 4. Door Pulls: Manufacturer's standard. C. Baked Enamel Finish: Paint shall be vanilla or almond in color. Manufacturer's standard baked enamel finish. 1. Global Steel Products Corporation as reference standard. 2. Knickerbocker Partition Corporation. TOILET PARTITIONS 10150-2 H1D 041003 08/06/03 ISO 11 i E CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA 3. Flush Metal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Install partitions rigid, straight, plumb and level in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Set units with not more than 1/2" between pilasters and panels, and not more than 1" clearances between panels and"walls. B. Hardware Adiustments: Adjust and lubricate hardware for proper operation after installation. 1. Set hinges on in -swing doors to hold doors open approximately 30 deg from -the closed position when unlatched. 2. Set hinges on out -swing doors to return to fully closed position. C. Cleaning and Final Adiustments: Perform final adjustments to leveling devices, door hardware, and other operating parts. Clean exposed surfaces and touch up minor finish imperfections using materials and methods recommended by partition manufacturer. D. Replace damaged units which cannot be satisfactorily field repaired, as directed by Owner. TOILET PARTITIONS. H1D 041003 END OF SECTION 10150-3 08/06/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA SECTION 10445 INTERIOR SIGNAGE 0 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and provisions of the Contract, including General, Supplementary and Special Conditions, applicable Division O Sections and Division 1 Sections, apply to this section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Forms of interior signs include the following: 1. Engraved plastic room identification signs. 2. Emergency exit signs. 3. Information Signs 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain signs of each type from a single manufacturer. B. In addition to complying with pertinent codes and regulations, comply with industry and trade standards normally associated with this product or material, except where specified product or material is superior in quality to industry and trade standards. 1.04 WARRANTY A., Provide Owner with written warranty as a condition of work acceptance, signed by Contractor and installer (where applicable), r agreeing to maintain, repair and/or replace products and materials for one year following acceptance, and without additional cost to Owner. Vandalism is excluded. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: 1. Mohawk Sign Systems 2. Andco Industries Corporation 3. ASI Sign Systems, Incorporated 4. Big Apple Sign Corporation 5. " Colite Industries, Incorporated 6. Spanjer Brothers, Incorporated 2.02 MATERIAL A. High Pressure Plastic Laminate: 1/8" thick melamine plastic laminate with contrasting core color, fire retardant and self - extinguishing that meets U.S. Government specification No. LP -387A, Type NDP. B. Graphic Process: Sand Carved (raised 1/32') to meet the requirements of the Americans with Disabilities Act - 1990 and ANSI A117.1 - 1986. C. Color: To be selected from manufacturer's standard colors. 2.03 ROOM IDENTIFICATION SIGNS INTERIOR SIGNAGE 10445-1 H1D 080603 08/06/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA A. Graphic Content: 1. "WOMEN" 2. "MEN" 3. "ROAD SHOP" (1ST LINE) 4. "STORE" (1ST LINE) 5. ADIRECTOR@ (2ND LINE) 6. "SALES" (1ST LINE) 7. "MANAGERS@ (2ND LINE) 8. "JANITOR" 9. (HCP. SYMBOL) B. Colors: 1. Background Color: Black (Blue for Hcp symbol) 2. Copy Color: White C. Character Height: Raised characters shall be at least 5/8" high, but not higher than 211. D. Sign Size: 1. Single line: 3" (high) x length required. 2. Double line: 4-1/2" (high) x length required. 3. HCP Symbol: 6" min. in height. E. Letter form: Sans Serif upper case. Accompanied by Grade 2 Braille on all signs. F. Mounting Location: Mount sign alongside the door on the latch side, and 5'-0" above finished floor to centerline of sign height. 2.04 EMERGENCY EXIT SIGNS A. Graphic Content: 1. "EMERGENCY EXIT ONLY" (1ST LINE) 2. "PUSH BAR TO OPEN - SOUNDS ALARM" (2ND LINE) B. Colors: 1. Background Color: Deep Red 2. Copy Color: White C. Character Height and Style 1. 1st line: 1" high, Helvetica Bold, uppercase. 2. 2nd line: 3/4" high, Helvetica Medium, uppercase. 3. Braille Tag: Grade 2 Braille shall be on all signs. D. Sign Size: 4-1/2" (high) x length required. E. Mounting Height and Location: Interior face of doors scheduled as "Exit Only". Mount on face of door, centered, at 5'-0" above finished floor to centerline of sign. 2.05 INFORMATION SIGNS 0 INTERIOR SIGNAGE 10445-2 H1D 080603 08/06/03 Ll NOT AN EXIT 18"W X 3-1/2" H 1-1/2" B. Colors• 1.• Background: Black 2. Copy Color: White C. Mounting Location: Not over 5'-0" above finish floor. Locate as directed by Owner's Representative. D. Note: Informational and directional signs are NOT required to use raised copy or Braille tags. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Locate sign units where shown and scheduled. using mounting methods of type described and to comply with manufacturer's instructions. Install sign units level, plumb and at the height indicated. B. Wall -Mounted Panel Signs: Attach panel signs to walls surfaces using the methods indicated below: 1. Vinyl -Tape Mounting: Use double -sided foam tape, except on vinyl -covered or rough surfaces. 2. Silicone Adhesive Mounting: Use liquid silicone adhesives for irregular, porous or vinyl -covered surfaces. END OF SECTION INTERIOR SIGNAGE HID 080603 10445-3 08/06/03 "CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA A. Graphic Content: . Copy Content Sign Size Type Size CAPACITY 15" X 3-1/2" H 1-1/2" EMPLOYEES ONLY 19"W X 3-1/2" H 1-1/2" Ll NOT AN EXIT 18"W X 3-1/2" H 1-1/2" B. Colors• 1.• Background: Black 2. Copy Color: White C. Mounting Location: Not over 5'-0" above finish floor. Locate as directed by Owner's Representative. D. Note: Informational and directional signs are NOT required to use raised copy or Braille tags. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Locate sign units where shown and scheduled. using mounting methods of type described and to comply with manufacturer's instructions. Install sign units level, plumb and at the height indicated. B. Wall -Mounted Panel Signs: Attach panel signs to walls surfaces using the methods indicated below: 1. Vinyl -Tape Mounting: Use double -sided foam tape, except on vinyl -covered or rough surfaces. 2. Silicone Adhesive Mounting: Use liquid silicone adhesives for irregular, porous or vinyl -covered surfaces. END OF SECTION INTERIOR SIGNAGE HID 080603 10445-3 08/06/03 'CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA SECTION 10520 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and provisions of the contract, including general, supplementary and special conditions, applicable Division 0 Sections and Divisions 1 Sections, apply to this section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Extent of fire extinguishers is indicated on Drawing A2.0. B. Definition: "Fire extinguishers" as used in this section refers to units which can be hand -carried as opposed to those which are equipped with wheels or to fixed fire extinguishing systems. C. Types of products required include: 1. Fire extinguishers. 2. Mounting brackets. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single source responsibility: Obtain products in this sections from one manufacturer. B. UL -Listed Products: Provide new portable fire extinguishers which 1 are UL -listed and bear UL "Listing Mark" for type, rating, and classification of extinguisher indicated. ePART 2 B PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from the following: J.L. Industries Larsen's Mfg. Co. Johnson -Lee, Division of W.F. Lee Corp. Muckle Manufacturing, Division of Technico, Inc. Watrous, Inc. 2.02 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 1. General: Provide fire' extinguishers for each location indicated which comply with requirements of governing authorities. 1. Abbreviations indicated below to identify extinguisher types related to UL classification and ratings system and not, necessarily to type and mount of extinguishing material contained in extinguisher. 1. Multi -Purpose Dry Chemical Type: UL rated in enameled steel container, for Class A, Class B and Class C fires. 2. UL 3A: 4 B:C, 5 lb. capacity unless otherwise indicated on drawings or where larger capacities are required by authorities having jurisdiction. 2.03 MOUNTING BRACKETS: FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 10520-1 0498 P.A. NO. CR 04/30/97 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA 1. Provide manufacturer's standard bracket designed to prevent accidental dislodgement of extinguisher of sizes required for type and capacity of extinguisher required, in manufacturer's standard plated finish. 0 1. Provide brackets for all extinguishers. PART 3 B EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Install fire extinguishers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions at locations indicated on drawings. 1. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 2. If authorities having jurisdiction determines the quantity of fire extinguishers to be other than indicated on drawings, the Owner will issue a change order to add or credit as applicable based on unit cost included in Bid Form. END OF SECTION FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 10520-2 0498 P.A. NO. CR 04/30/97 rJ CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA SECTION 10529 SECURITY BOX PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. • Drawings and provisions of the contract, including" general, supplementary and special conditions, applicable Division 0 Sections and Divisions 1 Sections, apply to this section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Location of Knox Box is indicated on the drawings. B. Type of products required include: 1. Recessed. C. Type of box to be verified with Fire Marshal. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single source responsibility: Obtain products in this section from one manufacturer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from the following: The Knox Company distributed by ADI Distribution 2.02 KNOX BOX A. Knox Box Unit: Model #3270 Recessed with alarm tamper switch. B. Finish: Pre-treatment zinc -phosphate to Federal Standard TTC 490 Type II, weather resistant TGIC polyester powder coat with zinc phosphate undercoat. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. -Install Knox Box units where indicated in strict accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations. END OF SECTION SECURITY BOX' H1D 041003 11 10529-1 08/06/03 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. • LA QUINTA, CA SECTION 10607 CHAIN LINK FENCE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and provisions of the Contract, including General, Supplementary and Special Conditions, applicable Division 0 Sections and Division 1 Sections. 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK A. Include all labor, material and equipment required to furnish and install all chain link fence system indicated on the drawings and specified herein. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Chain Link Fabric: Chain link fabric shall be No. 11 gauge and have a uniform square mesh measuring approximately 2" between its parallel sides. It shall be woven from good commercial steel wire with a minimum breaking strength for individual wire of 1,200 pounds. Fabric shall be attached to the terminal posts by means of a tension strip held by specially designed clips and spaced at 12" O.C. -END OF SECTION - CHAIN LINK FENCE 10607-1 H1D ADDENDUM 5 030104 03/01/04 B. Posts and Rails: Round posts and rails shall be 2" OD Schedule 40. .Posts shall extend into a cast in place pipe sleeve and will be grouted as detailed on the drawings. C. Galvanizing: All parts of the fence posts and gate, above and below ground, shall be zinc coated by the hot -dip process. D. All bolts, hardware and accessories for complete installation to be included. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION - A. Provide all inserts and anchors to properly install fence in conditions as shown on drawings. B. Field bracing to be furnished by erector. -END OF SECTION - CHAIN LINK FENCE 10607-1 H1D ADDENDUM 5 030104 03/01/04 r END OF SECTION 4 WIRE SHELVING 10670-1 P.A. NO. 80 06/12/95 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA SECTION 10670 WIRE SHELVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and provisions of the Contract, including General, Supplementary and Special Conditions, applicable Division 0 Sections and Division 1 Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Extent of wire shelving is indicated on drawings and specified - herein. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single -Source Responsibility: Provide products of same manufacturer for..all wire shelving. PART -2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of the following: Clairson International Ocala, FL 34478 (800) 874-0008 2.02 MATERIALS A. Wire Shelving: Equal to "CLOSETMAID" with non -excluding formula PVC coating. B. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as shelving or of galvanized steel where concealed. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Inspect surfaces to receive wire shelving. Report unsatisfactory installation surfaces to Contractor and do not proceed with installation until surfaces are restored to satisfactory condition to commence installation. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install all wire shelving in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. r END OF SECTION 4 WIRE SHELVING 10670-1 P.A. NO. 80 06/12/95 'CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA SECTION 10800 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL r 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and provisions of the Contract, including General, Supplementary and Special Conditions, applicable Division 0 Sections and Division 1 Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Extent of toilet and bath accessories is indicated on drawings and includes the following: 1. Owner furnished and Contractor installed items. 2. Contractor furnished and Contractor installed items. B. Owner furnished and Contractor installed items are indicated on drawings and schedules. r 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single -Source Responsibility: Provide products of same manufacturer for each type of accessory unit and for units exposed to view in same areas. 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordination: Coordinate accessory locations, installation, and sequencing with other work to avoid interference and to assure proper installation, operation, adjustment, cleaning, and servicing of toilet accessory items. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: 1. Accessory Specialties, Inc. 2. A & J Washroom Accessories 3. American Specialties, Inc. 4. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 5. Bradley Corporation 6. General Accessory Manufacturing Co. 7. Parker-Scovill 8. Watrous, Inc. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Stainless Steel: AISI Type 302/304, with polished No. 4 finish, 22 gage minimum, unless otherwise indicated. B. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit or of galvanized steel where concealed. 2.03 FABRICATION A. General: Stamped names or labels on exposed faces of toilet and bath accessory units are not permitted, however unobtrusive labels indicating manufacturer and model number are required on surface not exposed to view. B. Surface -Mounted Accessories: Fabricate units with tight seams and TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800-1 0498 P.A. NO. CR 04/30/97 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA joints, exposed edges rolled. Provide concealed anchorage wherever possible. C. Grab Bars: 1. Stainless Steel Type: Provide grab bars with wall thickness not less than 18 gage and as follows: a. Mounting: Concealed b. Gripping Surfaces: Manufacturer's standard non -slip texture. C. Wall Clearance: 1-1/2" D. Mirrors: 24" wide x 36" high, 25 gauge stainless steel channel plate glass mirror triple silvered, electro -copper plated, baked enamel backing; and 20 gauge galvanized steel back plate over resilient vented shock -proof filler. Provide manufacturer's 10 year guarantee against silver spoilage. E. Tilt (Handicap) Mirror: 24" wide x 36" high, Type 304 heavy gage stainless steel frame tapers from 4" depth at top to 1" depth at bottom. One (1) piece galvanized steel back and inner stiffener frame, welded construction with slots for mounting screws. Select 1/4" float glass mirror shall -be guaranteed for 15 years against silver spoilage. Back shall be protected by full-size shock - absorbing, water-resistant, non-abrasive, 1/8" thick polystyrene padding. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Install all toilet accessory units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate and recommended by manufacturer of unit. Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations indicated. B. Adjust toilet accessories for proper operation .and verify that mechanisms function smoothly. C. Clean and polish all exposed surfaces after removing protective coatings. END OF SECTION TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800-2 0498 P.A. NO. CR 04/30/97 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA SECTION 11160 LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL KIM 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and provisions of the Contract, including General, Supplementary and Special Conditions, applicable Division 0 Sections and Division 1 Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Extent of loading dock equipment is indicated on drawings and includes the following: 1.• Dock bumper 2. - Dock leveler 3. Dock seal 4.' Metal Hood above seal B. Steel channel frames for dock levelers are specified in Section 05500, "Metal Fabrications". 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data, installation instructions and maintenance instructions for each type of loading dock equipment. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for each type of loading dock equipment, including details, unit dimensions, required clearances, anchorages and other data required for a complete installation. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility.. Obtain each type of loading dock equipment from a single manufacturer. B. Comply with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. C. Dock Leveler Standard: Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI MH 14.1, 1984 standards. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of the following: 1. Dock Bumpers: a. Kelly Company, Inc. 6720 N. Teutonia Ave. Milwaukee, WI 53209 Tel: (888) 428-0530 2. Dock Levelers: a. Kelly Company, Inc. 3. Dock Seal: a. Kelly Company, Inc./Tuf-Seal 2.02 PRODUCTS LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT 11160-1 H1D ADDENDUM 5 030104 03/01/04 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA A. Dock Bumpers: Provide the manufacturer's standard units of the type, size and arrangement indicated: 1. Laminated tread type units, fabricated from multiple plies cut from fabric -reinforced rubber truck tires to a uniform thickness (verify with civil drawings and manufacturer of equipment) and mounted to structural steel rod and angle supports with not less than 1" of the tread plies extending beyond the face of the closure angle. Length as shown on drawings. 2. Mount to face of loading dock with anchor bolts. B. Dock Levelers: Provide hinged -lip dock levelers designed for permanent installation in concrete pits preformed in the edge of the loading platform at locations shown, and of the type, function, operations, capacity, size and construction indicated, complete with controls, safety devices and accessories required. 1. Function: Provide units which compensate for differences in height, vertically and laterally, between truck bed and loading platform, that provide a working range for vertical travel of not less than 12" above and 12" below dock level, and include the following functions: a. Lip Operation: Provide standard mechanism for the hinged lip's automatic extension and support on the ramp edge that will enable the lip to rest on the truck bed over the leveler's working range, with automatic release of lip support and lip retraction upon truck departure. 1. Length of Lip Extension: Not less than 16" from ramp edge and not less than 12" in front of dock bumpers. 2. Automatic Ramp Return: Provide for unloaded ramp's automatic return from raised or lowered positions to stored position, level with the platform, upon truck's departure. 2. Mechanical Operating System: Provide spring operated raising and walk -down lowering of the unloaded ramp. Equip units with an upward -biased spring counterbalancing mechanism controlled by a hold-down device. Raise the ramp to the top limit of the operating range by operating the recessed control handle in the ramp to disengage the hold-down device. Lower the ramp below platform level with the lip retracted by operating the auxiliary recessed control handle to release support legs. a. Rated Capacity: Provide levelers capable of supporting a gross moving load of 25,000 lbs. without permanent deflection or distortion, as determined by actual tests in compliance with requirements of ANSI MH 14.1, 1984 Standards for rated capacity of fixed dockboards. 3. Platform Size: 6' wide x 8' long. 4. Safety Devices: Provide toe guards, cross -traffic support and free -fall protection of the type standard with the manufacturer for the type selected. a. Maintenance Strut: Provide an integral strut for support of ramp in the up position during maintenance. 5. Construction: Provide dock leveler consisting of frame made of structural and formed steel shapes, and platform, including LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT 11160-2 H1D ADDENDUM 5 030104 03/01/04 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Install each. item of loading dock equipment in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.02 OPERATION AND ADJUSTMENT "A. Adjust and lubricate each operating item of loading dock equipment. Test each item and make necessary adjustments for proper operation. END OF SECTION LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT 11160-3 H1D ADDENDUM 5 030104 03/01/04 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. ;•t `� ' : 'i ` '-- LA QUINTA, CA a hinged lip, fabricated from non-skid steel plate with lip edges chamfered. 6. Finish and Color: Provide baked enamel finish. Paint toe guards yellow. 7. Provide manufacturer's standard "weatherseal" option (sides and rear). C. Dock Seals: Manufacturer's standard dock seals consisting of fabric covered foam pads for forming an air tight seal between truck and loading dock openings at the jambs and head. 1. Beveled Jamb Pads: Not less than 12" wide at base and 15" wide at face. Contractor to verify with civil drawings and manufacturer of equipment chosen as to projection from face of wall required to complete an airtight seal. This may require tapered dock seals depending upon conditions at site. 2. Head Curtain: 30" adjustable drop curtain with velcro touch and hold system on vertical splits and rope pulley system. 3. Construction: Single -or -double ply 16 oz. coated -fabric - covered urethane -foam core with supporting frame. 4. Guide Strips: Minimum 3-1/2" wide coated nylon full length on the jamb pads of contrasting color to pleated protectors. 5. Pleated Protectors: Overlapping layers of 40 oz. hypalon coated fabric attached to the base fabric; 4" exposure, 5" overlap. 6. Wood Supporting Frame: 2" x 12" select structural grade, pressure treated, kiln dried and factory painted, with steel mounting hardware. D. Metal Hood: 18 gage galvanized steel, 18" wide x full width of dock seal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Install each. item of loading dock equipment in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.02 OPERATION AND ADJUSTMENT "A. Adjust and lubricate each operating item of loading dock equipment. Test each item and make necessary adjustments for proper operation. END OF SECTION LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT 11160-3 H1D ADDENDUM 5 030104 03/01/04 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA SECTION 12506 WINDOW TREATMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and provisions of the Contract, including General, Supplementary and Special Conditions, applicable Division 0 Sections and Division 1 Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Extent of window treatment is indicated on drawings and includes the following: 1. Manually operated slat type mini -blinds. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Provide units produced by one manufacturer for each type required, with complete standard assemblies including hardware accessory items, mounting brackets, and fastenings. B. Furnish materials in colors and patterns selected by Project Manager from manufacturers' standard colors/patterns. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 HORIZONTAL BLINDS A. Headrail: Channel -shaped section complete with tilting mechanism, top and end braces, top cradles, cord lock, and accessory items required for type of blind and installation. B. Bottom Rail: Tubular steel bottom rail, designed to withstand twisting or sagging. Contour top surface to match slat curvature, with flat or slightly curved bottom. Close ends with metal or plastic end caps of same color -as rail. Finish rail in same color as slats. C. Slats: Spring -tempered aluminum (louver blades), rounded corners with forming burrs removed, as follows: 1. . Slat Width: 1 -inch (25mm) nominal slats, with other components sized to suit. 2. Provide slats.designed and spaced to achieve maximum overlap and closure for optimum light exclusion. D. Ladders: Designed to support and maintain slats at proper spacing and alignment in open and closed positions, as follows: 1. Braided polyester cord design consisting of vertical components of not less than 0.043 -inch nor more than 0.068 - inch in diameter and integrally braided ladder rungs of not less than 4 threads; space ladders not further than 23 inches apart and 7 inches from ends of slats. 2.. Provide color to match slat color. E. Tilting Mechanism: Assembly including disengaging worm and gear WINDOW TREATMENT 0198 P.A. NO. 281 12506-1 01/30/98 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA mechanism to eliminate overdrive, low -friction gear tilter, drum and cradle at each ladder, tilt rod, tape clips, and grommet guides to prevent wear on ladder and cords; designed to hold slats at any angle and prevent movement of slats due to vibration, operated as follows: so 1. Wand Operator: Detachable clear plastic wand, of proper length to suit blind installation, detachable without tools by raising locking sleeve. F. Lifting Mechanism: Crashproof cord locks with cord separators and braided polyester. Size cord to suit blind type. Include self - aligning cord equalizers designed to maintain horizontal blind position. G. Installation Brackets: Designed to facilitate removal of head channels. Provide intermediate brackets at spacing recommended by blind manufacturer. Include hardware necessary for secure attachment of brackets to adjoining construction and to headrails. Design brackets to support safely the weight of blind assemblies plus forces applied to operate blinds. H. Finish: Provide finishes indicated below. Finish exposed accessories and hardware to match rail color. Provide corrosion - resistant finish to concealed items of hardware. 1. Aluminum Slats: Chemical conversion coat then follow with baked -on synthetic resin enamel finish coat. a. Color: As indicated on the drawings. I. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of the following: 1. "Riviera 1" Slat"; Levelor Corp. 2.02 FABRICATION AND OPERATION A. Prior to fabrication, verify actual opening dimensions by accurate site measurements. Adjust dimensions for proper fit at openings. B. Coordinate with other trades for securing tracks to substrates and other finished surfaces. C. Fabricate window treatment components from noncorrosive, nonstaining, nonfading materials that are completely compatible and do not require lubrication during normal expected life. D. Fabricate blind units to fill openings from head to sill and jamb to jamb. E. Space slate to provide overlap for light exclusion when fully closed. F. Equip horizontal blind units for the following operation: 1. Full -tilting operation -with slats rotating approximately 180 deg. Place tilt operating controls on left-hand side of blind units unless otherwise indicated. 2. Full -height raising, to minimum stacking dimension, with lifting cord locks for stopping blind at any point of ascending or descending travel. Place pull cords on right- hand side of blind units unless otherwise indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION WINDOW TREATMENT 12506-2 0198 P.A. NO. 281 01/30/98 +Cr :�:.; �" �,r ;.'4t. cf � ;t� t.✓?uk .ii�+�"�, CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Install window treatment units to comply with manufacturer's instructions. Position units level, plumb, secure, and at proper height and location relative to adjoining window units and other related.work. Securely anchor units with clips, brackets, and anchorages suited to type of substrate. B. Provide clearance between sash and blinds to permit unencumbered operation of sash hardware. C. Isolate metal parts from concrete and mortar to prevent galvanic action. Use thick coating or other means recommended by manufacturer to effect separation. D. Protect installed units to ensure their being in operating condition, without damage, blemishes, or indication of use at substantial completion of project. Correct nonconforming damaged units. Replace units that cannot be field corrected. WINDOW TREATMENT 0198 P.A. NO. 281 END OF SECTION 12506-3 01/30/98 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. SECTION 12690 FLOOR MATS PART 1 - GENERAL' LA QUINTA, CA 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and provisions of the Contract, including General, Supplementary and Special -Conditions, applicable Division 0 Sections and Division 1 Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Extent of floor mats is indicated on drawings and include the following: 1. Surface type polypropylene tiles. B. Resilient flooring specified in Division 9. 1.03 SPECIAL CONDITIONS A. Floor mats and adhesives are to be purchased by the contractor (not the subcontractor) for a pre-set price from Mats, Inc. Freight will be paid for by Circuit City in a "third party billing" arrangement. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain floor mats from one source from a single manufacturer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of the following: 1. Entry Way Matting as manufactured by Mats, Inc., Contact: Donna McCleod, Tel: (800) 628-7462, ext. 241; Fax: (781) 344-1537. 2.02 MATERIALS A. General: Provide colors, patterns, and profiles of material as indicated on drawings and schedules or by the specification. B. Polypropylene Tiles: Style: Diagonal tile; color: Standard charcoal; Size: 19.5" x 19.5"; Face Fiber: 100% polypropylene; Total thickness: .37 inches; Face weight: 33.9 oz./sq. yd.; Total weight: 131 oz./sq. yd.; Primary backing: Bitumen. C. Adhesive: Matworks Release Bond Adhesive MW -REL -100. D. Tapered Edge Strips: Provide manufacturer's standard tapered flexible vinyl edge strips for transition between mat edges and adjacent flooring of different elevation. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Shop fabricate units of floor mat work to greatest extent possible z. in sizes as indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION FLOOR MATS 12690-1 H1D ADDENDUM 6 041204 04/12/04 CIRCUIT CITY STORES, INC. LA QUINTA, CA 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Install mats to comply with manufacturer's instructions at locations indicated and coordinated with entrance locations and traffic patterns. B. Adhere mats to substrate using adhesive specified. C. Provide tapered edge strips at locations where mats abut floor surfaces of different elevations. 3.02 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive immediately. B. Clean mats using methods recommended by manufacturer. C. Protect mats from damage during remainder of construction period. END OF SECTION t) FLOOR MATS 12690-2 H1D ADDENDUM 6 041204 04/12/04